Home

DCS800 Firmware Manual - Galco Industrial Electronics

1. mobo orig qurje oqv OLGA SN 40198009 200 Joupeadsjauig ong ajgesiqouds 0 4g Pupu 64g ajow y 64g BuneJouob onup eg lesieeHPH Lapiz plondwey sig plondwey sig paniasel 611g puewwogoucs 649 puigexeug gg julodjasiy gig SPOWUEOHUOOHUIEWL 9r rZ uonoeJiqe ug Bia Mopeedsiea gia voxeJ nig Uue v LUG PWO uoropejuooutew IN Aiques prize owzinodwey ng oeznodwey ria xeyeud veoJ04 11g HQMOPUIM 449 PVLXe4 og payqiyyjuo 91g Bupieq o1weucp pesha H oriz i oror doisueis egunouuvaddns gig WopeedspioH 94g Apuouks gug SMEISNEYO SUG pwd UOP epoydois 3 T rotz uny eg daga FO ic a uny eg zeBpugeiqesiq sia uobupresquca sig Jes PU sm Uomep Diet gir apowdoys Leg eoo 6001 abpugaiqesig pi jespeed sur Fi ees yia NEISNZHO pg Doan Ploy pig POWNOIS c doe 2 Nello zig dois 3 Neyo zig Lebpugeiqesiq pg yjesjpeecsur pig yes eig peddu eig Duneeu 10you 9poIWNLJO LIO LE zuo een sz p m s eig odweyjeg eig yseogdojs 3 Zig jeu ps ZG paniesed zy peedsiow C 0 D doyg yse09 Nzyo Ha mhi dois 15602 NZIIO La p m s zig ssedAqdwey zig MOpUMJOInO HIG unyApy Lig Dupau oseugd suueiy AED
2. uniraovbio OZ 16 poedsio S speedsurynouuy L zz ey anes leie ege S at FDreempisieuxnig madd IZEN S z Maien meim vct i Ca DS G epoeasurunowy OEF xunsoa epogbio zpeedsurunouiv 6 EP Lee ege Suen ipeedsurynouuv Bh E ones jeuos esepowao SO 1 osind 2 EXT esind z o1 uui peedsurunoxew 71 CF soupoods LO EZ urunguoosiquA O z opogedi owzno edKuxeapesnu H zL 66 A SE SS anguuviLLN 1026 varnoxed OEE 7 oneure way lesepopionuoo angpiguoy k ODIJUONLIW Rear gt anguuvdyiw Papa ez ETZ Pesnieubior zoey TRSUENUON OL 66 EENS LJ vaeuddnsime Z ebpuq yuriueuno GE EG aways CIE peedseseatw H v0 66 Se n lesepowionuoo zBpiguruno Ww nire EET E EE Im ed onsen Heres Wenger Fezposdg y e puq ywn iueuno aviv LOTT xl pepe 1pigurunguw 3 ween nee Eer 0 vajeuno LISER fl TE T D ege lee N Leem Haer O Ser en de onuoo wand Kreien a mmm oem zoer gt i i EES posryesung m i u xeu ween GOP IO GD Coe i uuu cre xew Wesz e W uoueinseous BE eege zeisinono Psepowedo 1 ma ed 00001 owinonuo CBE L pem ma 0000 otio Buipeos jeurenur suen SET jet
3. Anda HIT 66 xean ail egene ana ret 7 o MOAUONLIN op poy LIV veisin TITT So vy EE av iv 0S0 Aen deenen for ri 0 68 ZU 66 Sy dee veajeuion LZ uw o Faaei UOOA E e OpHoN GET wewenseow A SOE suns el Sengen SE buet Am Sg x jueuno gt PO v Jjesneeupiaiw pue 3Wajeuxnial uoneoyipour KEH i Jeu viloAsureW lexunopidiiow CZT Eu juo9 jueuano enbioydo Jejoquoo Ap Passt a eon pseu awa n cvvV E Pe ail pies Lon Peene SOSP steen Rer uBienIoNeN 8L IZ rare i Heisuomno Mou c ap prey pue RR 00001 1 Butze uerg sjuewaunseoy sw g jonuoo ueuno piety sui g jonuoo xny pue 43 ou niaev ana Hazze uooplet lesepojuiedo yuvin Horer ut DOE Wer JeuivioAuuv jovioAuuv JeuioviloA AWI feuoyngauoD qwewemnseau gt quanno ompun wou rou JO PY Sees SEN ou you buet L 0276 Dr pesdsion speedsurunouuy izz ey eNejs jojered Qo J 801 D I Lxeowptenixn4 ypeedsurunouuv 1Z V a sind z o been roum Gzt d i FT GH epeedsurunouuy OZ SE aunso Deag GEEH namon zpeedsurunouuv 6r EF esou ege avi ipeedsurunguuy eh E7 ones jeuos resepowio S067 E SES esind z 0 eum peedsurunoxey JEE 1 seupeeds LO EZ vurungiuoosiq LW O z epogedAy owznoj sdKiegesnim LH zi66 aunso t QUALIA W vasinoxed COE Simeus woy _jogopoyonvoo i E angp awon
4. Source selection DO s Inversion of DO s 0 comp T DOxlndex 0 1 1 E IO BoardConfig 98 15 DO CtriWord r SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 2 DO CtrlWord 7 05 Dotindex 1401 default EN DOTBIINO 14 02 a FansOn DOtIndex 1401 4 DO x71 X4 1 2 i DO2Index 14 03 pti pos BOBBING 14 04 d FieldOn DO2Index 14 03 9 X7 2 X4 3 4 DO3index 14 05 i x gen E id MainContactorOn DO3Index 14 05 LA 203 X7 3 X4 5 6 i DO4index 14 07 m DOABINO 14 08 gt DO4index 14 07 DO X74 X4 7 8 i DO5Index 14 09 bit 4 DO5 BE DOSindex 14 09 E X7 5 X5 1 2 d DO6index 14 11 BER DOGBIINO 14 12 gt E DO6lndex 14 11 DOS X7 6 X5 3 4 i DO7Index 14 13 eaten DO7BitNo 14 14 d Se oe Se SC l x DO8index 14 15 P SDCS PIN 4 DO8BitNo 14 16 MainContactorOn Dosindex 14 15 amp 99 spcs Pow4 X5 7 8 bit 7 DO8 gt X96 1 RDIO 04 D O ExtModule1 98 03 bit 8 DO9 A x21 bit 9 DO10 A X22 2 RDIO 01 D O ExtModule2 98 04 bit 10 DO11 4 XA 98 00 bit 11 DO12 A X22 A bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 8t9 4 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 a D DI DI DIDIDIDIDIDIDI Wlolololololololo olo p D rj1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8l9l 10l0 o d 11 12 8 06 A Structure of DO s
5. E CEU eposon in ZOOS qpeods zzs4 L 9 ie peel eee eel eros COL Jepooue esnd i augpypseds H i mung nonwoniw H2066 oD de poodseseaiw 70 66 Mapoodsiow P a I s Peowioa awa KOIT i 1 7 7 BOOS esaeas WOR SN ee i d S La Trn DOES DS i AWapypeeds peodseseatw 1 0766 poodsooid TE Peodsion S zue leuinopis uentC GZ L wgetan jusweinseelu peeds ue ARC LUE ma sw g g uopoajes jenjoe paedg 00002 62 Z 1overeospeeds Buyeos ue NIVHO 1VNLOY d3JdS zjobioL i YZ ped ma sd Lt poodsooid Puduogeoybio ozva eed SUMIE Pedsunensy ZZ peedsuiwieasdy Vers su peodsxewsiisdy K co vz sd rv oz ve er vz SUE DE DE S0 vz dee sd 602 zent mem dese pore re uwsdy cov an edd us jy4duicooov GT yz ous ureqduioooov li yz Y luonesueduioo Vote Joyes MopeedspioH SOS EEN PZ 90 Beck De doispoods orez erun enga sodupivuM Wopen MIOMOPUIM ppv Fabel
6. TorqRef2 Torque selector 2 09 2 09 gt TorqRaf2 TorqRefExt Speed 25 10 TorgRefA Sel 224 Filter Torque 2 Ll TorgRef3 d OTO 2305 25 01 TorqRefA2501 z503 x Torpi i An AR Kee i 25 02 H TorqRefA FTC i TorqRefB 25004 Torque ramp TorqMaxTref H i TorqMinTref i 25 05 TorgRampUp Toraminan e l 25 06 H TorqRampDown l i i 26 05 l 26 04 TorqMuxMode DUT Mode Is TorqSel 26 01 TorqSel2601 0 StopMode I Speed Tora 1 or 2 E StopMode yw MCW bms Speed Min D or 3 x LocalLoossCtri sees ACW Bit 15 Speed Max 1 or 4 SpeediLimit 1 or 6 omm Losscen FaultStopMode M1TorgProvTime M2TorgProvTime cho ComLossCtrl ch2 ComLossCtrl For further information consult the DCS800 Hardware Manual Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 102 Additional settings Field weakening In case of field weakening all followers must have a speed feedback via encoder tacho or MotSpeed 1 04 see M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 External Note When connecting the output of one encoder to two drives a splitter has to be used Connection to overriding control In case followers are connected to an overriding control make sure that the overriding control is not writing on the same signals via group 51 and or group 90 as the master via the master follower link There is always a problem when two sources writing on
7. DI7 gt 4 Mux 4 o amp S amp e 2 CO Oo forward Te 3 S direction reverse amp 4 direction Oz 5 Fault DCS800 OR Li amp 6 Ss forward amp 7 eee Cyclic Single reverse amp 348 direction PosSyncMode 50 15 2 Pulse encoder 1 9 zero channel SyncCommand AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 9 10 Sel S SyncCommand 10 04 l H i SyncDisable AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit10 i ResetSyncRdy AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 11 D PosCountinitLo 50 08 ADD 1 PosCountlnitHi 50 09 Pulse encoder 1 pulses Pulse encoder 1 position counter logic 79 SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 PosCountLow 3 07 PosCountHigh 3 08 DCS800 FW pos count dsf 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Firmware description 80 DI gt 1 Ee emm Ei forward He 3 direction reverse amp 4 direction 5 amp a 3 6 forward 1 amp 7 direction reverse Damm direction Pulse encoder 2 a zero channel SyncCommand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 10 Sel Fault DCS800 S O e SyncRdy 4uxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 R SyncCommand2 10 05 SyncDisable AuxCtr Word 7 02 bit10 ResetSyncRdy AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 11 PosCount2InitLo
8. 112 Lini config ratio EE 112 M eb t ggf bebe de dacecacecacecacecacecscecacecacecacecacecacecscecacecscecacecacecacecacecacecacecscas 112 elle 113 Firmware StructUre uiii rdc ed e ORELL GER RERERRRR RR ARRA EE REPRR N NG X X AE PE NR ane ERR 113 Toggle between speed and torque Control 115 Follower diagnostics nennen nennen snnt 115 Master follower link specification enne 115 Ch3 commissioning and maintenance tools 116 DriveWiIndOW EN 116 Ethernet communication for monitoring with Ethernet adapter NETA 01 117 ET 117 NETA 01 DG5800 einer ee edite eee fie te faeta 117 Related documentation 117 NETA eiis IC e RETO 117 Mechanical and electrical installation sssesssseeeemmn 118 Drive configurations scite Deep leas 118 CANopen communication with fieldbus adapter HCAN OD 119 ici EET 119 RGAN 0T DOS800 2 o teet ote eite roe a setis estes etie sees 119 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 14 Related documentation 119 Overriding control copfiguration enne nnne nnne 119 skal T M A R 119 Mechanical and electrical installation sseesesseenn 119 Drive Gopftguraiion nennen enne nnn nnnnenn sse e nnn n nnne sens 119 Parameter setting example 1 using group BI 119 Further informatio
9. 25 06 TorqRampDown TorqSelMod Om Mode StopMode E StopMode LocalLoossCtrl CommLossCtrl FaultStopMode M1TorgProvTime 26 05 ITorqMuxMode i 2102 TorqSel 26 01 TorqSel2601 0 6 H H Speed Torq 1 or 2 i Speed Min 1 or 3 EMEN Speed Max 1 or 4 SpeediLimit 1 or 6 s MCW BIS ACW Bit 15 M2TorgProvTime Ch0 ComLossCtrl Ch2 ComLossCtrl Master parameter Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 210 sends the torque value to the follower Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 114 Follower Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 Follower activates write pointer Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 Ch2 FolSig2 70 19 and Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Follower parameter Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 2501 gets the torque value from the master Torque reference and torque selection 3 3 ms TorgRef2 Torque selector 2 08 208 T Speed 1 TorqRef2 TorqRefExt 25 10 TorgRefA Sel I 2 24 gt Filter Torque 2 TorqRef3 x T0 2405 Z250 TorqRefA2501 25 03 i Ab AR i 25 02 HToraReta Erd LoadShare i TorqRefB 25 04 Torque ramp H TorgMaxTref TorqMinTref lt 19 TorqMaxAIl 3505 _ TorqRampUp f TorqMinAIl 25 06 H TorqRampDown
10. eene 242 M1FexNode 64 95 107 393 455 Mitldleaiet esee 60 334 M1FIaMinTrip 33 34 48 60 64 306 444 460 M1FIdOvrCurLev 306 441 454 M1FIdRefExt een 34 341 M1FIdRefMode een 34 341 MiFreewhll ey 340 M1KlixonSel 82 317 438 451 M1KpArmOu sninii omna anann nanan 37 M1KpArmMCur 31 65 328 455 470 M1KpFeXxX eeeeeeeeennnen 31 34 333 M1ModelTime eeees 315 439 M1NomCur 30 64 66 91 415 429 M1NomFldCur 30 64 418 441 444 M1NomVoOlt 30 64 66 415 435 MiOperModetexd 97 346 M1OvrSpeed 30 42 307 443 459 470 Mibosl mc 31 59 340 M1SpeedFbSel 32 42 48 76 78 102 361 425 444 456 463 471 474 M1SpeedMax 30 42 109 119 122 125 127 129 131 133 139 141 144 147 279 471 M1SpeedMin 30 42 109 119 122 125 127 129 131 133 139 141 144 147 278 471 M1SpeedScale 109 119 122 125 127 129 131 133 139 141 144 147 360 471 M1StrtTorqRefSel 89 325 471 M1TachMaxSpeed 42 384 M1TachoAdgjust ussssssss 32 365 M1 TachoGain cccccececeeeeeeecteeeeeeneeeees 384 Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Fi
11. Input I O par 9 DsetXplus5Val3 For proper communication shown values have to be used Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words Further information Output and input parameters 51 08 51 25 can also be connected directly to the desired DCS800 parameters In this case please take care that the RDNA 01 adapter gets the changed values and also take care that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 to prevent data trouble Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication S3ADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 133 Ethernet IP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Ethernet adapter RETA 01 together with the DCS800 RETA 01 DCS800 The Ethernet IP communication with the drive requires the option RETA 01 Related documentation User s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module RETA 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual EDS file The EDS file for RETA 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RETA 01 into slot 1 of the drive Drive configuration The Ethernet adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances 102 103 if Protocol 51 16 is set
12. 23 03 TeraSeiMod E 26 05 TorqMux 26 04 TorgMuxMode 1 21 02 OftMode Lx NotUsed TorqSel DEL TorgSel2601 0 6 21 03 StopMode Dit D11 Speed Torq 1 or 2 2104 E StopMode MCW Bit 11 MCW Bit15 Speed Min 1 or 3 3027 LocalLoossCtri ACW Bit 12 ACW Bit 15 Speed Max 1 or 4 3028 CommLossCti L SpeediLimit 1 or 6 E 30 30 FaultStopMode 42 10 M1TorgProvTime 49 40 M2TorqProvTime 70 05 Ch0 ComLossCtri 70 15 Ch2 ComLossCtrl Master follower firmware structure SDCS COM 8x SDCS COM 8x SDCS COM 8x Di D200 GE p Eve D200 Eive ES 5 5 S A E D400 pee eee PR RUNS 2 g gg xi9 3 g 5 D 3 B E E E Se vi oh I D E Um 8 89 9323 plastic optic fibre com bus conn a dsf lt gt 30 m SDCS COM 8 Rev D and higher Master follower fiber optic cable connection see also DCS800 Hardware Manual Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 115 Toggle between speed and torque control In some application both speed and torque control of the followers are required e g if itis necessary to accelerate all drives along the same speed ramp up to a certain speed before the torque control can be started In
13. eee 292 WinderScalle eee 366 line 291 WinWidthNeg AAA 292 WinWidthPOS cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 291 ZeroCurDetect enrere 82 403 ZeroCurTimeOut 404 433 463 ZeroDamphRFE esses 297 Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 494 ZeroFreqRFE eese 297 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 495 SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g DCS800 family DCS800 S modules m Compact The versatile drive for any m Highest power ability application m Simple operation g Comfortable assistants e g for commissioning or 20 5 200A fault tracing m 1160V4 m Scalable to all applications 230 1 000 Na m Free programmable by means of integrated IPOO IEC61131 PLC DCS800 A enclosed H converters B Complete drive solutions Individually adaptable to customer requirements User defined accessories like external PLC or auto mation systems can be included m High power solutions in 6 and 12 pulse up to 20 20 000 Ac 20 000 A 1 500 V O 1500V4 m In accordance to usual standards 230 1 200V m individually factory load tested IP21 IP54 g Detailed documentation DCS800 E series g DCS800 module with all necessary accessories H Pre assembled drive kits mounted and fully cabled on a panel g Very fast installation and commiss
14. 54 77 285 MainCtrlWord 53 100 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 216 MainsComp fme 402 Maimstreohct 194 MainStatWord 53 117 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 222 MainsvohtAct 191 MainsvotAchel eee 191 MaxBridgeTemp 28 204 429 451 467 MaxCurLimSpeed ssssssss 331 Max ncoderfme 362 Measurement 405 MG ConfigWord ssesesseseeeeeeeerssererneerrrreeene 339 Modbus timeout ee 133 144 ModBusModule2 139 141 412 Module baud rate 125 127 129 131 Module macid 125 127 129 131 ModuleType 119 122 125 127 129 131 133 144 147 Moti Fevt iatus 214 432 456 Mott FexSwver cccccccccceeccsecssseeseeeeeeeeeeees 203 Mot FexSwVersion een 52 MotiFexvfvpe eee 97 202 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Mott FIAC ee 193 Mot FIDCurRe f cccceccccesseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaas 34 Mot1FIdCurRel 48 60 193 Mot TempCale sssneeeeeeneeeeneeereen 192 439 MotlTempMeas ssss 192 435 Mot2FexsStatus eee 215 456 Mot ev wyer e 203 Mot2FexSwVersion eee 52 Mot texvfvpe 203 Mot2FldOur esse 193 Mot2FlIdCurRel een 193 Mot2TempGalo nme EES 192 Mot2TempMeas A 193 MOC Uist
15. MES 1 0 In 1 31 04 Man In 1 1 06 1 I 3 ei act Set M1ModelTime 31 01 122 s Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 441 Field overcurrent The nominal value of the field current is set with M1NomFlaCur 99 1 1 The overcurrent level is set by means of M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 Exceeding this level causes F515 M1FexOverCur Armature current ripple The current control is equipped with a current ripple monitor This function can detect 1 a broken fuse or thyristor 2 too high gain e g wrong tuning of the current controller 3 abroken current transformer T51 T52 The current ripple monitor level is set by means of CurRippleLim 30 19 Exceeding this level causes either F517 ArmCurRipple or A117 ArmCurRipple depending on CurRippleSel 30 18 Current ripple monitor method is based on comparing positive and negative currents of each phase The calculation is done per thyristor pair Isnubber circuit 1 not fired thyristor l l l 16 1 2 3 2 34 54 56 DCS800 FW curr rip mon dsf Current ripple monitor method CurRipple 1 09 is calculated as abs l I abs I _ I abs l l By low pass filtering with 200 ms CurRippleFilt 1 10 is generated and compared against CurRippleLim 30 19 L1 CurRipple 1 09 CurRippleFilt 1 10 i 9 F517 ArmCurRipple EE A117 ArmCurRipple CurRippleLim 3
16. Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name BalRef balance speed reference External value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Both i part and output of the speed controller are forced to BalRef 24 11 when AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 8 1 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N DerivTime d part speed controller Speed controller derivation time DerivTime 24 12 defines the time within the speed controller derives the error value The speed controller works as PI controller if DerivTime 24 12 is set to zero Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N DerivFiltTime filter time for d part speed controller Derivation filter time Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N AccCompDerTime acceleration compensation derivation time AccCompDerTime 24 14 compensates the inertia by adding the derived and weighted SpeedRef4 2 18 to the speed controller output The acceleration compensation is inactive if AccCompDerTime 24 14 is set to zero Example AccCompDerTime 24 14 equals the time required to accelerate the drive to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 with motor nominal torque Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N AccCompFiltTime filter time acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation filter time Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type Volatile N Speed adaptive proportional gain and integral time p part p part i part i part KpSValMinSpeed 24
17. ulgugpeeds H Oise 49lonuo Gld 10u09 MOPUIM eyeudoaig sw g g eo peeds aus TIE xwaeu H SCH Zeta decieeh Walt el EA 1090W peniete HEO EZ ipeedspox Ee jeupeedexnv L 62 b loszjpeods DES Ss zem o HET teszieu H OOTI van zv wads SSS age uv resueur COLL upeodsicead Sie DEIER eds SES sez supeods Sree Tore ooo el Lt Iesus eO LL EEN E pegjeupeeds rewog 1 geuusv 1 98 MONN sw g g uonoejes dd soz 1 va MOWN eoueiojo1 peadg C LIOZC zeen i Veisupsd ogpeeds Pupo dsena DE rn ses X E pejeszdwey E 1 zpeedspexi4Hi Wee SE eD ipeedspoxi4 uwpeedsiw L002 anpeedsin Nuel xewpeedgin 12002 ccnl xewpsedsiw H SO Jeupeedsxny DN EE iotzjupeeds CIS e DESEN ox rsen Q1 ane 1 nogoen H ames 4 peeds pechen amp ee SC Tawo H EZ meng opogieupeeds 1 edeuspeqjoov ZS 1 a
18. Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 194 Signal Parameter name DC VoltSerAll 12 pulse serial master and slave actual DC voltage Sum of actual armature voltage for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave Valid in 12 pulse master only Valid for 12 pulse serial sequential only Int Scaling 12 1 V Type SI Volatile Y MainsFreqAct internal mains frequency Calculated and internally controlled mains frequency Output of PLL controller See also DevLimPLL 97 13 KpPLL 97 14 TfPLL 97 15 Int Scaling 100 1 Hz Type Volatile AhCounter ampere hour counter Ampere hour counter Int Scaling 100 1kAh Type Volatile Unused ProcSpeed process speed Calculated process line speed Scaled with WinderScale 50 17 Int Scaling 10 1 m min Type SI Volatile SpeedActEnc2 speed actual encoder 2 Actual speed measured with pulse encoder 2 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile SpeedRef2 speed reference 2 Speed reference after limiter M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRef3 speed reference 3 Speed reference after speed ramp and jog input Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedErrNeg An An speed actual speed reference Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y TorqPropRef proportional part of torque reference P part of the speed controller s output in perce
19. 33 90 06 Dsetxplus2val3 51 42 PZDEIN i 12 lt 43 92 05 DsetXplus3vala 108 51 13 PZOTOUT i 13 gt 51 80 07 Dsetxplus4vall 51 44 PZD7IN i 16 Zo 5 1 9207 DsetXplusSValt 901 51 15 PZD8 OUT Wd JEE 52 90 08 Dsetxplus4Val2 E 51 18 PZDBIN i ml lt B2 92 08 DsetXpluss al2 902 51 437 PZD8OUT 15 53 90 08 DsetxplusdVal3 51 18 PZD8IN 18 de ER 92 09 Disetpluss ala 903 51 19 PZD1DOUT 49 74 90 10 Dsetplus amp Valt o 51 20 PZDIOIN i 22 8 1 92 10 DsetXplus Valt 904 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 151 Switch on sequence RemoteCmd SS Inching2 amp Inching1 amp RamplnZero amp RampHold Q RampOutZerq eo CH J Reset Off before On On main cont On Run with reference E Stop Start inhibit Examples for the MainCtrlWord 7 01 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 152 Data set table A lot of fieldbus communications use the data set table to transmit data words The next table shows the configuration number of each data word and the corresponding pointer Data set no Parameter pointer from PLC to DCS800 Parameter pointer from DCS800 to PLC Data set no Configuration no Parameter pointer from PLC to DCS800 Parameter pointer from DCS800 to PLC Data set no Configuration no Parameter pointer from PLC to DCS800 Par
20. Int Scaling 1 Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name 407 SH 2 LU e Option modules a 2 o o 98 01 Encoder2Module encoder 2 extension module ol ai o lu This parameter is used to activate an extension module for either a second encoder RTAC xx or 9 z a resolver RRIA xx 2 lt z RTAC xx RRIA xx extension module interface selection Encoder2Module 98 01 releases pulse Z z encoder 2 or a resolver The modules can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 0 see Node ID selector S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no RTAC xx RRIA xx is used default 1 Sloti RTAC xx RRIA xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 RTAC xx RRIA xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 RTAC xx RRIA xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA RTAC xx RRIA xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 0 The drive trips with F508 OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RTAC xx RRIA xx extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RTAC xx RRIA xx board with the SDCS CON use the screws included in the scope of delivery Switches on RTAC xx or RRIA xx Node ID selector S1 is only valid when plugged in an AI
21. temperature UIT fixed not selectable Configurable yes The AO s can be connected to any integer or signed integer of the drive by means of group 15 It is possible to invert the AO s by simply negate ndexAO 1 15 01 to IndexAO4 15 16 In addition the AO s can be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if the corresponding IndexAOx 15 xx is set to zero see CtrIWordAO 1 15 02 to CtrIWordAOA 15 17 Configurable temperature The AO s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement see M1TempSel 31 05 and M2TempSel 49 35 JO configuration 8ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 93 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Scaling 8 Output voltage Output voltage Output voltage Bipolar signal EE Unipolar signal 10V amp 7 Unipolar signal 10V Bi Ud 0 10V Uni 5V Offset WO 2 10V Uni 6V Offset PID ES P1503 5V Offset Firmware Firmware d Firmware signal Ov signal ov signal P1503 0 10V Uni 0 10096 Ado 0 100 DWL assistant dsf It is possible to scale AO1 to AO4 with 2 parameters each the range of each AO is set by means of ConvModeAO 15 03 to ConvModeAOA 15 18 if th
22. 9901 Language 9903 M1NomCur 9904 M1BaseSpeed Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter 4 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired parameter value LOC PAR EDIT 9902 M1NomVolt 60 V CANCEL SAVE Note To get the parameter default value press UP DOWN simultaneously 5 Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications 6 Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to step back to the MAIN MENU DCS800 panel operation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Start up assistants mode 425 Use the start up assistants mode for basic commissioning of the drive When the drive is powered up the first time the start up assistants guides you through the setup of the basic parameters There are seven start up assistants available They can be activated one after the other as the ASSISTANTS menu suggests or independently The use of the assistants is not required It is also possible to use the parameter mode instead The assistant list in the following table is typical 1 Name plate data Enter the motor data the mains supply data the most important protections and follow the instructions of the assistant After filling out the parameters of this assistant it is in most cases possible to turn the motor for the first
23. Esstop Off3 Onlnhibited via digital input Off2 10 08 or E Stop 10 09 Onlnhibit state not active alarm indication no alarm setpoint SpeedRef4 2 18 and actual value MotSpeed 1 04 in the tolerance zone setpoint SpeedHef4 2 18 and actual value MotSpeed 1 04 out of the tolerance zone remote control local control speed greater than defined in SpeedLev 50 10 speed lower or equal than defined SpeedLev 50 10 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name AuxStatWord auxiliary status word ASW Auxiliary status word Bit Name BO DataLogReady B1 OutOfWindow B2 E StopCoast Fex1Ack Fex2Ack BrakeCmd Limiting TorqCtrl ZeroSpeed EMFSpeed FaultOrAlarm DriveDirectionNeg B15 AutoReclosing Int Scaling 1 Type Value 1 0 1 Comment contents of data logger is readable contents of data logger is not readable actual speed is out of window defined by WinWiathPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09 actual speed is inside the defined window E stop function has failed see E StopDecMin 21 05 E StopDecMax 21 06 and DecMonDly 21 07 no action macro User1 active see ApplMacro 99 08 macro User1 not active macro User active see ApplMacro 99 08 macro User2 not active positioning synchronization is done either for pulse encoder 1 or pulse encoder 2 or both pulse
24. Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 528 FieldBusCom Fieldbus communication loss j always if FB F528 FieldBusCom is only activated after the first TimeOut data set from the overriding control is received by the 30 35 0 drive Before the first data set is received only A128 FieldBusCom is active The reason is to suppress unnecessary faults the start up of the overriding control is usually slower than the one of the drive Check CommandSel 10 01 ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 CommModule 98 02 parameter settings of group 51 fieldbus fieldbus cable fieldbus termination fieldbus adapter 529 M1FexNotOK Motor 1 field exciter not okay 9 02 always A fault was found during self diagnosis of field exciter bit 12 or power failure in field exciter 1 Check field exciter operation and change the field exciter if necessary fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 530 M2FexNotOK Motor 2 field exciter not okay A fault was found during self diagnosis of field exciter or power failure in field exciter 2 Check field exciter operation and change the field exciter if necessary fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Triplevel 531 MotorStalled Selected motor motor stalled RdyRef 1 The motor torque exceeded Sta
25. Selected motor torque proving is inactive This bit is to be set by Adaptive Program application program or overriding selected motor the brake remains closed applied see note2 selected motor the brake is controlled by the internal brake logic in group 42 Brake control reset torque memory valid only if M1StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 Memory reset and hold PID controller release PID controller Changes of DriveDirection become active only in drive state RdyRun Changing the speed direction of a running drive RdyRef state by means of DriveDirection is not possible 219 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 220 Signal Parameter name Note2 If ForceBrake is set the brake remains closed applied If the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command is given to a drive in state RdyOn or RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 bit O and 1 the brake logic will be started up to the point of the brake open command A drive in state Running MainStatWord 8 01 bit 2 will be stopped by ramp the brake will be closed applied but the drive will remain in state Running Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y 7 04 UsedMCW used main control word UMCW Internal used selected main control word is read only and contains all drive depending commands The selection is depending on the drives local remote control setting CommandSel 10 01 and HandAuto 10 07 The bit functionality of bit O
26. TorqCorrect 26 15 ResCurDetectSel 30 05 M1TempSel 31 05 M1StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 CurSel 43 02 M2TempSel 49 35 M2StrtTorqRefSel 49 44 Following restrictions apply the residual current detection input is fixed assigned to Al4 if activated via ResCurDetectSel 30 05 the motor temperature measurement is fixed assigned to Al2 and AI3 respectively AI7 and AI8 if activated via M1TempSel 31 05 respectively M2TempSel 49 35 Scaling Firmware signal Firmware signal Firmware signal i A Unipolar signal Unipolar signal AER d 0 10V 0 20mA Uni 5V 10mA Offset 100 A 2 10V 4 20mA Uni 6V 12mA Offset oer 100 H H H i Input Input i voltage 100 1 voltage H current 1 i current 100 1 Input i voltage 0 i 1 H current 0 7 Hoy i Lr P1303 0 10V Uni OV 10V P1301 10V P1302 n a oma 1501 Soen P1302 n a P1303 5V Offset P190120mA 20mA 10V 20mA P1302 r H e 100 P1303 10V Bi DWL assistant dsf I O configuration 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 90 It is possible to scale Al to Al6 with 3 parameters each the range of each Al is set by means of a jumper distinguishing between current and voltage and ConvModeAl1 13 03 to ConvModeAIG6 13 27 100 of the input signal connected to an Al is scaled by means of Al1HighVal 13 01 to Al6HighVal 13 25 100
27. VO configuration SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 87 Analog inputs Al s The basic I O board is the SDCS CON 4 with 4 standard Al s All 4 standard Al s can be replaced with SDCS IOB 3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO 01 analog I O extension modules Thus the maximum number of Al s is 8 The hardware source is selected by AIO ExtModule 98 06 for Al5 and AIG AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 for AI7 and AI8 10 BoaraConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of analog UO extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON 4 Hardware setting Switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S2 and S3 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Input range Al1 and Al2 set by parameter 10 V O V to 10V 2 V to 10 V 5 V offset 6 V offset 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Input range AI3 and Al4 set by parameter 10 V O V to 10V 2 V to 10 V 5 V offset 6 V offset Resolution 15 bits sign Scan time for Al1 and Al2 3 3 ms 2 77 ms synchronized with mains frequency Scan time for AI3 and AI4 5ms Additional functions motor temperature measurement for a PTC connected to AI2 see section Motor protection SDCS IOB 3 Hardware setting Switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S1 the hardware gain for AI2 and AI3 can be increased by 10 with jumpers S2 and S3 th
28. the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 1 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 2 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 3 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N TrmtRecVal1 4 mailbox 1 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 1 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N MailBox2 mailbox 2 node ID Mailbox 2 can transmit receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal2 1 94 20 TrmtRecVal2 2 94 21 TrmtRecVal2 3 94 22 and TrmtRecVal2 4 94 23 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox2 94 18 is set to O Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N 395 E C Si
29. DC fuses blown ratio between mains voltage and armature voltage either the mains voltage is too low or the motor s armature voltage is too high ArmAlphaMin 20 15 is set too high Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Definition Action Alarm is active 4 Alarmlevel Selected motor tacho range If A115 TachoRange comes up for longer than 10 seconds there is an overflow of the AlTacho input Check Tor the right connections X3 1 to X3 4 on the SDCS CON 4 If A115 TachoRange comes up for 10 seconds and vanishes again M1OvrSpeed 30 16 or M2OvrSpeed 49 21 has been changed In this case a new tacho fine tuning has to be done ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune 115 TachoRange 116 BrakeLongFalling A117 117 ArmCurRipple 118 FoundNewAppl D 119 ApplDiff A120 120 OverVoltProt Selected motor mechanical brake The acknowledge signal for brake closed applied is missing Check MliBrakeAckSel 42 02 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 brake brake cabling used digital inputs and outputs group 14 Armature current ripple RdyRef 1 One or several thyristors may carry no current Check CurRippleSel 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 for too high gain of current controller M1KpArmCur 43 06 current feedback with oscilloscope 6 pulses within one cycle visible b
30. Data9 data container 9 Data container 9 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data10 data container 10 Data container 10 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data11 data container 11 Data container 11 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data12 data container 12 Data container 12 see group description above Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 278 Signal Parameter name Limits 20 01 This parameter group consists of all user settable limits Torque limitation 3 3 ms TorqRef4 Gear backlash compensation 26 13 GearStartTorq 4 j TorqScale 26 02 GearTorqTime LoadComp GearTorqRamp TorqUsedMax ITorqUsedMaxSel 2 22 3 TorqMaxAll TorqMax2005 TorqMinAll Alt AIG TorqLimAct M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 CurSel FluxRefFldWeak 43 02 TorqCorrect 2 14 E k NotUsed TorqCorr h M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 TorqUsedMin 20 19 HTorqUsedMinSel 2 23 20 06 HTorqMin2006 AM AIG Negate 223 A4JXE222 1 M1SpeedMin motor 1 minimum speed Motor 1
31. If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using ABB Drives assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 127 Parameter setting example 2 using Vendor specific assembly Vendor specific assembly can run with up to 9 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus ModuleType 51 01 CONTROLNET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 5 5 5 MBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using Vendor specific assembly Output instance 51 06 102 102 Vendor specific assembly Input instance 51 07 103 103 Vendor specific assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to 1 18 Set these values according Input I O par 9 51 25 table Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words and according to the de
32. M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 f 106 1 06 1 12 The temperature rise output of the model is shown in Mot TempCalc 1 20 Thermal model selection The activation of the thermal models is made by setting M1ModelTime 31 01 greater than zero Thermal time constant The time constant for the thermal model is set by means of M1ModelTime 31 01 If the thermal time constant of a motor is given by the manufacturer just write it into M1ModelTime 31 01 In many cases the motor manufacturer provides a curve that defines how long the motor can be overloaded by a certain overload factor In this case the proper thermal time constant must be calculated Fault tracing SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 440 Example The drive is desired to trip if the motor current exceeds 170 96 of motor nominal current for more than 60 seconds Selected tripping base level is 106 96 of nominal motor current thus M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 106 96 0 Current La 96 Example 31 04 trip 106 112 260 Las 170 96 240 4 ImMotn 100 96 200 t 60s 1804 160 l 14047 i 1207 l 1004 i T i 1 T 30 60 300 600 6000 Time sec DCS800 FW mot load curv dsf Motor load curve Note This is an example and does not necessarily correspond to any motor Using formula 1 we can calculate the correct value for t when starting with a cold motor With 2 E 31 04 6 A d e T oos Follows ps z cus 1225
33. Stall protection The stall protection trips the converter with F531 MotorStalled when the motor is in apparent danger of overheating The rotor is either mechanically stalled or the load is continuously too high It is possible to adjust the supervision time speed and torque The stall protection trips the drive if 1 the actual speed is below StallSpeed 30 02 and 2 the actual torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 exceeds StallTorq 30 03 3 for a time longer than programmed in StallTime 30 01 Overspeed protection The motor is protected against overspeed e g in a case when the drive is in torque control mode and the load drops unexpected The overspeed level is set by means of M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Exceeding this level causes F532 MotOverSpeed Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual eg 444 Current rise The protection against fast current rise during generating is configured by means of ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 Exceeding this level causes F539 FastCurRise If present the DC breaker is tripped and the main contactor is opened Field undercurrent The nominal value of the field current is set with M1NomFlaCur 99 1 1 The minimum field current level is set by means of M1FidMinTrip 30 12 Undershooting this level causes F541 M1FexLowCur FlaMinTripDly 45 18 delays F541 M1FexLowCur Tacho pulse encoder polarity The polarity of the analog tacho or pulse encoder depending on M1SpeedFbSell 50 0
34. Start up this chapter describes the basic start up procedure of the drive Firmware description this chapter describes how to control the drive with standard firmware I O configuration this chapter describes the I O configuration of digital and analog inputs and outputs with different hardware possibilities Communication this chapter describes the communication capabilities of the drive Adaptive Program AP this chapter describes the basics of the Adaptive Program and instructs how to build a program Signal and parameter list this chapter contains all signals and parameters DCS800 Control Panel operation this chapter describes the handling of the DCS800 Control Panel Fault Tracing this chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of the drive Appendix A Firmware structure diagram Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation Appendix C Index of signal and parameters Introduction to this manual 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 24 Start up Chapter overview This chapter describes the basic start up procedure of the drive A more detailed description of the signals and parameters involved in the procedure can be found in section Signal and parameter list General The drive can be operated locally from DriveWindow DriveWindow Light or DCS800 Control Panel respectively remote from local I O or overriding control The following start up procedu
35. VO configuration SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Configuration 85 All DO s can be read from DO StatWord 8 06 bit DO configurable default setting 0 1 yes FansOn CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bito 1 2 yes FieldOn CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit5 2 3 yes MainContactorOn CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit7 3 4 yes 4 5 yes 5 6 yes 6 7 yes 7 8 yes MainContactorOn CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit7 8 9 no not selectable 9 10 no not selectable 10 11 no not selectable 11 12 no not selectable Configurable yes The DO s can be connected to any integer or signed integer of the drive by means of group 14 It is possible to invert the DO s by simply negate DO1Index 14 01 to DO8Index 14 15 In addition the DO s can be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if the corresponding DOxIndex 14 xx is set to zero see DO CtrilWord 7 05 Configurable no The DO s can only be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control see DO CtrlWord 7 05 Note DO8 is only available as relay output on the SDCS PIN 4 if no SDCS IOB 2 is used I O configuration 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 86
36. plus Y DsetXplus4Val1 DsetXplus4Val2 I dh 1 t DsetXplus6Val3 D aiig Instance 2 Inp 1 plus1Val1 DsetXplus1Val2 PLC lt Drive l LI L m DsetXplus3Val3 DsetXplus5Val1 i DsetXplus7Val1 i Dsetxplus7Val2 DsetXplus7Val3 L j rend ew a er es RETA 01 Ethernetv IP configuration parameters Communication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual eg 138 After configuration the packed telegram is defined Output input teleqrams id fi Ed f S i 01 03 05 index index index 02 04 06 Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 139 Modbus RTU communication with fieldbus adapter RMBA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Modbus adapter RMBA 01 together with the DCS800 RMBA 01 DCS800 The Modbus communication with the drive requires the option RMBA 01 The protocol Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit using serial communication is supported Related documentation User s Manual Modbus Adapter Module RMBA 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RMBA 01 into a slot of the drive Slot 1 has to be used if the Modbus should control the drive Drive configuration The Modbus adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 and MoaBusModule2 98 08 The seria
37. the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to ms If MailBoxi 94 12 is negative data will be received Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 105 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Firmware 1 drive Firmware 2 drive MailBoxCycle1 94 13 100 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 200 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 200 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 100 Send and receive values Each mailbox can transmit receive up to 4 values depending on the sign of the mailbox node ID number 1 mailbox TrmtRecVal1 1 94 14 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 15 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 TrmtRecVal1 4 94 17 2 mailbox TrmtRecVal2 1 94 20 TrmtRecVal2 2 94 21 TrmtRecVal2 3 94 22 TrmtRecVal2 4 94 23 Communication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 106 12 pulse Set the DCSLink hardware Cable connection 12 pulse master SDCS DSL 4 12 pulse sla
38. 50 06 SpeedriltTime ms 5 40H1 Par 50 6 H Event logger DI Faut logger Memory Parameters Monitor 403 QD History Buffer s 3600 000 K amp x Axis Length s 15 000 T Y axis Maximum 40 00 BY Axis Minimum 30 00 38 1 01 04 MotSpeed rpm 0 00 1500 00 edRef4 rpm 0 00 1500 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 32 223 523 8 23 1123 14 23 1723 Time s MiB DCs 800 D1 mn ha IS Jte Mi DCS 800 D1 40H1 Tesis DriveWindow manual tuning speed controller set SpeedCorr 23 04 0 96 remove On and Run via DriveWindow Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 45 EMF controller Basics Manual tuning In case the motor needs to be used in the field weakening area the EMF controller has to be tuned The EMF controller needs to have a quick response Usually 2 to 3 times slower than the field current controller The tuning has to be done in the field weakening area because the EMF controller is blocked in the base speed range EMF 5 step gt n Field weakening point EMF reference for manual tuning EMF controller VQ DCs 800 D1 mo uiis Pam TS E Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Manual tuning of the EMF controller connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor EMF VoltActRel 1 17 and VoltRef2 3 26 set FlaCtriMode 44 01 EMF set EMF Ctr
39. A rpm 20000 Example With SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 15 rpm and EMF FbMonLev 30 15 50 V the drive trips when the EMF is gt 50 V while the speed feedback is lt 15 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N EMF FbMonLev EMF feedback monitor level The speed measurement monitoring function is activated when the measured EMF exceeds EMF FbMonLev 30 15 See also SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 Int Scaling 1 1 V Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M1OvrSpeed motor 1 overspeed The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed FaultWord2 9 02 bit 15 if M1OvrSpeed 30 16 is exceeded It is recommended to set M1OvrSpeed 30 16 at least 20 higher than the maximum motor speed Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 SUP rpm 20000 The overspeed fault for motor 1 is inactive if M1OvrSpeed 30 16 is set to zero Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N 307 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 308 Signal Parameter name 30 17 SpeedFbFItSel speed feedback fault selector SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 determines the reaction to a speed feedback problem 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 Fault the drive trips according to SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 default NotUsed Immediate Immediate fault fault Motor speed 0 Base speed Max speed T
40. Additional adjustments can be made using the DCS800 Control Panel to manually select and set individual parameters See chapter Signal and parameter list DCS800 Control Panel Use the DCS800 Control Panel to control the drive to read status data to adjust parameters and to use the pre programmed assistants Features The DCS800 Control Panel features Alphanumeric LCD display Language selection for the display by means of Language 99 01 Panel can be connected or detached at any time Start up Assistant for ease drive commissioning Copy function parameters can be copied into the DCS800 Control Panel memory to be downloaded to other drives or as backup Context sensitive help Fault and alarm messages including fault history DCS800 panel operation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 421 Display overview The following table summarizes the button functions and displays of the DCS800 Control Panel Status LED LCD display Divided into three main areas Green for normal operation Top line variable depending on the mode of operation Flashing green for alarms Middle area variable in general shows parameter values menus or Red for faults lists Bottom line shows current function of the two soft keys and the clock display if enabled Soft key 1 Function varies and is i Soft key 2 Function varies and is defined by the text in the lower left defined by the text in the lower ri
41. Field current reference gain For example with FidRefGain 45 11 20 96 100 field current is generated at TorqRHefUsed 2 13 20 96 Field current monitoring Field During normal operation the field current is compared with M1FidMinTrip 30 12 minimum trip The drive trips with F541 MiFexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if the field current drops below this limit and is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed During field reversal the situation is different M1FldMinTrip 30 12 is disabled for FlaCtriMode 44 01 Fix Opti EMF Opti Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 of FidCurRefM1 3 30 The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if 50 of FlaCurRefM1 3 30 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed If actual flux and armature voltage of the motor cannot follow the field current during field reversal it is necessary to delay the active field direction FluxRevMonDly 45 08 is the maximum allowed time within Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 and the internal motor flux doesn t correspond to each other during field reversal During this time F522 SpeedFb FaultWord 2 9 02 bit 5 is disabled Flux reversal The sign of Mot1FlaCurhRel 1 29 is used to generate the field reversal EE acknowledge To avoid signal noise problems a small hysteresis defined by y means of FidRevHyst 45 09 is needed Fjald reversal While the field
42. Physical actual values MotSpeedFilt filtered motor speed Filtered actual speed feedback Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Filtered with 1 s and SpeedFiltTime 50 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedActEMF speed actual EMF Actual speed calculated from EMF Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedActEnc speed actual encoder 1 Actual speed measured with pulse encoder 1 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y MotSpeed motor speed Actual motor speed Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 If M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 is set to External the signal is updated by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control SpeedFiltTime 50 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y Analog tacho inputs SDCS CON 4 Analog tacho scaling 3 M1SpeedScale 50 01 90V to 270V a4 49 X3 1 5 01 M1TachoAdjust 50 12 30V to 90V 43O x3 2 AlTachoVal M1 TachoVolt1000 50 13 SpeedActTach 8V to 30V AQ x3 3 AITAC 9991x3 4 speed_act_tach_a dsf SpeedActTach speed actual tacho Actual speed measured with analog tacho Note This value is only valid if an analog tacho is connected Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y 1 06 MotCur motor current had o Relative actual motor current in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DC
43. Volatile Y SI Volatile Y Type MotiTempCalc motor 1 calculated temperature Motor 1 calculated temperature from motor thermal model in percent see M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 and M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 Used for motor overtemperature protection MtAlarmLimLoad 31 03 MhtFaultLimLoad 31 04 Int Scaling 100 1 Type Mot2TempCalc motor 2 calculated temperature Motor 2 calculated temperature from motor thermal model in percent see M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 and M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 Used for motor overtemperature protection Ma2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 MeFaultLimLoad 49 34 Int Scaling 100 1 Type MotiTempMeas motor 1 measured temperature Motor 1 measured temperature Used for motor overtemperature protection Unit depends on setting of M1TempSel 31 05 0 NotUsed 1 1 to 6 PT100 C 2 PTC Q Int Scaling 1 1 C 19 1 Volatile Y Volatile Y Volatile Y def nit E C Lu wp y OE Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Mot2TempMeas motor 2 measured temperature Motor 2 measured temperature Used for motor overtemperature protection Unit depends on setting of M2TempSel 49 35 0 NotUsed 121to6 PT100 C 2 PTC Q Int Scaling 1221 C 10 1 Volatile Y BridgeTemp actual bridge temperature Actual bridge temperature in degree centigrade Int Scaling 1 1 C Type
44. visZk MZ v2e vis M vz F15 il branching fuse Mi V147lN M vet vie ZN vA y vay Dau principle B6 a dsf give On and Run via DriveWindow the main contactor should not pick up make sure that the mains voltage is zero check the firing pulse with the current clamp remove On and Run via DriveWindow set ServiceMode 99 06 back to NormalMode TestFire 97 28 is automatically set back to Off Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 52 Firmware description Chapter overview This chapter describes how to control the drive with standard firmware Identification of the firmware versions The DCS800 is controlled by the SCDS CON 4 The firmware version and type can be checked from FirmwareVer 4 01 and FirmwareType 4 02 The DDCS communication is handled by the SDCS COM 8 The firmware revision can be checked from Com8SwVersion 4 11 The firmware revisions of the field exciters can be checked from Mot1FexSwVer 4 08 and Mot2FexSwVer 4 09 Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 53 Start stop sequences General The drive is controlled by control words MainCtrlWord 7 01 or UsedMCW 7 04 The MainStatWord 8 01 provides the hand shake and interlocking for the overriding control The overriding control uses the MainCtrilWord 7 01 or hardware signals to command the drive The actual status of the drive is dis
45. 1 P94 20 2501 Tret Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MailBox1 mailbox 1 node ID Mailbox 1 can transmit receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal1 1 94 13 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 14 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 15 and TrmtRecVal1 4 94 16 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox1 94 12 is set to O Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N MailBoxCycle1 cycle time mailbox 1 The function of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is depending on the setting of MailBox1 94 12 If MailBox1 94 12 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms If MailBox1 94 12 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom A larmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set
46. 173 Event Type Display function Illustration Operation IN1 triggers the event IN2 selects the fault alarm or notice IN3 is the event delay in ms IN1 Activation input boolean 0 1 trigger event 0 block deactivated IN2 Selection of the message to be displayed There exist 15 different messages which are selected by using numbers The default message is shown in the brackets It can be changed by means of string parameters Alarms Faults Notices String parameters 301 APAlarm1 601 APFault1 801 String 85 11 302 APAlarm2 602 APFault2 802 String2 85 12 303 APAlarm3 603 APFault3 803 String3 85 13 304 APAlarm4 604 APFault4 804 String4 85 14 305 APAlarm5 605 APFault5 805 String5 85 15 Connections IN1 boolean IN2 Text of alarm fault or notice Must be defined via String1 85 11 to String5 85 15 and connected to IN2 IN3 16 bit integer OUT not used Filter Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT is the filtered value of IN1 IN2 is the filter time in ms Connections OUT IN1 1 e Note The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors IN1 16 bit integer 15 bits sign value to be filtered IN2 16 bit integer 15 bits sign filter time in ms IN3 not used OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign
47. 2 DI2 1 Reverse 0 Forward 3 DIS 1 Reverse 0 Forward 4 DIA 1 Reverse 0 Forward 5 DI5 1 Reverse 0 Forward 6 DI6 1 Reverse 0 Forward 7 DI7 1 Reverse 0 Forward 8 DI8 1 Reverse 0 Forward 9 DI9 1 Reverse 0 Forward only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 Reverse 0 Forward only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 Reverse 0 Forward only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 Reverse 0 Forward MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 Reverse 0 Forward AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 Reverse 0 Forward AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 Reverse 0 Forward AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 Reverse 0 Forward AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Reset Reset command Binary signal for Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 0 NotUsed 1 2 DI 2 DI2 3 DI3 4 DIA 5 DI5 6 DI6 7 DI 8 DI8 9 DI9 10 D10 11 DH1 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW
48. ACW Bit15 SyncCommand Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 246 Signal Parameter name SyncCommand 2 synchronization command for position counter encoder 2 Activation of synchronization for pulse encoder 2 and setting of the binary input signal At the synchronization event AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 SyncCommand the position counter is initialized with following values PosCount2lnitLo 50 21 is written into PosCount2Low 3 05 and PosCount2lnitHi 50 22 is written into PosCount2High 3 06 At the same time AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 SyncRdy is set to 1 The synchronization can be inhibited by setting AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 10 SyncDisable to 1 The synchronization event is selected by 0 NotUsed default 1 DI7 rising edge 0 1 taken from DI7 2 DI7HI amp Z DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 3 DITHi amp Z Fwd DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward 4 DITHi amp Z Rev DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating reverse 5 DI7 falling edge 1 0 taken from DI7 6 DI7Lo amp Z DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 7 DI7LO amp Z Fwd DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward 8 DI7Lo amp Z Rev DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel
49. AlRange MechBrake TachPolarity TachoRange reserved TorqProving ReversalTime reserved reserved APFault1 APFault2 APFault3 APFault4 APFault5 Int Scaling 1 231 Signal Parameter name Fault code Comment and trip level F549 1 parameter compatibility the parameter causing the fault can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 F550 1 reading the actual parameter set or a user parameter set from either parameter flash or Memory Card failed checksum fault analog input range A Mon4mA 30 29 selected motor mechanical brake M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 M1BrakeFltTime 42 05 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 selected motor tacho respectively pulse encoder polarity Overflow of AlTacho input reserved for PID controller selected motor torque proving M1TorgProvTime 42 10 the Adaptive Program application program or overriding control providing the acknowledge signal TorqProvOK AuxCtrlWorae2 7 03 bit 11 reversal time ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 RevDly 43 14 no action no action Adaptive Program fault 1 Adaptive Program fault 2 Adaptive Program fault 3 Adaptive Program fault 4 Adaptive Program fault 5 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 232 Signal Parameter name UserFaultWord user defined fault word 1 User defined fault word All names are defined by the user via application program Bit Fault text Fault code Com
50. AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Type Volatile N NotUsed def nit E C NotUsed E Eoo LLL EJ Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name GearStartTorq gearbox starting torque Gear backlash compensation GearStartTorq 26 08 is the reduced torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 used after a torque direction change The torque limit is reduced for the time defined by GearTorqTime 26 09 Torque GearTorqRamp 26 10 GearStartTorq 26 08 GearTorqTime 26 09 Int Scaling 1002 1 6 Type Volatile N GearTorqTime gearbox torque time Gear backlash compensation When the torque is changing its direction the torque limit is reduced for the time defined by GearTorqTime 26 09 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type I Volatile N GearTorqRamp gearbox torque ramp Gear backlash compensation When the torque is changing its direction the torque limit is reduced for the time defined by GearTorqTime 26 09 After the time has elapsed the torque limit is increased to its normal value according to the ramp time defined by GearTorqRamp 26 10 GearTorqRamp 26 10 defines the time within the torque increases from zero to MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N 303 E C Unused Signal and parameter list
51. Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW 7 04 bit O On respectively Off1N is set to low 0 RampStop 1 TorqueLimit 2 CoastStop 3 DynBraking Note The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and On is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and On is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped dynamic braking In case UsedMCW 7 04 bit O On and UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run are set to low run and on commands are
52. E C TorqRefA torque reference A External torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 TorqRefA 25 01 can be scaled by LoadShare 25 03 Note TorqRefA 25 01 is only valid if TorgRefA Sel 25 10 TorqRefA2501 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRefA FTC torque reference A filter time TorqRefA 25 01 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type SI Volatile N LoadShare load share Scaling factor TorqRefA 25 01 Int Scaling 10 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqRefB torque reference B External torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 TorqRefB 25 04 is ramped by TorqRampUp 25 05 and TorqRampDown 25 06 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRampUp torque ramp up Ramp time from 0 to 100 of MotNomTorque 4 23 for TorqRefB 25 04 Int Scaling 100 1 s Type l Volatile N TorqRampDown torque ramp down Ramp time from 100 96 to 0 of MotNomTorque 4 23 for TorqRefB 25 04 Int Scaling 100 1 s Type l Volatile N Unused Unused TorqRefA Sel torque reference A selector Selector for TorqRefExt 2 24 0 TorqRefA2501 TorqRefA 25 01 default 1 Ali analog input Al1 2 Al2 analog input Al2 3 Al3 analog input AI3 4 AI analog input Al4 5 AIS analog input AIS 6 Al6 analog input Al6 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 300 Signal Param
53. Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 394 Signal Parameter name 94 09 M2FexNode motor 2 field exciter node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 2 field exciter in the drive See also example 1 above The field exciter node ID is inactive if M2FexNode 94 09 is set to O Note M2FexNode 94 09 is void when M2UsedFexType 49 07 NotUsed or OnBoard Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N 94 10 Unused The drive to drive and master follower communication utilizes 4 mailboxes to transfer data Thus data transfer to any station in the system is possible Each mailbox can transmit receive up to 4 values Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data negative only receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed Example 6 Drive to drive configuration sending signals from drive 2 using MailBox3 94 24 to drive 3 using MailBox3 94 24 by means of 5 to transmit data and 5 to receive data P94 24 5 P94 30 6 Example 7 Master follower configuration send TorqRef3 2 10 from the master drive via MailBox1 94 12 to TorqRefA 25 01 of the followers via MailBox2 94 18 Master drive 13 follower drive P94 01 1 P94 01 2 P94 12 1 P94 18 1 P94 14 210 Trers P94 20 2501 Treta 2 follower drive P94 01 3 P94 18 1 P94 20 2501 Tret 10 follower drive P94 01 11 P94 18
54. Output I O par 7 DsetXplus4Val1 Output I O par 8 Output I O par 9 DsetXplus4Val2 DsetXplus4Val3 Input VO par5 DE DsetXplus3val2 Input VO par6 DE DsetXplus3val3 Input VO par 07 DsetXplus5valt Input VO par8 08 DsetXplus5val2 Input I O par 9 DsetXplus5Val3 For proper communication shown values have to be used Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words Further information Output and input parameters 51 08 51 25 can also be connected directly to the desired DCS800 parameters In this case please take care that the RCNA 01 adapter gets the changed values and also take care that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 to prevent data trouble Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication S3ADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 129 DeviceNet communication with fieldbus adapter RDNA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the DeviceNet adapter RDNA 01 together with the DCS800 RDNA 01 DCS800 The DeviceNet communication with the drive requires the option RDNA 01 Related documentation User s Manual DeviceNet Adapter Module RDNA 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Supported assemblies with DCS800 are ABB Drives assembly Output instance 100 Input instance 101 and User specific assembly Output insta
55. Volatile N Al6HighVal analog input 6 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in A 6HighVal 13 25 Note To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1 mV Type l Volatile N 10000 10000 6V Offset Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Al6LowVal analog input 6 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in AJOGLowVal 13 26 Note Al6Low Val 13 26 is only valid if ConvModeAl6 13 27 10V Bi Note To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAI6 conversion mode analog input 6 The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and current is done via DIP switches on the RAIO 01 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 120V 10V Uni OV to 10V 0O mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto 10V 4mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type C Volati
56. delays F541 MiFexLowCur DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 FexTimeOut 94 07 100 ms def causes F516 M1iFexCom M1FexNode 94 08 21 def Use the same node number as in DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 of the field exciter M1NomFidCur 99 11 XXX A ly XXX A rated field current M1UsedFexType 99 12 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 Parameters to be set in large field exciters Before starting with the commissioning set all parameters to default by means of ApplMacro 99 08 Factory and App Restore 99 07 Yes Check with MacroSel 8 10 Parameter Field converter Comments CommandSel 10 01 4 FexLink MotFanAck 10 06 0 NotUsed OvrVoltProt 10 13 2 DI2 depending on hardware connection to DCF506 ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 500 96 to suppress F503 ArmOverVolt if this does not help increase M1NomVolt 99 02 OperModeSel 43 01 1 FieldConv CurSel 43 02 8 FexCurRef M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 0 RevDly 43 14 50 ms FlaCtriMode 44 01 0 Fix def Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 65 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 21 def Use the same node number as in M1FexNode 94 08 of the armature module DevLimPLL 97 13 20 to suppress blocking of current controller see CuCtrlStat2 6 04 bit 13 M1NomvVolt 99 02 xxx V U xxx V rated field voltage M1NomCur 99 0
57. 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name def nit E C TorqScale torque scaling Scaling of TorgRefUsed 2 13 and MotTorq 1 08 TorqScale 26 13 TorqRefUsed TorqScale 26 13 3 245 MotTorq MotTorqFilt FluxRefFidWeak L 1 085 4 reme SSC 97 20 TorgActFiltTime mot nom Imax 25 Filter mot nom Armature current measurement 71 155 convCurActRel Volatile Y 6 Moise 1 RSC DEN 71 Ell E TorqCorrect torque correction Torque correction value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 0 NotUsed no torque correction used default 1 AMH torque correction via Al1 fast AI 2 Al2 torque correction via Al2 fast Al 3 Al3 torque correction via AI3 4 Al4 torque correction via Al4 5 AIS torque correction via AIS 6 Al6 torque correction via AI6 Note If TorqCorrect 26 15 AI3 then AI3 is connected to TorqCorr 2 14 and thus added to TorqRefUsed 2 13 Note Since this torque offset is added it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N AIG Ki D 2 2 5 zZ StallTime stall time The time allowed for the drive to undershoot StallSpeed 30 02 and exceed StallTorq 30 03 A triggered stall protection leads to F531 MotorStalled FaultWord2 9 02 bit 14 The stall protection is inactive if StallTime 30 01 is set to zero Int Sca
58. 4 DIA 5 DI5 6 DI6 7 DI 8 DI8 9 DI9 10 D10 11 DI11 ACW Bit15 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active default 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active only available with digital extension board 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active only available with digital extension board 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17 ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 20 ACW Bit15 Int Scaling 1 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 1 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 14 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 12 no Off2 0 Off2 active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 248 Signal Parameter name E Stop emergency stop command Binary signal for Off3 E Stop UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 For fastest reaction
59. 4 22 shows the load of the application Neither should reach 100 Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MotTorqNom motor nominal torque Calculated nominal motor torque Note the value is calculated the following way 60 M1NomVolt 99 02 M1MotCur 99 03 M LArmR 43 10 M1NomCur 99 03 MotTorqNom 4 23 2 Fa MiBaseSpeed 99 04 Values above 65000 can not be displayed Int Scaling 1 1 Nm Type l Volatile Y ProgressSignal progress signal for auto tunings Progress signal for auto tunings used for Startup Assistants Int Scaling 1 1 6 Type l Volatile Y TachoTerminal tacho terminal to be used Depending on the analog tacho output voltage e g 60 V at 1000 rpm and the maximum speed of the drive system which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 and MiBaseSpeed 99 04 different inputs connections at the SDCS CON 4 have to be used Analog tacho inputs SDCS CON 4 90V to 270V 4469 X3 1 30V to 90V 449 x3 2 8V to 30V 449 x3 3 AITAC O x3 4 TachoTerminal 4 25 shows which terminal has to be used depending on the setting of M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 and the actual maximum speed of the drive system 0 NotUsed if M1 TachoVolt1000 50 13 0 V no analog tacho used or not set jet 1 X3 3 8 30V result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 2 1 V 2 X3 2 30 9
60. 50 21 Cyclic Single PosSyncMode 50 15 7 4 7 ADD PosCount2InitHi 50 22 Pulse encoder 2 pulses Pulse encoder 2 position counter logic cm V PosCount2Low 3 05 PosCount2High 3 06 Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 81 UO configuration Chapter overview This chapter describes the I O configuration of digital and analog inputs and outputs with different hardware possibilities Digital inputs DI s The basic I O board is the SDCS CON 4 with 8 standard Dis All 8 standard Dis can be replaced with SDCS IOB 2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO 01 digital UO extension modules Thus the maximum number of DI s is 14 The hardware source is selected by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 for DI9 to DI11 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 for DI12 to DI14 and 10 BoaraConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of digital UO extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON SDCS IOB 2 On the SDCS CON 4 the standard Dl s are filtered and not isolated On the SDCS IOB 2 the standard Dis are filtered and isolated Selectable hardware filtering time DI7 and DI8 on the SDCS IOB 2 2msor 10 ms jumper S7 and S8 Input voltages 24 VDC to 48 VDC 115 VAC or 230 VAC depending on the hardware for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Scan time for DI1 to
61. 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N brake is open lifted brake is open lifted only available BrakeOpen ACW Bit15 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2BrakeRefDly motor 2 brake reference delay Brake open lift delay This function compensates for the mechanical open lift delay of the brake During the start Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 2 1 of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller output is set to start torque see M2StrtTorqRefSel 49 44 until M2BrakeRefDly 49 30 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2ZeroSpeedDly motor 2 zero speed delay This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 to actual speed 0 Until M2ZeroSpeedDly 49 31 is elapsed the brake is kept open lifted Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2ModelTime motor 2 model time constant Thermal time constant for motor 2 with fan forced cooling The time within the temperature rises to 63 of its nominal value The motor
62. Again the 3 data word from overriding control to drive should be the torque reference and the 3 data word from the drive to the overriding control should be the actual motor torque Therefore following settings have to be made values see table below PZD3 OUT 51 05 3 and PZD3 IN 51 06 6 After changing parameters in group 51 please don t forget to reset the RPBA 01 adapter by means of FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET Now the corresponding parameters in group 90 and group 92 are enabled Following settings have to be made now DsetXVal3 90 03 2501 TorqRefA 25 01 and DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 107 MotTorqFilt 1 07 Setting of data words using group 90 and group 92 Parameter group 51 l Direction ABB Parameter group 90 and 82 iname setvalue PLCs Drve Datasets name def value m fixed connection kg 11 90 01 Deep all HO H fixed connection lt n 2 1 92 01 DsetplustVal 501 z fixed connection 12 30 02 Disetxv alz 2301 amp fixed connection m 22 92 02 DsetXplust wal 104 S 51 05 PZD30UT 13 90 03 Dsetxvala 2501 amp 51 06 PZD3IN lt m 23 92 03 Dsetkplustval3 29 B 5107 PZD4OUT gt 31 90 04 Dsefxplus2val 70 amp 51 08 PZD4IN i 10 Keier 44 92 04 Deetplussvalt 802 51 08 PZD5OUT i g 32 90 05 Dsefxplus2val2 703 51 40 PZDSIN i 44 42 92 05 DsetXplus3val2 10 5141 PZDBOUT i gf
63. CtriStatMas 12 pulse master control status 12 pulse master control status Bit Value Comment BO 1 command On to 12 pulse slave 0 no action B1 1 command Off2N Emergency Off Coast Stop to 12 pulse slave low active 0 no action B2 1 motor heating function active 0 motor heating function not active B3 1 command Run to 12 pulse slave 0 no action B4 1 command field exciter On 0 command field exciter Off B5 1 dynamic braking 0 no action B6 1 12 pulse serial operation see OperModeSel 43 01 0 12 pulse parallel operation see OperModeSel 43 01 B7 1 command Reset to 12 pulse slave 0 no action B8 1 0 e B9 1 0 B10 1 waiting for reduction of EMF to match the mains voltage see RevVoltMargin 44 21 0 no action B11 1 autotuning armature current controller active 0 no action B12 1 zero current detected HevDly 43 14 is elapsed 0 no action B13 1 command to change direction of current bridge change over active 0 no action B14 1 CurCtrlStat2 6 04 gt 0 current controller is blocked 0 no action B15 1 CurRefUsed 3 12 negative 0 CurRefUsed 3 12 positive The control bits B3 to B6 Reset On Run and Off2N are only valid in the 12 pulse slave if in the 12 pulse slave CommandSel 10 01 12P Link Valid in 12 pulse master and slave Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile Y 213 E C E E Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter na
64. DP Mode 51 21 0 FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by Profibus adapter DCS800 parameter setting using PPO Type 1 Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Parameter setting example 2 using PPO types 2 4 and 5 The first two data words PZD1 OUT PZD2 OUT from the overriding control to the drive are fixed connected as control word and speed reference at the Profibus side and cannot be changed The first two data words PZD1 IN PZD2 IN from the drive to the overriding control are fixed connected as status word and speed actual at the Profibus side and cannot be changed Further data words are to be connected to desired parameters respectively signals by means of parameters in group 51 PZD3 OUT 51 05 means 3 data word from overriding control to drive PZD3 IN 51 06 means 3 data word from Drive to overriding control to PZD10 OUT 51 18 means 10 data word from overriding control to drive PZD10 IN 51 19 means 10 data word from drive to overriding control o
65. Digital outputs DO S sssssssssssssssssseeseeeeeeeeenn nennen nennen nnnm nnn nnne ns nnn rtr sienne inns 84 SDCS CON 4 GD OB 84 1 cand 2 SHDIORO EE 84 GomnfiQuration s i x ice es act fess Ret Aas deee P 85 Analog inputs EE 87 SDGCS CON 4A nineeusebe ee BD PI HEB OE E REGEM RE Ee eoi ola 87 SDCSAOB HB a desk EET 87 ba Ge E meet E s E E EEEE ndm 88 2 PAIQUO EEN 88 COMP GUL AION ERECTUS 89 el Te WEE EE EE 89 Analog outputs AO S EE 91 SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 nennen nnne nennen ener nnns nnns 91 Ar AIO eh EE 91 el Ee EE 92 ConflguratiOnaz s reote Eee Pete e cadets te ite a bless E bai i sob ranir Gba ud EO 92 Scaling rne So a ws A 93 Communication 94 Chapter overvieW 22 2 2 2 tei tei ete iie e Eo iei ePe Pei eo eio iebo Pede ie be Pede Ee bees e Redes ebbe Pese Rees 94 DCSLink with GDCG DSLA seen a nennen enn nnne n niae a rn E R nnns 94 ELLE EE 94 Excitation commissioning a FEN A 94 Layout FEX RA 94 AV OUD S DG SS EE 94 Set the FEX 4 type ssssssssssssssssssseseeene seen nennen nnne sene n nnns snnt nnne snnt ntes ener nnns 95 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision 95 Set the DOSLINK CEPI 96 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Set the supply of the FEN A enn aiaia 97 Checking the FE X24 lE 97 Master follower Commissioning nennen nnne nn nnne nnn nnn nn
66. E Stop 7 01 Bit 2 wurde gedr ckt 100 0 0 Motor drehzahl On Off1N Off2N Off3N Run RampOutZero RampHold RampinZero Reset Inching1 Inching2 o co 4 0 O1 IS Oo ID O RemoteCmd m o MSW 8 01 Bit RdyOn 0 RdyRun RdyRef Tripped Off2NStatus Off3NStatus Onlnhibited Alarm AtSetpoint Remote 00 Ni OX O1 S Go 9 gt AboveLimit o ZeroSpeed 8 02 Bit 11 BrakeCmd 8 02 Bit8 Drehzahlrampenausgang clamped CmdFansOn 6 03 Bit 0 CmdMainContactorOn 6 03 Bit 7 ww M1BrakeDly 42 03 M1BrakeCloseDly 42 04 5 Verhalten abhangig von Off1Mode 21 02 und StopMode 21 03 6 Verhalten abh ngig von FldHeatSel 21 18 und M1FlIdMinTrip 30 12 7 Verhalten abh ngig von FanDly 21 14 8 Verhalten abh ngig von BrakeEStopMode 42 09 9 Verhalten abh ngig von EStopMode 21 04 EZ Nicht relevant Start stop seq b dsf Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 58 Field excitation General Depending on the application the DCS800 has the capability to use several different kinds of field exciters or combinations of them The differences of the field exciters and their fu
67. It is recommended to set ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 at least 20 higher than M1NomVolt 99 02 Example With M1NomVolt 99 02 525 V and ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 120 the drive trips with armature voltages 630 V The overvoltage supervision is inactive if ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 is set to 328 or higher Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ArmOvrCurLev armature overcurrent level The drive trips with F502 ArmOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 1 if ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 is exceeded It is recommended to set ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 at least 25 higher than M1NomCur 99 03 Example With M1NomCur 99 03 850 A and ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 250 the drive trips with armature currents 2125 A Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurRiseMax maximum rise armature current The drive trips with F539 FastCurRise FaultWord3 9 03 bit 6 if ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 per 1 ms is exceeded This trip opens the main contactor and the DC breaker if present Int Scaling 100 1 ms Type Volatile N M1FlidMinTrip motor 1 minimum field trip The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if M1FlaMinTrip 30 12 in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 11 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Note Mi1FIaMinTrip 30 12 is not
68. M2NomFidCur 49 05 with M2KpFex 49 10 3 if the field current error is 5 of M2NomFlaCur 49 05 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N 325 0 2 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2TiFex motor 2 i part field current controller Integral time of the field current controller M2TiFex 49 11 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 96 of motor nominal field current M2NomFlaCur 49 05 with M2KpFex 49 10 3 if the field current error is 5 of M2NomFlaCur 49 05 On that condition and with M2TiFex 49 11 200 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal field current if the current error is constant after 200 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting M2TiFex 49 11 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the field current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N M2CurLimBrdg1 motor 2 current limit of bridge 1 Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 Setting M2CurLimBrdg1 49 12 to 0 disables bridge 1 Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Vol
69. Open the workspace 05 DCS800 Speed feedback assistant dww Enter the EMF speed feedback parameters and if applicable the parameters for pulse encoder 1 pulse encoder 2 or the analog tacho M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 M1EncMeasMode 50 02 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 M1EncPulseNo 50 04 M1 TachoVolt1000 50 13 M1NomVolt 99 02 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 SpdFbAssist and set On and Run within 20 s The speed feedback assistant detects the kind of speed feedback EMF pulse encoder 1 pulse encoder 2 or analog tacho the drive is using During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 During the whole procedure the drive will be in EMF speed control despite the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 When the autotuning is finished successfully check M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 parameter set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning In case an analog tacho is detected M1 SpeedFbSel 50 03 Tacho it is recommended to fine tune the analog tacho Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 Tac
70. Proportional gain of the EMF controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal EMF with KpEMF 44 09 3 if the EMF error is 5 of M1NomVolt 99 02 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N TiEMF i part EMF controller Integral time of the EMF controller TIEMF 44 10 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal EMF with KpEMF 44 09 3 if the EMF error is 5 of M1NomVolt 99 02 On that condition and with TiEMF 44 10 20 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal EMF if the EMF error is constant after 20 ms are elapsed 15 96 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting TiEMF 44 10 to O ms disables the integral part of the EMF controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type Volatile N Field current at 70 flux in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 11 44 12 FidCurFlux40 field current at 40 flux Field current at 40 flux in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 1 1 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N 44 13 FidCurFlux70 field current at 70 flux Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N FldCurFlux90 field current at 90 flux Field current at 90 flux in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 11 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Sig
71. SDCS DSL 4 Hardware FEX 4 jumper S1 1 2 if bus termination is needed jumper S1100 1 ON if bus termination is needed jumper S2 sets the ground termination jumper S1100 2 and S1100 3 set the ground termination Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Set the supply of the FEX 4 The FEX 4 can be either supplied by 1 phase or by 3 phases 97 Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4 M1OperModeFex4 45 22 3 phase X100 5A X100 35A X101 U1 5 X101 V1 2 X101 W1 x X100 D1 M1OperModeFex4 45 22 1 phase Ha X100 35A X101 U1 A X101 V1 3 X101 W1 P X100 D1 Checking the FEX 4 There are several signals to check the FEX 4 installation Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4 Mot1FexType 4 06 shows the FEX 4 yellow U731 or waiting for DCSLink type as chosen with M1UsedFexType 99 12 green U730 LED is blinking communication DCSLinkStat1 4 18 or DCSLinkStat2 4 19 show the status of the field exciter node as chosen with M1FexNode 94 08 yellow U731 or green U730 LED is steady DCSLink communication is OK For further information consult the DCS800 Hardware Manual 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Communication 98 Master follower commissioning Set the DCSLink hardware Cable connection Master SDCS DSL 4 1stfollower SDCS DSL 4 X8 X8 NETT A Bus and ground termination The DC
72. Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name LocLock local lock Local control can be disabled by setting LocLock 16 04 to True If LocLock 16 04 is released in local control it becomes valid after the next changeover to remote control No pass code is required to change LocLock 16 04 0 False local control released default 1 True local control blocked Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N MacroChangeMode macro change mode The choice to release Motor1 2 shared motion or macros User1 2 is defined by means of MacroChangeMode 16 05 0 User1 2 change between parameter sets User1 and User2 default 1 Motor1 2 change between Motor1 and Motor2 shared motion parameters for motor 2 see group 49 ParChange 10 10 selects the binary signal to release either Motor1 User1 or Motor2 User2 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N ParAppilSave save load parameters and enable disable application programs If parameters are written to cyclic e g from an overriding control they are only stored in the RAM and not in the flash By means of ParApplSave 16 06 all parameter values are saved from the RAM into the flash ParApplSave 16 06 is also used to save load a parameter set on from the memory card and to enable disable application programs 0 Done parameters are saved or all other actions are finished default 1 Save
73. StartFrom0 Coast Stop Off2N UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 E stop Off3N UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 and if the drive is de energized and then re energized M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 FlyStart 21 10 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 M2SpeedFbSel 49 24 M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 for proper function of the used speed feedback devices analog tacho encoder 139 Off3FieldBus Off3 E stop pending via MainCtriWord 7 01 I 9 08 RdyRun 1 fieldbus bit 6 There is no problem with the drive itself Check MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit2 Off3N 140 lgFieldBus __ Illegal fieldbus settings 9 08 always The fieldbus parameters in group 51 fieldbus are not bit 7 set according to the fieldbus adapter or the device has not been selected Check group 51 fieldbus configuration of fieldbus adapter 141 COM8FwVer SDCS COM 8 firmware version conflict 9 08 always Invalid combination of SDCS CON 4 firmware and bit 8 SDCS COM 8 firmware Check for valid combination of SDCS CON 4 FirmwareVer 4 01 and SDCS COM 8 Com8SwVersion 4 11 firmware version according to the release notes Fault tracing 138 Off2FieldBus Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop pending via 9 08 RdyRun 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 I fieldbus start inhibition bit 5 There is no problem with the drive itself Check MainCtrlWord 7 01 biti Off2N Lo sS sx o 5 S 5 5 5 f Alrmievel SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Definition
74. Use the Clock set mode to Enable or disable the clock function Select the display format Set date and time 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight CLOCK SET in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the desired option then press SEL 3 Choose the desired setting then press SEL or OK to store the setting or press CANCEL to leave without modifications 4 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU Note To get the clock visible on the LCD display at least one change has to be done in the clock set mode and the DCS800 Control Panel has to be de energized and energized again Parameter backup mode The DCS800 Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters AP will be uploaded and downloaded The type code of the drive is write protected and has to be set manually by means of ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode and TypeCode 97 01 The parameter backup mode has following functions UPLOAD TO PANEL Copies all parameters from the drive into the DCS800 Control Panel This includes both user sets User1 and User2 if defined and internal parameters such as those created by tacho fine tuning The DCS800 Control Panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on its battery Can only be done in drive state Off and local from DCS800 Control Panel DOWNLOAD FULL SET Restores the full parameter set from the DCS800 Control Panel into the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure ident
75. X24 Structure of AO s I O configuration 94 Communication Chapter overview This chapter describes the communication capabilities of the drive DCSLink with SDCS DSL 4 General The DCSLink is a multi purpose twisted pair bus for the DCS800 All functions using the same hardware and can be used at the same time The DCSLink can be used for excitation master follower drive to drive communication and 12 pulse Excitation commissioning a FEX 4 Layout FEX 4 240 Za e S X o EX 2 d p D Qo SES e T110 O E Field O n x190 fT F m x 2 gl T112 ME O s800 T111 Le EL ee D800 U730fJ 801 u7310 9 R106 8 sio vg x calo Anel XI In xo sa S Mains Rio E z 30 je a X xo Q R108 x7 gt j Fex4_layout_a dsf 24 V supply X3 DSL Link X1 1 24 V DC X3 1 GND B X1 2 OVDC X3 2 CANL X3 3 CAN H Layout SDCS DSL 4 O C SDCS Sg SO E o Heran Communication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Set the FEX 4 type 95 The FEX 4 can be used in 4 different applications FEX 425 Int as internal field exciter of a D5 module with up to 25 A DCF803 0016 as external field exciter with up to 16 A DCF803 0035 as external f
76. an unconnected input does not affect the output of the block The Attribute Input BlockxAttrib is to set with the attributes like declaration of constant and bits of all three inputs DWL AP does this automatically The constant attribute defines a block constant which can only be changed or modified in EDIT mode The blocks use two input formats e integer or e boolean The used format depends on the function block type For example the ADD block uses integer inputs and the OR block boolean inputs Note The inputs of the block are read when the execution of the block starts not simultaneously for all blocks Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 163 Block input attributes Block inputs gets the parameter of signal source or user constants e g 85 01 Depending on the used block function and depending on the desired function the attributes of all three inputs are to be set as integer constant or as selection of a bit of a 16 bit word source Therefore it is used a 16 bit word which is defined as following 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Bit number 0 packed Boolean 3 2 1 Function block Function block Function block To use an input input 3 bit input 2 bit input 1 bit as a constant selection selection selection value the bit belonging to the This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain bit input must be set out of a packed Boolean word It is used to conn
77. bit 15 19 ACW Bit12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 20 ACW Bit13 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 21 ACW Bit14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 22 ACW Bit15 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Acc Dec1 i 0 AccIDect 20 pl Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name JogAccTime acceleration time jogging The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 in case of Jogging When using jog command Jog1 10 17 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 8 speed is set by FixedSpeed1 23 02 When using jog command Jog2 10 18 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 9 speed is set by FixedSpeed 2 23 03 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 Int Scaling 100 1s Type I Volatile N JogDecTime deceleration time jogging The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed in case of Jogging When using jog command Jog 10 17 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 8 speed is set by FixedSpeed1 23 02 When using jog command Jog2 10 18 or MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 9 speed is set by FixedSpeed2 23 03 To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 I
78. decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped Off2N has priority over OffN3 and On No Off3 E stop Command to Onlnhibit state Stopping via E StopMode 21 04 Off3N has priority over On Command to RdyRef state The firing pulses are released and the drive is running with the selected speed reference Command to RdyRun state Stop via StopMode RampOutZero no action speed ramp output is forced to zero RampHold no action freeze hold speed ramp RamplnZero no action speed ramp input is forced to zero Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 217 Signal Parameter name acknowledge fault indications with the positive edge no action Inching1 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed1 23 02 active only with CommandSel 10 01 MainCtriWord and RampOutZero RampHold RampinZero Run 0 Inching2 overrides Inching1 alternatively Jog1 10 17 can be used no action Inching2 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed2 23 03 active only with CommandSel 10 01 MainCtriWord and RampOutZero RampHold RamplnZero Run 0 Inching2 overrides Inching1 alternatively Jog2 10 18 can be used no action RemoteCmd overriding control enabled overriding control has to set this value to 1 The last UsedMCW 7 04 and the last references SpeedRef 23 01 AuxSpeedRef 23 13 TorqRe
79. e g 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Act2 PID controller actual input value 2 index Index pointer to the source of the PID controller actual input value 2 The format is XXyy with negate actual input value 2 xx group and yy index e g 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref1Min PID controller minimum limit reference input value 1 Minimum limit of the PID controller reference input value 1 in percent of the source of PID Ref1 40 13 Int Scaling 100 1 6 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref1Max PID controller maximum limit reference input value 1 Maximum limit of the PID controller reference input value 1 in percent of the source of PID Ref1 40 13 Int Scaling 100 1 6 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref2Min PID controller minimum limit reference input value 2 Minimum limit of the PID controller reference input value 2 in percent of the source of PID Ref2 40 14 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref2Max PID controller maximum limit reference input value 2 Maximum limit of the PID controller reference input value 2 in percent of the source of PID Ref2 40 14 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name PID Mux PID controller reference input selector multiplexer PID controller reference input se
80. is set to 0 ms If MailBox3 94 24 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle3 94 25 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom A larmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle3 94 25 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal3 1 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 3 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N 397 E C TrmtRecVal3 2 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 3 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N TrmtRecVal3 3 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 3 transmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N TrmtRecVal3 4 mailbox 3 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 3 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N MailBox4 mailbox 4 node ID Mailbox 4 can transmit
81. l Volatile Y CtriMode control mode Used control mode see TorqSel 26 01 0 NotUsed 1 SpeedCtrl speed control 2 TorqCtrl torque control 3 CurCtrl current control 4 VoltCtrl voltage control if CtrlModeSel 43 08 PowerSupply2 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y MotiFidCurRel motor 1 relative actual field current Motor 1 relative field current in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 1 1 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y MotiFidCur motor 1 actual field current Motor 1 field current Filtered with 500 ms Int Scaling 10 1A Type SI Volatile Y 193 unit E C Seems pei i aag Mot2FidCurRel motor 2 relative actual field current Motor 2 relative field current in percent of M2NomFidCur 49 05 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Mot2FidCur motor 2 actual field current Motor 2 field current Filtered with 500 ms Int Scaling 10 1A Type SI Volatile Y ArmCurActSI 12 pulse slave actual armature current Actual armature current of 12 pulse slave Valid in 12 pulse master only A Valid for 12 pulse parallel only Int Scaling 1 1A Type SI Volatile Y ArmCurAII 12 pulse parallel master and slave actual armature current Sum of actual armature current for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave Filtered with 10 ms Valid in 12 pulse master only Valid for 12 pulse parallel only Int Scaling 1 1A Type SI Volatile Y K E Lal RE SSC
82. motoring Lens Max regenerative voltage 150 U motmax Max motoring voltage 15 RevVoltMargin 44 21 Ugenmotor regenerative motor voltage with safety margin Ugenmotor regenerative motor voltage with safety margin RevVoltMargin 44 21 Ugenvax Max regenerative voltage 150 motoring generating Umotmax Max motoring voltage 15 RevVoltMargin dsf For regenerative mode is valid U senmotor U ais U safety with U 1 35 COS Q max ii U vog D 135 cos 20 14 U and U Safety 44 21 follows U 1 35 cos 20 14 U genMax Mains _ act genMotor Mains _ act 44 2 1 aen a Example With ArmAlphaMax 20 14 150 RevVoltMargin 44 21 10 and U NomMainsVolt 99 10 follows Mains act genMotor 1 35 i cos 150 U Unie 16 U follows U 1 06 U Mains _ act 0 1 U 0 1 U Mains _ act Mains _ act Mains _ act genMotor Mains _ act Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N 337 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 338 Signal Parameter name 44 22 VoltRefExt external EMF voltage reference External EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 Note VoltRefExt 44 22 is only valid if EMF RefSel 44 23 VoltRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y EMF RefSel EMF reference selector EMF RefSel 44 23 selector 0 Internal internally calculated EMF
83. o 1 e Reset L MUL EMF VoitActRel 1 1 2 x AND IER uS LEMP FbMonLev 30 15 MUL Be 1 X DCS800docuMig 33 ds4 Speed measurement supervision The drive reacts according to SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 when 1 the measured EMF is greater than EMF FbMonLev 30 15 and 2 the measured speed feedback SpeedActEnc 1 03 SpeedActTach 1 05 or SpeedActEnc2 1 42 is lower than SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 Example SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 15 rpm EMF FbMonLev 30 15 50 V The drive trips when the EMF is greater than 50 V while the speed feedback is lt 15 rpm Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 443 Motor voltage Motor speed volt a dsf Speed FbMonLev 30 14 Speed feedback monitor SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 selects the reaction to a speed feedback problem 1 the drive is immediately tripped with F522 SpeedFb 2 the speed feedback is switched to EMF and the drive is stopped according to E StopRamp 22 11 then F522 SpeedFb is set 3 the speed feedback is switched to EMF and A125 SpeedFb is set 4 This selection is only valid if 2 pulse encoders are connected Depending on the setting of M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 the speed feedback is switched from pulse encoder 1 to pulse encoder 2 or vice versa in case of a problem and A125 SpeedFb AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 8 is set In case the field is weakened the drive is immediately tripped with F522 SpeedFb except two pulse encoders are in use
84. of the input signal connected to an Al is scaled by means of Al1LowVal 13 02 to Al6LowVal 13 26 Example In case the min max voltage 10 V of Al1 should equal 250 of TorqRefExt 2 24 set TorqRefA Sel 25 10 AM ConvModeAl1 13 03 10V Bi AltHighVal 13 01 4000 mV Al1LowVal 13 02 4000 mV SDCS IOB 3 SDCS CON 4 Scaling Input value Scaling r SpeedActTach 1 05 X3 1 to AlTacho AlTacho Use of Al s X3 4 Val 5 01 x33 X35 ConvMode ERU AIT HighVal 13 01 HertseL 11 09 X3 4 X3 6 Alt 13 03 6 03 Al1LowVal 13 02 Ref2Sel 11 06 X3 5 X3 7 ConvMode AI2 Val 5 04 AI2High Val 13 05 TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 X3 6 X3 8 Al2 13 07 Al2LowVal 13 06 TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 X3 7 ConvMode AI3 Val 5 05 Al3HighVal 13 09 TorqRefA Sel 25 10 X3 8 Al3 13 11 Al3LowVal 13 10 TorqCorrect 26 15 X3 9 X4 1 ConvMode A14 Val 5 06 Al4HighVal 13 13 ResCurDetectSel 30 05 X3 10 m X42 AM 13 15 Al4LowVal 13 14 M1TempSel 31 05 X3 11 StrtTorgRefSel 42 07 X942 CurSel 43 02 IO BoardConfig 98 15 M2TempSel 49 35 1 RAIO 01 X1 AIS ConvMode AIS Val 5 07 Al5HighVal 13 21 Fixed assigned Al s x12 AIS 13 23 i Al5LowVal 13 22 The residual current X1 3 Al6 ConvMode Al6HighVal 13
85. only available with digital extension board 122 MCW Bit11 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Note The macro User1 User2 selection made by ParChange 10 10 overrides the selection made with ApplMacro 99 08 It takes about 2 s until the new parameter values ar
86. reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 1 Volatile Y M1FexFaultWord motor 1 field exciter fault word Motor 1 field exciter fault word Fault text Fault code Comment reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 243 Signal Parameter name E C M2FexAlarmWord motor 2 field exciter alarm word LL Motor 2 field exciter alarm word Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment BO reserved B1 reserved B2 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y M2FexFaultWord motor 2 field exciter fault word LL Motor 2 field exciter fault word i Fault text Fault code Comment reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 244 Signal Parameter name gw g amp 9 2 u 2 o Start stop select 2 o 10 01 CommandSel command selector co lo UsedMCW 7 04 selector gt 0 Local I O Drive i
87. rpm 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N KpSValMinSpeed p part speed controller value at minimum speed WwW KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 determines the proportional gain percentage at the speed defined by parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed 24 17 Int Scaling 1 1 6 Type I Volatile N TiSValMinSpeed i part speed controller value at minimum speed w TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 determines the integral time percentage at the speed defined by parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed 24 17 Int Scaling 1 1 6 Type I Volatile N ZeroFreqRFE zero frequency resonance frequency eliminator LL Frequency of zero The filter is located at the input of the speed controller Int Scaling 10 1 Hz Type l Volatile N ZeroDampRFE zero damping resonance frequency eliminator w Damping of zero Int Scaling 1000 Type I Volatile N PoleFreqRFE pole frequency resonance frequency eliminator LL Frequency of pole The filter is located at the input of the speed controller Int Scaling 10 1 Hz Type l Volatile N PoleDampRFE pole damping resonance frequency eliminator LL Damping of pole Int Scaling 1000 21 Type I Volatile N SpeedErrorScale An scaling LL Scaling factor speed error An Int Scaling 10 1 Type Volatile N KpS2 2 p part speed controller LL 2 proportional gain of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 Int Scaling 100 Type I Volatile N TiS2 2 i part speed controller Lu 2 integral time of
88. 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1Sel 11 03 MotPot respectively Ref2Sel 11 06 MotPot Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N NotUsed def NotUsed nit E C Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 11 15 MotPotMin motor pot minimum Ee The motor pot minimum function releases the minimum speed level The minimum speed level is D defined by FixedSpeed1 23 02 When the drive is started the motor accelerates to FixedSpeed1 E 23 02 It is not possible to set the speed below FixedSpeed1 23 02 by means of the motor pot ES function 0 NotUsed 1 DN 2 DI2 3 DI3 4 DIA 5 DI5 6 DI6 7 DI7 8 DI8 9 DI9 10 DI10 11 DI11 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17 ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 20 ACW Bit15 Int Scaling 1 263 Signal Parameter name ACW Bit15 Not default 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked 1 released 0 blocked only available with digital extension board 1 released 0 blocked only available with digital extension board 1 released 0 blocked only available with digital ext
89. 02 Note M1SpeedScale 50 01 has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding control e g fieldbus Note M1SpeedScale 50 01 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 because the maximum amount of speed units is 32 000 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Commissioning hint set MiSpeedScale 50 01 to maximum speed set M1BaseSpeed 99 04 to base speed set M1SpeedMax 20 02 MiSpeedMin 20 01 to maximum speed Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M1EncMeasMode motor 1 encoder 1 measuring mode M1EncMeasMode 50 02 selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 1 0 A B Dir channel A rising edges for speed channel A not not used channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 1 12A channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channels B and B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 2 A B Dir channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 3 A B channels A A not and B B not rising and falling edges for speed and direction speed evaluation factor 4 default Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N M1SpeedFbSel motor 1speed feedback sele
90. 03 100 P94 04 32 P94 07 100 P94 08 22 12 pulse slave drive P94 01 32 14 excitation P94 01 22 Example 5 Drive to drive configuration 1 drive 2nd drive 3 drive P94 01 1 P94 01 2 P94 01 2 3 Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name DCSLinkNodelD DCSLink node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of the station Two stations with the same node ID are not allowed Maximum allowed station count is 50 See also examples 1 to 5 above The DCSLink node ID is inactive H DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 is set to O The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the SDCS DSL 4 board is chosen but not connected or faulty Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N BaudRate baud rate Defines the transfer rate of the DCSLink The transfer rate decreases with the total length of the DCSLink cable 0 20 kBit s 20 kBit s total cable length max 500 m 1 50 kBit s 50 kBit s total cable length max 500 m 2 125 kBit s 125 kBit s total cable length max 500 m 3 250 kBit s 250 kBit s total cable length max 250 m 4 500 kBit s 500 kBit s total cable length max 100 m default 5 800 kBit s 800 kBit s total cable length max 50 m 6 888 kBit s 888 kBit s total cable length max 35 m 7 1 MBit s 1 MBit s total cable length approximately 25 m Note Maximum total cable length should not exceed 100 m Maximum amount of connected stations is
91. 06 if a digital input is selected and the brake acknowledge fails 0 NotUsed brake acknowledge is blocked default 1 2 DH 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 2 DI2 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 3 DI3 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 4 DI4 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 5 DI5 0 brake is closed applied brake is open lifted lifted lifted lifted lifted NotUsed NotUsed 1 1 1 6 DI6 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 7 DI7 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 8 DI8 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 9 DI9 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 10 DO 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 11 2 DI11 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 0 brake
92. 08 S02 0260 04 S02 4000 06 S01 2000 04 02 0260 05 S02 4000 07 S01 2000 05 02 0350 04 S02 4000 08 S01 2000 06 02 0350 05 S02 3300 10 S01 2000 07 S02 0320 06 S02 4000 10 S01 2050 05 S02 0450 04 S02 4800 06 S01 2050 06 S02 0450 05 S02 4800 07 S01 2050 07 S02 0520 04 S02 4800 08 S01 2500 04 S02 0520 05 S02 5200 04 S01 2500 05 S02 0650 06 S02 5200 05 S01 2500 06 S02 0680 04 S01 4000 12 S01 2500 07 S02 0680 05 S02 4000 12 S01 2500 08 S02 0820 04 S01 2050 10 02 0820 05 Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name S ConvScaleCur set converter DC current scaling Adjustment of DC current measuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 S ConvScaleCur 97 02 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode OA take value from TypeCode 97 01 default 1 A to 30000 A take value from S ConvScaleCur 97 02 This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in ConvNomCur 4 05 ServiceMode 99 06 has to be set back to NormalMode by the user Attention When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Int Scaling 1 1A Type I Volatile N S ConvScaleVolt set converter AC voltage scaling Adjustment of AC voltage me
93. 1 Data container 1 see group description above This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Data2 data container 2 Data container 2 see group description above This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N Data3 data container 3 Data container 3 see group description above This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Data4 data container 4 Data container 4 see group description above This data container is of is of the type retain value will only be saved when the drive is de energized Thus it will not lose its value Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Data5 data container 5 Data container 5 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data6 data container 6 Data container 6 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Data7 data container 7 Data container 7 see group description above Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Data8 data container 8 Data container 8 see group description above Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile
94. 1 0 2 0 1 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 1 9 1 0 1 0 10 1 1 0 0 12 IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 172 Count Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetical function The counter counts the rising edges of IN1 Rising edges at IN2 reset the counter IN3 limits OUT IN3 gt 0 OUT increases to the set limit IN3 lt 0 OUT increases up to the absolute maximum value 32768 When the maximum value is reached the output will be set to O and the counter starts counting from zero IN1 boolean counts rising edges IN2 boolean reset input high active IN3 16 bit integer 15 bit sign limit OUT 15 bit integer 15 bit sign shows the counted value D Pot Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetical function IN IN2 IN3 OUT IN1 increases OUT IN2 decreases OUT The absolute value of IN3 is the ramp time in ms which is needed to increase OUT from 0 to 32767 With positive IN3 the output range is limited from 0 to 32767 With negative IN3 the output range is between 32767 and 32767 If both IN1 and IN2 are true IN2 overwrites IN1 IN1 boolean ramp up IN2 boolean ramp down IN3 16 bit integer 15 bit sign ramp time scale OUT 16 bit integer 15 bit sign ramp value Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g
95. 10 V Int Scaling 1 1 mV Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAl2 conversion mode analog input 2 The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 120V 10V Uni OV to 10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto 10V 4mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N FilterAl2 filter time analog input 2 Analog input 2 filter time The hardware filter time is x 2ms Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Al3HighVal analog input 3 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in A SHighVal 13 09 Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1 mV Type l Volatile N Al3LowVal analog input 3 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in A 3LowVal 13 10 Note Al3LowVal 13 10 is only valid if ConvModeAl3 13 11 10V Bi Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1
96. 125 127 129 131 133 139 144 147 244 422 458 461 469 CommModule 109 119 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 408 452 458 472 COmpUKPLL L A 402 Constantl nei ee EE 380 Constantl0 nuege 381 ED ees 380 Constant 380 Constant4 2 2 6h Sicko SERIES 380 Constant 380 GOMSTANTG EE 380 Constant tenete ei er ue 380 Eat eessen 381 Constalhl9 nte tete re eee ires 381 ConstSpeed ssssssssssee 264 ConstSpeed2 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeseees 264 ConstSpeeds cccccccceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseees 264 ConstSpeed4 ssseseeeeeeereeerernrererresrrrnes 264 COnVGUFACL aet tette tested 63 192 ConvCurActRel eene 192 441 ConvFanAck 82 254 432 457 467 CONnVMOdeAI cce 89 265 ConvModeAI 2 eseese 266 ConvModeAl3 esee 266 ConvModeAILA eerie 267 CONVMOdEeAID uo ccc ccccccccceeececeeesseeeueeeeeeeeeees 268 ConvModeAI6 eeen 89 269 ConvModeAQO ee 93 271 ConvModeAQA2 eese eee 272 ConvModeAOXS eessee eee 272 ConvModeAQOA eeen 93 273 CONnVNOMCUTDL seeen 28 91 201 Conmhomvot 28 201 ConvOwvrOur eeeeeeeee 204 429 ConvTempbDly 228 401 429 453 Conmfvpe i iiisisietnisisisinietristaistaretststaista 28 204 CPU Load eene 207 CtriMode eeeeen eee 193 CilModeGel 328 CtrlStatMas oieee 213 ClrlStatSlg ii icto tete hee 214 C
97. 13 15 10V Bi Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAI4 conversion mode analog input 4 Analog input 4 on the SDCS CON 4 is only working with voltage The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 120V 10V Uni OV to 10V O mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto 10V 4mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N 6V Offset FilterAl4 filter time analog input 4 Analog input 4 filter time The hardware filter time is lt 2 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Reserved Reserved Al5HighVal analog input 5 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in Al5HighVal 13 21 Note To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type I Volatile N Al5LowVal analog input 5 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in AJO5LowVal 13
98. 15 bit sign error e g speed error IN2 16 bit integer 15 bit sign p part 30 0 3 100 1 IN3 16 bit integer 15 bit sign i part 250 2 5 5 000 50 OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign the range is limited from 20 000 to 20 000 Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 178 PI Bal Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetical function The PI Bal block initializes the PI block The PI Bal block must follow directly behind the PI block and can only be used together with the PI block When IN1 is true the PI Bal block writes the value of IN2 directly into OUT of the PI block When IN1 is false the PI Bal block releases OUT of the PI block Normal operation continues starting with the set output value bumpless transition IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT boolean true balance PI block false no balancing 16 bit integer 15 bits sign balance value not used affects PI block Ramp Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetical function IN1 is the input IN2 and IN3 are the times OUT increases or decreases until the input value is reached n IN3 t IN2 IN3 DCS800 FW ramp dsf IN1 16 bit integer 15 bit sign ramp input IN2 16 bit integer 15 bit sign ramp up time in ms related to 20 000 IN3 16 bit integer 15 bit sign ramp down time in ms related to 20 000 OUT 16 bit integer 15 bit sign ramp ou
99. 19 TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 KpS 24 03 TiS 24 09 TiS 24 09 KpS 24 03 TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 ProcSpeed 1 41 ProcSpeed 1 41 KpSTiSMinSpeed KpSTiSMaxSpeed KpSTiSMinSpeed KpSTiSMaxSpeed 24 17 24 18 24 17 24 18 In certain applications it is useful to increase decrease the proportional gain KpS 24 03 and decrease increase the integral time TiS 24 09 at low speeds to improve the performance of the speed control The linear increase and decrease of these parameters starts at KpSTiSMaxSpeed 24 18 and ends at KpSTiSMinSpeed 24 17 by means of KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 and TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 The speed adaptation is valid for positive and negative speeds Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 297 Signal Parameter name Q uj KpSTiSMinSpeed minimum speed for p i part speed controller LL The speed limit below which the proportional gain and the integral time are defined by KpSValMinSpeed 24 19 and TiSValMinSpeed 24 20 The used speed is ProcSpeed 1 41 32767 Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N KpSTiSMaxSpeed maximum speed for p i part speed controller w The speed limit above which the proportional gain and the integral time become constant and are defined by KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 The used speed is ProcSpeed 1 41 32767 Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29
100. 21 02 when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 On is set to low StopMode 21 03 when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run is set to low E StopMode 21 04 when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 Off3N is set to low FaultStopMode 30 30 in case of a trip level 4 fault SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 in case of a trip level 3 fault LocalLossCirl 30 27 when local control is lost ComLossCtrl 30 28 when communication is lost Ch0 ComLossCtrl 70 05 when communication is lost and Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 when communication is lost In addition dynamic braking can be forced by setting AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 5 to high At the same time UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run must be set to low AC breaker Command MainContactorOn see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 Command DynamicBrakingOn see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 8 Brake acknowledge see DynBrakeAck 10 22 DC breaker acknowledge see DC BreakAck 10 23 Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 DC breaker Brake contactor Field Braking resistors Application example of dynamic braking During dynamic braking the field current is maintained by keeping the field exciter activated It is recommended to supply external internal field exciters via a short time UPS to make sure that the field is maintained during mains failure OnBoard field exciters D1 to D4 will be supplied via the mai
101. 23 13 2 AM analog input Al1 3 Al2 analog input Al2 4 Al3 analog input AI3 5 Al4 analog input Al4 6 AIS analog input AIS 7 Al6 analog input Al6 8 FixedSpeedl FixedSpeed 1 23 02 9 FixedSpeed2 FixedSpeed 2 23 03 10 MotPot motor pot controlled by MotPotUp 11 13 MotPotDown 11 14 and MotPotMin 11 15 11 AuxRef Al1 AuxSpeedRef 23 13 minus value of Al1 12 reserved reserved 13 MinAI2Al4 minimum of Al2 and Al4 14 MaxAl2Al4 maximum of Al2 and Al4 15 Al1Direct Fast speed reference input using analog input Al1 SpeedRefExt1 2 30 is written directly onto the speed error summation Thus the speed ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero 0 or RampinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 70 1 16 Al2Direct Fast speed reference input using analog input Al2 SpeedRHefExt1 2 30 is written directly onto the speed error summation point Thus the speed ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero 0 or RampinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 70 1 17 Enc2Direct Fast speed reference input using pulse encoder 2 SpeedHefExt1 2 30 is written directly onto the speed error summation point Thus the speed ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero 0 or RampinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 70 1 18 SpeedRef2315 Fast speed reference input using DirectSpeedRef 23 15 SpeedRefExt1 2 30 is written directly onto the speed error summation point Thus the speed
102. 25 detection is fixed assigned X14 Al6 13 27 A8 Val 5 08 AleLowVal GE to Ald 3 11 and X3 12 AIO ExtModule 98 06 The motor temperature measurement is fixed 2 d RAIO 01 assigned to AI2 and AI3 X1 1 AI7 respectively AI7 and AI8 X12 X1 3 Als X14 AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 Structure of Al s Structure of AIs dsf IO configuration SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 91 Analog outputs AO s The basic I O board is the SDCS CON 4 with 3 standard AO s Two AO s are programmable the third one is fixed and used to display the actual armature current taken directly from the burden resistors All 3 standard AO s can be replaced with SDCS IOB 3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO 01 analog IO extension modules Thus the maximum number of AO s is 7 The hardware source is selected by AIO ExtModule 98 06 for AO3 and AO4 AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 for AO5 and AO6 10 BoaraConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of analog I O extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 1 RAIO 01 Output range AO1 and AC2 set by parameter 10 V O V to 10V 2 V to 10 V 5 V offset 6 V offset Output range fixed AO l act 8V equals the minimum of 325 M1NomCur 99 03 or 230 96 ConvNomCur 4 05 see also lactScaling 4 26 for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Resolution 11 bits sign Cycle time for AO1 and AO2 5ms Cyc
103. 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 2 51 09 255 Subnet mask 3 51 10 255 Subnet mask 4 51 11 0 GW adaress 1 51 12 0 e g gateway address 0 0 0 0 GW adaress 2 51 13 0 GW adaress 3 51 14 0 GW adaress 4 51 15 0 Protocol 51 16 0 0 Modbus TCP Modbus timeout 51 17 22 0 no monitoring 12100 ms 22 2200 ms Stop function 51 18 NA not applicable when using Modbus TCP Output 1 51 19 1 data word 1 setting via parameter 90 01 Output 2 51 20 2 data word 2 setting via parameter 90 02 Output 3 51 21 3 data word 3 setting via parameter 90 03 Output 4 51 22 7 data word 4 setting via parameter 90 04 Input 1 51 23 4 data word 1 setting via parameter 92 01 Input 2 51 24 5 data word 2 setting via parameter 92 02 Input 3 51 25 6 data word 3 setting via parameter 92 03 Input 4 51 26 10 data word 4 setting via parameter 92 04 FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 146 Read only or automatically detected by Ethernet adapter f all DIP switches S1 are OFF the IP address is set according to parameters 51 04 51 07 In case at least one DIP switch is on the last byte of the IP address P address 4 51 07 is set according to the DIP swi
104. 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 B1 M2FexOverCur F518 1 motor 2 field exciter overcurrent M2FldOvrCurLev 49 09 B2 M2FexCom F519 motor 2 field exciter communication loss FexTimeOut 94 07 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 M2FexNode 94 09 reserved no action FieldAck selected motor field acknowledge check fault message of or at field exciter SpeedFb selected motor speed feedback SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 ExtFanAck external fan acknowledge missing MotFanAck 10 06 MainContAck main contactor acknowledge missing MainContAck 10 21 type code mismatch TypeCode 97 01 ExternalDI external fault via binary input ExtFaultSel 30 31 ConvFanAck converter fan acknowledge missing ConvFanAck 10 20 FieldBusCom fieldbus communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 CommModule M1FexNotOK motor 1 field exciter not okay M2FexNotOK motor 2 field exciter not okay MotorStalled selected motor motor stalled Stal Time 30 01 StallSpeed 30 02 StallTorq 30 03 MotOverSpeed selected motor motor overspeed M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Int Scaling 1 1 i Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 230 Signal Parameter name FaultWord3 fault word 3 Fault word 3 Bit Fault text Fault code Comment and trip level BO 12PRevTime F533 3 12 pulse reversal timeout 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 B1 12PCurDiff F534 3 12 pulse current difference
105. 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 PowrDownTime 30 24 RR i F512 MainsLowVolt if PwrLossTrip 30 21 A111 MainsLowVolt l Immediately PowrDownTime 30 24 is exceeded F512 MainsLowVolt DCS800 FW aut recl dsf Auto reclosing Mains synchronism As soon as the main contactor is closed and the firing unit is synchronized with the incoming voltage supervising of the synchronization is activated If the synchronization fails Fb14 MainsNotSync will be generated The synchronization of the firing unit takes typically 300 ms before the current controller is ready Mains overvoltage The overvoltage level is fixed to 1 3 NomMains Volt 99 10 Exceeding this level for more than 10 s and RdyRun 1 causes F513 MainsOvrVolt Communication loss The communication to several devices is supervised The reaction to a communication loss can be chosen by means of LocalLossCtrl 30 27 or ComLossCtrl 30 28 The time out is set by the parameters listed in the table as well as all dependent fault and alarm messages Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 432 Overview local and communication loss Device Related fault Related alarm DCS800 LocalLossCtrl 30 27 fixed to 5s F546 LocalCmdLoss A130 LocalCmdLoss Control Panel DWL R type ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 F528 FieldBusCom A128 FieldBusCom fieldbus DCSLink MailBoxCycle1 94 13 F544 P2PandMFCom A112 P2PandMFCom
106. 335 ElUXG Or ennnen iessen 48 338 FluxRefEMF 0cccccceeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneess 200 FluxRefFldWeak eene 200 FluxRefSum eee 200 FluxRevMonbDJly eueses 60 342 Elv tart 75 284 467 474 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g ForceFladbDit 5 re 59 341 GearStartTorg este siae seee aeeie natae 303 ET le Kelte ET EE 303 Gear TorgTime ccccccceseeeeesteeeeeeeteeeeees 303 GW address 133 144 GW address 133 144 GW addr ss 3 cc nn 133 144 GW address A 133 144 HandAuto terat ereta riha 82 247 HW FitUDC eseeeee ee 405 HW SW option 125 127 129 131 IP address A 133 144 JactGcalmg 91 208 INGEXAO Ts orem oom oco tr ete 92 93 271 ItidexAQO2 natia cio teni 271 lndexAOS 4 224 454 44408880 e 24 en 272 INDEXAO4 EE 92 93 272 Inip t T eee oot 133 144 alle 133 144 ale L t WEE 133 144 nl Le 133 144 Input UO par 9 125 127 129 131 Input instance 125 127 129 131 IO BoardContfig 81 84 87 91 414 452 IP address 133 144 IP address 2 133 144 IP address 3 133 144 D Lie NEE 82 253 JOQ2 i ssts esenee eene 82 254 d Leien 289 JOGDECTIME 00 eee ee eeeeeettee eet eeeetteeeeeee eet 289 KDEME tet sit 33 45 334 KDPID ases 319 KDPEI seeded ei
107. 360 for the high words PosCountHigh 3 08 PosCount2High 3 05 PosCountlnitHi 50 09 and PosCount2InitHi 50 22 is valid always 0 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 364 Signal Parameter name Forward direction Reverse direction PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges High word 65535 edges PosCountMode 50 07 Scaled High word 360 PosCountMode 50 07 Rollover High word 0 High word 0 The position counter is controlled by SyncCommand 10 04 SyncCommand2 10 05 and AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bits 9 to 11 The status can be seen from AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 SyncRdy The position control function has to be implemented by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Int Scaling 1221 Type C Volatile N PosCountlnitLo Position counter encoder 1 low initial value Position counter initial low word for pulse encoder 1 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 1 pulse edge Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 Rollover 0 and 65536 360 See also SyncCommand 10 04 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name PosCountlnitHi Position counter encoder 1 high initial value Position counter initial high word for pulse encoder 1 Unit depends on setting of PosCountM
108. 4 the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and 5 A111 MainsLowVolt is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt is generated If the mains voltage returns before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed and the overriding control keeps the commands On MCW bit 0 and Run MCW bit 3 1 the drive will start again after 2 seconds Otherwise the drive trips with F512 MainsLowVolt When the mains voltage drops below UNetMin2 30 23 the action is selected by means of PwrLossTrip 30 21 1 the drive is immediately tripped with F512 MainsLowVolt or 2 the drive starts up automatically see description for UNetMin1 30 22 Below UNetMin2 30 23 the field acknowledge signals are ignored and blocked Note UNetMin2 30 23 isn t monitored unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin 1 30 22 Thus for proper operation UNetMin1 30 22 must be larger than UNetMin2 30 23 Note If no UPS is available set PwrLossTrip 30 21 to Immediately Thus the drive will trip with F512 MainsLowVolt avoiding secondary phenomena due to missing power for Al s and Die Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 431 Drive behavior during auto reclosing 4 hold speed controller integrator Speed ramp follows speed actual AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 15 AutoReclosing EE MainsVoltActRel 1 11 UNetMin1
109. 4 missing see group 98 RDIO xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98 RTAC xx in option slot on SDCS CON 4 missing see group 98 RTAC xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98 reserved SDCS IOB 2x respectively SDCS IOB 3 connection does not match selection in JO BoardConfig 98 15 SDCS DSL 4 missing see group 94 needed for DCSLink SDCS DSL 4 missing see group 52 needed for Modbus A134 ParComp alarm parameter compatibility conflict 10000 19999 the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits ParNoCyc notice parameter not cyclic 20000 29999 the not cyclic parameter which is being written to by means of a pointer parameter e g DsetXVal1 90 01 can be identified by means of the last 4 digits F548 FwFailure fault firmware failure 20000 29999 the read only parameter which is being written to by means of a pointer parameter e g DsetXVal1 90 01 Adaptive Program or application program can be identified by means of the last 4 digits def nit E C Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Thyristor diagnosis 30000 possibly trigger pulse channels are mixed up 31xdd V1 or V11 not conducting 32xdd V2 or V12 not conducting 33xdd V3 or V13 not conducting 34xdd V4 or V14 not conducting 35xdd V5 or V15 not conducting 36xdd V6 or V16 not conducting x 0 only
110. 459 o KEE 241 WEI EEN 242 AccCompDerTime ssssesseseeserseerrreerrene 296 AcctCGompbitT me 296 AccTImel RE 286 AcGTIIme2 eheu 288 AdapPrg Stat erre 377 AdapProgCmd 157 375 473 477 e UR 402 Le TR LEE 405 AhGounter uie eee 194 Al Mon4mA e 312 433 462 472 Al Val 209 AlHighVa l niece 89 265 Al Lowyal EEA ET 89 265 AI2 Mal e t oer EE 209 Al2FHighVal RR 265 AI2EOWMAl eto tenses etta cire e 266 AIS e 209 AlSEligh Val editiones 266 AISEOWMal 2 5 rre 266 Ala Valcsaz sooo a tte t 209 Al4High Val ee EEN 267 AIME OWVal amc meine tace hector dcr 267 Alb Malt ice ete teer eek bere uds 209 Al5HighVal eeeseeeennnnne 267 AlbLbowVal n ENEE ENER NEEN RENE iie 267 IGN alee ties eee ee eae e 209 Al6HighVal eeeeeeeenneeeenee 89 268 AG ewe 89 269 AIO ExtModule 87 91 411 452 AIO MotTempMeas 87 91 413 452 AlTachoVal 209 AlarmWordl 99 104 233 445 AlarmworQqe oseo 139 141 AlarmwWord innpnonanonnnnnunn 234 445 AlarmWord3 sssssesssseeerererrrrrerrrrrerrrnn 235 445 AnybusModType ssseeeeeee 385 AO Val 209 ee se 209 ApplicName n e 201 APPIN EE 204 ApplEOoadl eode dett Peine 207 ApplMacrg nn 30 417 427 ApplRestore ee 30 416 Lite ien RE 199 ArmAlphaMAax AAA 280 ArmAlphaMin eee
111. 9 bits 15 0 101 099 91991991 1 0 o o O 1 0 O 1 1 0 O O ofo 0 0 0 0 gt OUT IN 4 IN2 OUT IN3 IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer packed boolean OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 171 Bset Type Logical function Illustration Operation With Bset it is possible to set the value of a certain bit in a word Connect the word to be processed at IN1 Define the number of the bit to be changed at IN2 Define the desired bit value at IN3 1 for true and O for false OUT is the result of the operation Connections IN1 16 bit integer packed boolean word to be processed e g MainCtrlWord 7 01 IN2 0 15 bit to be changed IN3 boolean desired bit value OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean result Compare Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation Output bits 0 1 and 2 bits 4 15 are not used Connections e If IN1 gt IN2 gt OUT 001 OUT bit 0 is true e if IN1 IN2 OUT 010 OUT bit 1 is true and e ifIN1 IN2 OUT 100 OUT bit 2 is true Output bit 3 If IN1 gt IN2 OUT 1ddd OUT bit 3 is true and remains true until IN1 IN2 IN3 after which bit 3 is false gt 2 bit3 Output bit 4 15 not used OUT integer value which is shown on display is the sum of the bits bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 OUT value on display 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
112. ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 operation mode depends on TorqSel 26 01 default 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 only available with digital extension board 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 only available with digital extension board 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 only available with digital extension board 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 0 speed control 1 depends on TorgMuxMode 26 04 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 0 speed control 1 depends on TorqMuxMode 26 04
113. AI3 on SDCS IOB 3 6 6PT100 Al2 3 six PT100 3 connected to AI2 and 3 connected to AI3 on SDCS IOB 3 7 1PT100 AI7 one PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO 8 2PT100 AI7 two PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO 9 3PT100 AI7 three PT100 connected to AI7 on second RAIO 10 4PT100 AI7 8 four PT100 3 connected to AI7 and 1 connected to AI8 on second RAIO 11 5PT100 AI7 8 five PT100 3 connected to AI7 and 2 connected to AI8 on second RAIO 12 6PT100 AI7 8 six PT100 3 connected to AI7 and 3 connected to AI8 on second RAIO 13 1PTC AI2 one PTC connected to AI2 on SDCS IOB 3 14 2PTC Al2 3 two PTC 1 connected to Al2 and 1 connected to AI8 on SDCS IOB 3 15 1PTC Al2 Con one PTC connected to Al2 on SDCS CON 4 For more information see section Motor protection Note Al7 and Al8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule 98 06 Note In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI of the SDCS IOB 3 the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10 Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see DCS800 Hardware Manual Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M1AlarmLimTemp motor 1 alarm limit temperature The drive sets A106 M1OverTemp AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 5 if M1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot TempMeas 1 22 Note The unit depends on M1TempSel 31 05 Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q 1 Type SI Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed C M1FaultLimTemp motor 1
114. Action Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 142 MemCardMiss Memory Card missing directly after There is an application loaded in the drive The energizing of Memory Card belonging to the application is not found electronics Check if the Memory Card is properly plugged into the SDCS CON 4 X20 de energize the electronics insert the proper Memory Card and reenergize ParApplSave 16 06 in case there is no Memory Card used set ParApplSave 16 06 DisableAppl 143 MemCardFail Memory Card failure directly after Checksum failure or wrong Memory Card bit 10 energizing of Check electronics Memory Card IT proper ABB Memory Card is used ParApplSave 16 06 2xx alarm name Disappearing system alarm 301 APAlarm1 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9 08 always bit 11 302 APAlarm2 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9 08 always 303 APAlarm3 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 304 APAlarm4 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 305 APAlarm5 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 310 UserAlarm1 User defined fault by application program 311 UserAlarm1 User defined fault by application program 312 UserAlarm2 User defined fault by application program 313 UserAlarm3 User defined fault by application program 314 UserAlarm4 User defined fault by application program 315 UserAlarm5 User defined fault by application program Se l D D 3
115. Analog input AI1 Analog input Al2 ON ON 0 4 20 mA 0 2 10V n III 0 2V 123456 123456 Default NotUsed min AIMA 413 unit E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 414 Signal Parameter name set the number of connected PT100 per channel DIP switch settings Input signal type Analog input AI1 2 or 3 PT100 QN ON set the voltage DI Iri signal to I I OS MU 12345 123456 1 PT100 GN ON set the voltage LH I TE signal to dH HB eet 123456 123456 Int Scaling 1 Volatile N 98 15 10 BoardConfig I O board configuration IO BoaraConfig 98 15 selects the optional interface boards SDCS IOB 2 and or SDCS IOB 3 for the standard UO of the SDCS CON 4 0 NotUsed no optional interface boards connected default 12 SDCS IOB 2 only SDCS IOB 2 connected 98 NotUsed HS VS NotUsed 2 SDCS IOB 3 only SDCS IOB 3 connected 3 1OB 2 IOB 3 SDCS IOB 2 and SDCS IOB 3 connected The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the IO board configuration is not met e g one or two boards are physically connected but not selected by O BoardConfig 98 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N 16 Unused Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 415 Signal Parameter name dxutzo E g O S D S o Start up data e o 99 01 Language language cl
116. ArmCurDev A114 A214 MechBrake A122 A222 ArmCurRipple A117 A217 MemCardFail A143 A243 AutotuneFail A121 A221 MemCardMiss A142 A242 BrakeLongFalling A116 A216 NoAPTaskTime A136 A236 COM8Com A113 A213 Off2FieldBus A138 A238 COM8FwVer A141 A241 Off2ViaDI A101 A201 ConvOverTemp A104 A204 Off3FieldBus A139 A239 Off3ViaDI A102 A202 DC BreakAck A103 A203 OverVoltProt A120 A220 DynBrakeAck A105 A205 P2PandMFCom A112 A212 ExternalDl A126 A226 ParAdded A131 A231 ParComp A134 A234 FaultSuppres A123 A223 ParConflict A132 A232 FieldBusCom A128 A228 ParRestored A129 A229 FoundNewAppl A118 A218 ParUpDwnLoad A135 A235 IllgFieldBus A140 A240 RetainInv A133 A233 LocalCmdLoss A130 A230 SpeedFb A125 A225 SpeedNotZero A137 A237 M1OverLoad A107 A207 SpeedScale A124 A224 M1OverTemp A106 A206 M2OverLoad A110 A210 TachoRange A115 A215 Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 101 Off2ViaDI 467 Definition Action Alarmlevel Off2 Emergency Off Coast stop pending via RdyRun 1 digital input start inhibition i There is no problem with the drive itself Check Off2 10 08 if necessary invert the signal group 10 102 Off8ViaDI 103 DC BreakAck 104 ConvOverTemp 105 DynBrakeAck Off3 E stop pending via digital input RdyRun 1 There is no problem with the drive itself Check E Stop 10 09 if necessary invert
117. B2 ParUpDwnLoad A135 The checksum verification failed during up or download of parameters Please try again NoAPTaskTime Adaptive Program task for not set in TimeLevSel SpeedNotZero Re start of drive is not possible Speed zero see M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 or M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 has not been reached only in case FlyStart 21 10 StartFrom0O In case of a trip set On Run 0 to reset the alarm Off2FieldBus Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop pending via fieldbus Off2 10 08 Off3FieldBus Off3 E stop pending via fieldbus E Stop 10 09 IllgFieldBus the fieldbus parameters in group 51 fieldbus are not set according to the fieldbus adapter or the device has not been selected COMS8FwVer invalid combination of SDCS CON 4 firmware and SDCS COM 8 firmware MemCardMiss 1 Memory Card missing MemCardFail checksum failure or wrong Memory Card APAlarm1 Adaptive Program alarm 1 APAlarm2 Adaptive Program alarm 2 APAlarm3 Adaptive Program alarm 3 APAlarm4 Adaptive Program alarm 4 APAlarm5 Adaptive Program alarm 5 Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 236 Signal Parameter name UserAlarmWord user defined alarm word 1 User defined alarm word All names are defined by the user via application program Bit BO B1 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Int Scaling 1 Alarm code and alarm level UserAlarm1 A310 UserAlarm2 A311 User
118. Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17 ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 20 ACW Bit15 Int Scaling 1 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 1 default Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 1 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 Reset by rising edge 0 1 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 1 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 Reset by rising edge 0 1 Reset by rising edge 0 1 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Type C Volatile N MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 SyncCommand synchronization command for position counter encoder 1 Activation of synchronization for pulse encoder 1 and setting of the binary input signal At the synchronization event AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 SyncCommand the position counter is initialized with following values PosCountlnitLo 5
119. DCS800 Panel EUM LJ UO extension 2 x2 as 7 8 H2500 S egen Ze 5 1 X37 SDCS PIN 4 SDCS POW 4 Si p 6 X10 F100 F101 F102 A S 8 X13 SDCS PIN 4 SDCS PIN 51 S d Xu xm ud X11 Slot 31 FEE Hm SDCS COM 8 or X10 Slot 2 Relay Aux JO extension MO extension c1 DOS supply EE HHHH u1 v1 Wi Di X12 SDCS PIN 4 SDCS PIN 51 LI 9 s Ze X20 Slot 4 Memory card T 4 SDCS DSL 4 Jumpers shown in default position X34 X8 SDCS DSL 4 6 24V DCS Link zx DriveWindow Ligne DER En x X51l X52 X58 CDP DW2 M F I O Control gt gt mr OIL 312 too bal amp o 2 0282 698 858 SDCS CON 4 TERMINAL ALLOCATION X3 Tacho and Al X4 Al and AO X5 Encoder X6 DI X7 DO DCS800 terminal alloc a dsf 2345 678 81012345 678 910112325 678 91112325 6789111234 5 7 8 ZZZZzZ2 dd b5si amp zZZ225892 II DANNGOLSL eK AMT HOKE LATS HANSIMOKS 8355222222 2290959035 171 1 7 884 BB8B888855 BERBEERS S8 8 25 o Q So e Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 485 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters Index of signals and parameters alphabetic order 12P Oe e nuin 347 12P RevTimeOwut eene 348 459 12P SlaNode ees 107 393 459 12P TimeOut 107 393
120. DITOlrivert iis eet eese 256 DITAIDNVOTT idonee 82 256 Di lnvert iann 82 255 RI ideis 255 DISInVerti estie store poeta oae ite Ebrei eoi 255 BI Hie iio nce nce aee cite i ites 255 BDI5IBVert EE 255 Dl6lInvert sseeeseennn 255 DIZInWert siiis renta Penne k eniin 255 DISIAVErti cited Savas 256 RI UE 256 Diagnosis 31 237 452 461 473 BIS DIR II 348 459 DiffC FL n oce rere pestes 347 459 DIO ExtModulel1 81 84 409 452 DIO ExtModulee2 81 84 410 452 Direction irre n 82 244 DirectSpeedRe sssssssssuss 293 DispParam1 Sel ssse 317 422 DispParam2Sel ssssse 318 422 Disepbaram Gel 318 422 DO CtrlWord een 85 221 DO StatWord aeee 85 226 DOTBItNO iiie irren 269 DO 1Index seeemmH 85 269 Elei ME 269 DO2Index niteretur ut 269 Bleid 5 2 tette 270 DOSINGOX cnet rec 270 DOABItNoO sese 270 DOAlnden ee eeeeceecececeeeeeeteeeeeteteeeeseeneeeeees 270 DObPNo tahiai 270 DOblnden 270 DOGBItNO 2 tete tete tette tenes 270 DOGINGOX erret tette 270 BLOA TIN O 5er etre tiere reta 270 DO7lndex iiie 270 DO8BINO DEE 270 DOa8Index eeee 85 270 DP MOde oerte en terree 147 DrveliDMOrs ataca teeth ties 204 DriveStat ooo 55 226 DroopHhalte 6ea tatit 294 DsetXplus10Val1 eee 387 DsetXplus10Val2 A 38
121. E S E eas MONA an wa 8101 zBor ma wron Lor sw g due peeds I pied sw c uojoejes eouereje1 peeds oN HV OS 0 JOYLNOOD Q33dS NIVHO 3ON3333 Q33dS Appendix A Firmware structure diagram SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 480 Dap T aox uezbeTp exnionzjs M4 008590 Bulsopeyoiny gg BeNuonoerqeAua vig uue vaoineJ Lg paeds Ja ug peedsgoiez Lg penesal gig penesal pug panesal ug penso zig penesal Lug pwo du ee 20 GL pwo du Jegeag 20 ppU jueuno oJaz E uano snonuguoo zi sasind Bury puigejouieu 04g zBuryou eg Luut og yesey ug ojezu duie gig SO OU esey ouuo xne og 7 LL puigejouied Ong cButuou eg L upu eg yesey A9 ojezujdurey og moaidiesey Sum penese pg wenbioesey c Lig ye1g 0104 Zi O oxdbio HIG Jonuoo xne s Lig lonuoo xne v Lig lonuoo xne Lig lonuoo xne z Lig Apyou s s y Lg
122. E ceo be og eg eg Eech eg bech eebe tag tuchlach tech tides SDCS COM 8 messages ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeene nennen enne nnne Alam signals A TEEN Disappearing system alarm sssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeee ennemis User defined alarm by Adaptive Program Notices Appendix A Firmware structure diagrams Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation Appendix C Index of signals and parameters Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 21 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Chapters not yet available 22 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 23 Introduction Chapter overview This chapter describes the purpose contents and the intended use of this manual Before You Start The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the information necessary to control and program the drive Study carefully the Safety instructions at the beginning of this manual before attempting any work on or with the drive Read through this manual before starting up the drive The installation and commissioning instructions given in the DCS800 Hardware Manual and DCS800 Quick Guide must also be read before proceeding This manual describes the standard DCS800 firmware What this manual contains The Safety instructions can be found at the beginning of this manual Introduction to this manual the chapter you are currently reading introduces you to this manual
123. EE 382 Block COut een 382 BlockzOQOut nauim 382 Block Out 382 Block9Out eee 382 Brake GiopMode sssneeeeeeeeererreerereeren 326 BrakeFaultFunc 325 462 470 471 Br AkPOINt rrr e a 377 Bridge emp 193 429 ChO BaudRate eee 109 370 ChO0 ComLossCtrl 75 109 371 461 469 Ch0 DriveBusS scce 461 469 ChO DriveBus em 109 375 ChO DsetBaseAddr eese 374 CHO DsetBaseAddr ses 109 ChO HW Config sssssesss 109 CHO HW Config cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 371 ChO LinkControl eese 109 370 Ch ONode Addr eee 109 370 ChO TimeOut 109 371 461 469 Ch1 LinkControl eee 372 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 75 115 373 461 469 Ch2 FolSig KEE 113 373 CRh2 Fol9l02 set eto 113 373 Ch2 F0lSig3 see ences 113 374 Ch2 LinkControl ee 372 Ch3MatoMode 112 372 Ch2 M sSigl inem 112 372 Ch2 Mastig eneen 112 372 Ch3Mastig 112 372 Ch Node ddr 372 Ch2 TimeOut 115 373 461 469 Ch3 HW Config ssssssss 116 374 Ch3 LinkControl eee 374 Ch hNodeAddr 30 116 374 Com8SwVersion 52 118 203 474 ComLossCtrl 75 99 104 312 431 458 461 469 472 Comm raie 133 144 CommandSel 53 64 66 100 109 113 119 122
124. ENEE EE Fault MOCES 00 0 cece eee eeeeceeee cece eee eeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaaeeeeees Convener Protection iv vee dedere ieee Auxiliary undervoltage A Armature OovercuUrrent nnns Converter overtemperature cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeesenaeees Auto reclosing mains undenvohtage Mains SYNCHRONISM cece eaaa ra aAa eaaa Ea Sna TERURE E ENTES Mains overvoltage ssesssseeeeennennennnnnn Communication Joss Fan field and mains contactor acknowledge External fault der ee Bridge ever Analog input monitor Motor protection ENEE Armature overvoltage cccccceeecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeetecnnaaeeeeees Residual current detection Measured motor Temperature ln D Motor thermal model SE Bee le EE Armature current pple ecccceceeeeeeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeteccaaeeeeees Speed feedback monttor Stall protechon nennen Overspeed protectlon rene entm nene pane epe ee C rrent FHS6 cette ide de ere ee Field undercurrent ecceeeeeeee eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeaaaeeeeeeeeeteeaaaes Tacho pulse encoder polarity sesesssesssssss BE Lernen e E e n Le GE Display of status fault and alarm signals cceseeeeeeeeeees SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Table of contents 20 Categories of signals and display options sssessssresesrneerirneerrrresrrneee General messages Power up errors E Fault signals
125. EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Status information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC indicates that the drive control is local from the DCS800 Control Panel REM indicates that the drive control is remote via local I O or overriding control indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows DCS800 Control Panel display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or A Drive is running and at setpoint ees Shaft direction is forward p or reverse y Rotating dotted blinking arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present but motor is not running E g start enable is missing Upper right position shows the active reference when in local from DCS800 Control Panel Middle Using parameter Group 34 the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display up to three parameter values By default the display shows three signals Use DispParam1Sel 34 01 DispParam2Sel 34 08 and DispParam3Sel 34 15 to select signals or parameters to display Entering value O results in no value displayed For example if 34 01 0 and 34 15 0 then only the signal or parameter specified by 34 08 appears on the DCS800 Control Panel display Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two
126. ExtModule 98 06 0 first RAIO xx not existing or faulty B1 second RAIO xx detected see AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 second RAIO xx not existing or faulty B2 RRIA xx detected RRIA xx not existing or faulty RTAC xx detected RTAC xx not existing or faulty first RDIO xx detected see DIO ExtModule1 98 03 first RDIO xx not existing or faulty second RDIO xx detected see DIO ExtModule2 98 04 second RDIO xx not existing or faulty SDCS DSL 4 detected see DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 SDCS DSL 4 not existing or faulty SDCS IOB 2x detected see JO BoardConfig 98 15 SDCS IOB 2x not existing or faulty SDCS IOB 3 detected see O BoaraConfig 98 15 SDCS IOB 3 not existing or faulty SDCS COM 8 detected see CommModule 98 02 and group 70 SDCS COM 8 not existing or faulty RMBA xx Modbus detected see CommModule 98 02 and ModBusModule2 98 08 RMBA xx Modbus not existing or faulty B15 SDCS MEM 8 Memory Card detected SDCS MEM 8 Memory Card not existing or faulty Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile Y CPU Load load of processor The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts A CPU Load 4 21 shows the load of the firmware and AppiLoad 4 22 shows the load of the application Neither should reach 100 Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile Y ApplLoad load of application The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts CPU Load 4 21 shows the load of the firmware and AppiLoad
127. FixedSpeed1 the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 and sets A127 AlRange AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 10 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name FaultStopMode fault stop mode FaultStopMode 30 30 determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 4 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and a trip of level 4 is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and a trip of level 4 is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the a
128. Hardware Manual Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 27 Drive data Check following items for each drive and mark the differences in the delivery documents motor analog tacho or pulse encoder and cooling fan rating plates data direction of motor rotation maximum and minimum speed and if fixed speeds are used Speed scaling factors e g gear ratio roll diameter acceleration and deceleration times Operating modes e g stop mode E stop mode the amount of motors connected Checking with the power switched on There is dangerous voltage inside the cabinet A Switching the power on prior to connecting the voltage proceed as follows 1 ensure that all the cable connections are checked and that the connections can t cause any danger 2 close all doors of enclosed converter before switching power on 3 be ready to trip the supply transformer if anything abnormal occurs 4 switch the power on Measurements made with power on Check the operation of the auxiliary equipment check the circuits for external interfaces on site 1 E stop circuit 2 remote control of the main breaker 3 signals connected to the control system 4 other signals which remain to be checked connecting voltage to the drive check from the delivery diagrams the type of boards and converters which are used in the system Check all time relay and breaker settings close the supply
129. M1TachoMaxSpeed 88 25 the needed tacho connection is calculated automatically and shown in TachoTerminal 4 25 Manual tuning B 04 25 TachoTerminal X3 1 90 270V Analog tacho inputs SDCS CON 4 90V to 270V wel 30V to 90V 8 930 x3 2 8V to 30V 34369 x3 3 AITAC Oix3 4 Analog tacho connections check the tacho connections and change them accordingly set M1TachoTune 88 27 1 000 default make sure that the drive is in EMF control M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 EMF give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference measure speed actual at the motor shaft using a hand held tacho rescale M1TachoTune 88 27 in small steps e g 0 005 until the speed actual measured at the shaft and the speed actual measured with the analog tacho match see SpeedActTach 1 05 remove On and Run via DriveWindow Speed controller When tuning the drive change one parameter at a time then monitor the effect on the step response and possible oscillations The effect of each parameter change must be checked over a wide speed range and not just at one point The set speed controller values mainly depend on the relationship between the motor power and the attached masses backlashes and natural frequencies of the attached mechanics filtering Basics The step response tests must be carried out at different speeds from minimum up to maximum speed at sever
130. MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 Lk TZP TimeOut 94 03 F535 12PulseCom FexTimeOut 94 07 F516 M1FexCom F519 M2FexCom SDCS COM 8 Ch0 ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 F543 COM8Com A113 COM8Com Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 Overview local and communication loss Fan field and mains contactor acknowledge When the drive is switched On MCW bit O the firmware closes the fan contactor and waits for acknowledge After it is received the field contactor is closed respectively the field converter is started and the firmware waits for the field acknowledge Finally the main contactor is closed and its acknowledge is waited for If the acknowledges are not received during 10 seconds after the On command MCW bit 0 is given the corresponding fault is generated These are 1 F521 FieldAck see Mot1FexStatus 6 12 2 F523 ExtFanAck see MotFanAck 10 06 3 F524 MainContAck see MainContAck 10 21 4 F527 ConvFanAck see ConvFanAck 10 20 Note F521 FieldAck is the sum fault for all field related faults like F515 M1FexOverCur see M1FlaOvrCurLev 30 13 F516 M1FexCom see FexTimeOut 94 07 F529 M1FexNotOK fault during self diagnosis F537 MiFexRdyLost AC voltage is missing or not in synchronism F541 M1FexLowCur see M1FidMinTrip 30 12 oc RON External fault The user has the possibility to connect external faults to the drive The source can
131. MainCtrlWord The drive has to be in state RdyRun RdyRef is still zero RampOutZero RampHold and RampinZero have to be set to zero see MainCtrlWord 7 01 When Jog1 command is given the drive goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeed1 23 02 alternatively Inching1 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 can be used Note Acceleration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime 22 13 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N ACW Bit15 253 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Jog2 jogging 2 command Binary signal for Jog2 Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed2 23 03 Selection see Jog 10 17 NotUsed NotUsed Jog2 10 18 overrides Jog1 10 17 CommandSel 10 01 Local I O The drive has to be in state RdyRun RdyRetf is still zero When Jog2 command is given the drives sets automatically RampOutZero RampHold RamplnZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 and goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeed2 23 03 CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlIWord The drive has to be in state RdyRun RdyRetf is still zero RampOutZero RampHold and RampinZero have to be set to zero see MainCtrlWord 7 01 When Jog2 command is given the drive goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeed2 23 03 alternatively Inching2 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 can be
132. Manual e g 157 DWL AP General Another way to create applications is with DWL AP It is a program plugged into DriveWindow Light and can be opened with Tools and DriveAP for DCS800 Drive Window Light 2 Parameter Browser DCS800 File View Options Drive Tools Communication Window Help cm CLA CoDeSys Application Download Online Offline Refresh DriveAP l or DC5800 n slalo 1 omms Important keys and buttons DWL AP is controlled by means of following keys and buttons Keys and buttons Function Ctrl left mouse button on a box Change insert function blocks connect or function block in and outputs in Edit mode Shift left mouse button on the View actual values in Start mode red cross Cancel Abort the action Help Open the online help Program modes There are 5 modes for the Adaptive Program see AdapProgCmd 83 01 e Stop the Adaptive Program is not running and cannot be edited Start the Adaptive Program is running and cannot be edited Edit the Adaptive Program is not running and can be edited SingleCycle and SingleStep are used for testing Change to Edit mode Use Ctrl left mouse button on 83 01 Adaptive Program Control 83 01 Adaptive prog Sto 83 02 EditCmd and set to Edit Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 158 83 01 Adaptive program command Fee SS 2 E dit SingleCycle N SingleStep Inse
133. O no fault AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 ault O no fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N a a ault O no fault AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 a a ACW Bit15 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ExtAlarmSel external alarm selector The drive sets A126 ExternalDI AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 9 if a binary input for an external alarm is selected and 1 0 NotUsed no reaction default 12 DH 1 fault O no fault 2 DI2 1 fault O no fault 3 DIS 1 fault O no fault 4 DIA 1 fault O no fault 5 DI5 1 fault O no fault 6 DI6 1 fault O no fault 7 DI7 1 fault O no fault 8 DI8 1 fault O no fault 9 DI9 1 fault O no fault Only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 fault 0 no fault Only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 fault 0 no fault Only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 fault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 fault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 fault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 fault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 fault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 fault 0 no fault AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 fault O no fault AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit1
134. Please note that the DCS800 works only with the ABB Drives profile Parameter setting example 1 using PPO Type 1 ABB Drives profile Vendor specific with PPO Type 1 DP VO see page 25 The first two data words PZD1 OUT PZD2 OUT from the overriding control to the drive are fixed connected as control word and speed reference at the Profibus side and cannot be changed The first two data words PZD1 IN PZD2 IN from the drive to the overriding control are fixed connected as status word and speed actual at the Profibus side and cannot be changed Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 PZD1 OUT control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 148 DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 PZD2 OUT speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 PZD1 IN status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 PZD2 IN speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 PROFIBUS DP Node address 51 02 4 set node address as required Baud rate 51 03 1500 PPO type 51 04 PPO1
135. SLAM tHe GIVE eege deeg E ee ee eer 54 STOP de nS 55 Field excitatlOr icis hr errorae daria sagaci asa dara daga ava aga Va a aga ara ga a ara asa ara asa ara a a dade Teva sanat 58 ENEE 58 Field Reversal iseinean nnn ran EAn r NAANA EA NA AA ANNA EANNA ANENE NERES 58 Field kee 0 MERE E E 58 Field reference hysteresis sssssssssssssseeeenenneennen nnn 59 Force field current direchon NEEN 59 nidum e 59 Bumpless trarislllon recentem e dicecsvsdvessteedsvecsesdeescstedenassteeh 59 Lee UE 59 Field current reference gain ssesssssssseeeeenennnnnnnnn 59 Field current monttortng enne nennen nnne nnn nennen 60 Field miniraurmririp d uos or e ed ate red 60 Fuxrevorsal EE 60 Field reversal bwvesteresle AEN 60 SLEG 60 Field Heating ESSERE Aa 60 OVSrVIOW eebe eti hof ti ois dio cis Mio cis Moo eei 60 Modes of operatton EEN 61 E E a a E E A E ET 62 Field exciter qe o o ERROR 63 Generalss25 5 EE 63 Large field exciter controlled by a DCS800 armature Converter 63 Parameters to be set in the DCS800 armature converter 64 Parameters to be set in large field exciters A 64 Field current autotuning for large field exciters sssssssssssss 65 Stand Alone MEI e TEE 66 Parameters to be set in the stand alone field exciter 66 Field current autotuning for stand alone field exvciter c
136. SpeedLev 50 10 then parameter set 2 is active 3 DI1 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 4 DI2 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 5 DI3 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 6 DIA 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 DIR 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 8 DI6 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 9 DI7 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 10 DI8 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 11 DI9 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 12 D10 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 13 DI1 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 14 MCW Bit11 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 15 MCW Bit12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 16 MCW Bit13 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 17 MCW Bit14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 18 MCW Bit15 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01
137. V HI HHI GH 123456 123456 Default Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Input signal type selection Each input can be used with a current or voltage signal Input signal DIP switch settings type Analogue input 1 Analogue input 2 Current signal 0 4 20 mA al H Default 123456 123456 ON ON Volt ignal A co ov EEL illli 123456 123456 Voltage signal 0 2 V 123456 123456 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Unused ModBusModule2 Modbus module 2 The Modbus module RMBA xx can be connected in option slot 1 2 or 3 see also CommModule 98 02 0 NotUsed no RMBA xx is used default 1 Slot1 RMBA xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 RMBA xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 RMBA xx is connected in option slot 3 4 DSL reserved Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Unused Unused L Netsed Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 98 12 Signal Parameter name AIO MotTempMeas analog extension module for motor temperature measurement Second RAIO xx extension module interface selection AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 releases AIT AI8 AO5 and AO6 The analog in and outputs are only used for motor temperature measurement see M1TempSel 31 05 and M2TempSel 49 33 The module can be connected in op
138. a det The reversal delay starts when zero current has been detected see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 13 after a command to change current direction see CurRefUsed 3 12 has been given After a command to change the current direction the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 RevDly 43 14 must have the same setting for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave with one exception only fthere is no current measurement in the 12 pulse serial slave set RevDly 43 14 in the 12 pulse serial slave to minimum 0 ms Thus the 12 pulse serial slave uses the reversal command of the 12 pulse master for its own bridge changeover see CtriStatMas 6 09 bit 12 No additional reversal delay is added since the master delays bit 12 according to its own RevDly 43 14 Note 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 and ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must be longer than RevDly 43 14 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type Volatile N RevMode reversal mode RevMode 43 16 defines the behavior of the speed ramp and speed controller during bridge and field reversal torque reversal the speed ramp and speed controller are frozen during reversal gt bumpless reversal the speed ramp and speed controller are released during reversal gt the drive follows the ramp default RevMode 43 16 is automatically set to Hard wh
139. a single thyristor in bridge 1 is not conducting e g 320dd means V2 respectively V12 is not conducting x 1 6 additionally a second thyristor in bridge 1 is no conducting e g 325dd means V2 and V5 respectively V12 and V15 are not conducting dd don t care the numbers of this digits do not carry any information about the thyristors of the first bridge Example 36030 means V16 in bridge 1 and V23 in bridge 2 are not conducting 3ddiy V21 not conducting 3dd2y V22 not conducting 3dd3y V23 not conducting 3dd4y V24 not conducting 3dd5y V25 not conducting 3dd6y V26 not conducting y 0 only a single thyristor in bridge 2 is not conducting e g 3dd20 means V22 is not conducting y 21 6 additionally a second thyristor in bridge 2 is no conducting e g 3dd25 means V22 and V25 are not conducting dd don t care the numbers of this digits do not carry any information about the thyristors of the second bridge Example 96030 means V16 in bridge 1 and V23 in bridge 2 are not conducting A124 SpeedScale alarm speed scaling 40000 49999 the parameter with the speed scaling conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits F549 ParComp fault parameter compatibility conflict 50000 59999 the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits F545 ApplLoadFail ControlBuilder DCS800 application programming 64110 task not configured 64112 attempt to ru
140. aa uo Select language E 0 English default amp 9 fe 1 English AM not implemented yet 2 Deutsch 3 Italiano 4 Espa ol 5 Portugu s not implemented yet 6 Nederlands not implemented yet 7 Fran ais 8 Dansk not implemented yet 9 Suomi not implemented yet 10 Svenska not implemented yet 11 Po Russki not implemented yet 12 Polski 13 Turkish not implemented yet 14 Cesky not implemented yet Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N M1NomVolt motor 1 nominal DC voltage o cl gt l o Motor 1 nominal armature voltage DC from the motor rating plate 9 Note In 12 pulse serial mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 96 of the rated motor voltage if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in series are connected it is 100 96 of one motor s rated voltage Int Scaling 1 1V Type I Volatile N M1NomcCur motor 1 nominal DC current oo ao Motor 1 nominal armature current DC from the motor rating plate If several motors are S connected to the drive enter the total current of all motors amp Note In 12 pulse parallel mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 of the rated motor current if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in parallel are connected it is 100 96 of one motor s rated current Note In case the converter is used as a 3 phase field exciter use M1Nom
141. bit 3 MTEFGRGERON 42 11 Brake open lift command AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 Torque proving Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 F556 TorqProv MotCur 1 06 Adaptive Program M1TorgProvTime 42 10 Brake application program logic FaultWord4 9 04 bit 7 or overriding control TorgProvOK AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 11 BalRef 24 11 or TorqSel 26 01 BalSpeedCtrl AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 8 or TorqRefA 25 01 Adjustable start torque Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 StrtTorgRefSel 42 07 TorgintegRef 05 StrtTorqRef 42 08 Brake faults alarms and E stop BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 _ A122 MechBrake M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 gt gt AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 k Brake open lift command s AuxStatWord 8 02 bit M1BrakeFitTime 42 05 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 A166 BrakeLongFalling BrakeEStopMode 42 09 TF AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name All speed references have to be routed via the speed ramp With brake control On M1BrakeCtrl 42 01 and RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 bit 2 1 the torque proving is done if selected Afterwards the torque reference is set to StrtTorgRef 42 08 and the brake open li
142. bit integer 15 bits sign OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 169 ADD Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT is the sum of the inputs OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 Connections IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer 15 bits sign OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign AND Type Logical function Illustration Operation OUT is true if all connected inputs are true Otherwise the OUT is false Truth table Connections IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 False All bits 0 0 0 0 1 False All bits 0 0 0 1 0 False All bits 0 0 0 1 1 False All bits 0 0 1 0 0 False All bits 0 0 1 0 1 False All bits 0 0 1 1 0 False All bits 0 0 1 1 1 True All bits 1 1 IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 170 Bitwise Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function IN IN2 IN3 OUT The block compares bits of three 16 bit word inputs and forms the output bits as follows OUT ONT OR IN2 AND INS Example Single bit IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Example Whole word Output word 0 1 0 ojo 41 1 0 0 O 1 1 0 1 O 0 031 0 9 9 9 1 9 0 0 1 919 1 9
143. bits 1 1 1 0 1 false all bits O 0 1 1 0 false all bits O 0 1 1 1 false all bits O 0 IN1 IN2 and INS boolean OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Switch B Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function IN IN2 OUT OUT is equal to IN2 if IN1 is true OUT is equal to INS if IN1 is false IN1 OUT 0 IN3 1 IN2 IN1 ue OUT IN3 Z IN1 boolean only bit O is valid IN2 and IN3 boolean OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 181 Switch l Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT is equal to IN2 if IN1 is true and equal to IN3 if IN1 is false IN1 OUT 0 INS 1 IN2 IN E IN2 OUT IN3 3 Connections IN1 boolean only bit O is valid IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer 15 bits sign OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign TOFF Type Logical function Illustration Operation OUT is true when IN1 is true OUT is false when IN1 has been false for a time gt IN2 Connections OUT remains true as long as IN1 is true plus the time defined in IN2 IN1 1 0 t IN2 IN2 OUT i All bits 1 D T D S t IN1 boolean input IN2 16 bit integer delay time in ms IN3 false or s INS true IN3 boolean determines unit of time OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean result with values on display True 1 false 0 Adaptive
144. can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control To connect bits of the DO CtrlWord 7 05 with DO1 to DO8 use the parameters in group 14 Digital outputs DO9 to DO12 are directly sent to the extension I O Thus they are only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit Name BO DO1 B1 DO2 B2 DO3 reserved B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Comment this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group 14 Digital outputs this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 9
145. converters has to match Firmware 1 drive Firmware 2 drive DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 2 BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s Activate the mailboxes The drive to drive communication utilizes 4 mailboxes for data transfer Thus data transfer to any device node in the system is possible Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data negative only receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs e g 5 5 and 6 6 are needed Firmware 1 drive Firmware 2 drive MailBox1 94 12 2 5 MailBox1 94 12 5 MailBox2 94 18 6 MailBox2 94 18 6 1 drive P94 01 1 P94 12 5 P94 18 6 204 drive P94 01 2 P94 12 5 P94 18 6 Attention Positive mailbox node ID numbers must be unique Negative mailbox node ID numbers can be used by several mailboxes Activate the communication supervision The communication supervision is activated by means of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 The function of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is depending on the setting of MailBox1 94 12 If MailBox1 94 12 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault
146. default 1 Ext4422 VoltRefExt 44 22 external EMF voltage reference 2 AM analog input Al1 3 Al2 analog input Al2 4 AI3 analog input AI3 5 Al4 analog input Al4 6 AIS analog input AIS 7 Al6 analog input Al6 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Internal Internal VoltCorr EMF voltage correction EMF voltage correction in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 Added to VoltRef1 3 25 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y VoltRefSlope EMF voltage reference slope EMF voltage reference slope in percent M1NomVolt 99 02 per 1 ms The dv dt limitation is located at the input of the EMF controller Int Scaling 100 1 ms Type Volatile N FluxCorr flux correction FluxCorr 44 27 in percent of nominal flux is added to the sum of the flux reference FluxRefSum 3 28 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MG ConfigWord MG set configuration word MG set configuration word For more information see DCS800 MG set motor control SADWO000310 Bit Name BO reserved B1 reserved B2 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved SpeedController B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 1 Value Comment CO A EN hb E ch CH Release speed controller no action Volatile Y 339 3ADW000193R0701 DC
147. defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control B13 DI14 DIS of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control B14 reserved B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 226 Signal Parameter name 8 06 DO StatWord digital outputs status word DOSW Digital output word shows the value of the digital outputs after inversion to DO StatWord 8 06 from drive gt invert DOx to DOx Name Comment default setting DO1 DO1Index 14 01 603 and DO1BitNo 14 02 15 FansOn actual setting depends on macro DO2 DO2Index 14 03 603 and DO2BitNo 14 04 5 FieldOn actual setting depends on macro DO3 DO3Index 14 05 603 and DO3BitNo 14 06 7 MainContactorOn actual setting depends on macro DO4Index 14 07 0 and DO4BitNo 14 08 0 Not connected actual setting depends on macro DO5index 14 09 0 and DOSBitNo 14 10 0 Not connected actual setting depends on macro DO6Index 14 11 0 and DO6BitNo 14 12 0 Not connected actual setting depends on macro DO7Index 14 13 0 and DO7BitNo 14 14 0 Not connected actual setting depends on macro DO8Index 14 15 603 and DO8BitNo 14 16 7 MainContactorOn actual setting depends on macro D
148. disconnecting device check the connection from the delivery diagrams close all protection switches one at a time and measure for proper voltage Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 28 Commissioning a DCS800 Nominal values of the converter can be found in group 4 check following signals ConvNomVolt 4 04 nominal AC converter voltage in V read from TypeCode 97 01 or S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 ConvNomCur 4 05 nominal converter DC current in A read from TypeCode 97 01 or S ConvScaleCur 97 02 ConvType 4 14 recognized converter type read from TypeCode 97 01 MQuaarantType 4 15 recognized converter quadrant type read from TypeCode 97 01 or S BlockBrdg2 97 07 MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 maximum bridge temperature in degree centigrade read from TypeCode 97 01 or S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 If signals are not correct adapt them see group 97 in this manual Connect DCS800 to PC with DriveWindow Light Connect a normal serial cable from the PC COM port to X34 on the drive E Remove the DCS800 Control Panel if Connect drive X34 to your PC COM port present Depress the locks to remove the cover Start DriveWindow Light and check the communication settings EE a C wie Uinta Auto Mode Settings Fort eam E Example with COM Start up S3ADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 29 Commissioning a DCS800 with the wizard To laun
149. e g 113 Followers The follower mode is selected by Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 To control start and stop from the master set CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord The connections are selected by Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 Ch2 FolSig2 70 19 and Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 according to the following table Signal addresses in the follower Update Parameter name and index of the Follower drive selection parameters time default values 2ms MainCtrlWord 7 01 Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 2ms SpeedRef 23 01 Ch2 FolSig2 70 19 2ms TorqRefA 25 01 Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Above parameters are not valid in the master The follower cyclically reads Ch2 FolSig1 3 every 2 ms Note In default setting master signal TorqRef3 2 10 is send via master parameter Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 to follower signal TorqHefA 25 01 via follower parameter Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Firmware structure Master Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 Master activates read pointer Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 Ch2 MasSig2 70 11 and Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 Torque reference and torque selection 3 3 ms T TorqRef2 Torque selector 2 09 i Y t 2 09 TorqRef2 TorqRefExt TorgRefA Sel 2245 Fitter Lo 2 08 5 TorqRef1 5 01 TorqRefA2501 l 4 ub e eem Ce AI AR 20 09 H TorqMaxTref 20 10 H TorqMinTref 219 TorqMaxAll 2 204 TorgMinAll TorgRef3 o i X LoadShare 25 02 4TorgRefA FTC TorgRefB Torque ramp
150. e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed3 armature current at speed limit 3 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at speed 43 17 5 Lo 43 17 with N a Max 1 20 01 l 1 20 02 I Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ArmCurLimSpeed4 armature current at speed limit 4 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at speed 43 17 2 gs 43 17 with n Max I 20 01 l 1 20 02 I Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed5 armature current at speed limit 5 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at n Max I 20 01 1 20 02 l Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid
151. encoders depending on the setting of SyncCommand 10 04 and SyncCommand2 10 05 enabled only if PosSyncMode 50 15 Single positioning synchronizing not done motor 1 field exciter acknowledged no action motor 2 field exciter acknowledged no action selected motor command to open lift the brake is given see group 42 Brake control selected motor command to close apply the brake is given drive is in a limit see LimWord 8 03 drive is not in a limit drive is torque controlled no action actual motor speed is in the zero speed limit defined by M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 or M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 actual motor speed is out of the zero speed limit M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 EMF no action fault or alarm indication no fault or alarm indication negative drive direction active controlled by bit 8 of AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 positive drive direction active controlled by bit 8 of AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 auto reclosing logic is active no action Volatile Y 223 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 224 Signal Parameter name 8 03 LimWord limit word LW dai du Limit word Bit active limit BO TorqMax 20 05 or TorqMaxAll 2 19 B1 TorqMin 20 06 or TorqMinAll 2 20 B2 TorqMaxSPC 20 07 or TorqMaxAll 2 19 B3 TorqMinSPC 20 08 or TorqMinAll 2 20 B4 TorqMaxTref 20 09 B5 TorqMinTref 20 10 B6 M1SpeedMax 20 02 or M2SpeedMax 49 20 B7 M1SpeedMin 20 01 or
152. exciter mode OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Unused aay o O o z a e e Ka Ka Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 251 Signal Parameter name E C OnOff1 On Off1 command Oo Binary signal for OnOff1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 0 NotUsed 12DM On by rising edge 0 gt 1 2 DI2 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 3 DI3 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 4 DIA On by rising edge 0 gt 1 Offi 5 DI5 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 OI Off1 OI OI OI Off1 default Off1 Off1 only available with digital extension 6 DI6 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 7 DI On by rising edge 0 gt 1 8 DI8 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 9 DI9 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 board 10 2 DI10 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 only available with digital extension board 11 DI On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 On by rising edge 0 1 13 MCW Bit12 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 18 15 MCW Bit14 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 OO OO OOOO OO OH 0 Off1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 16 MCW Bit15 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 On
153. fault limit temperature The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 5 if M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot1TempMeas 1 22 Note The unit depends on M1TempSel 31 05 Int Scaling 1 1 C 1Q9 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 317 umjme o LEE 34 07 Signal Parameter name zo 2 LU M1KlixonSel motor 1 klixon selector ol The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 5 if a digital input selected and the klixon is open 0 NotUsed no reaction default 12DM 0 fault 1 no fault 2 DI2 0 fault 1 no fault 3 DIS 0 fault 1 no fault 4 DIA 0 fault 1 no fault 5 DI5 0 fault 1 no fault 6 DI6 0 fault 1 no fault 7 DI7 0 fault 1 no fault 8 DI8 0 fault 1 no fault 9 DI9 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board Note It is possible to connect several klixons in series Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N a DCS800 Control Panel display o x o Signal and parameter visualization on the DCS800 Control Panel DispParam1Sel 34 01 DispParam2Sel 34 08 DispParam3Sel 34 15 Setting a display parameter to O results in no signal or para
154. for input 2 of function block 1 BPS1 Description see Block1In1 84 05 except To get only a certain bit e g RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord 8 01 set Block1In2 84 06 801 and Block1Attrib 84 08 30h Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Block1In3 function block 1 input 3 Selects the source for input 3 of function block 1 BPS1 Description see Block1In1 84 05 except To get only a certain bit e g RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord 8 01 set Block1In3 84 07 801 and Block1Attrib 84 08 300h Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Block1Attrib function block 1 attribute Defines the attributes of function block 1 for all three inputs Block1In1 84 05 Block1In2 84 06 and Block1In3 84 07 BPS1 Block1Attrib 84 08 is divided into 4 parts Bit number 0 3 for input 1 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word Bit number 4 7 for input 2 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word Bit number 8 11 for input 3 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word Bit number 12 14 for input 1 3 to feed a constant directly into the input Brune D Din CC qs ASTITI E Boolean Function block Function block Function block input 3 bit input 2 bit input 1 bit To use an input 3 selection selection selection as a constant value the bit belonging to the This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain input must be set bit out of a packed Boolean word I
155. gie mr x E Docs 800 D1 01 IA Application amp control eme 2 01 29 MotiFidcurRel 35 O 1 Par 1 29 Gi Data logger 1 03 30 FldCurRefM1 50 0 1 Par 3 30 f 30 12 M1FidMinTrip o 0H1 Par 30 12 f 44 02 MIKpFex 0 71 O 1 Par 44 2 f 44 03 M1TiFex ms 100 10 H1 Par 44 3 d 45 05 M1FidRefMode MiFldRefExt 10H 1 Par 45 5 n EN 50 0H1 Par 45 6 I Event logger Faut logger Memory E Q amp Parameters H Monitor Normal 1004 Interval ms 10 P History Buffer s 3600 000 KX Axis Length s 15 000 T Y axis Maximum 100 00 BY Axis Minimum 0 00 804 1 03 30 FidCurRefM1 0 00 100 00 2 01 29 MotiFldCurRel 0 00 100 00 3 Channel 3 0 00 100 00 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 Channel 5 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 601 3 404 204 Was 3 65 6 65 9 65 12 65 15 65 Time s mal e sano S a EL lel ol el Ready Mi DCS 800 D1 o 1 nmi DriveWindow manual tuning field current controller set M1FidRefExt 45 06 0 remove On via DriveWindow set M1FidMinTrip 30 12 and M1FidRefMode 45 05 back to their original settings Armature current controller To keep a Pl controller as fast as possible idealistically the integral part should stay at zero The worst case is that the integral part is running into the limits and thus needs a long time to recover To prevent
156. group 100 index e g MainCtrlWord 7 01 701 SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Adaptive Program 160 Set Pointer Parameter 84 05 a Select Undefined if no connection is required Set Pointer Parameter 84 05 Connections of outputs to firmware parameters can be done by means of the output pointers on the right side of the desktop Block 1 Out 86 01 Block Out 86 02 Block3 Out 6 03 Block3 Qut Signal lock4Out 86 0 Block4Qut Signal 84 27 m A If an output of a function block should be connected with an input of a function block simply select the output s parameter at the input Adaptive Program SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual eg Set the Time level 19 04 DR 19 08 9s Jp EAR em Be Time level Sms Saving AP applications 161 Time Levels msec e A 83 04 It is possible to save AP applications as ap files BA Driveap for DCS800 DCS800 OBEN 1 Gene PM emp Wessun ap GUO run external ap ene Pit JAR ONNE ap 3D Sa Current EISE ap Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 162 Function blocks General rules Block inputs The use of block input 1 BlockxIn1 is compulsory it must not be left unconnected Use of input 2 BlockxIn2 and input 3 BlockxIn3 is voluntary for the most blocks As a rule of thumb
157. is active 6 20 08 TorqMinSPC 20 08 speed controller limit is active 7 20 09 TorqMaxTref 20 09 external reference limit is active 8 20 10 TorqMinTref 20 10 external reference limit is active 9 20 22 TorqGenMax 20 22 regenerating limit is active 10 2 08 TorgHRef1 2 08 limits TorqRef2 2 09 see also TorqSel 26 01 Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name SpeedScaleAct actual used speed scaling The value of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 equals 20 000 internal speed units Currently used speed scaling in rpm for MotSel 8 09 Motor1 20 000 speed units M1SpeedScale 50 01 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 10 or mathematically If 50 01 2 10 then 20 000 50 01 in rpm If 50 01 lt 10 then 20 000 Max I 20 07 I 1 20 02 in rpm M1SpeedScale 50 01 gt 10 M1SpeedScale 50 01 SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 Currently used speed scaling in rpm for MotSel 8 09 Motor2 20 000 speed units M2SpeedScale 49 22 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 gt 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin 49 19 and M2SpeedMax 49 20 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 lt 10 or mathematically f 49 22 gt 10 then 20 000 49 22 in
158. is not accelerating or wrong tacho polarity tacho encoder not enough load too low inertia for the detection of speed controller parameters drive not in speed control mode see TorqSel 26 01 TorqSelMod 26 03 TorqMuxMode 26 04 reserved Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 240 Signal Parameter name Thyristor diagnosis shortcut caused by V1 shortcut caused by V2 shortcut caused by V3 shortcut caused by V4 shortcut caused by V5 shortcut caused by V6 thyristor block test failed shortcut caused by V15 or V22 shortcut caused by V16 or V23 shortcut caused by V11 or V24 shortcut caused by V12 or V25 shortcut caused by V13 or V26 shortcut caused by V14 or V21 motor connected to ground armature winding is not connected 105 120 reserved AI monitoring 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Al1 below 4 mA AI2 below 4 mA AI3 below 4 mA Al4 below 4 mA AIS below 4 mA AI6 below 4 mA AITAC below 4 mA 128 149 reserved Option modules 162 163 164 fieldbus module missing see CommModule 98 02 SDCS COM 8 for DDCS respectively fieldbus communication missing see CommModule 98 02 SDCS COM 8 for master follower communication missing see group 70 reserved RMBA xx module missing see group 98 RAIO xx in option slot on SDCS CON 4 missing see group 98 RAIO xx in option slot on AIMA missing see group 98 RDIO xx in option slot on SDCS CON
159. is used in order to avoid an increasing error due to rounding errors Synchronization The position counter can be synchronized with an initial value This initial value is set by means of PosCountlnitLo 50 08 and PosCountlnitHi 50 09 At the synchronization event the position counter output PosCountLow 3 07 and PosCountHigh 3 08 is preset with the initial value and SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 is set PosCountlnitLo 50 08 PosCountLow 3 07 PosCountlnitHi 50 09 PosCountHigh 3 08 The synchronization command is chosen by means of SyncCommand 10 04 It can either be SyncCommand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 or hardware The fastest synchronization is achieved by the encoder zero pulse Synchronization by DI7 is delayed due to its scan time and additional hardware filter times The synchronization can be inhibited by setting SyncDisable AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 10 SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 can be reset by means of ResetSyncRdy AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 11 With PosSyncMode 50 15 either single or cyclic synchronization is selected With single synchronization the next synchronization event must be released with ResetSyncRdy AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 11 Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g
160. jogging or E stop The physical reversal time can be reduced by increasing the input voltage of the field exciter and using Optitorque Please note that the output voltage of the field exciter is limited by means of M1PosLimCtrl 45 02 or M2PosLimCtrl 45 16 This can also increase the physical reversal time The output of the speed ramp is updated by means of the actual speed to ensure a bumpless transition if RevDly 43 14 is greater than 25 ms and RevMode 43 16 Soft Due to high inductances of motors the field reversal takes a relatively long time In certain cases this time can be reduced by means of optitorque see FlaCtriMode 44 01 In case the process requires only a small torque during field reversal the field current is decreased and the armature current is increased prior to the field current change This speeds up the field reversal The rate of the field current reduction depends on the process E g if the speed direction is changed rather slowly the required torque may also be quite small This allows the reduction of the field current Thus by means of optitorque it is possible to shorten the field reversal time In optitorque mode the field current will be reduced proportionally to TorqRefUsed 2 13 The relation between TorqRefUsed 2 13 and field current is defined by FlaRefGain 45 11 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g GO TorqRefUsed 2 13 FldRefGain 45 11
161. limit output value Maximum limit of the PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N ACW Bit15 Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 321 Signal Parameter name PID OutDest PID controller output value index Index pointer to the sink of the PID controller output value The format is xxyy with negate output value xx group and yy index e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Resetindex PID controller reset index The PID controller reset is controlled by a selectable bit see P D ResetBitNo 40 20 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert reset signal xx group and yy index Examples If PID Resetindex 40 19 701 main control word and PID ResetBitNo 40 20 12 then the PID controller reset is active when bit 12 is high If PID Resetindex 40 19 701 main control word and PID ResetBitNo 40 20 12 then the PID controller reset is active when bit 12 is low Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N PID ResetBitNo PID controller reset bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with PID ResetIndex 40 19 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N PID Reserved PID reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N Brake control Group 42 Bra
162. mV Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAl3 conversion mode analog input 3 Analog input 3 on the SDCS CON 4 is only working with voltage The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 120V 10V Uni OV to 10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto 10V 4mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile N FilterAl3 filter time analog input 3 Analog input 3 filter time The hardware filter time is x 2 ms Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Al4HighVal analog input 4 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in A 4HighVal 13 13 Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1 mV Type I Volatile N Al4LowVal analog input 4 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in A 4LowVal 13 14 Note Al3LowVal 13 14 is only valid if ConvModeAl4
163. master s torque or speed reference In general torque control or window control of the followers should be used when the motor shafts of the master and the followers drives are fixed coupled to each other via gearing chains belts etc and no speed differences between the drives is possible Link configuration Master Ch2 on the SDCS COM 8 board is used for the master follower link between the drives Ch2 is configurable by Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 either to be master or follower in the communication in broadcast mode Typically the speed controlled process master drive is configured also to be the communication master The master mode is selected by Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 The torque reference source address is defined in the master by Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 to be sent via broadcast to the followers Also two other signals can be sent through the link if required Their addresses are defined by Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 and Ch2 MasSig2 70 11 Typical default addresses are Signal addresses in the master Update Parameter name and index of the default Master drive selection time values parameters 2ms MainCtrlWord 7 01 or UsedMCW 7 04 Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 2 ms SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Ch2 MasSig2 70 11 2 ms TorgRef3 2 10 Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 Above parameters are not valid in the follower The master cyclically sends Ch2 MasSig1 3in one DDCS message as broadcast every 2 ms Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual
164. means of an external device e g Bender relays 9 DI8 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 10 DI9 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays Only available with digital extension board 11 D10 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays Only available with digital extension board 12 DI11 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays Only available with digital extension board Note If ResCurDetectSel 30 05 is connected to a digital input only ResCurDetectDel 30 07 remains valid The trip limit ResCurDetectLim 30 06 is adjusted at the external device Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N ResCurDetectLim residual current detection limit Residual current detection tripping level in amperes at the primary side of the current transformer ratio is 400 1 If ResCurDetectSel 30 05 is connected to a digital input ResCurDetectLim 30 06 is deactivated because the limit is adjusted at the external device Int Scaling 10 1A Type I Volatile N ResCurDetectDel residual current detection delay Time delay for F505 ResCurDetect FaultWord1 9 01 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N ArmOvrVoltLev armature overvoltage level The drive trips with F503 ArmOverVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 2 if ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 is exceeded
165. measurement mode for pulse encoder 1 0 A B Dir channel A rising edges for speed channel A not not used channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 1 12A channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channels B and B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 2 A B Dir channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 3 A B channels A A not and B B not rising and falling edges for speed and direction speed evaluation factor 4 default Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2SpeedFbSel motor 2 speed feedback selector Motor 2 speed feedback selection speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback with flux compensation default 1 Encoder speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 1 connected to either SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 2 Tacho speed is measured by means of an analog tacho 3 External MotSpeed 1 04 is updated by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control 4 Encoder2 speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 2 connected to a RTAC xx see Encoder2Module 98 01 5 EMF Volt speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback without flux compensation Note1 It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 EMF N
166. not zero AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 22 ACW Bit15 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Note If zero current is detected by means of the thyristor voltages either 10 of MainsVoltAct 1 11 or 10 V is undershot Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Se U ACW Bit15 403 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 404 Signal Parameter name 97 19 ZeroCurTimeOut zero current timeout After a command to change current direction see CurRefUsed 3 12 the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 CtriRefUsed 3 12 changes polarity Zero current CtrlStatMas 6 09 detection bit 12 is set CurCtrlStat 6 03 bit 1 le RevDly 43 14 ZeroCurTime Out 97 19 RevDly_a dsf The reversal delay starts when zero current has been detected see CurCir Stat1 6 03 bit 13 after a command to change current direction see CurRefUsed 3 12 has been given The time needed to change the current direction can be longer when changing from motoring mode to regenerative mode at high motor voltages because the motor voltage must be reduced before switching to regenerative mode see also RevVoltMargin 44 21 ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must have the same setting for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave with one exception only If
167. of the Channel 0 optotransmitters in DDCS mode Ch0 DriveBus 71 01 No Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back DDCS mode is typically used with APC2 AC70 AC80 and module bus of AC 800M O Ring Regeneration is enabled Used with ring type bus topology Typically when Channel 0 of all SDCS COM 8 has been connected to a ring 1 Star Regeneration is disabled Used with star type topology Typically with configurations using the NDBU x5 branching units default Note This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode ChO DriveBus 71 01 Yes Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N RampStop 0 FixedSpeed1 371 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 372 Signal Parameter name def nit E C Ch1 LinkControl channel 1 link control Channel 1 is used for communication with the AIMA xx adapter DDCS channel 1 light intensity control for transmission LEDs When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 NodeAddr channel 2 node address Channel 2 is used for point to point communication connections between drives e g master follower communication Node address channel 2 1 125 Node addresses of slave drives not valid if Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 Master Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 MaFoMode channel 2 master follower mode Channel 2 can be used to send refe
168. only 0 NotUsed motor 2 temperature measurement is blocked default 1 1PT100 AIS one PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS IOB 3 2 2PT100 AI3 two PT100 connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 3 3PT100 AI3 three PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS IOB 3 4 4PT100 AIS 2 four PT100 3 connected to AI3 and 1 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 5 5PT100 AIS 2 five PT100 3 connected to AI3 and 2 connected to AI2 on SDCS IOB 3 6 6PT100 AIS 2 six PT100 3 connected to AI3 and 3 connected to AI2 on SDCS IOB 3 7 1PT100 AIS one PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2 8 2PT100 AI8 two PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2 9 3PT100 AI8 three PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2 10 4PT100 Al8 7 four PT100 3 connected to AI8 and 1 connected to AI7 on RAIO2 11 5PT100 AI8 7 five PT100 3 connected to AI8 and 2 connected to AI7 on RAIO2 12 6PT100 AI8 7 six PT100 3 connected to AI8 and 3 connected to AI7 on RAIO2 13 1PTC AI3 one PTC connected to AI3 on SDCS IOB 3 14 2PTC AI3 2 two PTC 1 connected to AIS and 1 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 15 1PTC Al2 Con one PTC connected to Al2 on SDCS CON 4 For more information see section Motor protection Note Al7 and AI8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule 98 06 Note In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI of the SDCS IOB 3 the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10 Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see DCS800 Hardware Manual Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M2AlarmL
169. or not compatible the parameter for max 10 s is set to default The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 1 1 Check parameter setting Parameter up or download failed 9 08 after up or The checksum verification failed during up or bit2 download of Parameter compatibility 9 08 When downloading parameter sets or during power up bit 1 download of a the firmware attempts to write the parameters If the parameter set download of parameters Please try again parameters for Two or more parameter set actions were requested at the same time Please try again Adaptive Program task time not set 9 08 always 4 The task time for the Adaptive Program is not set bit 3 while the Adaptive Program is started Check that TimeLevSel 83 04 is set to 5 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 500 ms when AdapProgCmd 83 01 is set to Start SingleCycle or SingleStep Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 474 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm Control Panel word DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Speed not zero 9 08 Not active if SpeedNotZero Re start of drive is not possible Speed zero see bit4 RdyRef 1 M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 or M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 has not been reached In case of an alarm set On Run 0 and check if the actual speed is within the zero speed limit This alarm is valid for normal stop Off1N UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 in case FlyStart 21 10
170. reference in percent of M2NomFidCur 49 05 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Information 201 E C FirmwareVer firmware version Name of the loaded firmware version The format is yyy or yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version and yyy single phase firmware for demo units Int Scaling Type Cc Volatile Y FirmwareType firmware type Type of the loaded firmware version The format is 80 Standard firmware 87 Heating firmware Int Scaling Type C Volatile Y ApplicName name of application program Name of the running application program 0 NoMemCard no Memory Card plugged in 1 Inactive A Memory Card is plugged in but the application program is inactive Use ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl to activate the application program 2 NoApplic the Memory Card is empty no application program available 3 application name gt name of the running application program Int Scaling Type C Volatile Y ConvNomvVolt converter nominal AC voltage measurement circuit Adjustment of AC voltage measuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 0 Read from S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 if S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 0 Int Scaling 1 1V Type I Volatile Y Conv
171. ridoe T emp 451 ScaleAO eee 93 271 SealeAQ2 enirn eere rtr 272 Seale AOG WEE 272 Tee EE 93 273 elle E 213 ServiceMode 31 50 51 65 66 67 416 427 470 471 SetSystemTime eene 275 Shape Tim 6 nente 287 SpeedActEMP rre 190 SpeedActErnc ees 190 442 SpeedAGCtEnca menm 194 442 SpeedActTach 32 42 190 442 SpeedGort eee 43 290 SpeedErrF ilt s 32 43 290 SpeedErrFilt2 ssse 32 43 292 GpeedErrheg iitiistieiiitsipiirekaigirrrtaipta tott 194 GpeecdtrrorGcale eneee 297 SpeedFbFltMode 75 314 429 447 456 471 SpeedFbFItSel 308 442 456 471 SpeedFbMonbLev 306 442 SpeedFiltTime 32 43 362 ET 365 SpeedRampOut sssneeeeeeeeeeeenneererneerreneee 197 SpeedRef 100 108 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 189 289 Eet EEA 194 SpeedREfI ehanint neeaae anatania ania 194 SpeedRef4 ssesssssssss 32 43 195 SpeedHelfExt1 EE 197 Dpeedhieftvt tst inirtnir risian 197 SpeedhRefScale ssssssssssss 293 SpeedhRefUsed 100 186 195 SpeedScaleAct 108 109 119 122 125 127 129 131 133 139 141 144 147 186 189 197 450 459 Gpeecdzhbare 290 SpeedStep s ssssseeseesseneerrreeerirneernnserrennes 292 SqrWavelndex A 419 GorVWav
172. roi uiouo peniesei iig Bo1e e abu Lig peesboTejeq od uoApy 0g Du uosueJ OG syne4 NLHO uo og gt NIHO uO og p m s OWE Bo7ezeques y 049 msy powasxny MSIN paomezsuew BASNI 91607 aaua mown MoWPesn i MON PIOMIZOUIEW zm3v zP1XoMinoxnv LMOVv PX0112xny ma iO0LiJjespueuuoo Z0g 108 09 GoD pueg Zoor omw pueH ora wow LOZ 07 GoD Joujuoo ejyoud eAug gv mossotwoo zuo S107 P zz inossoquoo ouo S007 g euni ioxdbio1zW OF GY Sau AoA IO Lundi OL Zt EE epoydoisine4 O OF EZ lesutwpesnbio1 H 8EOZ Mossoquuo9 820 0 0 1 wurypeeds upesnbio1 Miossoo1jeoo ZZ OF y 0 1 xewjpeeds S4 4a MOV 7 ZL HA MOV xn Hero z6piawrunorw apowdorg aH PO LZ 10 Uumpesde Shi MOW Ets EO TZ h Z 10 bio poeds m x h i 90 toziesbio1 DS eebet giv v oot epowuo H 0 LZ t Hoa MH 1109b101 DEEN zm SE 9 Pewiesbior 0 92 We Saber SL9Z ZOEY xeowpiuleuxni x rem KH USCElu aurusou seo i wmogdueybiol IT so sz dpdweybioy H S0 Sz av LI TvunbioL soozxewb o1 H oroz Veure Ozz bo Lan Ixewbio 1 Letz D IIvXeyb4o gt m lesxewpesnbio LH groz jeiLuyibio E ESCHER souxewbio LISS duerenbio LISS amp enbiol erugpeo HAREL zose NU ED x duiesbio 1166 o OS Lecveubueot Les d Verbuet Dee pe et Gezei La x A epogbio bio ueigiees buet Zanter SS EIS AA les vjeubio OrSZ sod L NJ pose edidi uonesueduioo Gord 807 Qo RERO HESS Jopejes enbuo pleybioy or L ZyeybIoL ma ma sw g g vom e
173. should be used for filter times smaller than 30 ms SpeedErrFilt 23 06 and SpeedErrFilt2 23 11 are filtering the speed error An and should be used for filter times greater than 30 ms It is recommended to set SpeedErrFilt 23 06 SpeedErrFilt2 23 1 1 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 363 Signal Parameter name 50 07 PosCountMode position counter mode e m o ul The position counter is based on the pulse count of pulse encoder 1 and or pulse encoder 2 with Si all pulse edges are counted The 32 bit position value is divided into two 16 bit words for each ke o pulse encoder EE 0 PulseEdges for the low words PosCountLow 3 07 PosCount2Low 3 04 ei PosCountlnitLo 50 08 and PosCount2lnitLo 50 21 is valid 1 1 pulse edge for the high words PosCountHigh 3 08 PosCount2High 3 05 PosCountlnitHi 50 09 and PosCount2InitHi 50 22 is valid 1 22 65536 pulse edges 1 Scaled for the low words PosCountLow 3 07 PosCount2Low 3 04 PosCountlnitLo 50 08 and PosCount2InitLo 50 21 is valid 0 0 and 65536 360 for the high words PosCountHigh 3 08 PosCount2High 3 05 PosCountlnitHi 50 09 and PosCount2InitHi 50 22 is valid 1 1 revolution default 2 Rollover for the low words PosCountLow 3 07 PosCount2Low 3 04 PosCountlnitLo 50 08 and PosCount2InitLo 50 21 is valid 0 0 and 65536
174. temperature drops below minus 10 C F504 ConvOverTemp is generated Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 430 Auto reclosing mains undervoltage Auto reclosing allows continuing drive operation immediately after a short mains undervoltage without any additional functions in the overriding control system In order to keep the overriding control system and the drive control electronics running through short mains undervoltage an UPS is needed for the 115 230 VAC auxiliary voltages Without the UPS all DI like e g E stop start inhibition acknowledge signals etc would have false states and trip the drive although the system itself could stay alive Also the control circuits of the main contactor must be supplied during the mains undervoltage Auto reclosing defines whether the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt or if the drive will continue running after the mains voltage returns To activate the auto reclosing set PwrLossTrip 30 21 Delayed Short mains undervoltage The supervision of mains undervoltage has two levels 1 UNetMin1 30 22 alarm protection and trip level 2 UNetMin2 30 23 trip level If the mains voltage falls below UNetMin1 30 22 but stays above UNetMin2 30 23 the following actions take place 1 the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 2 single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible 3 the controllers are frozen
175. the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Switches on the 1 RDIO xx Node ID selector S1 Pos 0 1 2 E F A ID 0 1 2 14 15 e Configuration switch S2 essess es essa DI3 HW filtering 123 123 12 1234 DI2 HW filtering DI HW filtering X21 X22 X11 x12 Unused Node ID selector S1 is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board ADDRESS MEVS O9 O An Ka NM lo Le ip E ei Zreck Configuration switch S2 For faster detection the hardware filter of the digital input in question can be disabled Disabling the hardware filtering will however reduce the noise immunity of the input DIP switch settings Hardware Filtering Digital input Digital input Digital input DH DI DIS ON Enabled Al D 1234 ON Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Disabled I NotUsed min AIMA 409 unit E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 410 Signal Parameter name def nit E C 98 04 DIO ExtModule2 digital extension module 2 Second RDIO xx extension module interface selection DIO ExtModule2 98 04 releases D112 DI13 DI14 DO11 and DO12 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively o
176. the disappearing alarm A2xx with a minus sign An appearing user defined alarm is indicated as A3xx A disappearing user defined alarm is indicated as A4xx The alarm handling must provides 4 alarm levels Alarm level 1 the drive keeps on running and the alarm is indicated after the drive is stopped the main contactor cannot be switched on again no re start possible Alarm level 2 the drive keeps on running and the alarm is indicated fan contactor stays on as long as the alarm is pending ifthe alarm disappears FanDly 21 14 will start Alarm level 3 AutoReclosing auto re start is AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 15 active RdyRun MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 is disabled but the drive is automatically restarted when the alarm condition vanishes aissetto 150 Single firing pulses Alarm level 4 the drive keeps on running and the alarm is indicated In case an alarm occurs it stays active until the cause is eliminated Then the alarm will automatically disappear thus a Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 is not needed and will have no effect Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 466 Alarm name Alarm number Alarm name Alarm number appearing disappearing appearing disappearing AlRange A127 A227 M2OverTemp A109 A209 ApplDiff A119 A219 MainsLowVolt A111 A211
177. the signal group 10 Selected motor DC Breaker acknowledge missing 9 06 RdyRun 1 a is set to 150 and single firing pulses are given thus bit 2 the drive cannot be started or re started while the DC breaker acknowledge is missing Check DC BreakAck 10 23 if necessary invert the signal group 10 Converter overtemperature 9 06 always Wait until the converter is cooled down bit 3 Shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 The converter overtemperature alarm will already appear at approximately 5 C below the shutdown temperature Check ConvFanAck 10 20 FanDly 21 14 converter door open converter fan supply voltage converter fan direction of rotation converter fan components converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 Selected motor dynamic braking is still pending 9 06 RdyRun 1 a is set to 150 and single firing pulses are given thus bit 4 the drive cannot be started or re started while dynamic braking is active except if FlyStart 21 10 FlyStartDyn Check QODynBrakeAck 10 22 FlyStart 21 10 Ee s Ne Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm is active Control Panel 9 06 always bit 5 M1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 motor temperature motor fan supp
178. there is no current measurement in the 12 pulse serial slave set ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 in the 12 pulse serial slave to maximum 12000 ms Note 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 and ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must be longer than RevDly 43 14 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N TorqActFiltTime actual torque filter time Torque actual filter time constant for MotTorqFilt 1 07 Is used for the EMF controller and the EMF feed forward Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ResetAhCounter reset ampere hour counter Binary signal to reset AhCounter 1 39 0 NotUsed default 12 DH Reset by rising edge 0 1 2 DI2 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 3 DI Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 4 DIA Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 5 DI5 Reset by rising edge 0 1 6 DI6 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 7 DI7 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 8 DI8 Reset by rising edge 0 1 9 DI9 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 Reset by rising edge 0 1 only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 Reset by r
179. this and to achieve an integral part as small as possible two feed forwards are used for the current controller 1 During discontinuous current the signal from the current controller is boosted by means of the discontinuous current adaptation depending on discontinuous current limit current reference and EMF The discontinuous current limit has to be determent during the commissioning 2 Additionally the EMF itself is used as feed forward Unfortunately it is not possible to measure the EMF directly It has to be calculated by means of following formula Control principle Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 36 EMF U R 1 L lt The values for the resistance R and the inductance L of the motor have to be determent during the commissioning ie y UA Current controller p part i part Discontinuous current EMF adaptation Discontinuous current limit Control principle armature current controller Thus the manual tuning of the armature current controller has to be splitted into Manual tuning three parts l l 1 determine resistance and inductance of the motor 2 determine discontinuous current limit of the motor 3 manual tuning of the armature current controller p and i part DriveWindow information VO DCS 800 D1 toki 8 2 a ae ilo E Signal Run On DriveWindow information Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 37 Part 1 determi
180. tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 478 Text on DCS800 Control Panel Definition Action DSL found SDCS DSL 4 found DCSLink board found Drive not responding Drive not responding The communication between drive and DCS800 Control Panel was not established or was interrupted Check Change the DCS800 Control Panel Change the cable connector which is used to connect the DCS800 Control Panel to the SDCS CON 4 Change the SDCS CON 4 Change the SDCS PIN 4 Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 479 iagrams tructure d irmware S Fi Appendix A Jsp p aoa uexBerp oxnjonxjs M4 008590 AER prepuejs oy moys sureierp eumpnay veau OyL uopu py 10u09 Bulpuseno 10 weiBoid uoneoidde wesBoig endepy q 0 vayam jensn s ejeure ed sowed s JEC JEC GR pueBo1 2160 ony poodgieAQION Z 54 Soest JS Aadoisere uw EL ZE lins cr inpsedsoiez i Je 02 ia LI peedsuxoun 910 Tesiiaaapeeds JE Jotun swa SF OF ewonqpeeds _ POF yt oNesinazoua H 610S epowseewzoua H B105 CID E agesate ocone owveu SC ysnipyyoe st H LOS ven owen CLOS SOT oupe Boreuy wpeevpeods onesindsuaiw HPO OS
181. upon the next power up of the Modbus adapter StationNumber station number Defines the address of the station Two stations with the same station number are not allowed online Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N BaudRate baud rate Defines the transfer rate of the Modbus link 0 reserved 1 600 600 Baud 2 1200 1200 Baud 3 2400 2400 Baud 4 4800 4800 Baud 5 9600 9600 Baud default 6 19200 19200 Baud Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 69 Group 60 369 Signal Parameter name E C Parity parity Defines the use of parity and stop bit s The same setting must be used in all online stations 0 reserved 1 None1Stopbit no parity bit one stop bit 2 None2Stopbit no parity bit two stop bits 3 Odd odd parity indication bit one stop bit 4 Even even parity indication bit one stop bit default Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N o D 2 En o o 2 Application program parameters These parameter groups contain all parameters created by the application program Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 370 Signal Parameter name DDCS control 70 01 ChO NodeAddr channel 0 node address Channel 0 is used for communication with the overriding control Node address channel 0 if APC2 or NCSA 01 AC31 is used ChO No
182. valid during field heating and field economy In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 of M1FidHeatRef 44 04 The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if 50 of M1FidHeatRef 44 04 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Note MiFIaMinTrip 30 12 is not valid for FlaCtriMode 44 01 Fix Opti EMF Opti Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 of FlaCurRefM1 3 30 The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 if 50 of FidCurRefM1 3 30 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N MiFldOvrCurLev motor 1 field overcurrent level The drive trips with F515 M1FexOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 14 if M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 11 is exceeded It is recommended to set M1FidOvrCurtLev 30 13 at least 25 higher than M1NomFidCur 99 1 1 The field overcurrent fault is inactive if M1FidOvrCurLev 30 13 is set to 135 96 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N SpeedFbMonLev speed feedback monitor level The drive reacts according to SpeedFbFItSel 30 17 or trips with F553 TachPolarity FaultWord4 9 04 bit 4 if the measured speed feedback SpeedActEnc 1 03 SpeedActTach 1 05 or SpeedActEnc2 1 42 does not exceed SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 while the measured EMF exceeds EMF FbMonLev 30 15 Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29
183. valid when plugged in an AIMA board ADDRESS EREN ENG m e N x21 X22 Xii X12 sdf el Configuration switch S2 For faster detection the hardware filter of the digital input in question can be disabled Disabling the hardware filtering will however reduce the noise immunity of the input DIP switch settings Hardware Filtering Digital input Digital input Digital input Dii DIS DI3 ON Enabled z Default Hil 1234 ml D ON Disabled I 1234 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 411 Signal Parameter name B zo KS 5 ui 98 05 Unused 98 06 AIO ExtModule analog extension module o ao lu First RAIO xx extension module interface selection AIO ExtModule 98 06 releases AIS Al6 AOS Z o and AO4 2 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module 2 z adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 5 see Node ID selector S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no first RAIO xx is used default 1 Sloti first RAIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 first RAIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 first RAIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA first RAIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 5 The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLos
184. values and set all trigger conditions Upload samples and show as values or as graphs Save samples as files in the NETA 01 Download saved data logger files via FTP e Status word MainStatWord 8 01 is shown after clicking on the lamp Note Bit 11 EXT_CTRL_LOC and bit 12 RUN_ENABLE are not used for DC drives Note Data set communication and motor control e g local control of the drives via NETA 01 are not released for the DCS800 Related documentation User s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module NETA 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual NETA 01 configuration The NETA 01 homepage can be called by using a browser e g internet explorer Note Before connecting the NETA 01 via Ch3 with the DCS800 check that Tool Channel Ch3 of the NETA 01 configuration is ticked otherwise group 51 Fieldbus will be overwritten Note When connecting the NETA 01 with the DCS800 make sure to use Ch3 tool channel on the SDCS COM 8 otherwise group 51 Fieldbus will be overwritten ChO can be used too but then group 51 Fieldbus will be overwritten and cannot be used for other serial communication Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 118 More details about the NETA 01 configuration see page 55 of the User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation The adapter module is mounted onto a standard mounting rail outside the drive Drive configuration The DCS800 needs no special settings whe
185. 0 Stop only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 Start by rising edge 0 1 13 MCW Bit12 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 OOoOoooooococoo 0 Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 17 ACW Bit12 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 21 DI7DI8 On and Start by rising pulse 0 1 of DI7 Stop and Off1 by falling pulse 1 0 of DI8 Following settings apply OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 DI7DI8 Note To give On and Run at the same time set OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Jogi jogging 1 command Binary signal for Jog1 Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed1 23 02 0 NotUsed default 1 Dil 12 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 2 DI2 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 3 DIS 1
186. 0 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 When used for monitoring only For monitoring only read commands are supported Up to 24 data words for monitoring are possible because the 12 data words written to by the overriding control see group 90 can also be read The following table shows the parameter settings Drive parameters Settings Comments CommModule 98 02 FldBusModbus FldBusModbus means controlling the drive by means of another R type fieldbus adapter see description of CommModule 98 02 ModBusModule2 98 08 Slot2 or depends on the location of the Slot3 adapter StationNumber 52 01 1 247 desired station number BaudRate 52 02 5 5 9600 Baud Parity 52 03 4 4 Even DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive 40001 gt data word 1 1 DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive 40002 gt data word 1 2 DsetXVal3 90 03 2501 default TorqHefA 25 01 output data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from overriding control to drive 40003 gt data word 1 3 up to DsetXplus6Val3 90 12 O default not connected output data word 12 not connected 12 data word from overriding control to drive 40021 lt data word 7 3 C
187. 0 08 is written into PosCountLow 3 07 and PosCountlnitHi 50 09 is written into PosCountHigh 3 08 At the same time AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 SyncRdy is set to 1 The synchronization can be inhibited by setting AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 10 SyncDisable to 1 The synchronization event is selected by 0 NotUsed default 1 DI7 rising edge 0 1 taken from DI7 2 DITHi amp Z 3 DI7Hi amp Z Fwd 4 DITHi amp Z Rev 5 DI7 6 DI7TLo amp Z 7 DI7LO amp Z Fwd 8 DI7Lo amp Z Rev 9 Z DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward DI7 1 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating reverse falling edge 1 0 taken from DI7 DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating forward DI7 0 and rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder motor rotating reverse rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 10 SyncCommand rising edge 0 gt 1 taken from AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 Note Forward rotation means that encoder channel A pulses lead channel B pulses by 90 electrical Reverse rotation means that encoder channel B pulses lead channel A pulses by 90 electrical Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N
188. 0 19 Fg CurRippleSel 30 18 L2 5 4 3 2 L3 5 6 DCS800 FW curr rip mon calc dsf Current ripple monitor calculation Note The load influences the error signal CurRippleFilt 1 10 Current near discontinuous level will create values of about 300 Fault tracing SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 442 ConvCurActRel 1 15 if a thyristor is not fired High inductive loads will create values of about 9096 ConvCurActRel 1 15 if a thyristor is not fired Commissioning hint It is not possible to pre calculate clear levels The current control reacts to unstable current feedback The load is continuously driving the current if a thyristor is not fired Speed feedback monitor The speed feedback monitor supervises an attached analog tacho or encoder for proper function by means of measured speed and measured EMF Above a certain EMF the measured speed feedback must be above a certain threshold The sign of the speed measurement must be correct as well SpeedActEnc 1 03 SpeedActEnc2 1 40 or SpeedActTach 1 05 COMP 1312 ro SpeedFbMonLev 30 1 4 H 1 I2 bo e 2 He AND amp COMP seg H M12 2 n 2r o Jel x Helo OR s SR F522 SpeedFb SW C COMP z R Field direction 8 03 bit 4 H wan xp H n z2ro E Y I1 I2
189. 0 27 ComLossCtrl 30 28 FaultStopMode 30 30 M1TorqProvTime 42 10 M2TorqProvTime 49 40 Ch0 ComLossCtrl 70 05 or e Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 is active and the parameter is set to RampStop or TorqueLimit default 1 Fix the torque selector is fixed to the value set by TorqSel 26 01 TorqMuxMode 26 04 and TorqMux 26 05 Note The setting of TorgSelMod 26 03 is especially affecting drives using torque control e g master Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 301 Signal Parameter name 9 Lu Torque selector 2 09 H I H Speed 1 TorqRef2 SE i p 25 10 TorqRefA Sel 2 24 Filter i jd Torque 2 SEL TorgRefA2501 25 03 Ai AG FTorqRefA ET boadShare TorqRefB Z5 Torque ramp TorqSelMod HTorqMux f TorqMuxMode OfflMode NotUsed TorqSel ITorqSel2601 0 6 H DH D111 I Speed Torq 1 or 2 i 03 StopMode MCW Bit 11 MCW Bit15 ISpeed Min 1 or 3 SM d E StopMode ACW Bit 12 ACW Bit 15 Speed Max 1 or 4 27 LocalLoossCtri ISpeed Limit 1 or 6 CommLossCtri FaultStopMode M1 TorqProvTime M2TorgProvTi
190. 0 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 10 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N 387 E C DsetXplus10Val2 data set X 10 value 2 Data set X 10 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 10 Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus10Val3 data set X 10 value 3 Data set X 10 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 10 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Receiving data sets addresses 2 DsetXplus12Val1 data set X 12 value 1 Data set X 12 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 12 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile DsetXplus12Val2 data set X 12 value 2 Data set X 12 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 12 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile DsetXplus12Val3 data set X 12 value 3 Data set X 12 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 12 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus14Val1 data set X 14 value 1 Data set X 14 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 14 Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile DsetXplus14Val2 data set X 14 value 2 Data set X 14 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 14 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus14Val3 data set X 14 value 3 Data set X 14 value 3 int
191. 00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 210 Signal Parameter name Drive logic signals SystemTime converter system time Shows the time of the converter in minutes The system time can be either set by means of SetSystemTime 16 11 or via the DCS800 Control Panel Int Scaling 1 1min Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name CurCtriStati 1 current controller status 17 current controller status word Bit Value BO B1 B2 Int Scaling 1 Comment command FansOn command FansOff See also trip levels in paragraph Fault signals of this manual one mains phase missing no action motor heating function active motor heating function not active field direction reverse field direction forward command to switch excitation on FieldOn command to switch excitation off FieldOff dynamic braking active started dynamic braking not active command to close main contactor MainContactorOn command to open main contactor MainContactorOff command to close contactor for dynamic braking resistor armature current is zero DynamicBrakingOn command to open contactor for dynamic braking resistor DynamicBrakingOff drive is generating drive is motoring command to close the US style changeover DC breaker close the DC breaker open the resistor breaker US DCBreakerOn command to open the US style changeover DC breaker open the
192. 0193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2FIdRefMode motor 2 field current reference mode M2FidRefMode 45 13 selector 0 Internal motor 2 field current reference according to shared motion MotSel 8 09 or field heating FidHeatSel 21 18 default 1 M1FldCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 1 2 M2FIdRefExt M2FidRefExt 45 14 external field current reference Field current control 5 ms ParChange 10 10 FldHeatSel M1FidRefMode FidCurRefM1 Motor 1 field Optitorque current controller and M1FidHeatRef 44 04 field reversal M1FIdRefExt 45 06 group 45 M1KpFex M1TiFex M1PosLimCtrl ParChange FidHeatSel M1FldRefMode Motor 2 field CO current controller M2FidHeatRef 49 06 M2FldRefExt 45 14 M2KpFex M2TiFex M2PosLimCtrl Int Scaling 1 1 Volatile N M2FIdRefExt motor 2 external field current reference Motor 2 external field current reference input in percent of M2NomFlaCur 49 05 Note M2FidRefExt 45 14 is only valid if M2FidRefMode 45 13 M2FIdRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M2FreewhlLev motor 2 freewheeling level Motor 2 field exciter free wheeling level only when M2UsedFexType 49 07 DCF804 0050 or DCF804 0060 in percent ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage If 2 successive AC voltage measurements differ more than M2FreewhlLev 45 15 the free wheeling function is activate
193. 02 The result is a load dependent speed decrease in percent of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Example With DroopRate 24 02 3 and TorqintegRef 2 05 100 nominal motor torque the actual Speed decreases 3 of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 295 Signal Parameter name E C KpS p part speed controller Proportional gain of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal torque with KpS 24 03 3 if the speed error An is 5 of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Int Scaling 100 Type I Volatile N Load adaptive proportional gain The adaptive proportional gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out disturbances which are caused by low loads and backlash Moderate filtering of the speed error An is typically not enough to tune the drive The load adaptation is valid for positive KpSMin 24 04 and negative torque p part KpS 24 03 T KpSWeakpFiltTime 24 06 TorqRef2 2 09 KpSWeakp 24 05 KpSMin minimum p part speed controller KpSMin 24 04 determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output TorgRef2 2 09 is zero KpSMin 24 04 cannot be greater than KpS 24 03 Int Scaling 100 Type I Volatile N 24 03 geo up er KpSWeakp weakening point of p par
194. 02 follows 2 see page 64 TX PDO21 Enable 51 15 641 This value has to be calculated with 280 Hex 640 Node ID 51 02 Here 640 4 1 2 641 TX PDO21 TxType 51 16 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 TX PDO21 EvTime 51 17 10 10 2 10 ms TX PDO21 1stObj 51 18 8199 2007 Hex 8199 Transparent Status Word see page 62 TX PDO21 1stSubj 51 19 0 TX PDO21 2ndObj 51 20 8200 2008 Hex 8200 Transparent Actual Speed see page 62 TX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 21 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 121 TX PDO21 3rdObj 51 22 16386 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with TorqRef2 2 09 follows 16384 2 16386 see page 64 TX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 23 9 This value has to be taken from the parameters index E g with TorqRef2 2 09 follows 9 see page 64 TX PDO21 4thObj 51 24 16392 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with AuxStatWord 8 02 follows 16384 8 16392 see page 64 TX PDO21 4thSubj 51 25 2 This value has to be taken from the parameters index E g with AuxStatWord 8 02 follows 2 See page 64 TransparentlProfil 51 26 1 1 Transparent FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH
195. 02 1500 04 S01 0090 04 01 3300 04 S02 1500 05 S01 0090 05 01 3300 05 S02 1500 06 o Ooj O1 3 m o S01 0125 04 01 3300 06 S02 1500 07 S01 0125 05 01 3300 07 S02 1900 08 S01 0180 04 01 3300 08 S02 2000 04 S01 0180 05 01 3300 12 S02 2000 05 S01 0230 04 01 4000 04 S02 2050 05 S01 0230 05 S01 4000 05 S02 2050 06 S01 0315 04 S01 4000 06 S02 2050 07 S01 0315 05 S01 4000 07 S02 2500 04 S01 0290 06 S01 4000 08 S02 2500 05 S01 0405 04 01 3300 10 S02 2050 10 S01 0405 05 01 4000 10 S02 2600 10 S01 0470 04 01 4800 06 S02 2600 12 S01 0470 05 01 4800 07 S02 3000 04 S01 0590 06 01 4800 08 S02 3000 05 S01 0610 04 01 5200 04 S02 2500 06 S01 0610 05 01 5200 05 S02 2500 07 S01 0740 04 02 0025 04 S02 3000 06 S01 0740 05 02 0025 05 S02 3000 07 S01 0900 04 02 0050 04 S02 2500 08 S01 0900 05 S02 0050 05 S02 3000 08 S01 0900 06 02 0075 04 S02 3300 04 S01 0900 07 02 0075 05 S02 3300 05 S01 1200 04 S02 0100 04 S02 3300 06 S01 1200 05 S02 0100 05 S02 3300 07 S01 1500 04 S02 0140 04 S02 3300 08 S01 1500 05 S02 0140 05 S02 3300 12 S01 1500 06 S02 0200 04 S02 4000 04 S01 1500 07 02 0200 05 S02 4000 05 S01 1900
196. 0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Group A3 Signal Parameter name Current control 327 unit E C 43 01 OperModeSel operation mode selector Converter mode selection 0 ArmConv 6 pulse single armature converter default 1 FieldConv field exciter mode Attention The digital input for the external overvoltage protection is assigned by means of OvrVoltProt 10 13 2 12PParMaster 12 pulse parallel master 3 12PParSlave 12 pulse parallel slave 4 12PSerMaster 12 pulse serial master 5 12PSerSlave 12 pulse serial slave This parameter is write protected while Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 1 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N ArmConv 12PSerSlave ArmConv 43 02 CurSel current reference selector CurSel 43 02 selector 0 CurRef311 CurRef 3 11 calculated from torque reference as armature current reference default 1 CurRefExt CurRefExt 43 03 as armature current reference 2 AM analog input Al1 as armature current reference 3 Al2 analog input Al2 as armature current reference 4 AI3 analog input AI3 as armature current reference 5 Al4 analog input Al4 as armature current reference 6 AIS analog input AI5 as armature current reference 7 Al6 analog input AI6 as armature current reference 8 FexCurRef FldCurRefM1 3 30 from armature converter via DCSLink as field current reference only available if OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv 9 FluxRefEMF FluxRefEMF 3 27 from armature converter as f
197. 08 manual tuning of the armature current controller connect an oscilloscope to the fixed AO l act X4 9 10 on the SDCS CON 4 or X4 5 6 on the SDCS IOB 3 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode set CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt set M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to step the armature current controller make sure the motor is not turning Attention let the drive run only for a short time tune the armature current controller by means of M1KpArmCur 43 06 and M1TiArmCur 46 07 Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 41 optimal p part too high i part too short i part too long p part too low and i part too long t Armature current controller step responses remove On and Run via DriveWindow Set CurSel 43 02 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 back to their original settings Analog tacho In case an analog tacho is used for speed feedback it has to be tuned DriveWindow information simon las Sam Se 9l Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 42 Manual tuning of the analog tacho Set speed and analog tacho parameters o M1SpeedMin 20 01 o M1SpeedMax 20 02 o M1OvrSpeed 30 16 o MhiBaseSpeed 99 04 and o tacho voltage at 1000 rpm with M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 the maximum tacho speed is calculated automatically and shown in
198. 0V result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 2 1 V 3 X3 1 90 120V result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 2 1 V 4 Auto result if M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 1 V after the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of the speed feedback assistant Note TachoTerminal 4 25 is also valid for motor 2 depending on setting of ParChange 10 10 and MacroChangeMode 16 05 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y lactScaling scaling of the fixed actual current output l act Scaling of analog output for the actual output current in Ampere per 10 V output voltage See terminals SDCS CON 4 X4 9 and SDCS IOB 3 X4 5 Note The scaling can also be adjusted by means of R110 when using a SDCS IOB 3 Int Scaling 1 1A Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 209 Signal Parameter name E C Analog UO AlTacho Val analog input for tacho ol Measured actual voltage at analog tacho input The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper setting Note A value of 11 V equals 1 25 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Unused AM Val analog input 1 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 1 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y AI2 Val analog input 2 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 2 The integer scaling ma
199. 1 Default setting of 209 equals TorgRef2 2 09 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus3Val1 data set X 3 value 1 Data set X 3 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 3 Default setting of 802 equals AuxStatWord 8 02 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus3Val2 data set X 3 value 2 Data set X 3 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 3 Default setting of 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus3Val3 data set X 3 value 3 Data set X 3 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 3 Default setting of 108 equals MotTorq 1 08 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name DsetXplus5Val1 data set X 5 value 1 Data set X 5 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 5 Default setting of 901 equals FaultWord1 9 01 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N 389 E C DsetXplus5Val2 data set X 5 value 2 Data set X 5 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 5 Default setting of 902 equals FaultWord2 9 02 Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus5Val3 data set X 5 value 3 Data set X 5 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 5 Default setting of 903 equals FaultWord
200. 1 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 17 data word from overriding control to drive Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 126 DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 CONTROLNET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 2 2 500 kBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly Output instance 51 06 100 100 ABB Drives assembly Input instance 51 07 101 101 ABB Drives assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to NA not applicable when using Input I O par 9 51 25 ABB Drives assembly VSA I O size 51 26 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by ControlNet adapter
201. 1 07 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Control Word see page 63 Data set 1 word 1 RX PDO21 1stSubj 51 08 1 Hex 1 Control Word see page 63 Data set 1 word 1 RX PDO21 2ndObj 51 09 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Reference 1 see page 63 Data set 1 word 2 RX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 10 2 Hex 2 Reference 1 see page 63 Data set 1 word 2 RX PDO21 3rdObj 51 11 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Reference 2 see page 63 Data set 1 word 3 RX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 12 3 Hex 3 Reference 2 see page 63 Data set 1 word 3 RX PDO21 4thObj 51 13 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Reference 3 see page 63 Data set 3 word 1 RX PDO21 4thSubj 51 14 7 Hex 7 Reference 3 see page 63 Data set 3 word 1 TX PDO21 Enable 51 15 641 This value has to be calculated with 280 Hex 640 Node ID 51 02 Here 640 1 641 TX PDO21 TxType 51 16 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 TX PDO21 EvTime 51 17 10 10 10ms TX PDO21 1stObj 51 18 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Status Word see page 63 Data set 2 word 1 TX PDO21 1stSubj 51 19 4 Hex 4 Status Word see page 63 Data set 2 word 1 TX PDO21 2ndObj 51 20 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Actual Value 1 see page 63 Data set 2 word 2 TX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 21 5 Hex 5 Actual Value 1 see page 63 Data set 2 word 2 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800
202. 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 1 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Type C Volatile N ACW Bit15 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name def nit E C Ref1Sel speed reference 1 select Speed reference 1 value 0 SpeedRef2301 SpeedRef 23 01 default 1 AuxSpeedRef AuxSpeedhef
203. 1 motor 1 field exciter selftest faulty F529 M1FexNotOK FaultWord2 9 02 bit 12 0 motor 1 field exciter selftest OK B7 1 motor 1 field exciter not ready F537 M1FexRdyLost Fau tWord3 9 03 bit 4 motor 1 field exciter ready B8 1 motor 2 field exciter selftest faulty F530 M2FexNotOK FaultWord2 9 02 bit 13 0 motor 2 field exciter selftest OK B9 1 motor 2 field exciter not ready F538 M2FexRdyLost Fau tWord3 9 03 bit 5 0 motor 2 field exciter ready B10 1 waiting for zero current 0 no action B11 1 field reversal active armature current controller is blocked 0 no action B12 1 0 B13 1 current controller not released because DevLimPLL 97 13 is reached 0 no action Bi4 1 mains not in synchronism AC F514 MainsNotSync FaultWord1 9 01 bit 13 0 no action Bi5 1 Current controller not released This bit is set in case of a relevant fault Fxxx or an alarm Axxx of alarm level 3 0 no action Note A set bit does not necessarily lead to a fault message it depends also on the status of the drive Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 6 06 Unused 6 07 6 08 6 09 Signal Parameter name SelBridge selected bridge Selected current conducting bridge 0 NoBridge no bridge selected 1 Bridge1 bridge 1 selected motoring bridge 2 Bridge2 bridge 2 selected generating bridge Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y Unused Unused
204. 10 are reserved for the Adaptive Program and can be used for custom setting Parameters 19 01 to 19 12 can be used in the same way but are not stored in the flash e Connect the user constant to a block as usual by the input selection parameter The user constants can be changed while the Adaptive Program is running They may have values from 32767 to 32767 Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 166 Parameter value as a boolean input How the block handles the input The block e reads the selected value as an integer e uses the bit defined by the bit field as the boolean input and e interprets bit value 1 as true and 0 as false Example The figure below shows the value of Block11In3 84 07 when the input is connected to DI2 AII digital inputs are available in D StatWord 8 05 Bit O corresponds to DI1 and bit 1 to DI2 Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8407 Block1In3 Connection to 805 a 805 output of Dl s CANCEL group x 100 index Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8408 Block1Attrib Setting of bit 1 of 0100 hex block1In3 CANCEL Note The parameter selected as an input should have a packed boolean value binary data word Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 167 Constant as a boolean input How to set and connect the input e Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode Enter e Give the co
205. 100 2 and X100 3 21 reserved 22 Exc Appl 1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADW00031 1 If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M2FlIdMinTrip motor 2 minimum field trip The drive trips with F542 M2FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 9 if M2FlaMinTrip 49 08 in percent of M2NomFlaCur 49 05 is still undershot when F aMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Note M2FIaMinTrip 49 08 is not valid during field heating and field economy In this case the trip level is automatically set to 50 of M2FidHeatRef 49 06 The drive trips with F542 M2FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 9 if 50 of M2FidHeatRef 49 06 is still undershot when FidMinTripDly 45 18 is elapsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N M2FldOvrCurLev motor 2 field overcurrent level The drive trips with F518 M2FexOverCur FaultWord2 9 02 bit 1 if M2FIdOvrCurLev 49 09 in percent of M2NomFlaCur 49 05 is exceeded It is recommended to set M2FidOvrCurtLev 49 09 at least 25 higher than M2NomFlaCur 49 05 The field overcurrent fault is inactive if M2FidOvrCurLev 49 09 is set to 135 96 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N NotUsed 135 125 def NotUsed nit E C 49 10 M2KpFex motor 2 p part field current controller Proportional gain of the field current controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal field current
206. 12 16 MCW Bit13 17 MCW Bit14 18 MCW Bit15 19 ACW Bit12 20 ACW Bit13 21 ACW Bit14 22 ACW Bit15 Int Scaling 1 1 Invert speed ref 1 selection implements a change over switch together with speed ref 2 selection E g if speed ref 1 selection switch is open the switch for speed ref 2 is closed and vice versa switch for speed ref 2 is fixed open default switch for speed ref 2 is fixed closed 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is op
207. 122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 or F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 is set depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Note If the brake close apply command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1 BrakeAckSel 42 02 are different for a longer time than set in M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 either A122 MechBrake AlarmWorda 2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 is set depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M1StrtTorqRefSel motor 1 start torque reference selector Motor 1 start torque selector 0 NotUsed start torque function is blocked and the start torque reference is fixed zero default 1 Memory Torque memory released The minimum value equals the absolute value of SirtTorqRef 42 08 The torque memory can be reset by means of AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 13 2 StrtTorqRef SirtTorqRef 42 08 3 Alt analog input Al1 4 Al2 analog input Al2 5 Al3 analog input AI3 6 Al4 analog input Al4 7 Al5 analog input AIS 8 Al6 analog input Al6 Note Torque memory is the presetting of the torque when starting with e g suspended load The preset torque equals the actual torque stored when the brake open lift command is removed if the stored torque is greater than the value in StrtTorqRef 42 08 Otherwise the value in StrtTorqRef 42 08 is taken After energizing the drive the value of StrtTorqRef 4
208. 179 Sj I 180 iei A sede cedesededcveds 180 Switch EE 181 gez e 181 TON HE 182 dI I Ec 182 Spe R 183 Dia raM TX 184 Signal and parameter list 185 Signals and parameiers nennen enne nnne snnt EEEE nnne Ennen 185 Signal groups et 185 Parameter groups Jet 187 Signal and parameter EE 190 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g SOU EE 190 Physical actual values iesu euet e aeaee NEEE Enna n sauces ENEE ERES SEE 190 GROUP e LEER 194 Speed controller signals sse 194 Icio E 198 Reference actual values AEN 198 GQLOUp RE 201 luet o RE 201 Eleng EE 209 Al e e E EE 209 GOU o RII T enEEIS 210 Blees LEI 210 El iie ente iier haute avia tn ee 216 Control words cccccccececeeeeeeceeeeeecceeeeeseaeeeeecaeeeeeseaeeeeseaeeeeseceeeeeeeneeeeeseaas 216 THREE dtt 222 Status limit words sesssssssssssessseseeeeeeeeeennenn nennen nnne 222 El EE 228 Fault alarm words nennen nnne nnne nennen 228 eremo omm 244 Start Stop SeleCt WEE 244 GROUP RRE 257 Speed reference inputs iiec eeu oe adie Ever ra en 257 EIST EEN 264 Constant speeds ieietieiutaiutaliutetieitetietin tiers 264 LEIT T3 E 265 Analog inputs 2 2 enden erc
209. 19 M2FexCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit 2 communication faulty 3 FexFaulty F530 M2FexNotOK FaultWora2 9 02 bit 13 field exciter selftest faulty 4 FexNotReady F538 M2FexRdyLost FaultWord3 9 03 bit 5 field exciter not ready 5 FexUnderCur F542 M2FexLowCur Fau tWord3 9 03 bit 9 field exciter undercurrent 6 FexOverCur F518 M2FexOverCur FaultWord2 9 02 bit 1 field exciter overcurrent 7 WrongSetting check setting of M1UsedFexType 99 12 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 216 Signal Parameter name Control words All signals in this group except UsedMCW 7 04 can be written to my means of DWL DCS800 Control Panel Adaptive Program application program or overriding control MainCtriWord main control word MCW The main control word contains all drive depending commands and can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit Name Value Comment BO On Off1N 1 Command to RdyRun state With MainContCtrlMode 21 16 On Contactors are closed field exciter and fans are started With MainContCtriMode 21 16 On amp Run RdyRun flag in MainStatWord 8 01 is forced to 1 Command to Off state Stopping via Off1Mode 21 02 No Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop Command to Onlnhibit state Stop by coasting The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to
210. 196 Type SI Volatile Y CurRippleFilt filtered current ripple Relative filtered current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Filtered with 200 ms Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y MainsVoltActRel relative actual mains voltage Relative actual mains voltage in percent of NomMains Volt 99 10 Int Scaling 100 1 Type I Volatile Y 191 E C MainsVoltAct actual mains voltage Actual mains voltage Filtered with 10 ms Int Scaling 1 1V Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ArmVoltActRel relative actual armature voltage Relative actual armature voltage in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 Note the value is also influenced by AdjUDC 97 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y ArmVoltAct actual armature voltage Actual armature voltage Filtered with 10 ms Note the value is also influenced by AdjUDC 97 23 Int Scaling 1 1 V Type SI Volatile Y ConvCurActRel relative actual converter current DC Relative actual converter current in percent of ConvNomCur 4 05 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvCurAct actual converter current DC Actual converter current Filtered with 10 ms Int Scaling 1 1A Type SI EMF VoltActRel relative actual EMF Relative actual EMF in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 EMF VoltActRel 1 17 Int Scaling 100 1
211. 1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus ModuleType 51 01 CANopen Node ID 51 02 1 set node address as required Bauarate 51 03 8 8 1 MBits s PDO21 Cfg 51 04 1 0 Configuration via CANopen objects 1 Configuration via RCAN 01 adapter parameters RX PDO21 Enable 51 05 769 This value has to be calculated with 300 Hex 768 Node ID 51 02 Here 768 1 769 Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 120 RX PDO 21 TxType 51 06 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 RX PDO21 1stObj 51 07 8197 2005 Hex 8197 Transparent Control Word see page 62 RX PDO21 1stSubj 51 08 0 RX PDO21 2ndObj 51 09 8198 2006 Hex 8198 Transparent Reference Speed see page 62 RX PDO21 2ndSubj 51 10 RX PDO21 3rdObj 51 11 16409 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with TorqRefA 25 01 follows 16384 25 16409 see page 64 RX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 12 This value has to be taken from the parameters index E g with TorqRefA 25 01 follows 1 see page 64 RX PDO21 4thObj 51 13 16391 This value has to be calculated with 4000 Hex 16384 parameter group number E g with AuxCtrlWord 7 02 follows 16384 7 16391 see page 64 RX PDO21 4thSubj 51 14 This value has to be taken from the parameters index E g with AuxCtrlWord 7
212. 2 08 is set as torque memory Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N StrtTorqRef start torque reference Selected motor start torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name BrakeEStopMode emergency stop mode brake Selected motor BrakeEStopMode 42 09 determines the reaction when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 Off3N respectively E stop is set low 0 Disable the brake is closed applied according to the standard brake control default 1 Enable the brake is closed applied immediately together with the E stop command Note If BrakeEStopMode 42 09 Enable the E StopRamp 22 04 should be shorter than the time needed to stop the motor with the mechanical brake applied only Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M1TorqProvTime motor 1 torque proving time Brake torque proving acknowledge The drive trips with F556 TorqProv FaultWord4 9 04 bit 7 if the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command is set and the acknowledge TorqProvOK AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 11 is not set before M1TorgProvTime 42 10 is elapsed The torque proving is inactive if M1TorqProvTime 42 10 is set to O Note The acknowledge signal TorqProvOK has to be provided by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control and is set by means of a rising edge 0 1 The torque reference might be set by me
213. 2 2 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal2 3 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal2 4 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N MailBox3 mailbox 3 node ID Mailbox 3 can transmit receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal3 1 94 26 TrmtRecVal3 2 94 27 TrmtRecVal3 3 94 28 and TrmtRecVal3 4 94 29 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox3 94 24 is set to 0 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MailBoxCycle3 cycle time mailbox 3 The function of MailBoxCycle3 94 25 is depending on the setting of MailBox3 94 24 If MailBox3 94 24 is positive A data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle3 94 25 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals values from 1 4 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle3 94 25
214. 22 Note Al5LowVal 13 22 is only valid if ConvModeAl5 13 23 10V Bi Note To use current please set the DIP switches RAIO 01 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ConvModeAI5 conversion mode analog input 5 The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and current is done via DIP switches on the RAIO 01 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 120V 10V Uni O Vto 10V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto10V 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Bipolar and unipolar DIP switch setting Input signal type Analogue input An Analogue input AI2 0 4 20 mA ON ON iii TAT 0 2 10 V 123456 123456 0 2 V 0 4 20 mA ON ON i WHT T L H 0 2V 123456 123456 Default Voltage and current Input signal DIP switch settings Analogue input 1 Analogue input 2 Current signal oN ON 0 4 20 mA HI III Default 123456 123456 ON ON Volt i m sev EEL III 123466 fat AR en Int Scaling 1
215. 24 4 70 24 6 70 24 4 8 70 24 10 70 24 12 70 24 4 14 90 16 90 17 90 18 91 01 91 02 91 03 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note The update time is the time within the drive is reading values from the data sets Since the drive is a communication slave the actual cycle time depends on the cycle time of the communication master Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 111 Transmitted data set table Send from the drive to the overriding control typical Addresses for data transmitted to the overriding control Dataset Data set Selection Default Parameter name number index COM 8 parameter value default values 1 92 01 801 MainStatWord 70 24 1 2 92 02 104 MotSpeed 92 03 209 TorqRef2 92 04 802 AuxStatWord 92 05 101 MotSpeedFilt 92 06 108 MotTorq 92 07 FaulWord1 92 08 FaulWord2 92 09 FaulWord3 92 10 FaulWord4 92 11 AlarmWord1 92 12 AlarmWord2 AlarmWord3 LimWord DI StatWord 92 16 DO StatWord 70 24 11 92 17 BridgeTemp 92 18 Mot1TempMeas 93 01 70 24 18 93 02 93 03 70 24 4 3 70 24 4 5 70 24 7 Mj N j N zi D N C 70 24 9 70 24 15 Note The update time is the time within the drive is reading values from the data sets Since the drive is a slave the actual communication cycle time depends on the mast
216. 2FlaScale 45 21 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode To use S M2FidScale 45 21 following inequation has to be valid M2NomFldCur 49 05 lt S M2FlaScale 45 21 lt maximum field current of the used field exciter For S M2FidScale 45 21 gt maximum field current of the used field exciter A132 ParConflict AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 15 is generated For M2NomFlaCur 49 05 gt S M2FlaScale 45 21 the scaling is automatically set by M2NomFlaCur 49 05 The scaling factor is released when M2NomFidCur 49 05 lt S M2FldScale 45 21 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over immediately Int Scaling 100 1A Type l Volatile N M1OperModeFex4 motor 1 fex4 operation mode selector The FEX 425 Int DCF803 0016 and DCF803 0035 can be connected to either a 3 phase supply or a single phase supply 0 1 phase single phase supply 123 phase 3 phase supply default Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M2OperModeFex4 motor 2 fex4 operation mode selector The FEX 425 Int DCF803 0016 and DCF803 0035 can be connected to either a 3 phase supply or a single phase supply 0 1 phase single phase supply 123 phase 3 phase supply default Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N MultiFexCount Multi fex count Number of connected field exciters For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control SADWO000309 Int Scaling 1 Type V
217. 2PandMFCom Drive to drive and master follower communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 SDCS COM 8 communication loss ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 ArmCurDev armature current deviation B14 TachoRange Overflow of AlTacho input or M1OvrSpeed 30 16 respectively M2OvrSpeed 49 21 have been changed B15 BrakeLongFalling A116 selected motor mechanical brake M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1BrakeLongTime 42 12 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 234 Signal Parameter name 9 07 AlarmWord2 alarm word 2 Alarm word 2 Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment and alarm level A117 4 BO ArmCurRipple B1 B15 FoundNewAppl A118 1 ApplDiff A119 OverVoltProt AutotuneFail MechBrake FaultSuppres SpeedScale SpeedFb ExternalDl AlRange FieldBusCom ParRestored LocalCmdLoss ParAdded ParConflict A132 Int Scaling 1 1 Type armature current ripple CurRippleMode 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 found new application on Memory Card activate application on Memory Card by means of ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl application on drive and Memory Card are different activate application on Memory Card by means of ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl overvo
218. 3 Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Definition Action Alarm is active larmlevel lt EH 321 UserAlarm11 User defined fault by application program bit 11 5522 322 UserAlarm12 User defined fault by application program bit 12 323 UserAlarm13 User defined fault by application program always 324 UserAlarm14 User defined fault by application program 325 UserAlarm16 User defined fault by application program 9 09 always Seen eege rl Alarmlevel is set in the application program Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Notices Text on DCS800 Control Panel 477 A notice is a message to inform the user about a specific occurrence which happened to the drive Definition Action 718 PowerUp Energize electronics The auxiliary voltage for the drives electronics is switched on 719 FaultReset Reset Reset of all faults which can be acknowledged 801 APNotice1 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 802 APNotice2 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 803 APNotice3 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 804 APNotice4 User defined notice by Adaptive Program 805 APNotice5 User defined notice by Adaptive Program AccessDenied Access to Memory Card Access to Memory Card is denied due to another access ParNoCyc
219. 3 External DC breaker on command e g from operator DC breaker e P AC breaker controlled by the drive DC breaker controlled externally In the above example the AC breaker is controlled by the drive The drive closes and opens the AC breaker with the command MainContactorOn The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set The DC breaker is controlled externally e g by the operator The result is checked by means of DC BreakAck 10 23 In case the DC breaker acknowledge is missing A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 2 is set is forced to 150 and single firing pulses are given The DC breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 74 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled externally Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 External DC breaker on command e g from operator DC breaker No AC breaker DC breaker controlled externally In the above example no AC breaker is used and the DC breaker is controlled externally e g by the operator The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set The DC breaker can be tripped active
220. 3 is checked against the EMF If the polarity is wrong F553 TachPolarity is generated Tacho range If an overflow of the AlTacho input is imminent F554 TachoRange is generated Check for the right connections X3 1 to X3 4 on the SDCS CON 4 Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 445 Status messages Display of status fault and alarm signals Categories of signals and display options A seven segment display H2500 is located on the control board SDCS CON 4 and it shows the state of drive 0 7s 0 7s 0 7s internal FlashP ROM error check sum external FlashPROM error check sum U RAM error RAM error no Firmware watchdog error H Program is not running Normal situation Download firmware S5 1 2 Request download Firmware step 2 S5 3 4 7seg_DCS8_a dsf The seven segment display shows the messages in code The letters and numbers of multi character codes are displayed one after the other for 0 7 seconds ata time Plain text messages are available on the DCS800 Control Panel and in the fault logger of DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 0 7s 0 7s 0 7s 0 7s FS Iu F514 mains not in synchronism For evaluation via digital outputs or communication to the overriding control 16 bit words are available containing all fault and alarm signals as binary code FaultWord1 9 01
221. 3 9 03 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus7Val1 data set X 7 value 1 Data set X 7 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 7 Default setting of 904 equals FaultWord4 9 04 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus7Val2 data set X 7 value 2 Data set X 7 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 7 Default setting of 906 equals AlarmWord1 9 06 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus7Val3 data set X 7 value 3 Data set X 7 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 7 Default setting of 907 equals AlarmWord2 9 07 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus9Val1 data set X 9 value 1 Data set X 9 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 9 Default setting of 908 equals AlarmWords3 9 08 Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus9Val2 data set X 9 value 2 Data set X 9 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 9 Default setting of 803 equals LimWord 8 03 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus9Val3 data set X 9 value 3 Data set X49 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 9 Default setting of 805 equals DI StatWord 8 05 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus11Val1 data set X 11 value 1 Data set X 11 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBase
222. 3 XXX A la XXX A rated field current NomMains Volt 99 10 xxx V Usen XXX V nominal supply voltage AC M1UsedFexType 99 12 0 NotUsed Field current autotuning for large field exciters The field current autotuning has to be started directly in the large field exciter Parameter Field converter Comments ServiceMode 99 06 2 FieldCurAuto Give the On and Run command within 20 s MiKpArmCur 43 06 XXX Is set by field current autotuning M1TiArmCur 43 07 XXX Is set by field current autotuning M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 096 Is set to zero by field current autotuning Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 66 Stand alone field exciter Overriding control H CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord DCS800 DCF505 excitation DCF506 CommandSel 10 01 Local I O Stand alone field exciter In the stand alone field exciters set OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv and CommandSel 10 01 Local I O or MainCtrlWord as source for the control word OnOff1 StartStop and Reset The reference is selected by CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt or AI to AI6 The field exciter mode uses the standard armature current controller as field current controller Thus the field current is set by means of M1NomCur 99 03 To close the field contactor use CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Parameters to be set in the stand alone field exciter Before starting
223. 3 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Parameter setting example 2 using User specific assembly User specific assembly can run with up to 9 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile 131 Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus ModuleType 51 01 DEVICENET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 2 2 500 kBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using User specific assembly Output instance 51 06 102 102 User specific assembly Input instance 51 07 103 103 User specific assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to 1 18 Set these values according Input I O par 9 51 25 table Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 depending on desired data words and according to the desired numbers of data words VSA I O size 51 26 1 9 Defines the length of the User specific assembly in pairs of data words E g a parameter value of 4 means 4 word as output and 4 words as input FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE defaul
224. 348 SIE lee Mulle 348 GOL Tekst 360 Speed measurement teo teo eei bete eet eset esee tees 360 Cleo PT 367 Ile e EE 367 CI eee 368 leie EE 368 Group 60 25 69 EE 369 Application program parameters 0 ccccceeeeee cette eeeceeee settee eeeeaaaeeeeeeeeteee 369 EI Le 20 EE 370 BIR LE 370 etam 375 DDriVebist ses monton Tete aanas eaa E Dto EOD UR e DECLA ER DN EGER bc 375 ek 375 Adaptive Program Control 375 GIOUP 84 EH 377 yaya Eet ee Le EE 377 EIST EE 380 User constants utiutetuebtitetebeb behoben 380 EI 8G EN EERECRE I ioe 382 Adaptive Program oufputs nennen nnn 382 CIT 383 lun ET 383 EIST OQ EE 385 Receiving data sets addresses A 385 eres EE E ep reree 387 Receiving data sets addresses 2 387 Elle E EE 388 Transmit data sets addresses A 388 GROUP OS eves scere eoe outlet eiut tuti iech fe Gecke Zeche See Geh e tiens 390 Transmit data sets addresses 2 390 Elle EE 391 Bleid EE 391 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g DCS800 Control Panel operation Chapter Oovervlew nennen El DCS800 Control Panel Display Oovervlew nnne nnn General display features Outp tTiode 5n saa nana nnde TE Rie Me aa Other modes nete nette AAT Maintenance Fault tracing Chapter oVelVIew c eee e ec dera acides
225. 4 1 fault O no fault AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 fault 0 no fault AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N ExtFaultOnSel external fault on selector ExtFaultOnSel 30 33 determines the reaction to an external fault 0 Fault external fault is always valid independent from drive state default 1 Fault amp RdyRun external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 for at least 6 s Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N ExtAlarmOnSel external alarm on selector ExtAlarmOnSel 30 34 determines the reaction to an external alarm 0 Alarm external alarm is always valid independent from drive state default 1 Alarm amp RdyRun external alarm is only valid when drive state is RdyRun MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 for at least 6 s Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N FB TimeOut fieldbus time out Time delay before a communication break with a fieldbus is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F528 FieldBusCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit 11 or A128 FieldBusCom AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 11 is set The communication fault and alarm are inactive if FB TimeOut 30 35 is set to 0 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N SpeedFbFitMode speed feedback fault mode SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 3 0 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When
226. 50 e g 25 drives including one external field exciter each Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N 20kBi ls 1 ol 12P TimeOut 12 pulse timeout Time delay before a 12 pulse communication break is declared and F535 12PulseCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 2 is set 12P TimeOut 94 03 is only active in the 12 pulse master The communication fault is inactive if 12P TimeOut 94 03 is set to 0 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N 12P SlaNode 12 pulse slave node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of the 12 pulse slave drive in the 12 pulse master drive See also examples 2 and 4 above The 12 pulse node ID is inactive if 12P SlaNode 94 04 is set to O Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Unused Unused FexTimeOut field exciter timeout Time delay before a field exciter communication break is declared Depending on the fex with the communication break either F516 M1FexCom FaultWord1 9 01 bit 15 or F519 M2FexCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit 2 is set FexTimeOut 94 07 is only active in the armature converter The communication fault is inactive if FexTimeOut 94 07 is set to 0 ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N M1FexNode motor 1 field exciter node ID Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 1 field exciter in the drive See also examples 1 to 4 above The field exciter node ID is inactive if M1FexNode 94 08 is set to 0 Note M1FexNode 94 08 is void when M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed or OnBoard
227. 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by CANopen adapter The values can be automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCAN 01 DCS800 parameter setting using group 51 Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Further information RX and TX parameters 51 07 51 14 and 51 18 51 25 are directly connected to the desired DCS800 parameters Take care that the used parameters are deleted from group 90 and 92 to prevent data trouble Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 122 Parameter setting example 2 using groups 90 and 92 Communication via groups 90 and 92 is using 4 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using groups 90 and 92 Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrIWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive Dse
228. 67 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N rom SpeedStep speed step SpeedStep 23 10 is added to the speed error An at the speed controller s input The given min max values are limited by M1SpeedMin 20 02 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Note Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedErrFilt2 2 filter for An Speed error An filter time 2 There are three different filters for actual speed and speed error An SpeedFiltTime 50 06 is filtering the actual speed and should be used for filter times smaller than 30 ms SpeedErrFilt 23 06 and SpeedErrFilt2 23 11 are filtering the speed error An and should be used for filter times greater than 30 ms It is recommended to set SpeedErrFilt 23 06 SpeedErrFilt2 23 1 1 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N WinCtrlMode window control mode Window control mode 0 SpeedErrWin Standard window control Speed error An has to be in a window defined by WinWidthPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09 Typically used for torque followers to limit differential speed default 1 SpeedActWin Speed actual has to be in a window defined by WinWidthPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09 Typically used for torqu
229. 7 DsetXplustOVal eeen 387 DsetXplus 1 1Val1 sssssssss 389 DsetXplus 1 1Val2 ee 389 DsetXplus11Val8 aeee 389 DsetXplus12Val1 eeen 387 DsetXplus12Val2 eeen 387 DsetXplus12Val38 eeen 387 DsetXplus193Val1 eee 390 DsetXplus13Val2 sssssss 390 DsetXplus13Val8 eeen 390 DsetXplus14Val1 a 387 DsetXplus14Val2 eeen 387 DsetXplust4Val eeen 387 DsetXplus15Val1 eneee 390 DsetXplus15Val2 AA 390 DsetXplus15Val3 A 390 DsetXplus1Val1 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 388 DsetXplus1Val2 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 388 DsetXplus1Val3 122 139 141 150 388 DsetXplus2Val1 122 386 DsetXplus2Val2 A 386 DsetXplus2Val eenen 386 DsetXplus3Val1 sssss 122 388 DsetXplus3Val2 eese 388 Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 488 DsetXplusSVal sees 388 DsetXplus4Val seesesseeesses 386 DsetXplus4Val2 sees 386 DsetXplus4Val eener 386 DsetXplus5Val1 A 389 DsetXplus5Val2 AEN 389 DsetXplusSVaI A 389 DsetXplus6Val AEN 386 DsetXplus6Val2 A 386 DsetXplus6Val 139 141 386 DsetXplus7 Val EEN 389 DsetXplus7Val2 EEN 389 DsetXplus7Val 139 141 389 DsetXplus8Val e 386 DsetXplus8Val2 A 386 DsetXplus8Val3 A 386 DsetXplusOVal
230. 70 44 13 and FldCurFlux90 44 14 to default give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to run the motor at e g half base speed make sure that the motor is running without load read ArmVoltAct 1 14 e g the measured value is 220 V reduce the flux with FluxCorr 44 27 until ArmVoltAct 1 14 reaches 90 96 of the 1 measurement read the value of Mot1FlidCurRel 1 29 keep it in mind and write it into FlaCurFlux90 44 14 after this procedure is finished reduce the flux with FluxCorr 44 27 until ArmVoltAct 1 14 reaches 70 96 of the 1 measurement read the value of Mot1FlaCurhRel 1 29 keep it in mind and write it into FlaCurFlux70 44 13 after this procedure is finished reduce the flux with FluxCorr 44 27 until ArmVoltAct 1 14 reaches 40 96 of the 1 measurement read the value of Mot1FlaCurhRel 1 29 keep it in mind and write it into FlaCurFlux40 44 12 after this procedure is finished Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 49 E DriveWindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 fo Allez si aai B DCS 800 D1 0H1 i 01 Phys Act Values 02 SPC Signals 03 Ref act Values 04 Information xola sl mmx alk ome x 3 01 04 MotSpeed rpm 40H 1 Par 1 4 1 01 14 ArmVoltAct V 10H1 Par 1 14 2 01 29 MottFldCurRel 0H1 Par 1 29 8 30 12 MIFldMinTrip O 1 Par 30 12 44 01 FldCtriMode 0H1 Par 44 1 p 44 07 EMF CtrlPosLim 25 10H1 Par 44 7 44 08 EMF
231. 8 04 this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Volatile Y RFE CtriWord control word resonance frequency eliminator RFECW The Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit Name BO FilterRelease B1 BalFilter B2 reserved to B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Value Comment 1 release the RFE filter with a static 1 0 block the RFE filter with a static O 1 Balance the RFE filter after a parameter change Use a pulse of gt 10 ms 0 no action Type Volatile Y 221 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 222 Signal Parameter name Status limit words 8 01 MainStatWord main status word MSW Main status word Bit BO B1 B2 B15 Name RdyOn RdyRun RdyRef Tripped Off2NStatus Off3NStatus OnInhibited AtSetpoint Remote AboveLimit reserved reserved reserved Int Scaling 1 lt gp c oO OO ck Och Oz Oh Comment ready to switch on not ready to switch on ready to generate torque not ready to generate torque operation released Running operation blocked fault indication no fault Off2 not active Off2 Onlnhibit state active Off3 not active Off3 OnInhibit state active Onlnhibited state is active after a fault Emergency Off Coast Stop Off2
232. 9 01 M1NomVolt 99 02 M1NomCur 99 03 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 NomMains Volt 99 10 and M1NomFlidCur 99 1 1 4 After filling out the parameters it is in most cases possible to turn the motor for the first time 5 Select an application macro by means of ApplMacro 99 08 macro and ApplRestore 99 07 Yes Check with MacroSel 8 10 Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 31 03 Autotuning field current controller 1 2 3 Open the workspace 03 DCS800 Autotuning field current controller dww Enter the field circuit data FldCtriMode 44 01 MQ1NomFlaCur 99 11 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 FieldCurAuto and set On within 20 s During the autotuning the main respectively field contactor will be closed the field circuit is measured by means of increasing the field current to nominal field current and the field current control parameters are set The armature current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn When the autotuning is finished successfully check M1KpFex 44 02 M1TiFex 44 03 and M1PosLimCtrl 45 02 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning 04 Autotuning armature cur
233. 9 06 2 FieldCurAuto Give the On and Run command within 20 s MiKpArmCur 43 06 XXX Is set by field current autotuning MiTiArmCur 43 07 XXX Is set by field current autotuning M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 096 Is set to zero by field current autotuning Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 68 DC breaker DC contactor General The DC breaker is used to protect the DC motor or in case of too low mains voltage or voltage dips the generating bridge of the drive from overcurrent In case of an overcurrent the DC breaker is forced open by its own tripping spring DC breakers have different control inputs and trip devices anOn Off coil with a typical time delay of 100 to 200 ms ahigh speed tripping coil e g Secheron CID to trip the DC breaker within 2 ms from e g the drive aninternal tripping spring which is released by overcurrent and set mechanically There are different ways how to control the DC breaker depending on the available hardware and the customers on off philosophy Following are the most common examples Attention If a DC breaker is used and DC voltage measurement is taken inside the converter module D1 D4 modules and D5 D7 in default configuration then deselect the automatic offset compensation by setting OffsetUDC 97 24 0 HVCB controlled externally DC breaker controlled by the drive gt Imax trip command On comma
234. A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning before opening the workspaces the drive has to be connected to DriveWindow Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 34 Manual tuning UO configuration To set the in and outputs see chapter I O configuration Field current controller Manual tuning of the field current controller connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor Mot1FlaCurHRef 1 29 and FlaCurRefM1 3 30 set M1FidMinTrip 30 12 0 96 set M1FidRefMode 45 05 M1FIdRefExt give On via DriveWindow use M1FidRefExt 45 06 to step the field current controller tune the field current controller by means of M1KpFex 44 02 and M1TiFex 44 03 o Steps size about 2 6 5 6 of nominal field current do not hit any limits during the step and the step response e g max field current or supply voltage o Step response time 50 ms 60 ms count only from 10 to 90 96 o where to step 30 96 60 and 80 of nominal field current step reference optimal curve p part too low p part too high i part too short Field current controller step responses Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g E Drivewindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 lef Inid File Edit view Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help 3 sex x eps ala pope ed spp
235. Adar 70 24 11 Default setting of 806 equals DO StatWord 8 06 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus11Val2 data set x 11 value 2 Data set X 11 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 11 Default setting of 124 equals BridgeTemp 1 24 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXplus11Val3 data set X 11 value 3 Data set X 11 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 11 Default setting of 112 equals Mot TempMeas 1 22 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 390 Signal Parameter name Transmit data sets addresses 2 DsetXplus13Val1 data set X 13 value 1 Data set X 13 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 13 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus13Val2 data set X 13 value 2 Data set X 13 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 13 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus13Val3 data set X 13 value 3 Data set X 13 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 13 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus15Val1 data set X 15 value 1 Data set X 15 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus15Val2 data set X 15 value 2 Data set
236. Alarm3 A312 UserAlarm4 Alarm text UserAlarm5 UserAlarm6 UserAlarm7 UserAlarm8 UserAlarm9 UserAlarm10 UserAlarm11 UserAlarm12 UserAlarm13 UserAlarm14 UserAlarm15 UserAlarm16 9 10 SysFaultWord system fault word Operating system faults from SDCS COM 8 board Comment Volatile Y Fault code F default parameters are invalid one of the User macros is invalid AMCOS fault please contact Your local ABB agent problems when writing to the flash memory please try again timeout of task T2 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent timeout of task T3 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent timeout of task T4 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent timeout of task T5 if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent timeout of task State if happens frequently please contact Your local ABB agent application on SDCS COM 8 faulty application on SDCS COM 8 faulty crash of CPU due to EMC or hardware problems Bit Fault text BO Factory macro parameter file error B1 User macro parameter file error B2 Non Volatile operating system error B3 File error in flash B4 Internal time level T2 overflow 100 us B5 Internal time level T3 overflow 1 ms B6 Internal time level T4 overflow 50 ms B7 Internal time level T5 overflow 1 s B8 State overflow B9 Application window ending overflow B10 Application program overflow B11 Illegal instruction B12 Register s
237. BO Node17 DCSLink node17 active and OK 0 DCSLink node17 not active or faulty B1 Node18 DCSLink node18 active and OK DCSLink node18 not active or faulty Node19 DCSLink node19 active and OK DCSLink node19 not active or faulty Node20 DCSLink node20 active and OK DCSLink node20 not active or faulty Node21 DCSLink node21 active and OK DCSLink node21 not active or faulty Node22 DCSLink node22 active and OK DCSLink node22 not active or faulty Node23 DCSLink node23 active and OK DCSLink node23 not active or faulty Node24 DCSLink node24 active and OK DCSLink node24 not active or faulty Node25 DCSLink node25 active and OK DCSLink node25 not active or faulty Node26 DCSLink node26 active and OK DCSLink node26 not active or faulty Node27 DCSLink node27 active and OK DCSLink node27 not active or faulty Node28 DCSLink node28 active and OK DCSLink node28 not active or faulty Node29 DCSLink node29 active and OK DCSLink node29 not active or faulty DCSLink node30 active and OK DCSLink node30 not active or faulty DCSLink node31 active and OK DCSLink node31 not active or faulty DCSLink node32 active and OK DCSLink node32 not active or faulty Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y Node30 Node31 Node32 OO ch OO ch Osch OO ch Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Ext IO Stat external IO status Status of external I O Bit Value Comment BO first RAIO xx detected see A O
238. CF803 0050 5 DCF804 0050 6 DCF803 0060 7 DCF804 0060 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 10 DCF803 0016 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 17 ExFex AI2 18 ExFex A Motor 2 used field exciter type no or third party field exciter connected integrated 1 Q field exciter for sizes D1 D4 only default internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 50 A field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 2 Q 3 phase field exciter external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via AI2 third party field exciter acknowledge via AI3 19 ExFex Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int external 2 Q 16 A field exciter DCF803 0016 or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X
239. CON 4 Terminal Allocation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 492 RefMUX it in Re eg 82 257 Ref1Sel89 109 119 122 125 127 129 131 133 139 144 147 258 Ref2MUX eeeeeeeeeeennnn 82 260 B else A 89 259 ResCurDetectDel 228 305 435 451 ResCurDetectLim 228 305 435 451 ResCurDetectSel 82 89 228 305 435 451 ET EE 82 245 ResetAhCounter eeeeeee 82 405 RevDly 59 60 64 66 330 433 463 HevMode araeir rier sranna tpn enei 59 60 330 RevVoltMargin A 337 433 REE CiWord 1 2 27 2803 ot ete 221 REE Statword so eo et el 227 RX PDO 21 1stObj 119 122 RX PDO21 1StSubj 119 122 RX PDO21 2ndSubj 119 122 RX PDO 21 2ndtObj 119 122 RX PDO 21 3rdObj 119 122 RX PDO 21 3raSubj 119 122 RX PDO 21 4thObj 119 122 RX PDO 21 4thSubj 119 122 RX PDO21 Enable 119 122 HN PO Txvivpe 119 122 S Blockbrdo snno a 28 S BlockBridge2 ssesssssss 401 S ConvScaleCur 28 401 450 457 S ConvScaleVolt 28 401 457 S M1 FidScale esisi as anses 345 e e E EE 346 S MaxBrdgTemp ssssssssserssssreresrrere 401 429 S Maxvb rdogT emp 28 S Maxvb
240. CS800 Firmware Manual e g 239 Signal Parameter name Encoder 1 parameters for motor 1 not consistent Check SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1EncMeasMode 50 02 M1EncPulseNo 50 04 At scaling speed see SpeedScaleAct 2 29 the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula f 2600 Hz ppr evaluation speed scaling 60s _ 50 04 50 02 2 29 60s E g the speed scaling must be 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A B evaluation Encoder 1 parameters for motor 2 not consistent Check SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M2EncMeasMode 49 23 M2EncPulseNo 49 25 At scaling speed see SpeedScaleAct 2 29 the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula jion f 2600 Hz ppr MN speed scaling s f 2600 Hz _ 49 25 49 23 2 29 605 f 2600 Hz E g the speed scaling must be 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A B evaluation Encoder 2 parameters not consistent Check SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Enc2MeasMode 50 18 Enc2PulseNo 50 19 At scaling speed see SpeedScaleAct 2 29 the pulse frequency must be greater than 600 Hz according to following formula f 2600Hz ppr evaluation speed scaling 60s _ 50 19 50 18 2 29 60s E g the speed scaling must be 9 rpm for a pulse encoder with 1024 pulses and A B evaluation f 2600 Hz Autotuning speed does not reach setpoint EMF control motor
241. CtriNegLim 25 10H1 Par 44 8 Zi 44 12 FldCurFlux40 95 0H1 Par 44 12 IdCurFlux70 95 O 1 Par 44 13 ldCurFlux90 2 0H1 Par 44 14 0H1 Par 44 27 99 04 MiBaseSpeed rpm 40H 1 Par 99 4 gum rj Mode Interval ms P History Buffer s T Y axis Maximum BY Axis Minimum 1 01 14 Armvoltact v 0 00 60 00 2 01 29 MotiFidCurRel 0 00 100 00 3 01 04 MotSpeed rpm 0 00 1500 00 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 Channel S 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 Monitor H 99 jo el DriveWindow manual tuning flux linearization set FluxCorr 44 27 0 96 remove On and Run via DriveWindow set FldCurFlux90 44 14 FlaCurFlux70 44 13 and FlaCurFlux40 44 12 to the determined values set M1FidMinTrip 30 12 FlaCtriMode 44 01 EMF CtrlPosLim 44 07 and EMF CtrlNegLim 44 08 back to their original settings Start up SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 50 Thyristor diagnosis Thyristor diagnosis basically provides two possibilities FORES 1 check all thyristors of the drive for proper function or 2 check individual firing pulses DriveWindow information zeen af m Pa 2 Si Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Check all Thyristor diagnosis for all thyristors l thyristors connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode Set ServiceMode 99 06 ThyDi
242. Cur 99 03 to set the nominal field current Int Scaling 1 1A Type I Volatile N M1BaseSpeed motor 1 base speed o o gd o Motor 1 base speed from the rating plate usually the field weak point M1BaseSpeed 99 04 is ag must be set in the range of err 0 2 to 1 6 times of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type I Volatile N 99 05 Unused Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 416 Signal Parameter name ServiceMode service mode ServiceMode 99 06 contains several test modes auto and manual tuning procedures The drive mode is automatically set to NormalMode after an autotuning procedure or after the thyristor diagnosis is finished or failed In case errors occur during the selected procedure A121 AutotuneFail AlarmWorae2 9 07 bit 4 is generated The reason of the error can be seen in Diagnosis 9 11 SetTypeCode is automatically set to NormalMode after the next power up 0 NormalMode normal operating mode depending on OperModeSel 43 01 default 1 ArmCurAuto autotuning armature current controller 2 FieldCurAuto autotuning field current controller 3 EMF FluxAuto autotuning EMF controller and flux linearization 4 SpdCtrlAuto autotuning speed controller 5 SpdFbAssist test speed feedback see M1EncMeasMode 50 02 M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 M1EncPulseNo 50 04 and M1
243. Cyclic parameters A non cyclical parameter is written to e g the overriding control writes cyclical on a non cyclical parameter The parameters causing the notice can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 PrginvMode Adaptive Program not in Edit mode Push or Delete action while the Adaptive Program is not in Edit mode Check EditCmd 83 02 AdapProgCmd 83 01 Adaptive Program faulty Adaptive Program faulty Check FaultedPar 84 02 PrgProtected Adaptive Program protected Adaptive Program is protected by password and cannot be edited Check PassCode 83 05 PrgPassword Adaptive Program wrong password Wrong password is used to unlock the Adaptive Program Check PassCode 83 05 FB found R type fieldbus adapter found R type fieldbus adapter found Modbus found R type Modbus adapter found R type Modbus adapter found COM8 found SDCS COM 8 found Communication board SDCS COM 8 found AIO found Analog extension module found Analog extension module connected to SDCS CON 4 or SDCS COM 8 found DIO found Digital extension module found Digital extension module connected to SDCS CON 4 or SDCS COM 8 found Enc found Encoder module found Encoder module RTAC 01 or RTAC 03 connected to SDCS CON 4 or SDCS COM 8 found Resolv found Resolver module found Resolver module RRIA 01 connected to SDCS CON 4 or SDCS COM 8 found Fault
244. DC breaker close the resistor breaker US DCBreakerOff Cur Cri Stati 6 03 bit 7 Cur Cristat 6 03 bit 10 Cur CirlStat 6 03 bit 8 firing pulses active on firing pulses blocked continuous current discontinuous current zero current detected current not zero command Trip DC breaker continuous signal no action command Trip DC breaker 1 s pulse no action Type I Volatile Y 211 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 212 Signal Parameter name 6 04 CurCtriStat2 2 current controller status 2 current controller status word The current controller will be blocked CurRefUsed 3 12 is forced to zero and ArmAlpha 3 13 is forced to the value of ArmAlphaMax 20 14 if any of the bits is set 0 OK Bit Value Meaning BO 1 overcurrent F502 ArmOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 1 0 no action B1 1 mains overvoltage AC F513 MainsOvrVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 12 0 no action B2 1 mains undervoltage AC F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 0 no action B3 1 waiting for reduction of EMF to match the mains voltage see RevVoltMargin 44 21 0 no action B4 1 F533 12PRevTime FaultWord3 9 03 bit 0 F534 12PCurDiff Fau tWord3 9 03 bit 1 or F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 0 no action B5 1 OperModeSel 43 01 12P partner blocked OperModeSel 43 01 FieldExciter Overvoltage protection active freewheeling 0 no action B6
245. DCS800 Firmware manual DCS800 Drives 20 to 5200 A DCS800 Drive Manuals All the documents available for the drive system DCS800 are listed below Language Public number E D ES CN RU PL DCS800 Quick Guide 3ADWO00191 D D D DCS800 Tools amp Documentation CD 3ADWOO021 1 x DCS800 Converter module Flyer DCS800 SADWOO00190 D D D Technical Catalogue DCS800 SADWOO01 92 x x x D D Hardware Manual DCS800 3ADW000194 x x x x x D Hardware Manual DCS800 update DCF503B DCF504B 3ADWO00194Z20301 x Firmware Manual DCS800 3ADWO00193 D D x x x x Installation according to EMC SADWO00032 x Technical Guide 3ADW000163 x Service Manual DCS800 SADWOO00195 D D 12 Pulse Manual SADWOO00196 D CMA 2 Board 3ADW000136 p Flyer Hard Parallel 3ADW000213 x Drive Tools DriveWindow 2 x User s Manual 3BFE64560981 x DriveOPC 2 x User s Manual 3BFE00073846 x Optical DDCS Communication Link 3AFE63988235 x DDCS Branching Units User s Manual 3BFE64285513 x DCS800 Applications PLC Programming with CoDeSys CoDeSys V23 D x 61131 DCS800 target tool description Application Program 38ADW000199 x DCS800 Crane Drive DCS800 Crane Drive Manual suppl 3AST004143 x DCS800 Crane Drive Product note PDC5 EN REVA p DCS800 Winder ITC DCS800 Winder Produ
246. DI6 5ms Scan time for DI7 and DI8 3 3 ms 2 77 ms synchronized with mains frequency 17 and 2 RDIO 01 The extension DI s are isolated and filtered Selectable hardware filtering time 2msorb5msto 10 ms Input voltages 24 VDC to 250 VDC 110 VAC to 230 VAC for more details see HDIO 01 User s Manual Scan time for DI9 to DI14 5msconnected at SDCS CON 4 14ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO 01 boards with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery I O configuration SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Configuration All DI s can be read from DI StatWord 8 05 bit DI configurable default setting 0 1 yes ConvFanAck 10 20 1 2 yes MotFanAck 10 06 2 3 yes MainContAck 10 21 3 4 yes Off2 10 08 4 5 yes E Stop 10 09 5 6 yes Heset 10 03 6 7 yes OnOff1 10 15 7 8 yes StartStop 10 16 8 9 yes 9 10 yes 10 11 yes 11 12 no not selectable 12 13 no not selectable 13 14 no not selectable Configurable yes The DI s can be connected to several converter functions and it is possible to invert the Die Di1Invert 10 25 to D 11Invert 10 35 In addition the DI s can be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Configurable no The DI s can only be used by Adaptive Program application
247. Dest ttt 321 PID OUIMaX iet tete ete tonio 320 PID OutMim nnani 320 P DRT EE 320 PID Ref1Max esseenm 319 PID Bet Min 319 PIBDReI2 rone ioi ain 320 PID Bef2M3a3X n tht teta nett trus 319 PID Ref2Min eseese 319 PID Reserved eem 321 PID Heseibnho 321 PID Resetlndex eene 321 PLL in 199 PLE emen 454 PoleDamphFE 5 bn pe hepobeeeun 297 PoleFregHFE AA 297 PosCount2High sseeesss 198 PosCount 2lnitHi eene 367 PosCount2lnitLo esee 367 PosCount2LOow eeeeeHee e 198 PosCountHigh eeeeeeeesssss 78 199 PosCountlnitHi eese 78 365 PosCountlnitLo ees 78 364 PosCountLow ssec 78 198 PosCountMode een 78 363 PosGvnchMode 78 366 Pobla e ee 419 Se EE 419 PowrDownTime 310 430 453 usns 147 lee EE 194 ProgressSignal ssseeeeeeeeeeerereeererneerrereee 208 PropFbSel iini ede 329 PIOtOCOlL cce te te aA 133 144 PwrConfig esseeeeeeennee 332 PwrLossTrip 309 430 453 468 PwrGzupphybeftxt 332 PZDIO IN oit etit eiecit orte 148 PZD10 OUT eee 148 IR 148 PZD3 OUR 5 25 toute ttt stud 148 Ousdrant Type 28 204 Ramp 2Select ssssssss 82 288 HampTimecale eenn reren 286 React TEE 199 Appendix B SDCS
248. DiffCurLim 47 02 DiffCurDly 47 03 B2 12PulseCom F535 3 12 pulse communication loss 12P TimeOut 94 03 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 12P SlaNode 94 04 12PSlaveFail 12 pulse slave failure this fault message trips the 12 pulse master and appears only in the 12 pulse master M1FexRdyLost motor 1 field exciter lost ready for operation message while working M2FexRdyLost motor 2 field exciter lost ready for operation message while working FastCurRise fast current rise ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 COM8Faulty SDCS COM 8 faulty M1FexLowCur motor 1 field exciter low under current M1FldMinTrip 30 12 FlaMinTripDly 45 18 M2FexLowCur motor 2 field exciter low under current M2FIaMinTrip 49 08 FlaMinTripDly 45 18 COM8Com SDCS COM 8 communication loss ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 P2PandMFCom Peer to peer and master follower communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 ApplLoadFail application load failure see Diagnosis 9 11 LocalCmdLoss local command loss Loca LossCtrl 30 27 HwFailure hardware failure see Diagnosis 9 11 B15 FwFailure firmware failure see Diagnosis 9 11 Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g FaultWord4 fault word 4 Fault word 4 Bit Fault text BO ParComp B1 ParMemRead
249. FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 is generated Note UNetMin2 30 23 isn t monitored unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 30 22 first Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 30 22 has to be larger than UNetMin2 30 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N PowrDownTime power down time The mains voltage must recover over both limits within PowrDownTime 30 24 Otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 will be generated Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type Volatile N 30 26 Unused Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Overview local and communication loss Device Related fault Related alarm DCS800 LocalLossCtrl 30 27 fixed to 5 s F546 LocalCmdLoss A130 LocalCmdLoss Control Panel R type fieldbus ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 F528 FieldBusCom A128 FieldBusCom DCSLink MailBoxCycle1 94 13 F544 P2PandMFCom A112 P2PandMFCom MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 Fo f2P TimeOut 94 03 F535 12PulseCom ern es F519 M2FexCom SDCS COM 8 F543 COM8Com A113 COM8Com Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 LocalLossCtrl local loss control LocalLossCtrl 30 27 determines the reaction to a local loss DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light F546 LocalCmdLoss Fau tWord3 9 03 bit 13 is set with 0 RampStop Th
250. FaultWord2 9 02 FaultWord3 9 03 FaultWord4 9 04 UserFaultWord 9 05 AlarmWord1 9 06 AlarmWorae2 9 07 AlarmWord3 9 08 and UserAlarmWord 9 09 Fault tracing SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 446 General messages SDCS CON 4 General messages will only be indicated on the seven segment display of the SDCS CON 4 7 Text on DCS800 Definition Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light not available firmware is not running segment display 8 not available firmware is running no faults no alarms _ arate indication while loading firmware into SDCS CON 4 KE EE SDCS CON 4 don t switch off Power up errors E SDCS CON 4 Power up errors will only be indicated on the seven segment display of the SDCS CON 4 With a power up error active it is not possible to start the drive Jf Text on DCS800 Definition joe Control Panel ER DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Checksum fault firmware flash SDCS CON 4 ROM memory test error SDCS CON 4 RAM memory test error even addresses SDCS CON 4 hardware is not compatible unknown board SDCS CON 4 watchdog timeout occurred S SDCS CON 4 RAM memory test error odd addresses 1 Units should be de energized and energized If the fault occurs again check the SDCS CON 4 SDCS PIN 4 respectively SDCS POW 4 boards and change them if necessary 2 Power up errors are only enabled immediately after p
251. Firmware Manual e g 124 TX PDO21 3rdObj 51 22 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Actual Value 2 see page 63 Data set 2 word 3 TX PDO21 3rdSubj 51 23 6 6 Hex 6 Actual Value 2 see page 63 Data set 2 word 3 TX PDO21 4thObj 51 24 16384 4000 Hex 16384 Actual Value 3 see page 63 Data set 4 word 1 TX PDO21 4thSubj 51 25 10 A Hex 10 Actual Value 3 see page 63 Data set 4 word 1 TransparentlProfil 51 26 1 1 Transparent FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by CANopen adapter The values can be automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCAN 01 DCS800 parameter setting using groups 90 and 92 Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 125 ControlNet communication with fieldbus adapter RCNA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the ControlNet adapter RCNA 01 together with t
252. FlaBoostFact 44 18 gt 100 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A S M2FidSacle 45 21 has to be set accordingly Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N FidBoostTime field boost time Time the field boost should last Int Scaling 1 1 s Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name RevVoltMargin reversal voltage margin RevVoltMargin 44 21 in percent of NomMainsVolt 99 10 is a safety margin for the motor voltage during regenerative mode Setting RevVoltMargin 44 21 to 0 provides no protection against commutation faults shooting through The function of RevVoltMargin 44 21 is the following To prevent the drive from blowing fuses when going from motoring using forward bridge to generating using reverse bridge the armature voltage has to be lower than the corresponding mains voltage This is automatically checked by the DCS800 and the reverse bridge is blocked as long as the armature voltage is too high To lower the armature voltage two ways are possible lowering the motor speed by idling or adapting the flux by lowering the field current e g set FidCtriMode 44 01 EMF Both options take time and thus delaying the current torque reversal For faster adapting of the motor voltage activate the field weakening function This can be supervised with CurCtrlStat2 604 bit 3 Uai generating
253. I1 group x 100 index CANCEL Example Al1 is supplied with a voltage source of 5 8 V Al1 is connected to the block as follows e Scroll to Block1In1 84 05 and shift to edit mode Enter Set to 503 because the value of Al1 is shown in group 5 with index 3 A 7 Val 05 03 05 100 3 503 e The value at the input of the block is 5800 since the integer scaling of A 1 Val 05 03 is 1000 1 V see chapter Parameters Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 165 Constant as an integer input How to set and connect the input Option 1 e Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode Enter e Give the constant value to this input parameter arrow keys e Accept by Enter e Scroll to attribute parameter e g Block1Attrib 4 08 e Set the bit for constant attribute of this input in Block1Attrib 4 08 e Accept by Enter The constant may have a value from 32768 to 32767 The constant cannot be changed while the Application Program is running The figures below shows the DCS800 Control Panel display when Block1In2 84 06 is in edit mode and the constant field is visible Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8406 Block1In2 Value of the desired 1 000 0 constant CANCEL Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8408 Block1Attrib Setting of constant 2 00 0 h ex value of Block1In2 input CANCEL Option 2 e User constants 85 01 to 85
254. Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqMaxSPC maximum torque speed controller LL Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 at the output of the speed controller TorqRef2 2 09 Note The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 280 Signal Parameter name 20 08 TorqMinSPC minimum torque speed controller Minimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 at the output of the speed controller TorqRef2 2 09 Note The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the largest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N 20 09 TorqMaxTref maximum torque of torque reference A B Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for external references TorqRefA 25 01 TorqRefB 25 04 Note The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqMinTref minimum torque of torque reference A B Mi
255. Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N PwrConfig power part configuration PwrConfig 43 23 defines the configuration of the connected power part 0 6 pulse the connected power part is a B6 bridge default 1 reserved 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile N PwrSupplyRefExt external voltage reference power supply mode External voltage reference for power supply mode in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 For more information see DCS800 Power Supply Control Manual 3ADW000375 Note PwrSupplyRefExt 43 24 is only valid if ControlModeSel 43 05 PowerSupply1 or PowerSupply2 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 333 Signal Parameter name zo 2 LU 3 o Field excitation 2 o 44 01 FlidCtriMode field control mode x 3x lo Motor 1 field control mode selection D n 0 Fix constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal E blocked optitorque blocked default bs 12 EMF field weakening active EMF controller released field reversal blocked zi optitorque blocked UI 2 Fix Rev constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal active optitorque blocked 3 EMF Rev field weakening active EMF controller released field reversal active optitorque blocked 4 Fix Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal blocke
256. Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 4 D 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 5 DI5 12 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 6 DI6 12 Jogl active 0 no Jog1 7 DI7 1 Jogl active 0 no Jog1 8 DI8 12 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 9 DI9 12 Jogi active 0 no dog only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 12 Jogi active 0 no dog only available with digital extension board 11 DI 12 Jog1 active 0 no Jog only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit1l1 1 Jogi active 0 no Jog1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 Jogl active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 Jog1 active 0 no Jog1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 Jogl active 0 no Jog1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 Jogl active 0 no Jog1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 Jogl active 0 no Jog1 AuxCtrlIWord 7 02 bit 15 Note Jog2 10 18 overrides Jog1 10 17 Note CommandSel 10 01 Local I O The drive has to be in state RdyRun RdyRef is still zero When Jogi command is given the drives sets automatically RampOutZero RampHold RamplnZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 and goes into state Running and turns with speed set in FixedSpeed1 23 02 CommandSel 10 01
257. LNO ZNI LNO ZNI SIUEISUOCH INI E LN ANI ed ed adh v0 8 ON MOO ON 49019 ON 49014 ON 49018 043009 qv LNdNI Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 185 Signal and parameter list Signals and parameters This chapter contains all signals and parameters Signal groups list Signals are measured and calculated actual values of the drive This includes the control status limit fault and alarm words The drive s signals can be found in groups 1 to 9 None of the values inside these groups is stored in the flash and thus volatile Note All signals in group 7 can be written to by means of DWL DCS800 Control Panel Adaptive Program application program or overriding control The following table gives an overview of all signal groups Group Description Comment 1 Physical actual values Speed controller signals Reference actual values Information self identification Analog I O Drive logic signals Control words command words Status limit words detection on operation and limits Fault alarm words diagnosis information CO N gt 01 amp Oo Po Signal Parameter name MotTorq motor torque Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefUsed use
258. M2SpeedMin 49 19 B8 M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 or M2CurLimBrdg1 49 12 B9 M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 or M2CurLimBrdg2 49 13 B10 reserved B11 reserved B12 reserved to B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y 8 04 Unused Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 225 Signal Parameter name 8 05 DI StatWord digital inputs status word DISW ed ed 0 Digital input word shows the value of the digital inputs before inversion Di Invert 10 25 DI11Invert 10 35 to DI StatWord 8 05 from Dix Dixinvert to drive Bit Name Comment default setting BO Dl ConvFanAck 10 20 actual setting depends on macro B1 D MotFanAck 10 06 actual setting depends on macro B2 DI MainContAck 10 21 actual setting depends on macro B3 DI4 Off2 10 08 actual setting depends on macro B4 DIS E Stop 10 09 actual setting depends on macro B5 Dl6 Reset 10 03 actual setting depends on macro B6 DI7 OnOff 10 15 actual setting depends on macro B7 DI8 StartStop 10 16 actual setting depends on macro B8 DI9 DI of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 B9 DHO DI2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 B10 DI11 DIS of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 B11 DI12 DI of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Only available for Adaptive Program application program or overriding control B12 DI13 DI2 of the extension IO
259. MA board ADDRESS Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 408 Signal Parameter name def nit E C 98 02 CommModule communication modules For the communication modules following selections are available NotUsed NotUsed Fieldbus R type DDCS e g AC 800M DDCS N type fieldbus Modbus RMBA xx X read only X read only X read only 0 NotUsed no communication used default 1 Fieldbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via an R type fieldbus adapter connected in option slot 1 The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 1 This choice is not valid for the Modbus 2 COM 8 AC800x The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 The data set base address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 3 COM 8 Nxxx The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 and an N type fieldbus adapter The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 1 4 Modbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via the Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 1 for that set ModBusModule2 98 08 Slot1 The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 1 5 AC800xFidbus The d
260. MIN N 40006 N C5 40005 40007 40008 40010 BL BR wo wl ow Nnj gt o N gt D C5 a Tim IR gt ojo e ojo e be N On gt o o c co NJ oO rm DsetXVal1 DsetXVal2 DsetXVal3 DsetXplus1Val1 DsetXplus 1Val2 DsetXplus1Val3 DsetXplus2Val1 DsetXplus2Val2 DsetXplus2Val3 DsetXplus3Val1 DsetXplus3Val2 DsetXplus3Val3 DsetXplus4Val1 DsetXplus4Val2 DsetXplus4Val3 DsetXplus5Val1 DsetXplus5Val2 DsetXplus5Val3 DsetXplus6Val1 DsetXplus6Val2 DsetXplus6Val3 DsetXplus7Val1 DsetXplus7Val2 DsetXplus7Val3 Setting of PLC parameter groups 90 and 92 depending on desired data words Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Communication 144 Modbus TCP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Ethernet adapter RETA 01 together with the DCS800 RETA 01 DCS800 The Modbus TCP communication with the drive requires the option RETA 01 The protocol Modbus TCP Ethernet is supported Related documentation User s Manual Ethernet Adapter Module RETA 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RETA 01 into slot 1 of the drive Drive configuration The Ethernet adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with Modb
261. NomCur converter nominal DC current measurement circuit Adjustment of DC current measuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S ConvScaleCur 97 02 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S ConvScaleCur 97 02 0 A Read from S ConvScaleCur 97 02 if S ConvScaleCur 97 02 0 Int Scaling 1 1A Type I Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 202 Signal Parameter name MotiFexType motor 1 type of field exciter Motor 1 field exciter type Read from M1UsedFexType 99 12 0 NotUsed 1 OnBoard 2 FEX 425 Int 3 DCF803 0035 4 DCF803 0050 5 DCF804 0050 6 DCF803 0060 7 DCF804 0060 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 10 DCF803 0016 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 17 ExFex AI2 18 ExFex A 19 ExFex Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A 21 VariFexType 22 Exc Appl 1 Int Scaling 1 no or third party field exciter connected integrated 1 Q field exciter for sizes D1 D4 only default internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 50 A field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not impl
262. O000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 469 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm Control Panel word DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 112 Peer to peer and master follower communication 9 06 always P2PandMFCom loss bit 11 Check ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBox1 94 12 MailBox2 94 18 MailBox3 94 24 MailBox4 94 30 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 DCSLink cable connections DCSLink termination DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 113 COM8Com SDCS COM 8 communication loss overriding 9 06 always 4 control and master follower bit 12 Check CommandSel 10 01 ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 ChO0 DriveBus 71 01 fiber optic cables to overriding control channel 0 overriding control adapters fiber optic cables between master and followers channel 2 RE EE 114 ArmCurDev Armature Current Deviation 9 06 RdyRef 1 4 Is shown if the current reference CurRefUsed 3 12 bit 13 differs from current actual MotCur 1 06 for longer than 5 sec by more than 20 of nominal motor current In other words if the current controller cannot match the given reference the alarm signal is created Normally the reason is a too small incoming voltage compared to the motor EMF For non motoric applications it is possible to block the alarm using AuxCtrlWora2 7 03 bit 6 Check
263. O6 are used as current source AI7 AO5 and AI8 AO6 have to be activated by means of AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 RAIO AT gt D X1 2 VS gt X2 4 Ze E 7a 3 AO6 lt om PT100 PT100 PT100 1 Za CH aos lt om PT100 PT100 PT100 NS Fm Se J y y Geng Motor 1 Motor 2 V A yY DCS800 FW PT0100 and sec RAIO dsf single motor PT100 and second RAIO SDCS IOB 3 Connection possibilities for PTC max 1 PTC for motor 1 and max 1 PTC for motor 2 or up to 2 PTC for a single motor AI2 motor 1 and AI3 motor 2 are used for the temperature measurement with PTC Jumper settings see DCS800 Hardware Manual All parameters for Al2 and AI3 in group 15 have to set to default SDCS IOB 3 gt gt 1 5 mA Motor 1 Motor 2 single motor DCS800 FW PTC and IOB3_a dsf PTC and SDCS IOB 3 Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 438 Klixon SDCS CON 4 Connection possibilities for PTC max 1 PTC for motor 1 or max 1 PTC for motor 2 Only AI2 can be used for the temperature measurement with PTC Jumper settings see DCS800 Hardware Manual All parameters for AI2 in group 15 have to set to default SDCS CON 4 X3 7 A2 D A D H d PTC x4 10 4k75 DCS800 FW PTC and C
264. ON4 a dsf PTC and SDCS CON 4 The temperature of motor 1 and motor 2 can be supervised by means of klixons The klixon is a thermal switch opening its contact at a defined temperature This can be used for supervision of the temperature by means of connecting the switch to a digital input of the drive The digital input for the klixon s is selected with M1KlixonSel 31 08 The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp when the klixon opens The motor fan will continue to work until the klixon is closed again Note It is possible to connect several klixons in series Motor thermal model General The drive includes two thermal models one for motor 1 and one for motor 2 The models can be used at the same time Two models are needed in case one converter is shared by two motors e g shared motion During normal operation only one thermal model is needed It is recommended to use the thermal model of the motor if a direct motor temperature measurement isn t available and the current limits of the drive are set higher than the motor nominal current The thermal model is based on the actual motor current related to motor nominal current and rated ambient temperature Thus the thermal model does not directly calculate the temperature of the motor but it calculates the temperature rise of the motor This is based on the fact that the motor will reach its end temperature Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 439 afte
265. OT of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 8 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 98 03 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 9 DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 10 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 98 04 written to by DO CtrlWord 7 05 bit 11 reserved B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y 8 07 Unused 8 08 DriveStat drive status Drive status 0 OnInhibited drive is in OnInhibit state 12 ChangeToOff drive is changing to Off 2 Off drive is Off 3 RdyOn drive is ready on 4 RdyRun drive is ready run 5 Running drive is Running 6 Stopping drive is Stopping 7 Off3 drive is in Off3 state E stop 8 Off2 drive is in Off2 state Emergency Off or Coast Stop 9 Tripped drive is Tripped Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MotSel selected motor Select motor and field exciter 0 Motor motor 1 and field exciter 1 are selected 1 Motor2 motor 2 and field exciter 2 are selected See ParChange 10 10 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y 227 E C MacroSel selected macro Currently selected macro 0 None default 1 Factory factory default parameter set 2 User User1 parameter set 3 User User2 parameter set 4 Standard standard
266. Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 182 TON Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function OUT is true when IN1 has been true for a time equal or longer than IN2 IN1 1 0 D NE S IN2 ime OUT l All bits 1 All bits O time Values on display True 1 false 0 With IN3 False the delay time of IN2 is scaled in ms with IN3 True the delay time of IN2 is scaled in s Input IN1 and INS boolean value Input IN2 16 bit integer value 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer value packed boolean Trigg Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function The rising edge of IN1 sets OUT bit 0 for one program cycle The rising edge of IN2 sets OUT bit 1 for one program cycle The rising edge of IN3 sets OUT bit 2 for one program cycle T Program cycle IN1 1 0 OUT Bit 0 t 1 0 ES EES gt T ES t IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 183 XOR Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function OUT is true if one input is true otherwise OUT is false Truth table IN1 IN2 INS OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 false all bits O 0 0 0 1 true all bits 1 1 0 1 0 true all bits 1 1 0 1 1 false all bits O 0 1 0 0 true all bits 1 1 1 0 1 false all bits O 0 1 1 0 f
267. Ra ipe CREER Ra E Ae 265 GROUP RE ni oe GDSENDGENDOGUUDOUGIDOG DOG GGG 269 Bleu Re ue LC 269 eint 271 Analog Re ue 271 eem Q 273 NET Bin e 273 eres 276 Datastorage herd hbri indic bet cce eiie cd uiii cde tide rn 276 GOU oE RE 278 LENG iiit t tete o ete e GG EG GG UE E DEL fette etd 278 El DIE 282 el GE e A E 282 Group 22ra A naa Maa aaa Main aba aa kee 286 Speed AMP DEE 286 Ell Ae AT 289 EIERE 289 EI PRENNE D DT 294 Speed control ege ergeet 294 Elle 299 Torque reterence nennen nennen nnn nnns nnne nnn 299 ODER 26 x wien secs H 300 Torque reference handling ccc cette eet eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeeeeteee 300 EI LEET 304 EL tt ee 304 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 18 COU e 315 Motor T temperature xs ci 315 Elle EE 317 DCS800 Control Panel display sse 317 Elle AO EEN 318 PID Cotilt Ol iiuioiioieioi eines toio tei tete tete to EE 318 EIST EE 321 Brake COMMUN os ge ee edeuee geess Eesen E 321 GrOUp 49 x eite taedet inde deii E 327 Current control iiit titt tete t ete tete o tee E bei Ba teta da 327 GlOUP 44 5 EE 333 e Ile RE Citation E 333 Group 4E EEN 340 Field converter settings sssssssseeeeennennne 340 Elle EE 347 12 pulse operation sse ennemis 347 GrOUp E
268. S800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MotTorgqFilt filtered motor torque Relative filtered motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period plus TorqActFiltTime 97 20 Note The cycle time is 20 ms Note The value is calculated the following way Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 MotCur 1 06 MotTorqFilt 1 07 o with MlBaseSpeed 99 04 MotSpeed 1 04 Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax for n gt M BaseSpeed 99 04 or Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax 210096 for n lt M1BaseSpeed 99 04 or MlUsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y MotTorq motor torque Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period Note The cycle time is 20 ms Note The value is calculated the following way Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 MotCur 1 06 100 MotTorq 1 08 with 4 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax MotSpeed 04 for n M1BaseSpeed 99 04 or Flux Re fFldWeak 3 24 FluxMax 210096 for n lt MlBaseSpeed 99 04 or MlUsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurRipple current ripple Relative current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomcCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100
269. S800 Firmware Manual e g Signal and parameter list Signal Parameter name Field converter settings M1FreewhlLev motor 1 freewheeling level Motor 1 field exciter free wheeling level only when M1UsedFexType 99 12 DCF804 0050 or DCF804 0060 in percent ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage If 2 successive AC voltage measurements differ more than M1FreewhlLev 45 01 the free wheeling function is activated Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N M1PosLimCtrl motor 1 positive voltage limit for field exciter Positive voltage limit for motor 1 field exciter in percent of the maximum field exciter output voltage Example With a 3 phase supply voltage of 400 VAC the field current controller can generate a maximum output voltage of 521 VDC In case the rated field supply voltage is 200 VDC then it is possible to limit the controllers output voltage to 46 That means the firing angle of the field current controller is limited in such a way that the average output voltage is limited to a maximum of 240VDC Note 4 Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M1PosLimCtrl 45 02 also as negative limit Int Scaling 1002 1 6 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M1FIdRefMode motor 1 field current reference mode M1FidRefMode 45 05 selector 0 Internal motor 1 field current reference according t
270. SLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus In the above example termination is mandatory at the master and the 10 follower SDCS DSL 4 jumper S1 1 2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination Communication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 99 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the master and all followers Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the masters node ID number to 1 and add one for each follower Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 follower DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 2 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 11 BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s Activate the mailboxes The master follower communication utilizes 4 mailboxes for data transfer Thus data transfer to any device node in the system is possible Positive mailbox node ID numbers only transmit data negative only receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs e g 5 and 5 are needed Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 follower MailBox1 94 12 2 5 MailBox1 94 12 5 MailBox1 94 12 5 Atte
271. SLinkNodelD 94 01 M1FexNode 94 08 respectively switches S800 and S801 on DCF803 0016 DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s F517 517 ArmCurRipple Armature current ripple One or several thyristors may carry no current Check 518 M2FexOverCur CurRippleSel 30 18 CurRippleLim 30 19 for too high gain of current controller M1KpArmCur 43 06 current feedback with oscilloscope 6 pulses within one cycle visible branch fuses thyristor gate cathode resistance thyristor gate connection current transformers T51 T52 Motor 2 field exciter overcurrent Check M2FidOvrCurLev 49 09 parameter settings of group 49 field excitation field current controller tuning connections of field exciter insulation of cables and field winding resistance of field winding fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 455 Fault is active when Triplevel RdyRun 1 RdyRef 1 RdyRun 1 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Fault tracing 456 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Triplevel 519 M2FexCom Motor 2 field exciter communication loss RdyRun 1 Check M2UsedFexType 49 07 FexTimeOut 94 07 flat cable connections between SDCS CON 4 and SDCS PIN 4 auxiliary voltage for integrated and external field exciter DCSLink cable conn
272. Speed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note M2SpeedMin 49 19 is also applied to SpeedHef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N M2SpeedMax motor 2 maximum speed Motor 2 positive speed reference limit in rpm for SpeedHef2 2 01 SpeedHefUsed 2 17 Internally limited from 2 29 SEE rpm to 2 29 SE rpm 20000 20000 Note M2SpeedMax 49 20 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note M2SpeedMax 49 20 is also applied to SpeedRef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2OvrSpeed motor 2 overspeed The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed FaultWord2 9 02 bit 15 if M2OvrSpeed 49 21 is exceeded It is recommended to set M2OvrSpeed 49 21 at least 20 higher than
273. TachoVolt1000 50 13 6 ArmCurMan manual tuning of armature current controller 7 FieldCurMan manual tuning of field current controller 8 ThyDiagnosis the thyristor diagnosis mode is set with TestFire 97 28 the result is shown in Diagnosis 9 11 9 FldRevAssist test field reversal 10 SetTypeCode set type code releases following parameters TypeCode 97 01 S ConvScaleCur 97 02 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 S M1FidScale 45 20 S M2FidScale 45 21 11 SpdCtriMan manual tuning of speed controller 12 EMF Man manual tuning of EMF controller 13 Simulation reserved 14 TachFineTune tacho fine tuning see M1 TachoAdjust 50 12 15 LD FB Config reserved for future use load fieldbus configuration file 16 DeleteAppl releases ParApplSave 16 06 DeleteAppl 17 FindDiscCur find discontinuous current limit Note The reference chain is blocked while ServiceMode 99 06 NormalMode Note Depending on MotSel 8 09 the field current of motor 1 or motor 2 is tuned Note A standard DCS800 converter used as field exciter cannot be tuned by means of its armature converter Tune it by setting ServiceMode 99 06 FieldCurAuto in the field exciter itself Int Scaling 1 1 Type Cc Volatile Y ApplRestore application restore Setting ApplRestore 99 07 Yes starts the loading storing of the macro preset parameter set selected by means of ApplMacro 99 08 ApplRestore 99 07 is automatically set back to Done after the chosen a
274. TimeOut 12 pulse reversal timeout In 12 pulse mode the current direction of both master and slave bridges is monitored The drive trips with F533 12PRevTime FaultWord3 9 03 bit 0 if the 2 converters have different bridges fired for more than 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 The reversal fault for 12 pulse is inactive if 12P HevTimeOut 47 05 is set to 999 ms or 1000 ms 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 is only active in the 12 pulse master less than less than 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 current direction 12 pulse master current direction 12 pulse slave j Note 12P RevTimeOut 47 05 must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 and ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 must be longer than RevDly 43 14 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Shared motion M2NomVolt motor 2 nominal DC voltage Motor 2 nominal armature voltage DC from the motor rating plate Note In 12 pulse serial mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 of the rated motor voltage if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in series are connected it is 100 96 of one motor s rated voltage Note The hardware of the measuring circuit has to be adapted for motor voltages lower than 50 V Int Scaling 1 1 V Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 349 Signal Par
275. Torque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRefUsed used torque reference Relative final torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after torque limiter TorqMax 20 05 TorqMin 20 06 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqCorr torque correction Relative additional torque reference in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 TorqCorrect 26 15 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y dv dt dv dt Acceleration deceleration speed reference change at the output of the speed reference ramp Int Scaling 2 29 s Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefUsed used speed reference Used speed reference selected with RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRef4 speed reference 4 SpeedRef3 2 02 SpeeaCorr 23 04 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y K mm on rmms al TorqMaxAII torque maximum all Relative calculated positive torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Calculated from the smallest maximum torque limit field weakening and armature current limits TorqUsedMax 2 22 FluxRefFlaWeak 3 24 and M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y K Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name TorqMinAll torque minimum all Relative calculat
276. Type SI Volatile N ArmAlphaMin minimum firing angle Minimum firing angle a in degrees Int Scaling 1 1deg Type SI Volatile N 20 17 Unused Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name TorqUsedMaxSel maximum used torque selector TorqUsedMax 2 22 selector 0 TorqMax2005 TorgMax 20 05 default 1 Ali analog input 1 2 Al2 analog input 2 3 Al3 analog input 3 4 Al4 analog input 4 5 Al5 analog input 5 6 Al6 analog input 6 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N TorqUsedMinSel minimum used torque selector TorqUsedMin 2 23 selector 0 TorqMin2006 TorgMin 20 06 default 1 Ali analog input 1 2 Al2 analog input 2 3 Al3 analog input 3 4 Al4 analog input 4 5 Ald analog input 5 6 Al6 analog input 6 7 Negate2018 negated output of TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 is used Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N TorqGenMax maximum and minimum torque limit during regenerating Maximum and minimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 only during regenerating Note The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening Int Scaling 100 196 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Start stop Unused OffiMode off 1 mode
277. U PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS MACROS ENTER Access to the MAIN MENU and other modes To reach the MAIN MENU 1 Press EXIT as necessary to step back through the menus or lists associated with a particular mode Continue until you are back to the output mode 2 Press MENU from the output mode At this point the middle of the display is a listing of the other modes and the top right text says MAIN MENU 3 Press UP DOWN to scroll to the desired mode 4 Press ENTER to enter the mode that is highlighted Following modes are available in the MAIN MENU Parameters mode Start up assistants mode Macros mode currently not used Changed parameters mode PONS DCS800 panel operation SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 424 Fault logger mode Clock set mode Parameter backup mode I O settings mode currently not used The following sections describe each of the other modes ONO Parameters mode Use the parameters mode to view and edit parameter values 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight PARAMETERS in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER LOC MAIN MENU PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS MACROS 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter group then press SEL LOC PAR GROUPS 01 Phys Act Values 02 SPC Signals 03 Ref Act Values 04 Information 3 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter in a group then press EDIT to enter PAR EDIT mode LOC U PARAMETERS
278. Window Light With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string name with a maximum of 12 characters This name will override the numbers and is shown as well in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 1 Type yc Volatile N NomMainsVolt nominal AC mains voltage Nominal mains voltage AC of the supply The default and maximum values are preset automatically according to TypeCode 97 01 respectively S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 Absolute max is 1200 V Int Scaling 1 1V Type Volatile N NotUsed min 3WreStandard Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g M1NomFidCur motor 1 n Signal Parameter name ominal field current Motor 1 nominal field current from the motor rating plate Note In case the converter is used as a 3 phase field exciter use M1NomCur 99 03 to set the nominal field current Int Scaling 100 1A Type l Volatile N M1UsedFexType motor 1 used field exciter type Motor 1 used field exciter type 0 NotUsed 1 OnBoard 2 FEX 425 Int 3 DCF803 0035 4 DCF803 0050 5 DCF804 0050 6 DCF803 0060 7 DCF804 0060 8 DCS800 S01 9 DCS800 S02 10 DCF803 0016 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 17 ExFex Al2 18 ExFex Al3 19 ExFex Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A 21 VariFexType 22 Exc Appl 1 no or third party field exciter connected integrated 1 Q field exciter fo
279. X 15 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile 93 06 DsetXplus15Val3 data set X 15 value 3 o o Data set X 15 value 3 interval 30 ms 3 Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 15 9 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 391 Signal Parameter name unit E C DCSLink control Group 94 This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the DCSLink board SDCS DSL 4 For communication between the armature converter and the field exciters respectively 12 pulse communication only the basic communication parameters 94 01 to 94 09 have to be set For master follower and drive to drive communication the basic communication parameters have to be set The data transfer is done by means of the 4 available mailboxes 94 12 to 94 35 Parameter settings default values single drive with excitation DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 see example 1 M1FexNode 94 08 21 M2FexNode 94 09 30 12 pulse drive DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 see example 2 12P SlaNode 94 04 31 M1FexNode 94 08 21 Example parameter settings for Node number master follower 94 01 1 2 3 d 11 see example 3 field exciter 94 08 21 22 23 ET 31 see example 3 12 pulse slave 94 04 and 94 01 3 32 see exam
280. a sets addresses 1 91 Receiving data sets addresses 2 92 Transmit data sets addresses 1 93 Transmit data sets addresses 2 94 DCSLink control 97 Measurement 98 Option modules 99 Start up data 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal and parameter list 188 Signal Parameter name 20 07 TorqMaxSPC maximum torque speed controller Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 at the output of the speed controller TorqRef2 2 09 Note The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N SpeedRef speed reference Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed 2 17 via ReftMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Internally limited from 2 29 SAGT rpm to 2 29 SO rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y Sample of parameters Parameter changes by DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light are stored in the flash Changes made by the overriding control are only stored in the RAM Min max def Minimum and maximum value or selection of parameter Default value or default selection of parameter Unit Shows the physical unit of a parameter if applicable The unit is displaye
281. action when CurRippleLim 30 19 is reached 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 Fault the drive trips with F517 ArmCurRipple FaultWord 2 9 02 bit 0 default 2 Alarm A117 ArmCurRipple AlarmWorda2 9 07 bit 0 is set Note The current ripple function detects a broken fuse thyristor or current transformer T51 T52 too high gain of the current controller Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N CurRippleLim current ripple limit Threshold for CurRippleSel 30 18 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Typical values when a thyristor is missing armature about 300 high inductive loads e g excitation about 90 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N PwrLossTrip power loss trip The action taken when the mains voltage undershoots UNetMin2 30 23 0 Immediately the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 default 1 Delayed A111 MainsLowVolt AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 10 is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 is generated Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N UNetMin1 mains voltage minimum 1 First upper limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMainsVolt 99 10 If the mains voltage undershoots UNetMin1 30 22 following actions take place the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possi
282. agnosis set TestFire 97 28 Off give On and Run via DriveWindow E Drivewindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 Bl lini x Eile Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help Haex las ipe leie e gt mlx BK miti Xx W pcs 800 D1 01 Al Application Sj contro f 09 11 Diagnosis 10H1 Par 9 11 B Data logger f 97 28 TestFire Off 0 1 Par 97 28 A Event logger 99 06 ServiceMode ThyDiagnosis 0 1 Par 99 6 x Fault logger Zg Memory H e Parameters zl ose on S a wl amp el mio eJ Ready v pcs 800 D1 O 1 een menm The main contactor is closed and the thyristor diagnosis is started After the thyristor diagnosis is finished the result is written into Diagnosis 9 1 1 the ServiceMode 99 06 is automatically set back to NormalMode and the drive is automatically switched off Check individual firing pulses Check in individual make sure that the main contactor cannot close e g disconnect the digital output controlling the main contactor or that the mains voltage is off e g firing pulses high voltage breaker is open connect a current clamp to one of the firing pulse cables connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode Set ServiceMode 99 06 ThyDiagnosis set TestFire 97 28 V11 V26 depending individual firing pulse to be checked Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 51 C1 vue MN vo
283. ailable The hysteresis is symmetrical and is set by FldRefHyst 45 10 The field reversal is controlled by the sign of TorqRefUsed 2 13 Ir gt TorqRefUsed 2 13 FidRefHyst 45 10 Note FidRefHyst 45 10 is only effective for FldCtriMode 44 01 Fix Rev or EMF Rev Int Scaling 1002 1 6 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name FldRefGain field current reference gain Optitorque calculates the field current reference depending on TorqRefUsed 2 13 Thus the field current is reduced to a smaller value if TorgRefUsed 2 13 is accordingly low This speeds up the field reversal assuming TorqRefUsed 2 13 is low during field reversal Optitorque is activated by means of FlaCtriMode 44 01 and like field reversal only available for motor 1 field exciter The relation between TorqRefUsed 2 13 and FlaCurRefM1 3 30 is linear and without offset It is defined by means of the FidRefGain 45 11 The gain is related to M1NomFlaCur 99 11 as well as to MotNomTorque 4 23 Ir TorqRefUsed 2 13 FldRefGain 45 11 Example With FidRefGain 45 11 20 100 field current is generated at TorgRefUsed 2 13 20 Note FidRefGain 45 11 is only effective for FidCtrlMode 44 01 Fix Opti EMF Opti Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti Int Scaling 1002 1 6 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW00
284. al different points The whole speed range must also be tested carefully e g at 25 96 30 96 of maximum speed step has to be in base Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Manual tuning 43 speed range and 80 96 of maximum speed step has to be in field weakening area in order to find any oscillation points A suitable speed step is about 2 of maximum speed A too large step reference or incorrect values of the speed controller might force the drives into torque current limits damage the mechanical parts e g gear boxes or cause tripping of the drive e osoon nr is am Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Manual tuning of the speed controller connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor MotSpeed 1 04 and SpeedRef4 2 168 give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference use SpeedCorr 23 04 to step the speed controller tune the speed controller by means of KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 o Steps size 2 6 of maximum speed do not hit any limits during the step and the step response e g torque or current limits disable the i part by setting TiS 24 09 0 ms increase KpS 24 03 until the step response shows an overshoot decrease KpS 24 03 about 30 adjust TiS 24 09 in such a way that there is no overshoot or only a slight overshoot depending on the application the function of the i pa
285. al extension board 13 MCW Bit11 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 14 MCW Bit12 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 15 MCW Bit13 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 16 MCW Bit14 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 17 MCW Bit15 1 field boost 0 no field boost MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 18 ACW Bit12 1 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 19 ACW Bit13 1 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 1 1 20 ACW Bit14 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 21 ACW Bit15 field boost 0 no field boost AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N ACW Bit15 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 336 Signal Parameter name 44 18 FldBoostFact field boost factor Field boost factor in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 The resulting field boost current must be lower than the nominal current of the used field exciter If the field boost current is out of range A132 ParConflict AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 15 is generated Note If FlaBoostFact 44 18 gt 100 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A S M1FidSacle 45 20 has to be set accordingly Example M1NomFidCur 99 11 20 A and FlaBoostFact 44 18 150 then S M1FidSacle 45 20 30 A Note If
286. aling 1 Type I Volatile N Block16Out block 16 output The value of function block 16 output Block16Output 84 99 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Internal This parameter group contains internal variables and should not be changed by the user WERE 88 01 Reserved Reserved Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 384 Signal Parameter name M1TachMaxSpeed motor 1 tacho maximum speed Internally used tacho maximum speed for motor 1 This value is depending on the analog tacho output voltage e g 60 V at 1000 rpm and the maximum speed of the drive system which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 This value should only be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune via M1TachVolt1000 50 13 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Internally limited from 2 29 Jed rpm to 2 29 SALA rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N M2TachMaxSpeed motor 2 tacho maximum speed Internally used tacho maximum speed for motor 2 This value is depending on the analog tacho output voltage e g 60 V at 1000 rp
287. als SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block3Out block 3 output The value of function block 3 output Block3Output 84 21 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block4Out block 4 output The value of function block 4 output Block1 Output 84 27 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block5Out block 5 output The value of function block 5 output Block1 Output 84 33 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block6Out block 6 output The value of function block 6 output Block1 Output 84 39 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Block7Out block 7 output The value of fun
288. alse all bits O 0 1 1 1 true all bits 1 1 IN2 IN3 OUT IN1 IN2 and IN3 OUT boolean 16 bit integer value packed boolean Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 184 Diagram o aa o P c o E 2 o o xe 0 a c bai o E bai CS D o CN n o seu 2 G o 9L1 98 lt S1 98 o E vi 98 E 1 98 2 c C1 98 L1 98 c o 01 98 o 60 98 2 D 80 98 E 410 98 90 98 D bal 980 98 xe SH x v0 98 o 0 98 a c0 98 x c 10 98 Et Jejutog 1ndino Ee Andino euieN Auedwod uoneoiddy uv anv unv EN EN EN O4 H H LNO ZNI LNO ZNI LNO ZNI LNI Ka LNI LNI edit adh adh ON 49018 ON 49018 ON 49018 ON POG uv anv nv EN EN EN 04 0 0 LNO ZNI LNO ZNI LNO ZNI LNI LNI SCH LNI edit adh adh ON MOO ON 901g ON 4901 ON 49018 SlauicO 01 S8 unv unv unv 60 S8 EN EN EN 90 4 Bn 80 8 LNO ZNI LNO CN LNO ZNI S Em zz 40 88 LNI LNI LNI adAL ed ed 90 S8 ON 9018 ON 901g ON olg ON og S0 S8 v0 S8 0 S8 OI unv aw C20 S8 EN EN EN L0 S8 04 04 Di LLNO ZNI
289. ameter pointer from DCS800 to PLC ol o o amp o m Configuration no Configuration numbers of each data word and its corresponding pointer Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 153 Adaptive Program AP Chapter overview This chapter describes the basics of the Application Program and instructs how to build an application All needed parameters can be found in the groups 83 to 86 What is the Adaptive Program Features Conventionally the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters Each parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range The parameters make adapting of the drive easy but the choices are limited It is not possible to customize the drive any further AP makes customizing possible without the need of a special programming tool or language e AP is using function blocks e DWL AP is the programming and documentation tool The maximum size of AP is 16 function blocks The program may consist of several separate functions The Adaptive Program of DCS800 provides the following features e 16function blocks e more than 20 block types e password protection e 4 different cycle times selectable e shift functions for function blocks e debug functions e output forcing e breakpoint Single step Single cycle e additional output write pointer parame
290. ameter name E C M2NomCur motor 2 nominal DC current LL Motor 2 nominal armature current DC from the motor rating plate If several motors are connected to the drive enter the total current of all motors Note In 12 pulse parallel mode this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter itself is providing This is usually 50 of the rated motor current if one motor is connected In case 2 motors in parallel are connected it is 100 96 of one motor s rated current Note In case the converter is used as a 3 phase field exciter use M2NomCur 49 02 to set the nominal field current Int Scaling 1 1A Type I Volatile N M2BaseSpeed motor 2 base speed Oo LL Motor 2 base speed from the rating plate usually the field weak point M2BaseSpeed 49 03 is must be set in the range of 0 2 to 1 6 times of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type I Volatile N M2ZeroSpeedLim motor 2 zero speed limit o When the Run command is removed set UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 to zero the drive will stop as chosen by StopMode 21 03 As soon as the actual speed reaches the limit set by M2ZeroSpeedLim 49 04 the motor will coast independent of the setting of StopMode 21 03 Existing brakes are closed applied While the actual speed is in the limit ZeroSpeed AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 11 is high Note In case FlyStart 21 10 StartF
291. amp The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed Either when emergency stop is released and E StopMode 21 04 RampStop or as reaction to a fault of trip level 4 and FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ShapeTime shape time Speed reference softening time This function is bypassed during an emergency stop Max Speed reference before ramp Speed reference after ramp no shape time Speed reference after ramp with shape time ce o gt Acceleration Shape time time Int Scaling 100 1s Type Volatile 22 08 Unused VarSlopeRate variable slope rate Variable slope is used to control the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change It is active only with VarSlopeRate 22 07 0 Variable slope rate and the drive s internal ramp are connected in series Thus follows that the ramp times AccTime1 22 01 and DecTime1 22 02 have to be faster than the complete variable slope rate time VarSlopeRate 22 07 defines the speed ramp time t for the speed reference change A Speed reference t cycle time of the overriding control e g speed reference generation A speed reference change during cycle time t SpeedRefUsed 2 17 SpeedRef3 2 02 Note In case the overriding control systems cycle time of the
292. ans of BalRef 24 11 or TorqSel 26 01 and BalSpeedCtrl AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 8 or TorqRefA 25 01 The reaction of the drive might be taken from MotCur 1 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1BrakeLiftDly motor 1 brake lift delay Brake open lift delay This function delays the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 until M1BrakeLiftDly 42 11 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1BrakeLongTime motor 1 brake long time Brake close apply acknowledge monitor During this time the brake close apply command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 can be different without causing either A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1s Type Volatile N M1BrakeStopDly motor 1 brake stop delay Brake close apply delay This function starts after the brake acknowledge if selected with M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 is zero and compensates for the mechanical close apply delay of the brake During the stop Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 0 of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller stays active until M1BrakeStopDly 42 13 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1s Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R
293. arious functions selected by parameters The data logger contains six channels with 1024 samples each Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name AuxCtrlWord2 auxiliary control word 2 ACW2 The auxiliary control word 2 can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit BO B1 B2 B14 B15 Note1 Name reserved reserved reserved reserved DisableBridge1 DisableBridge2 SupprArmCurDev ForceAlphaMax DriveDirection reserved DirectSpeedRef TorqProvOK ForceBrake ResetTorqMem reserved ResetPIDCtrl Value OO ch Och Och OH ch 0 1 0 1 0 Comment bridge 1 blocked bridge 1 released bridge 2 blocked bridge 2 released A114 ArmCurDev A armWord1 9 06 bit 12 blocked usually used for non motoric applications A114 ArmCurDev A larmWord1 9 06 bit 12 released force single firing pulses and set firing angle a to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 normal firing pulses released drive direction reverse see note1 changes the signs of MotSpeed 1 04 and CurRef 3 11 drive direction forward see note1 speed ramp output is overwritten and forced to DirectSpeedRef 23 15 speed ramp is active Selected motor torque proving is OK This bit to be set by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control see also M1TorqProvTime 42 10
294. ase UsedMCW 7 04 bit O On and UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run are set to low run and on commands are taken away at the same time or nearly contemporary OT Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 must have the same setting Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N DvnBraking E StopMode emergency stop mode Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 Off3N respectively E stop is set low 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and Off3N is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and Off3N is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current Whe
295. ash 8 Hand Auto load macro hand manual automatic into RAM and flash 9 Hand MotPot load macro hand manual motor potentiometer into RAM and flash 10 reserved reserved 11 MotPot load macro motor potentiometer into RAM and flash 12 TorqCtrl load macro torque control into RAM and flash 13 TorqLimit load macro torque limit into RAM and flash 14 DemoStandard load macro demo standard into RAM and flash 15 2WreDCcontUS load macro 2 wire with US style DC breaker into RAM and flash 16 3WreDCcontUS load macro 3 wire with US style DC breaker into RAM and flash 17 3WreStandard load macro 3 wire standard into RAM and flash Note When loading a macro group 99 is set reset as well Note If User1 is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 3 is set If User2 is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 4 is set Note It is possible to change all preset parameters of a loaded macro On a macro change or an application restore command of the actual macro the macro depending parameters are restored to the macro s default values Note In case macro User1 or User2 is loaded by means of ParChange 10 10 it is not saved into the flash and thus not valid after the next power on Note The DriveWindow backup function only saves the active macro Thus both macros User1 and User2 must be backed up separately Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y DeviceName device name The user can set a drive number by means of the DCS800 Control Panel or Drive
296. asuring channels SDCS PIN 4 or SDCS PIN 51 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode OV take value from TypeCode 97 01 default 1 V to 2000 V take value from S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in ConvNomVolt 4 04 ServiceMode 99 06 has to be set back to NormalMode by the user Attention When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Int Scaling 1 1V Type I Volatile N 30000 401 E C S MaxBrdgTemp set maximum bridge temperature Adjustment of the converters heat sink temperature tripping level in degree centigrade 0 C take value from TypeCode 97 01 default 1 C to 149 C take value from S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 150 C the temperature supervision is inactive if S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 is set to 150 C e g for rebuild kits This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 Note Maximum setting for converters size D6 and D7 is 55 C because the cooling air input temperature is measured For more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Int Scaling 1 1 C Type I Volatile N ConvTempDly converter temperature delay Instead of measuring the converter temperature it is possible to measure the converter fan current by means of the PW 1002 3 board ConvTempDly 97 05 avoids false fault messages
297. at this chapter contains enne n nnne nnnnnnnr nsns nnne nnn nn nnns 3 To which products this chapter applies nnns 3 Usage of warnings and notes 3 Installation and maintenance work 4 GOUGING WEE 5 Mechanical mstallaton nennen a n nnn nnn S 7 E le EE 8 Table of contents 10 Introduction 23 Chapter overvlew nennen nennen nennt nennen 23 Before You Statt 44 4 448540 fA ege ege ege deg eeu ou 23 What this manual contains 0 0 tee eee teeta eee terete enne 23 Start up 24 Clhiapter oVerview i n e dtd eater edis 24 GS Ce EE 24 El Geelen TEE 25 dr M PII MI 25 Checking with the power switched oft 25 Checking with the power switched on 27 Commissioning a DCS800 ssssssssssssssesseeeeeenees nennen snnt nnnr sein rnnr snnt rnnn nnne nnne nnns 28 Connect DCS800 to PC with DriveWindow Light 28 Commissioning a DCS800 with the wizard essssssssssssseeeeeeeeeee nnne nnne 29 Commissioning a DCS800 with DriveWindOw sssesssseeeeeeneeeeeennee nennen 30 Requirements iita re rid e ea eid Eee dE SER RR AREE REB EPR RR NER ERR EERA NAR Ee 30 01 02 Macro assistant Name plate data 30 03 Autotuning field current controller A 31 04 Autotuning armature current controller ssseseeeeeeeeeeeeneenn 31 05 Speed feedback assistant ssssssssssssssssssssseseeeeeee nennen nnne 32 Analog tacho fine tune procedure ssssssseen
298. ata set X 4 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 4 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus4Val3 data set X 4 value 3 Data set X 4 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 4 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus6Val1 data set X 6 value 1 Data set X 6 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 6 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus6Val2 data set X 6 value 2 Data set X 6 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 6 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus6Val3 data set X 6 value 3 Data set X 6 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 6 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus8Val1 data set X 8 value 1 Data set X 8 value 1 interval 30 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 8 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus8Val2 data set X 8 value 2 Data set x 8 value 2 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 8 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus8Val3 data set X 8 value 3 Data set X 8 value 3 interval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 8 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name DsetXplus10Val1 data set X 10 value 1 Data set X 1
299. atile N M2CurLimBrdg2 motor 2 current limit of bridge 2 Current limit bridge 2 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 Setting M2CurLimBrdg2 49 13 to 0 disables bridge 2 Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Note M2CurLimBrdg2 49 13 is internally set to 0 if QuadrantType 4 15 2 Q 2 Q drive Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M2KpArmCur motor 2 p part armature current controller Proportional gain of the current controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal current M2NomCur 49 02 with M2KpArmCur 49 14 3 if the current error is 5 of M2NomCur 49 02 Int Scaling 100 Type I Volatile N M2TiArmCur motor 2 i part armature current controller Integral time of the current controller M2TiArmCur 49 15 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 96 of motor nominal current M2NomCur 49 02 with M2KpArmCur 49 14 3 if the current error is 5 of M2NomCur 49 02 On that condition and with M2TiArmCur 49 15 50 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal current if the current error is constant after 50 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting M2TiArmCur 49 15 to 0 ms
300. ation is switched off field current actual doesn t reach field current reference no detection of field resistance field circuit open e g not connected respectively interrupted no writing of control parameters of speed controller tacho adjustment faulty or not OK or the tacho voltage is too high during autotuning tuning of speed controller speed feedback assistant or tacho fine tuning not possible due to speed limitation see e g M1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 Tuning of speed controller speed feedback assistant or tacho fine tuning not possible due to voltage limitation During the tuning of the speed controller the speed feedback assistant or the tacho fine tuning base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 might be reached Thus full armature voltage M1NomVolt 99 02 is necessary In case the mains voltage is too low to provide for the needed armature voltage the autotuning procedure is canceled Check and adapt if needed Mains voltage M1NomvVolt 99 02 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 field weakening not allowed see M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 and FlaCtriMode 44 01 discontinuous current limit could not be determined due to low current limitation in M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 or M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 filed current autotuning wrongly started in armature converter please use the field exciter no field exciter selected see M1UsedFexType 99 12 reserved DCS800 Control Panel up or download not started DCS800 Control Panel data not up or downloaded in time re
301. ault SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 17 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 DEVICENET Module macid 51 02 4 set node address as required Module baud rate 51 03 2 2 500 kBits s HW SW option 51 04 0 0 Hardware 1 Software Stop function 51 05 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly Output instance 51 06 100 100 ABB Drives assembly Input instance 51 07 101 101 ABB Drives assembly Output I O par 1 51 08 to NA not applicable when using Input I O par 9 51 25 ABB Drives assembly VSA I O size 51 26 NA not applicable when using ABB Drives assembly FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by DeviceNet adapter If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the DIP switches of the RDNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using ABB Drives assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 2
302. ays Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will bit 8 continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as long as the motor remains too hot Check Triplevel BE 0 0 N M2FaultLimTemp 49 37 M2KlixonSel 49 38 Ma2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 motor temperature let motor cool down and restart motor fan supply voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 3 Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 510 M2OverLoad 511 ConvFanCur 512 MainsLowVolt 453 Definition Action ES Fault is active when Motor 2 calculated overload 9 01 always Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will bit 9 continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as long as the motor remains too hot Check M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 Converter fan current 9 01 RdyRun 1 4 only with ConvTempDly 97 05 0 and a PW 10002 3 bit 10 board connected to SDCS PIN 4 51 Check converter fan supply voltage con
303. b A AAAA 161 Saving AP ele een EE 161 Function bloGKS eost LU Aes UL e a ae e Aer A ee AL A 162 General rules tht anak Arana Anan A An Anan Aan AGAR Aan Ads Amin A 162 eier 162 Block inp t attriDUles utet ud udi udi e 163 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 16 Parameter value as an integer Input 164 How the block handles the input sseeesesseeeeeeeeessserrrsresssrrrrrrrrssesrrrrrnnsssses 164 How to select the input enne 164 Constant as an integer input sssssssssssseeeeeneneeennennn 165 How to set and connect the Input 165 Parameter value as a boolean Imput 166 How the block handles the input ssseeesssseeeesssesssserrrsrssssrsrrrrrsssssrrrrrnnssssne 166 Constant as a boolean Imput enne 167 How to set and connect the Input 167 String fl el eite rec teriit tite ET 167 How to select the input nnns 167 giieeneedcas c 168 EE 168 Duce 169 ANI oi E EE ce UR du 169 BItWISQ eebe ERE aai een sedges 170 Ee UM M UM Mb ME ME ME ME un 171 Sn Lie EEEE 171 S70 0 eec 172 BE GE 172 ge c r 173 ei CT 173 ie VUEN 174 ET EE 174 IEN 175 MITES EE 175 Moll enean ti Leere Eb tpe EP Fr EEG a E EGG EUG UG EGG GR GE EEG age 175 INE EE 176 em M 176 ele Le WEE 176 PAL WV UNG sas cede dace EE 177 REEL 177 NB CIE 178 S NN 178 EE eh Eessen GE 179 SEMILLA
304. be connected to Die MainCtrlWord 7 01 or AuxCtrlWord 7 02 and is selectable by ExtFaultSel 30 31 External faults generate F526 ExternalDI ExtFaultOnSel 30 33 selects the reaction 1 external fault is always valid independent from drive state 2 external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun MSW bit 1 for at least 6 s Note In case inverted fault inputs are needed it is possible to invert the DPs Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 433 Bridge reversal With a 6 pulse converter the bridge reversal is initiated by changing the polarity of the current reference see CurRefUsed 3 12 Upon zero current detection see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 13 the bridge reversal is started Depending on the moment the new bridge may be fired either during the same or during the next current cycle The switchover can be delayed by RevDly 43 14 The delay starts after zero current has been detected see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 13 Thus RevDly 43 14 is the length of the forced current gap during a bridge changeover After the reversal delay is elapsed the system changes to the selected bridge without any further consideration This feature may prove useful when operating with large inductances Also the time needed to change the current direction can be longer when changing from motoring mode to regenerative mode at high motor voltages because the motor voltage must be reduced before switchin
305. biet 402 de 32 43 295 Eet e Ee et eter et eet ts 297 KpSMIR i oct ertet etre eer ees 295 KpSTiSMaxSpeed esseeeesneeerer eerren 297 KpSTiSMinSpeed sse 297 KpSValMinSpeed sssseeeeeeeneeeeeneerrr eene 297 KpSWeakp nene 295 KoWeakotirfime 295 Language eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 30 415 420 RE GC EE 241 Bien Lee WEE 224 Loadt emp nime eneenecp es 300 Loadchare e 299 LocalLossCtrl 75 311 431 462 472 LocationCounter cccccseceesseeeseeeeeeeeaas 377 LOGKOCK isis naui 274 M1AlarmLimLoad 315 489 452 468 489 MiAlarmLimTemp 316 435 451 468 MiAm oireeni 31 37 328 MiAmmb eerren 31 37 328 M1BaseSpeed 30 42 415 425 471 M1BrakeAckSel 82 324 462 470 M1 Braken 323 MiBrakeFltTime 324 462 MiBrakeLiftDly eeeseeeesssss 326 MiBrakeLongTime 326 462 470 MiPBrakebethy A 324 MiBraketoptnhy 326 M1CurLimBrdg1 seesseeeeeeeeeeeeeennene 31 280 MiCurt Imb rdo 31 280 M1DiscontCurLim 31 37 64 66 328 M1EncMeasMode 32 78 361 M1 EncPulseNo oseeenseeernrerrrrerrree 32 361 M1FaultLimLoad 315 439 452 MiFaultLimTemp 316 435 451 M1FexAlarmWord eene 242 M1FexFaultWord
306. ble the controllers are frozen the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and A111 MainsLowVolt A armWord1 9 06 bit 10 is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 is generated Note UNetMin2 30 23 isn t monitored unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 30 22 first Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 30 22 has to be larger than UNetMin2 30 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name UNetMin2 mains voltage minimum 2 Second lower limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMains Volt 99 10 If the mains voltage undershoots UnetMin2 30 23 following actions take place H PwrLossTrip 30 21 Immediately o the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 H PwrLossTrip 30 21 Delayed o field acknowledge signals are ignored o the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 o single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible the controllers are frozen the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and A111 MainsLowVolt AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 10 is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime 30 24 is elapsed otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt
307. by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 On by rising edge 0 1 0 Off1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 On by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Off1 AuxCtriWord 7 02 bit 15 21 DI7DI8 On and Start by rising edge 0 1 of DI7 Stop and Off1 by falling edge 1 0 of DI8 Following settings apply OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 DI7DI8 Note To give On and Run at the same time set OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 252 Signal Parameter name StartStop Start Stop command Binary signal for StartStop UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 0 NotUsed 1 2 DH Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 2 DI2 Start by rising edge 0 1 3 DIS Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 4 DIA Start by rising edge 0 1 5 DI5 Start by rising edge 0 1 NotUsed Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop default Stop only available with digital extension 6 DI6 Start by rising edge 0 1 7 DI7 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 8 DI8 Start by rising edge 0 1 9 DI9 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 board 10 DI10 Start by rising edge 0 gt 1 0 Stop only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 Start by rising edge 0 1
308. cause an emergency stop of the motor nor will the drive be disconnected from any dangerous potential To avoid unintentional operating states or to shut the unit down in case of any imminent danger according to the standards in the safety instructions it is not sufficient to merely shut down the drive via signals RUN drive OFF or Emergency Stop respectively control panel or PC tool Intended use The operating instructions cannot take into consideration every possible case of configuration operation or maintenance Thus they mainly give such advice only which is required by qualified personnel for normal operation of the machines and devices in industrial installations If in special cases the electrical machines and devices are in tended for use in non industrial installations which may require stricter safety regulations e g protection against contact by children or similar these additional safety measures for the installation must be provided by the customer during assembly Safety instructions SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Note e When the control location is not set to Local L not shown in the status row of the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel press the LOC REM key and then the stop key Safety instructions 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 10 Table of contents Safety instructions 3 Wh
309. ch the commissioning wizard start DriveWindow Light and press the Wizard button Start the wizard in DriveWin dow Light DriveWindow Light 2 Parame Ei B o9 stat Phys Ac SPC Sig Ref Act Informe Analog Drive Lc Control Stat Lir Fault Al 8 13 Analoc 14 Digital For basic commissioning press the Start buttoh or select a specific assistant 7 Field weakening assistant 6 Autotuning speed controller 248 5 Speed feedback assistant Sg 4 Autotuning armature current controller Ke 3 Autotuning fleld current controlle 2 Macro assistant 1 Name plate data ILU 288 mear Ganiiguration sequence Pesci Welpme lo the DS assistar Stormgsic commissioning to 71 d T choose speci riet Banc T7 7 None phate dato T 2 Maco assistant 3 Aulotuning field curent controller MA Auilcluring ermaiiie cunenl contraller T amp dulotuning peed conlicller 5 Speed lemdback aawstart T Pei weakening acielank irae Version 1 0 RC 3 Basic commissioning steps done Help bat AN ER 4 8 87 Wiz select dsf For more information about the wizard parameters faults and alarms press the Help button Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 30 Commissioning a DCS800 with DriveWindow Requirements 1 Before starting with the commissioning connect the drive via Ch3 on SDCS COM 8 with DriveWindow via e g NDPA 02 and NDPC 12 All w
310. ck to NormalMode 2 9 S 97 07 for e g rebuild kits 1 S01 0020 04 type code see table to 148 S02 5200 05 type code see table The drive s basic type code DCS800 AAX YYYY ZZB Product family DCS800 Type AA SO Standard converter modules RO Rebuild system EO Panel solution AU Enclosed converter Bridge type X 1 Single bridge 2 Q 2 2 anti parallel bridges 4 Q Module type YYYY Rated DC current Rated AC voltage ZZ 04 230 VAC 400 VAC 05 230 VAC 525 VAC 06 270 VAC 600 VAC 07 815 VAC 690 VAC 08 3860 VAC 800 VAC 10 450 VAC 990 VAC 12 540 VAC 1200 VAC Power connection B Sy Standard D1 D6 L Lett side D7 R_ Right side D7 a Second thyristor type D5 D6 Attention When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 400 Type code table None Signal Parameter name S01 2600 10 S02 1000 04 S01 0020 04 01 2600 12 02 1000 05 S01 0020 05 01 3000 04 S02 0900 06 S01 0045 04 01 3000 05 S02 0900 07 S01 0045 05 01 3000 06 S02 1200 04 S01 0065 04 01 3000 07 S02 1200 05 S01 0065 05 01 3000 08 S
311. commissioning tools the Adaptive Program and application program Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table DDCS link via ChO e g DriveWindow of SDCS COM 8 Dataset Value Address assignment of dataset 19 01 Serial communication via x42 Group Index gt 19 02 slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 90 02 19 03 see group 51 19 04 X 4 19 12 X see ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr a dsf Example2 A value can be send from the drive to the overriding control from individual parameters in group 19 via groups 92 or 93 The parameters of group 19 can be written to with the DCS800 Control Panel the commissioning tools the Adaptive Program and application program Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table DDCS link via ChO e g Control panel of SDCS COM 8 Dataset Value Address assignment of dataset 19 01 Serial communication via x43 Group Index 19 02 slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 KR ls 92 DE ETT see group 51 19 04 X 5 1 19 12 X see ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr a dsf Note This parameter group can be used as well for reading writing analog inputs outputs Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Data1 data container
312. contains all the necessary basic settings The additional desired data words have to be configured via the fieldbus network using Vendor Specific Drive I O Object Class 91h The adapter will automatically save the configuration The table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters shows the index configuration numbers and the corresponding data words via data sets Please note The grayed index is also addressed via group 51 please set the outputs and inputs to the same configuration numbers as shown in the table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters Example Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 136 Task The 5 data word of the telegram index05 should be connected to AuxCtrlWord 7 03 Todo AuxCtrlWord 7 03 is the default content of DsetXplus2Val2 90 05 The corresponding index configuration number of DsetXplus2Val2 90 05 is 8 So the configuration has to be done using the following values in the IP address all values are in hex service 0x10 write single class 0x91 drive IO map function instance 0x01 output attribute 5 index05 data 08 00 2 char hex value Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 137 DCS800 Parameter group 90 and 92 Datasets i name def value Class 91h index instance 1 configuration Output l no PLC gt Drive 3 i DsetXVal3 DsetXplus2Val1 o gt
313. controller FW rev g ppt Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name KpPID p part PID controller Proportional gain of the PID controller Example The controller generates 15 96 output with KpPID 40 01 3 if the input is 5 96 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N TiPID i part PID controller Integral time of the PID controller TiPID 40 02 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 96 output with KpPID 40 01 3 if the input is 5 On that condition and with TiPID 40 02 300 ms follows the controller generates 30 output if the input is constant after 300 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N TdPID d part PID controller PID controller derivation time TdP D 40 03 defines the time within the PID controller derives the error value The PID controller works as PI controller if TdP D 40 03 is set to zero Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N TdFiltPID filter time for d part PID controller Derivation filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N PID Act PID controller actual input value 1 index Index pointer to the source of the PID controller actual input value 1 The format is XXyy with negate actual input value 1 xx group and yy index
314. ct note PDC2 EN x DCS800 Winder description ITC 3ADWO00308 x Winder Questionnaire 3ADW000253z x DCS800 E Panel Solution Flyer DCS800 E Panel solution 3ADW000210 x Hardware Manual DCS800 E 3ADWO00224 x DCS800 A Enclosed Converters Flyer DCS800 A 3ADW000213 D Technical Catalogue DCS800 A 3ADW000198 x Installation of DCS800 A SADWOO00091 x x DCS800 R Rebuild System Flyer DCS800 R 3ADWO00007 D D DCS800 R Manual 3ADWO00197 X DCS500 DCS600 Size A5 A7 C2b C3 and C4 Upgrade Kits SADWOO00256 D Extension Modules RAIO 01 Analog IO Extension SAFE64484567 x RDIO 01 Digital IO Extension 3AFE64485733 x RRIA 01 Resolver Interface Module 3AFE68570760 x RTAC 01 Pulse Encoder Interface SAFE64486853 x RTAC 03 TTL Pulse Encoder Interface SAFE68650500 D AIMA R slot extension S3AFE64661442 x Serial Communication Drive specific serial communication NETA Remote diagnostic interface SAFE64605062 x Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RPBA PROFIBUS SAFE64504215 x Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RCAN 02 CANopen Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RCNA 01 ControlNet SAFE64506005 x Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RDNA DeviceNet SAFE64504223 x Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RMBA MODBUS SAFE64498851 X Fieldbus Adapter with DC Drives RETA Ethernet 3AFE64539736 X x gt existing p gt planned Status 04 2010 DCS800 Drive Manuals List_j doc Safety instructions What this chapter contains This chapter contains the safety instructions
315. ctTach 8V to 30V d49 x3 3 AITAC 9901x3 4 speed_act_tach_a dsf M1TachoAdjust motor 1 tacho adjust Fine tuning of analog tacho The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held tacho M1TachoAdjust 50 12 speed actual Internally limited to 2 29 UD rpm 20000 HandHeldTacho Note Changes of M1TachoAdjust 50 12 are only valid during tacho fine tuning ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune During tacho fine tuning M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 is automatically forced to EMF Attention The value of M1TachoAdjust 50 12 has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and not the delta between speed reference and measured speed Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M1TachoVolt1000 motor 1 tacho voltage at 1000 rpm M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed of 1000 rpm MhiTachoVolt1000 50 13 1 V the setting is used to calculate the tacho gain M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 0 V the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed feedback assistant Ml1TachoVolt1000 50 13 1 V the tacho gain was successfully measured and set by means of the speed feedback assistant Int Scaling 10 1V Type Volatile N PosSyncMode position counter synchronization mode Position counter synchronization mode for pulse encoder 1 a
316. ction block LocationCounter 84 03 shows the function block number which will be executed during the next SingleStep After a SingleStep AdapProgCmd 83 01 is automatically set back to Stop LocationCounter 84 03 shows the next function block to be executed To reset LocationCounter 84 03 to the first function block set AdapProgCmd 83 01 to Stop again even if it is already set to Stop A136 NoAPTaskTime AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 3 is set when TimeLevSel 83 04 is not set to 5 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 500 ms but AdapProgCmd 83 01 is set to Start SingleCycle or SingleStep Note AdapProgCmd 83 01 Start SingleCycle or SingleStep is only valid if AdapPrgStat 84 01 Running Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N olo 9 2 OH 9 bei i ON Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name EditCmd edit command Edit Adaptive Program EditCmd 83 02 is automatically set back to Done after the chosen action is finished 0 Done no action or edit of Adaptive Program completed default Shifts the function block in the spot defined by EditBlock 83 03 and all subsequent function blocks one spot forward A new function block can be placed in the now empty spot by programming its parameter set as usual Example A new function block needs to be placed in between the function block number four 84 22 to 84 27 and five 84 28 to 84 33 In order to do this 1 se
317. ction block 7 output Block1 Output 84 45 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block8Out block 8 output The value of function block 8 output Block1 Output 84 51 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block9Out block 9 output The value of function block 9 output Block1 Output 84 57 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Block100ut block 10 output The value of function block 10 output B ock1 Output 84 63 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Block110ut block 11 output The value of function block 11 output B ock1 Output 84 69 is written to a sink signal parame
318. ction is finished 0 Done_ no action or macro change completed default 1 2 Yes macro selected with App Macro 99 08 will be loaded into the drive Note Macro changes are only accepted in Off state MainStatWord 8 01 bit 1 0 Note It takes about 2 s until the new parameter values are active Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y NormalMode def NormalMode nit E C C Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name AppiMacro application macro ApplMacro 99 08 selects the macro preset parameter sets to be loaded stored into the RAM and flash In addition to the preset macros two user defined macros User1 and User2 are available The operation selected by ApplMacro 99 08 is started immediately by setting App Restore 99 07 Yes ApplMacro 99 08 is automatically set back to NotUsed after the chosen action is finished The selected macro is shown in MacroSel 8 10 0 NotUsed default 1 Factory load macro factory default parameter set into RAM and flash User1 and User2 will not be influenced 2 User1Load load macro User1 into RAM and flash 3 User1Save save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User1 4 User2Load load macro User2 into RAM and flash 5 User2Save save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User2 6 Standard load macro standard into RAM and flash 7 Man Const load macro manual constant speed into RAM and fl
319. ctor Motor 1 speed feedback selection 0 EMF speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback with flux compensation default 1 Encoder speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 1 connected to either SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 2 Tacho speed is measured by means of an analog tacho 3 External MotSpeed 1 04 is updated by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control 4 Encoder2 speed is measured by means of pulse encoder 2 connected to a RTAC xx see Encoder2Module 98 01 5 EMF Volt speed is calculated by means of the EMF feedback without flux compensation Note1 It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 EMF Note2 When using EMF speed feedback together with a DC breaker wrong voltage measurements can lead to F532 MotOverSpeed FaultWora 2 9 02 bit 15 In case of an open DC breaker the voltage measurement might show high values caused by leakage currents through the snubber circuits of the thyristors because there is no load on the DC side To prevent these trips set MainContAck 10 21 DCcontact Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N EMF Volt M1EncPulseNo motor 1 encoder 1 pulse number Amount of pulses per revolution ppr for pulse encoder 1 Int Scaling 1 1ppr Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 362 Signal Parameter name MaxEncoderTime maximum encoder time When an encoder is u
320. current error is constant after 200 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting M1TiFex 44 03 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the field current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 334 Signal Parameter name 44 04 MiFIdHeatRef motor 1 field heating reference Field current reference in percent of M1NomFieldCur 99 1 1 for field heating and field economy Field heating Field heating is released according to FidHeatSel 21 18 Field economy Field economy is only available when 2 motors with 2 independent field exciters are connected to the drive Field economy for motor 1 is released by means of M1FidHeatRef 44 04 lt 100 and activated if On 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 for longer than 10 s the other motor is selected via ParChange 10 10 the other motor can be seen in MotSel 8 09 and MtFlidRefMode 45 05 M2FIdRefMode 45 13 Internal Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N 44 07 EMF CtrlPosLim positive limit EMF controller Positive limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N 44 08 EMF CtriNegLim negative limit EMF controller Negative limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N KpEMF p part EMF controller
321. current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped default In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking A113 COM8Com A armWord1 9 06 bit 12 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note The time out for ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 is set by Ch0 TimeOut 70 04 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N CHO HW Config channel 0 hardware configuration CHO HW Config 70 06 is used to enable disable the regeneration
322. d Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Internal Internal det nit E C E Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2PosLimCtrl motor 2 positive voltage limit for field exciter Positive voltage limit for motor 2 field exciter in percent of the maximum field exciter output voltage Example With a 3 phase supply voltage of 400 VAC the field current controller can generate a maximum output voltage of 521 VDC In case the rated field supply voltage is 200 VDC then it is possible to limit the controllers output voltage to 46 That means the firing angle of the field current controller is limited in such a way that the average output voltage is limited to a maximum of 240VDC Note 4 Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M2PosLimCtrl 45 16 also as negative limit Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N FidCurTrim field current trimming The field current of motor 1 and motor 2 can be corrected by means of FlaCurTrim 45 17 in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 11 respectively M2NomFlaCur 49 05 0 to 20 The value is subtracted from motor 1 field current reference The result is visible in FldCurRefM1 3 30 20 to 0 96 The absolute value is subtracted from motor 2 field current reference The result is visible in FldCurRefM2 3 31 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N FldMinTripDly delay field curr
323. d only available with digital extension board Type C Volatile N Direct Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Speed reference inputs 257 E C Ref1Mux speed reference 1 selector multiplexer Speed reference 1 selector 0 Open 1 Close 2 DM 3 DI 4 DI 5 DIA 6 DI5 7 DI6 8 DI 9 DI8 10 DI9 112 DHO 12 DI11 13 MCW Bit11 14 MCW Bit12 15 MCW Bit13 16 MCW Bit14 17 MCW Bit15 18 ACW Bit12 19 ACW Bit13 20 ACW Bit14 21 ACW Bit15 Int Scaling 1 1 switch for speed ref 1 is fixed open switch for speed ref 1 is fixed closed default 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 12 switch is closed speed ref 1 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 only available with digital extension board 12 switch is closed speed ref
324. d optitorque active 5 EMF Opti field weakening active EMF controller released field reversal blocked optitorque active 6 Fix Rev Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller blocked field reversal active optitorque active 7 EMF Rev Opti field weakening active EMF controller released field reversal active optitorque active Note The field control mode for motor 2 depends on the setting of M2RefFieldMode 45 13 Note It is not possible to go into field weakening range when M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 EMF Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N 44 02 M1KpFex motor 1 p part field current controller ow wv uo Proportional gain of the field current controller N Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal field current M1NomFidCur 99 1 1 with M1KpFex 44 02 3 if the field current error is 5 of M1NomFlaCur 99 1 1 Int Scaling 100 Type I Volatile N M1TiFex motor 1 i part field current controller oo ouo Integral time of the field current controller M1TiFex 44 03 defines the time within the integral part S E of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 96 of motor nominal field current M1NomFidCur 99 1 1 with M1KpFex 44 02 3 if the field current error is 5 of M1NomFidCur 99 11 On that condition and with M1TiFex 44 03 200 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal field current if the
325. d 15 from integral part Setting M1TiArmCur 43 07 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N M1DiscontCurLim motor 1 discontinuous current limit Threshold continuous discontinuous current in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 The actual continuous discontinuous current state can be read from CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 12 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N M1ArmL motor 1 armature inductance Inductance of the armature circuit in mH Used for the EMF compensation EMF U R I L dL dt Attention Do not change the default values of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning Int Scaling 100 1 mH Type l Volatile N M1ArmR motor 1 armature resistance Resistance of the armature circuit in mQ Used for the EMF compensation EMF U R I L dl dt Attention Do not change the default values of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning Int Scaling 12 2 1mO Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name PropFbSel p part current feedback selection PropFbSel 43 11 chooses the armature current feedback type for the p part of the armature current controller 0 PeakCur peak current measurement is used default 1 AverageCur average current measurement i
326. d X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN 51 514 MainsNotSync Mains not in synchronism AC i RdyRun 1 The synchronization with the mains frequency has been lost Check mains supply fuses etc mains frequency 50 Hz 5 Hz 60 Hz 5 Hz and stability df dt 2 17 96 s see PLLIn 3 20 at 50 Hz one period 360 20 ms 20 000 and at 60 Hz one period 360 16 7 ms 16 6667 515 Motor 1 field exciter overcurrent 9 01 RdyRun 1 M1FexOverCur Check bit 14 in case this fault happens during field exciter autotuning deactivate the supervision by setting M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 135 M1FidOvrCurLev 30 13 parameter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning connections of field exciter insulation of cables and field winding resistance of field winding fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 516 MiFexCom Definition Action Motor 1 field exciter communication loss Check M1UsedFexType 99 12 FexTimeOut 94 07 flat cable connections between SDCS CON 4 and SDCS PIN 4 auxiliary voltage for integrated and external field exciter DCSLink cable connections DCSLink termination set dip switch S 1100 1 ON DCF803 0016 DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int DCSLink node ID settings DC
327. d in the DCS800 Control Panel and PC tools E C By means of USI Sel 16 09 it is possible to change between compact C and extended E signal and parameter list This influences parameter display of DCS800 Control Panel The compact list contains only signals and parameters used for a typical commissioning Group Index Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 189 Integer Scaling Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to change the value of the parameter properly Example If TorqMaxSPC 20 07 is written to from the overriding control an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 96 Example2 If SpeedRef 23 01 is written to from the overriding control 20 000 equals the speed in rpm shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Type The data type is given with a short code 16 bit integer value 0 65536 SI 16 bit signed integer value 32768 32767 C text string ENUM Volatile Y values are NOT stored in the flash they will be lost when the drive is de energized N values are stored in the flash they will remain when the drive is de energized Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 190 Signal and parameter list Signal Parameter name
328. d speed reference Used speed reference selected with RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 186 Sample of signals All signals are read only However the overriding control can write to the control words but it only affects the RAM Min max def Minimum maximum and default values are not valid for groups 1 to 9 Unit Shows the physical unit of a signal if applicable The unit is displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel and PC tools E C By means of USI Sel 16 09 it is possible to change between compact C and extended E signal and parameter list The compact list contains only signals and parameters used for a typical commissioning Group Index Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index Integer Scaling Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to read the value of the signal properly Example If MotTorq 1 08 is read from the overriding control an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 torque Example2 If SoeedRefUsed 2 17 is read from the overriding control 20 000 equals the speed in rpm shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Type The data type is given with a short code 16 bi
329. dFbSell 50 03 is checked against the EMF Check EMF FbMonLev 30 15 SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 polarity of tacho cable polarity of pulse encoder cable e g swap channels A and A not polarity of armature and field cables direction of motor rotation 554 TachoRange Selected motor tacho range Overflow of AlTacho input Check for the right connections X3 1 to X3 4 on the SDCS CON 4 556 TorqProving Selected motor torque proving while The acknowledge signal for torque proving is missing M1TorqgProvTi Check me 42 10 is MliTorgProvTime 42 10 active the Adaptive Program application program or overriding control providing the acknowledge signal TorqProvOK AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 11 557 ReversalTime Reversal time Current direction not changed before ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 is elapsed Check for high inductive motor too high motor voltage compared to mains voltage lower RevDly 43 14 if possible and increase ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 601 APFault1 User defined fault by Adaptive Program always 602 APFault2 User defined fault by Adaptive Program ne eee un i a caisse s nc 610 UserFault1 User defined fault by application program J 5 always y 611 UserFault2 User defined fault by application program e v RE CE i Fault tracing e ol SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 464 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Li
330. dMCW Off2N UsedMHCW Result 7 04 bit 0 7 04 bit 3 7 04 bit 1 0 D D field is turned off 1 0 1 reduced field current 1 1 1 normal field current 1 120 1 normal field current then reduced after stop 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Firmware description 62 field is turned off as motor coasts to stop and cannot turned back on again as long as Coast Stop is pending see Off2 10 08 the field current will be at the level set by means of M1FidHeatRef 44 04 while motor is stopped E stop In both modes of operation if the E stop see E Stop 10 09 is pending the field will be turned off It cannot be turned back on again as long as the E stop is pending If the E stop is cleared while in motion the motor will be stopped according to E StopMode 21 04 and then field and drive will be turned off Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 63 Field exciter mode General The standard DCS800 module can be operated as large field exciter by simply setting parameters It is either controlled by a DCS800 armature converter or can be configured as stand alone field exciter The field exciter mode uses the standard armature current controller as field current controller Thus the current of the converter ConvCurAct 1 16 equals the field current of the motor For these configurations an overvoltage p
331. data sets for the APC mailbox function 32 and 33 as well as for the master follower communication 41 are not programmable Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name 375 to FEEC M o Drivebus o o 71 01 ChO DriveBus channel 0 drive bus o o u Communication mode selection for channel 0 The DriveBus mode is used with the AC80 and AC 3 800M controllers O No DDCS mode recommended when ModuleBus is used 12Yes DriveBus mode default Note Before changing ChO DriveBus 71 01 the communication from the overriding control system has to be disabled e g by removing the fiber optic cables Note A new mode becomes only valid after the next SDCS COM 8 power up Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N 2 o Adaptive Program control 2 o Ben o AdapProgCmd Adaptive Program command Uu Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program 0 Stop stop the Adaptive Program is not running and cannot be edited default 1 Start running the Adaptive Program is running and cannot be edited 2 Edit edit the Adaptive Program is not running and can be edited 3 SingleCycle The Adaptive Program runs only once If a breakpoint is set with BreakPoint 83 06 the Adaptive Program will stop before the breakpoint After the SingleCycle AdapProgCmd 83 01 is automatically set back to Stop 4 SingleStep Runs only one fun
332. deAdar 70 01 1 if AC7O or AC80 is used via the optical module bus adapters TB810 or TB811 ChO NodeAdar 70 01 is calculated from the POSTION terminal of the DRIENG data base element as follows 1 multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16 2 addthe tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result Example POSITION l Ch0 NodeAdar 70 01 101 l 16 1 01 17 712 l 16 7 12 124 if AC 800M is used via the optical module bus ChO NodeAdar 70 01 is calculated from the position of the DCS600 ENG hardware module as follows 1 multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16 2 addthe tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result Example POSITION l Ch0 NodeAdar 70 01 112 l 16 1 12 28 503 16 5 03 83 Controller Node address Node address Node address Cho DriveBus DDCS DriveBus ModuleBus 71 01 APC AC31 No AC70 17 124 No AC80 DriveBus Yes AC80 ModuleBus 17 124 No FCI CI810A 17 124 No C1858 1 12 Yes Int Scaling 1 Volatile N 70 02 ChO LinkControl channel 0 link control DDCS channel 0 light intensity control for transmission LEDs When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Ch0 BaudRate channel 0 baud rate Channel 0 communication speed ChO BaudRate 70 03 must be set to 4 Mbits s when ABB overriding control modules e g FCI or AC 800M are used Otherw
333. disables the integral part of the current controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N M2DiscontCurLim motor 2 discontinuous current limit Threshold continuous discontinuous current in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 The actual continuous discontinuous current state can be read from CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 12 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N 351 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 352 Signal Parameter name M2ArmL motor 2 armature inductance Inductance of the armature circuit in mH Used for the EMF compensation EMF U R 1 L S dr Attention Do not change the default values of M2ArmL 49 17 and M2ArmR 49 18 Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning Int Scaling 100 1 mH Type l Volatile N M2ArmR motor 2 armature resistance Resistance of the armature circuit in mQ Used for the EMF compensation EMF U R I L SE dt Attention Do not change the default values of M2ArmL 49 17 and M2ArmR 49 18 Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning Int Scaling 12 2 1mO Type l Volatile N M2SpeedMin motor 2 minimum speed Motor 2 negative speed reference limit in rpm for SpeedRef2 2 01 SpeedHefUsed 2 17 Internally limited from 2 29 Z rpm to 2 29 E rpm 20000 20000 Note M2SpeedMin 49 19 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1Base
334. drive isolate the whole drive system from the supply Safety instructions SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Grounding These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the drive Incorrect grounding can cause physical injury death and or equipment malfunction and increase electromagnetic interference WARNING Ground the drive motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in all circumstances and to reduce electromagnetic emission and pick up Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized and marked as required by safety regulations e Ina multiple drive installation connect each drive separately to protective earth PE OCH Minimize EMC emission and make a 360 high frequency grounding e g conductive sleeves of screened cable entries at the cabinet lead through plate e Do not install a drive equipped with an EMC filter to an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system Note Power cable shields are suitable as equipment grounding conductors only when adequately sized to meet safety regulations e Asthe normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3 5 mA AC or 10 mA DC stated by EN 50178 5 2 11 1 a fixed protective earth connection is required Safety instructions 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g A Ate Printed circuit boards and fiber optic cables These
335. drive in state RdyOn or RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 bit O and 1 the brake logic will be started up to the point of the brake open lift command A drive in state Running MainStatWord 8 01 bit 2 will be stopped by ramp the brake will be closed applied but the drive will remain in state Running ForceBrake 0 The brake is controlled by the internal brake logic in group 42 Brake control M1BrakeCtrl motor 1 brake control Releases the control of motor 1 brake 0 NotUsed brake logic is blocked default 1 On brake logic is released according to it s parameter settings 2 BrakeClose test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always closed applied 3 BrakeOpen test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always opened lifted Attention A closed applied brake will open lift immediately Do not use this mode with e g an unsaved crane drive The brake open lift command BrakeCmd is readable in AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and can be connected to the digital output controlling the brake Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N BrakeOpen Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name nit def E C M1BrakeAckSel motor 1 brake acknowledge selector The drive sets either A122 MechBrake AlarmWorda 2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling A armWord1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42
336. dule RTAC xx is used In case a resolver is connected via an extension module RRIA xx Enc2PulseNo 50 19 defines the number of pole pairs Following formula is valid Enc2 PulseNo 50 19 21024 number of pole pairs Note The position counter 2 can be used with the resolver if following conditions are fulfilled number of pole pairs 1 and thus Enc2PulseNo 50 19 1024 PosCountMode 50 07 Rollover and the resolver s gear ratio is 1 1 this can be adapted by means of the application program see block PosSetGear Int Scaling 1 221 ppr Type Volatile N Unused PosCount2lnitLo Position counter encoder 2 low initial value Position counter initial low word for pulse encoder 2 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 1 pulse edge Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 Rollover 0 0 and 65536 360 See also SyncCommand 2 10 05 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N PosCount2InitHi Position counter encoder 2 high initial value Position counter initial high word for pulse encoder 2 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 22 65536 pulse edges Scaled 1 1 revolution Rollover always 0 See also SyncCommana 10 05 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Fieldbus This parameter group defines the communication parameters for fieldbus adapters F type R type and N type The parameter names and the number of the used paramet
337. during the fan acceleration 0s Converter temperature measurement is released The drive trips with F504 ConvOverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 4 in case of excessive converter temperature default 1 s to 300 s Converter fan current measurement is released when the drive is in On state UsedMCW 7 04 bit O On 1 The drive trips with Fb11 ConvFanCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 10 in case of missing or excessive converter fan current after ConvTempDly 97 05 is elapsed Int Scaling 1 1s Type I Volatile N S BlockBridge2 set block bridge 2 Bridge 2 can be blocked 0 Auto operation mode is taken from TypeCode 97 01 default 1 BlockBridge2 block bridge 2 2 Q operation for e g 2 Q rebuild kits 2 RelBridge2 release bridge 2 4 Q operation for e g 4 Q rebuild kits This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in QuadrantType 4 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N Au ll 0o o o D 2000 RelBridae2 Auto Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 402 Signal Parameter name Unused MainsCompTime mains compensation time Mains voltage compensation filter time constant Is used for the mains voltage compensation at the current controller output Setting MainsCompTime 97 09 to 1000 ms disables the mains voltage compensation Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Unused CompUkPLL phase locked loop to compen
338. e controlled test rigs to limit the no load speed SpeedErrWin Speederwin ol o o mw Example1 To get a window of 10 rpm width around the speed error An set WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedErrWin WinWidthPos 23 08 5 rpm and WinWidthNeg 23 09 5 rpm Example2 To get a window e g 500 rpm to 1000 rpm around speed actual set WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedActWin WinWiathPos 23 08 1000 rpm and WinWidthNeg 23 09 500 rpm To get a window e g 50 rpm to 100 rpm around speed actual set WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedActWin WinWidthPos 23 08 100 rpm and WinWidthNeg 23 09 50 rpm Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N o gl mgl eS Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 23 16 Signal Parameter name AuxSpeedRef auxiliary speed reference Auxiliary speed reference input for the speed control of the drive Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed 2 17 via A RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Internally limited from 2 29 DE PH to 2 29 ae rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y DirectSpeedRef direct speed reference Direct speed input is connected to SpeedRef3 2 02 by means of AuxCtrlWora 2 7 03 bit 10 1 and replaces the speed ramp output 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Note Si
339. e parameter change Binary signal to release either Motor1 User1 or Motor2 User2 The choice to release Motor1 2 shared motion or macros User1 2 is defined by means of MacroChangeMode 16 05 0 NotUsed default 1 DMH switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 2 DIS switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 3 DI switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 4 DIA switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 5 DI5 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 6 DI6 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 7 DI7 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 8 DI8 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 9 DI9 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0 only available with digital extension board 11 DI switch to Motor2 User2 by rising edge 0 gt 1 switch to Motor1 User1 by falling edge 1 0
340. e FanDly 21 14 has elapsed If motor or converter overtemperature is pending the delay starts after the temperature has dropped below the overtemperature limit Int Scaling 1 1 s Type l Volatile N 21 15 Unused Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MainContCtrlMode main contactor control mode MainContCtriMode 21 16 determines the reaction to On and Run commands UsedMCW 7 04 bits 0 and 3 0 On main contactor closes with On 1 default 1 On amp Run main contactor closes with On Run 1 2 OnHVCB for high voltage AC circuit breaker configuration for more information see chapter XXXX not implemented yet 3 DCcontact If DC breaker is used as a main contactor it will be closed with On 1 Additionally the armature voltage measurements are adapted to an open DC breaker by clamping SpeedActEMF 1 02 ArmVoltActRel 1 13 ArmVoltAct 1 14 and EMF VoltActRel 1 17 to zero when the drive is Off The clamping is released either 100 ms after an On command MCW bit 0 is given in case DCBreakAck 10 23 NotUsed or when using the DC breaker acknowledge with DCBreakAck 10 23 DIx until the acknowledge signal indicates that the DC breaker closed DCcontact Note If the DC volt measurement is located at the motor terminals use 0 On Modified D5 D7 converters Note The DC breaker US style K1 1 is a special designed DC breaker wi
341. e SDCS CON 4 and or SDCS PIN 4 respectively SDCS POW 4 board Auxiliary supply voltage Trip level 230 VAC 185 VAC 115 VAC 96 VAC F502 502 ArmOverCur Armature overcurrent 9 01 always 3 Check bit 1 ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 parameter settings of group 43 current control armature current controller tuning current and torque limitation in group 20 all connections in the armature circuit especially the incoming voltage for synchronizing If the synchronizing voltage is not taken from the mains e g via synchronizing transformer or 230 V 115 V network check that there is no phase shift between the same phases use an oscilloscope for faulty thyristors armature cabling incase of a rebuild kit proper connection of firing pulses and CT s if TypeCode 97 01 None and S ConvScaleCur 97 02 is set properly F503 503 ArmOverVolt Armature overvoltage DC 9 01 always 1 Check bit 2 if setting of ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 is suitable for the system parameter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning EMF controller tuning flux linearization too high field current e g problems with field weakening if the motor was accelerated by the load overspeed does the speed scaling fit see SpeedScaleAct 2 29 proper armature voltage feedback connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of
342. e active Note If Userl is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 3 is set If User2 is active AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 4 is set Note In case macro User1 or User2 is loaded by means of ParChange 10 10 it is not saved into the flash and thus not valid after the next power on ACW Bit15 249 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Note When changing parameters in a user macro first call the macro with App Macro 99 08 then change the parameters and save them with App Macro 99 08 Note The motor Motor1 Motor2 selection can be made in drive state RdyOn and RdyRun It takes about 20 ms to switch between values Note ParChange 10 10 itself is not overwritten Int Scaling 1 Volatile N OvrVoltProt over voltage protection triggered As soon as the overvoltage protection unit is triggered A120 OverVoltProt A armWora 2 9 07 bit 0 NotUsed default 12D 1 triggered 0 not triggered 2 DI2 1 triggered 0 not triggered 3 DI3 1 triggered 0 not triggered 4 Di4 1 triggered 0 not triggered 5 DI5 1 triggered 0 not triggered 6 DI6 1 triggered 0 not triggered 7 DI7 1 triggered 0 not triggered 8 DI8 1 triggered 0 not triggered 9 DI9 1 triggered 0 not triggered 10 DI10 1 triggered 0 not triggered 11 DI11 1 triggered 0 not triggered OvrVoltProt 10 13 is only released when drive is in field
343. e actual armature peak current in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FluxRefFIdWeak flux reference for field weakening Relative flux reference for speeds above the field weakening point base speed in percent of nominal flux For proper scaling setting of CtriModeSel 43 05 PowerSupply1 divides the value of FluxRefFldWeak 3 24 by 2 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y VoltRef1 EMF voltage reference 1 Selected relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 EMF RefSel 46 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y VoltRef2 EMF voltage reference 2 Relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 after ramp and limitation input to EMF controller VoltRefSlope 46 06 VoltPosLim 46 07 VoltNegLim 46 08 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FluxRefEMF flux reference after EMF controller Relative EMF flux reference in percent of nominal flux after EMF controller Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FluxRefSum sum of flux reference FluxRefSum 3 28 FluxRefEMF 3 27 FluxRefFlaWeak 3 24 in percent of nominal flux Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FldCurRefM1 motor 1 field current reference Relative motor 1 field current reference in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 1 1 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y FldCurRefM2 motor 2 field current reference Relative motor 2 field current
344. e connections DCSLink termination DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 12P SlaNode 94 04 F536 536 12PSlaveFail 12 pulse slave failure RdyOn 1 4 12 pulse master is tripped by a fault of the 12 pulse bit 3 slave Check Fault logger of 12 pulse slave 533 12PRevTime 12 pulse reversal timeout 9 03 RdyRef 1 Current direction not changed before 12P RevTimeOut bit 0 47 05 is elapsed Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light M1FexRdyLost Definition Action Motor 1 field exciter ready lost Field exciter lost ready for operation message while working AC voltage missing or not in synchronism Check if all phases are present ifthe mains voltage is within the set tolerance fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Motor 2 field exciter ready lost Field exciter lost ready for operation message while working AC voltage missing or not in synchronism Check if all phases are present ifthe mains voltage is within the set tolerance fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Fast current rise Actual current di dt too fast Check ArmCurRiseMax 30 10 SDCS COM 8 faulty Check Change SDCS COM 8 and or SDCS CON 4 Motor 1 field exciter low under current Check M1FIdMinTrip 30 12 FldMinTripDly 45 18 param
345. e generator E g signal e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Note SqrWavelndex 99 18 must not be used for the manual tuning functions see App Macro 99 08 Note After a power up SgrWavelndex 99 18 is set back to O and thus disables the square wave generator Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile Y TestSignal square wave signal form Signal forms for the manual tuning functions see App Macro 99 08 and the square wave generator 0 SquareWave a square wave is used default 1 Triangle a triangle wave is used 2 SineWave a sine wave is used 3 Pott a constant value set with Pot 99 15 is used Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y SquareWave Pot Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 420 DCS800 Control Panel operation Chapter overview This chapter describes the handling of the DCS800 Control Panel Start up The commissioning configures the drive and sets parameters that define how the drive operates and communicates Depending on the control and communication requirements the commissioning requires any or all of the following The Start up Assistant via DCS800 Control Panel or DriveWindow Light steps you through the default configuration The DCS800 Control Panel Start up Assistant runs automatically at the first power up or can be accessed at any time using the main menu Application macros can be selected to define common system configurations
346. e input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and local loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and local loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking A130 LocalCmdLoss AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 13 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note The time out for LocalLossCtrl 30 27 is fi
347. e range is set to bipolar or unipolar signals with offset 100 96 of the input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO 15 06 to ScaleAO4 15 20 If the range is set to unipolar signals without offset only 100 of the input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO 15 06 to ScaleAO4 15 20 The smallest value is always zero Itis possible to invert the AO s by simply negate ndexAO 1 15 01 to IndexAOA 15 16 Example In case the min max voltage 10 V of AO1 should equal 250 of TorqRefUsed 2 13 set IndexAO 1 15 01 213 ConvModeAO 1 15 03 10V Bi ScaleAO 1 15 05 4000 mV Source selection AOs Inversion of AOs 0 comP 1l IndexAO SR Index X i W E Ctr WordAOX 3 IO BoardConfig 98 15 Source Default Scaling Output value SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 IndexAO 1 15 01 gt ConvModeAO1 15 03 AO X4 7 X4 1 CUM GRO Se L p ScaleAO1 den d IndexAO1 15 01 201 Val 5 11 X4 10 X42 IndexAO 2 15 06 ConvModeAO2 15 08 AO2 X4 8 X4 3 Be EE Es ScaleAO2 SE IndexAO 15 06 A02 Val 5 12 X4 10 X44 fixed AO X4 9 X4 5 Herdware X4 10 X4 6 1 RAIO 01 AIO ExtModule IndexAO3 15 11 rk ConvModeAOS 15 13 AO3 98 06 See 51 p ScaleAO3 iis 4 indexes 19 10 X 4 15 15 ConvModeAOA 15 18 AO4 Geen SE Ed ScaleAO4 pP d IndexAO4 15 15 d a 2 RAIO 01 AIO MotTempMeas M1TempSel 31 05 AO5 x21 98 12 M2TempSel 49 35 X2 2 M1TempSel 31 05 X2 3 M2TempSel 49 35
348. eLiftDly 49 41 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2BrakeLongTime motor 2 brake long time Brake close apply acknowledge monitor During this time the brake close apply command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M2BrakeAckSel 49 29 can be different without causing either A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N NotUsed def NotUsed nit E C E M2BrakeStopDly motor 2 brake stop delay Brake close apply delay This function starts after the brake acknowledge if selected with M2BrakeAckSel 49 29 is zero and compensates for the mechanical close apply delay of the brake During the stop Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 O of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller stays active until M2BrakeStopDly 49 43 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 359 Signal Parameter name 49 44 M2StrtTorqRefSel motor 2 start torque reference selector 5 e o w Motor 2 start torque selector D x c 0 NotUsed start torque function is blocked and the start torque reference is fixed zero z 3 default z iz 1 Memory torque memory r
349. ebertod AA 419 SquareWave ssssssesseeeeseereeerirnssrrrrserrrees 198 Giallpeed eene 304 443 458 e UR 304 443 458 Giallforg eerren 305 443 458 elt e 54 82 252 StationNumber 139 141 368 Stop function 125 127 129 131 133 144 GiopMode 55 75 283 String seeded 173 381 Strings ebrei 173 381 le EE 173 381 Snae e E EEEE eene cette 173 381 Stringb iiu ttr a iaaa 173 381 StrtTorqRef cccccccccceecesesstteeeeeeeeeeees 325 471 Subnet mask 1 133 144 Subnet mask 2 133 144 Subnet mask 3 133 144 Subnet mask A 133 144 vn ommand 78 82 245 SyncCommandqe2 ssssssssssssss 246 SysFaultWord o oo eccccesesteeeeeeeeeeees 236 464 SysPassCode 2 00 eeeeeecesssseeeeeeeeeessssnseeeeees 273 SyStem Tiles As Aw SA ee 210 Tachotemmmal 42 208 TaEiltPlp 8t toit euiticet tester eee 319 TOPID ie EE 319 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g DR LCE 50 51 406 TestSignal ics ue teer 419 BI items 402 HL Oe 33 45 334 Bleu E WEE 376 473 MAP p TTE ROM 319 TES est ceci eee eae es 32 43 295 WAS MM DUE CERE 297 iSlnitValue sese 295 TGvalMinfpeed 297 ToolLinkConfig esessessss 275 Toro cctCompbtef 195 TorqActFiltTime eeeeeeeeeeees 404 TorqGort iieri necat 195 Re lte L Ce EE 89 304 TorgDerRet 55 5 aa 194 TorqGenMAax ss
350. ect the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a packed Boolean word With Bit 0 0000 Oh Bit 1 0001 1h high Bit 15 1111 Fh BlockParamSet_ovw_a dsf this type of constant defines a Block Constant which can only be modified in EDIT mode Example o o 1 o 1 o Huug HEX Example of attribute parameter with BlockxIn1 as boolean bit 10 BlockxIn2 as constant BlockxIn3 as integer gt Bits converted into hex the value 200A H is to be set into parameter BlockxAttrib Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 164 Parameter value as an integer input How the block handles the input The block reads the selected value in as an integer Note The parameter selected as an input should be an integer value The internal scaling for each parameter can be found in chapter Parameters How to select the input e Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode Enter e Setthe address from which the input value is to be read with group 100 index e g AccTime1 22 01 2201 A negative address e g 2201 will act an inversion of the connected value The figure below shows the DCS800 Control Panel display when the input BlockxIn1 with e g x 1 for 1 block selection parameter is in edit mode Display of panel REM PAR EDIT 8405 Block1In1 Connection to 50 3 503 as output of A
351. ections DCSLink termination set dip switch S1100 1 ON DCF803 0016 DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 M2FexNode 94 09 respectively switches S800 and S801 on DCF803 0016 DCF803 0035 and FEX 425 Int fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s 521 FieldAck Selected motor field acknowledge missing Check M1UsedFexType 99 12 if selection matches the field exciter type Mot1FexStatus 6 12 Mot2FexStatus 6 13 fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s F521 FieldAck is the sum fault for all field related faults like 1 F515 MiFexOverCur 2 F516 MiFexCom 3 F529 M1FexNotOK 4 F537 MiFexRdyLost 5 F541 M1FexLowCur 522 SpeedFb Selected motor speed feedback The comparison of the speed feedback from pulse encoder or analog tacho has failed Check M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 SpoeedFbFitMode 30 36 SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 EMF FbMonLev 30 15 SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 pulse encoder encoder itself alignment cabling coupling power supply feedback might be too low mechanical disturbances jumper S4 on SDCS CON 4 analog tacho tacho itself tacho polarity and voltage alignment cabling coupling mechanical disturbances jumper S1 on SDCS CON 4 EMF connection converter armature circuit closed SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 SDCS POW 4 2 O O l Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 457 Text
352. ed Another reason field heating is used is to keep moisture out of the motor Following parameters are used to turn on and control field heating FldHeatSel 21 18 M1FidHeatRef 44 04 There are basically two modes of operation In both modes the field current will be at a reduced level determined by M1FidHeatRef 44 04 FidHeatSel 21 18 On Field heating is on as long as On 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 Off2N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 and Off3N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 In general field heating will be on as long as the OnOff input is not set and no Coast Stop or E stop is pending Modes of operation Condition On UsedMCW Off2N UsedMCW Result 7 04 bit 0 7 04 bit 1 Power up 0 1 reduced field current Start drive 1 1 normal field current Normal stop 120 1 normal field current then reduced after stop Coast Stop 1 120 field is turned off as while running motor coasts to stop and cannot turned back on again as long as Coast Stop is pending see Off2 10 08 the field current will be at the level set by means of M1FidHeatRef 44 04 while motor is stopped FldHeatSel 21 18 OnRun Field heating is on as long as On 1 Run 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Off2N 1 and Off3N 1 In general field heating will be on as long as the OnOff input is set the Start Stop input is not set and no Coast Stop or E stop is pending On UsedMCW Run Use
353. ed documentation 133 EDS UE 133 Mechanical and electrical installation ssssessssseeeennnnnn 133 Drive Configuration ENEE 133 Parameter setting example using Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile 133 Upto 4 data WOrdS Marc 135 Upto Ee ERT ee EE 135 Switch on sequence ssssssssssssssssesseeseeennee nennen nen nnnr ssh nnnnn sn nnn rnnr seen nennen 138 Modbus RTU communication with fieldbus adapter RMBA 01 sssssesseeeeseneererreerrneeeeen 139 erac 139 ll ENEE Re 139 Related documentation 139 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Mechanical and electrical installation ssesseeeeemn 139 Blees leen em IUS 139 Parameter setting example sssssssssseeeeneeeneeneennnn nennen nnne nnns 139 z When controlling a drive ith ebhrhhetebebehabebeAb5habebebebdr 139 When used for monitoring only 141 Setting of PLC parameter groups 90 and Oo7 143 Switch on Sequence eed reete iib eei aate bed Lesben besides Lupin iate aia iniata 143 Modbus TCP communication with fieldbus adapter RE A 01 sssssssesseesssrrseerrrnesrrrresrrrnsss 144 GSMS all EE 144 HETA 01 DOS800 TEE 144 Related documentation 144 Mechanical and electrical installation ssssssseeeenem 144 Drive ere rTe P z li o o or 144 Parameter setting example using ModbueiTCh 144 SWITCH OM sequerice a ue
354. ed from 2 29 SOR rpm to 2 29 SE rpm 20000 20000 Note Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedShare speed sharing Scaling factor SpeedRefUsed 2 17 Before speed ramp Int Scaling 10 1 Type SI Volatile N SpeedErrFilt filter for An Speed error An filter time 1 There are three different filters for actual speed and speed error An SpeedFiltTime 50 06 is filtering the actual speed and should be used for filter times smaller than 30 ms SpeedErrFilt 23 06 and SpeedErrFilt2 23 11 are filtering the speed error An and should be used for filter times greater than 30 ms It is recommended to set SpeedErrFilt 23 06 SpeedErrFilt2 23 1 1 Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Idea of Window Control The idea of the Window Control is to block the speed controller as long as the speed error An or speed actual remains within the window set by WinWidthPos 23 08 and WinWidthNeg 23 09 This allows the external torque reference TorqRef1 2 08 to affect the process directly If the speed error An or actual speed exceeds the programmed window the speed controller becomes active and influences the process by means of TorqRef2 2 09 To release window control set TorqSe
355. ed limit for SpeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N M1ZeroSpeedLim motor 1 zero speed limit ol When the Run command is removed set UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 to zero the drive will stop as chosen by StopMode 21 03 As soon as the actual speed reaches the limit set by MiZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the motor will coast independent of the setting of StopMode 21 03 Existing brakes are closed applied While the actual speed is in the limit ZeroSpeed AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 11 is high Note In case FlyStart 21 10 StartFrom0 and if the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 4 is generated Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N Unused TorqMax maximum torque ol Maximum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for selector TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 Note The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqMin minimum torque o Minimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for selector TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 Note The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the largest value is valid
356. ed negative torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Calculated from the largest minimum torque limit field weakening and armature current limits TorqUsedMax 2 22 FluxRefFldWeak 3 24 and MtCurLimBrag2 20 13 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Unused TorqUsedMax used torque maximum Relative positive torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Selected with TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 Connected to torque limiter after TorqRef4 2 1 1 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqUsedMin used torque minimum Relative negative torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Selected with TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 Connected to torque limiter after TorqRef4 2 1 1 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRefExt external torque reference Relative external torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after torque reference A selector TorqRefA 25 01 and TorqRefA Sel 25 10 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqLimAct actual used torque limit Shows parameter number of the actual active torque limit 0 0 no limitation active 122 19 TorqMaxAll 2 19 is active includes current limits and field weakening 222 20 TorqMinAll 2 20 is active includes current limits and field weakening 322 22 TorqUsedMax 2 22 selected torque limit is active 422 3 TorqUsedMin 2 23 selected torque limit is active 5 20 07 TorqMaxSPC 20 07 speed controller limit
357. ed parameter list can be selected by USI Sel 16 09 0 2 Compact short parameter list C default 12 Extended long parameter list E Note USI Sel 16 09 works only for the DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light always show the extended parameter list Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N SetSystemTime set the drive s system time Sets the time of the converter in minutes The system time can be either set by means of SetSystemTime 16 11 or via the DCS800 Control Panel Int Scaling 1 221 min Type I Volatile Y ToolLinkConfig tool link configuration The communication speed of the serial communication for the commissioning tool and the application program tool can be selected with ToolLinkConfig 16 14 0 9600 9600 Baud 1 19200 19200 Baud 2 38400 38400 Baud default 3 57600 57600 Baud 4 115200 115200 Baud If ToolLinkConfig 16 14 is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 276 Signal Parameter name Data storage E SS x m Si 9 dis This parameter group consists of unused parameters for linking testing and commissioning purposes Example1 A value can be send from the overriding control to the drive via groups 90 or 91 to individual parameters in group 19 The parameters of group 19 can be read with the DCS800 Control Panel the
358. ed zero after DynBrakeDly 50 11 is elapsed Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Dynamic braking active see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 6 Zero current detected see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 13 Trip DC breaker see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 14 DC breaker acknowledge DynamicBrakingOn see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 8 Acknowledge brake contactor see DynBrakeAck 10 22 A105 DynBrakeAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 4 ZeroSpeed see AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 11 MainContactorOff see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 MotSpeed 1 04 M1ZeroSpeedLim 22 03 77 activation 100 0 Dynamic braking sequence For usage of US style DC breakers see MainContCtrlMode 21 16 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 78 Position counter General The position counter is used for position measurements It can be synchronized that is preset with an initial value The counter output value and its initial value are 32 bit signed values The 32 bit position value is sent to and received as two 16 bit values Thus the low word dose not possess a sign Counting procedure The position counting is only possible when using an encoder see M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Its measurement mode is selected by means of M1EncMeasMode 50 02 and PosCountMode 50 07 Counting is increasing when the motor is rotating forward and decreasing when the motor is rotating backward A loss free algorithm
359. ed4 constant speed 4 Defines constant speed 4 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name 265 GE 5 UI e e Analog inputs a gt o o 13 01 Al1HighVal analog input 1 high value gt o 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in A 1HighVal E 13 01 Example Incase the min max voltage 10 V of analog input 1 should equal 250 of TorqRefExt 2 24 set TorqRefA Sel 25 10 AM ConvModeAI 1 13 03 10 V Bi Al1HighVal 13 01 4000 mV and Al1LowVal 13 02 4000 mV Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type I Volatile N AliLowVal analog input 1 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in A 1LowVal 13 02 Note Al1LowVal 13 02 is only valid if ConvModeAl1 13 03 10 V Bi Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type SI Volatile N ConvModeAl1 conversion mode analog input 1 The distinction between voltage and current is d
360. eeeee 280 469 Am Alpohbat 199 AmmCur cH 193 ArmOurAIl eeeeeeeeeeenne 193 ArmCurLimMmSpeed1 issesieeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenne 331 ArmCurLimSpeede n 331 ArmCurLimSpeeds ssssusss 331 ArmMmCurLiMmSpeed4 n 332 ArmCurLimSpeedb ssssusss 332 ArmCurRiseMAax 306 444 460 ArmOwvrCurLev 30 228 306 429 450 ArmOvrVoltLev 64 66 228 305 435 450 ArmMmV ee EE 48 192 ArmVoltActRel ccccceecccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeaees 192 AuxCtrIWord 75 119 122 218 AuxCtrIWorde2 eere 219 469 LD DEE terre ia edet 293 AuxStatWord 76 119 122 223 BalRamphRetf sssseeeee 287 EE US 296 Baud ate EEN 147 Baudrate sii iinis 119 122 BaudRate 95 99 104 107 139 141 368 393 Block100Out esee treitera teet 383 Block1 1Out seseee 383 Block120Out eeeee 383 Block130Out eeee 383 Block140Out ere 383 Block150Out eeee 383 Block160ut eeeee 383 Block Ath 379 BIOCK TAD WEEN 378 BIOCKTN2 nna Mii Shite thie She thas 379 Blo k a Hl KE 379 Block OUt 2 tet ttes 382 Block Output 379 Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 486 Silke ae 378 Block2 OU eres 382 Ee e IL nnns eee 382 BlockdAcOut 382 BOCK OU
361. eeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 445 FaultWords 99 104 230 445 FaultWorddA eeseeeeeees 231 445 FB TimeOut eeeee 314 458 472 FBA PAR REFRESH 119 122 125 127 129 131 133 144 147 368 FOMON REN 456 463 471 FexTimeOut 64 95 107 393 455 456 Fieldbus1 nett te ter etaaveaaed eines 367 FIGIGDUST tesoro rischi cias 368 Fieldb s l ciii tierra 368 Fieldbus362 uoo iati 368 FilterATI oo dees due dE Ra ehe dE E 265 FilterAl2 eda 266 FilterA 3i EAE 266 WU DE 267 FillerAQ T SSnARESES 271 EillerAQ2 n eek teh te kta te he he etus 272 Filter 272 liem m 273 FiringLimMode sees 329 Firmware Tvpe EEN 52 201 FirmwareVer 52 118 201 474 FixedSpeed1 eieeuee itn 289 FixvedGpeec ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeneeeeees 289 Fld oositact EETA 336 EldBooslSel 2 She Sein dn dees 82 335 Fld oosi Time 336 FldCtriMode 31 33 45 48 58 64 333 FldCurFlux40O eee 33 47 334 FldCurFlux70 eee 33 47 334 FldCurFlux90 eee 33 47 334 FldCurbei 34 60 200 FldCurbeiM 200 FldACUrTrI eebe t tto bete etes 345 FildHeatSel eeen 60 286 FldMinTripDly 60 64 345 444 460 461 FldRefGain eene 59 343 FldRefHyst AAA 59 342 FIdElevilySt nnna 60 342 FlaWeakDyn esses
362. el 11 03 SpeedRef2301 Ch0 NodeAdar 70 01 0 254 ChO node address ChO LinkControl 70 02 10 ChO LED light intensity Ch0 BaudRate 70 03 4 Mbits s for ABB overriding control ChO TimeOut 70 04 100 Time delay for communication loss detection Ch0 ComLossCtrl 70 05 RampStop Reaction to communication loss detection Ch0 HW Config 70 06 Ring or Star ChO topology selection CHO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 10 use either data set range 1 to 16 or data set range 10 to 25 CommModule 98 02 COM 8 AC800x ChO DriveBus 71 01 No or Yes Ch0 communication mode selection DCS800 parameter setting for ABB overriding control Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedHef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 110 Received data set table Send from the overriding control to the drive typical Addresses for data received from the overriding control Dataset Data set Selection Default Parameter name number index CON 4 parameter value default values 1 90 01 701 MainCtrlWord 90 02 2301 SpeedHef 90 03 2501 TorqHefA 90 04 702 AuxCtrlWord 90 05 703 AuxCtrlWord2 90 06 90 07 90 08 90 09 90 10 90 11 90 12 70 24 0 70 24 2 70
363. el of the fault the drive reacts differently The drive s reaction to a fault with trip level 1 and 2 is fixed See also paragraph Fault signals of this manual The reaction to a fault of level 3 and 4 can be chosen by means of SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 respectively FaultStopMode 30 30 Converter protection Auxiliary undervoltage If the auxiliary supply voltage fails while the drive is in RdyRun state MSW bit 1 fault F501 AuxUnderVolt is generated Auxiliary supply voltage Trip level 230 VAC 185 VAC 115 VAC 96 VAC Armature overcurrent The nominal value of the armature current is set with M1NomCur 99 02 The overcurrent level is set by means of ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 Additionally the actual current is monitored against the overcurrent level of the converter module The converter s actual overcurrent level can be read from ConvOvrCur 4 16 Exceeding one of the two levels causes F502 ArmOverCur Converter overtemperature The maximum temperature of the bridge can be read from MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 and is automatically set by TypeCode 97 01 or manually set by S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 Note When setting the air entry temperature for D6 and D7 modules manually use MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 50 C as absolute maximum Exceeding this level causes F504 ConvOverTemp The threshold for A104 ConvOverTemp is 5 C below the tripping level The measured temperature can be read from BridgeTemp 1 24 If the measured
364. eleased the minimum value equals the absolute value of StrtTorqRef 42 08 2 StrtTorqRef StrtTorqRef 42 08 3 Al1 analog input Al1 4 Al2 analog input Al2 5 Al3 analog input AI3 6 Al4 analog input Al4 7 Al5 analog input AIS 8 Al6 analog input Al6 Note Torque memory is the presetting of the torque when starting with e g suspended load The preset torque equals the actual torque stored when the brake open lift command is removed After energizing the drive the value of StrtTorqRef 42 08 is set as torque memory Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 360 Signal Parameter name Speed measurement 50 01 MiSpeedScale motor 1 speed scaling Motor 1 speed scaling in rpm M1SpeedScale 50 01 defines the speed in rpm that corresponds to 20 000 speed units The speed scaling is released when M1SpeedScale 50 01 10 20 000 speed units M1SpeedScale 50 01 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 gt 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 in case M1SpeedScale 50 01 10 or mathematically If 50 01 10 then 20 000 50 01 in rpm If 50 01 lt 10 then 20 000 Max I 20 07 I 1 20 02 I in rpm The actual used speed scaling is visible in SpeedScale Act 2 29 M1SpeedScale 50 01 gt 10 M1SpeedScale 50 01 SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20
365. emented yet external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 2 Q 3 phase field exciter external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al2 third party field exciter acknowledge via AI3 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int external 2 Q 16 A field exciter DCF803 0016 or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X100 2 and X100 3 see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADWO000309 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADWOOO031 1 Type C Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Mot2FexType motor 2 type of field exciter Motor 2 field exciter type Read from M2UsedFexType 49 07 0 NotUsed no or third party field exciter connected 1 OnBoard integrated 1 Q field exciter for sizes D1 D4 only default 2 FEX 425 Int internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 3 DCF803 0035 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 4 DCF803 0050 external 1 Q 50 A
366. en I pued i d Butee ue WAWONWD CEU TO Yvioreuen CEP LS fenovionsurew CHE T Y Bep ojowu pue sjueweinseoy sw Clemen eum ameuny TOYLNOO LN3SOO 3801 VIASHV SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Appendix A Firmware structure diagram 483 JSp T Aer weabetp eanqonzqas 4 oossod epoui eise Hat ul Z 4 10 AOON 10 1 eubisyse H 6166 uoijoeuuoo ou sJeuyo Ip pouegeaeMubs Z E66 asmoa CRE ZL aod H 9166 pesnjeupeeds EIER LL hod H SL 66 Lweunopld CES 2 eor E peseung CZLE 28 i anemalenbs xepujeaemibs 9166 0 966 epoyeowies JojeJouoD anem euenbs due jurpne3yw H 701 due 14240 LW S054 J dwa juruueiviw H 901 r iesdwaL w LSO LE d 8IV duie L13AOLN 901v eb S Liv seejyduie OW v m ziv yu wanse w amesadw a JO 0 y jueuieJnseeui eunje1eduie 100W SNOILONNA TWNOILIGQV Appendix A Firmware structure diagram SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 484 Appendix B SDCS CON 4 Terminal Allocation SDCS CON 4 CONNECTOR ALLOCATION DCS800 module TERMINAL ALLOCATION X300 Routine test X9 Slot 1 X33
367. en speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 1 switch is closed speed ref 2 is active 0 switch is open speed ref 0 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Type Cc Volatile N Invert1102 Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 261 Signal Parameter name E C MotPotUp motor pot up With the motor pot up function the motor speed is increased by means of the selected binary input The acceleration is limited by AccTime1 22 01 MotPotDown 11 14 overrides MotPotUp 11 13 0 NotUsed default 1 DN 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 2 DI2 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 3 DI3 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 4 DIA 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 5 DI5 12
368. en H S067 xeauzm Ire 1066 ep peu ZW zeien OF GF PEP ie G 15 queuno ZWOMNOP HL c 90 6v jemneoHpidzw Kaal Jeux 009 lesqapeeds Li JI EH epus anerer TEE d Bl bc PsieeHPld peedsiow 000 OU OFON efumoma X4 L0 v epowinopia JY vunuipeeui o es si Buyjeos eure VES BRUN ARMEAN Q6xni4unopia xh Gemeen 1 Se gt pang 4a car LVS Ovxni4unopiat ed 1xeapesn iN ZU 66 Mnouinsod uw wh urisogio awa f 20 PP open H LCE n Ke UE __ wad EGO v M EES VMOAUON LIA zeg py LN xe4dyiLw om Hv OS ED i x Leen gt ledassexnion 9 v 0 68 2066 E J sv aint EH A xao eeri um ROSA sews lesione 09110 S27 JoPHHOW COE T A EH sei Seen SCH ue 4Wa Qaan v0 y ieneoupta pue voneoupow KZ 4 d LU eupwionsuen leinopt now aaner enz T anbiomdo EM 19joquoo 33 Fass al Genen esey ana fiec vy DL oe Leena gt SOSY ePoweupidLN ungjeuixnd gt 68 EU P Brewood TZ raren veau 00 HOM 7 a naidi EECH Buyeos een ejep ploy pue K 4 0102 01788 S DEE Sueueinseen sui g joyuoo jueuuno Dau sui g jonuoo xny pue 4w3 Jon eu pilav AWS HSZ 26 Soen Hoer Auogpiel4 lesepojuiedo Wer Tw ledovioAuuay pts leMOVIIOA An DEE gt jueuieunseou queuno eunjeway wou xeu NOWO P dro im ORM
369. en RevDly 43 14 is equal or less than 25 ms Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Speed depending current limit ArmCurLimSpd1 43 18 ArmCurLimSpd2 43 19 ArmCurLimSpd3 43 20 ArmCurLimSpd4 43 21 ArmCurLimSpd5 43 22 0 MaxCurLimSpeed n 43 17 Nmax maximum absolute value ofM1SpeedMin 20 01 and M1SpeedMax 20 02 max MaxCurLimSpeed speed limit for maximum armature current Minimum speed level where the armature current reduction begins Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 RU rpm 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed1 armature current at speed limit 1 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at MaxCurLimSpeed 43 17 Should be set to the maximum absolute value of M7CurLimBrdg1 20 12 and M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ArmCurLimSpeed2 armature current at speed limit 2 Armature current limit in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 at speed 43 17 24 Lo 43 17 with N a Max 1 20 01 l 1 20 02 I Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation
370. ension board 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 12 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 12 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 1 released 0 blocked MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 1 released 0 blocked AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Constant speeds unused ConstSpeed1 constant speed 1 Defines constant speed 1 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N ConstSpeed2 constant speed 2 Defines constant speed 2 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program Internally limited from 2 29 PUO Hm to 2 29 SEIN rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N ConstSpeed3 constant speed 3 Defines constant speed 3 in rpm The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or application program Internally limited from 2 29 SEO rpm to 2 29 erik rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N ConstSpe
371. ent thus set 0 V to 2 V for 1 PT100 respectively 0 V to 10 V for 2 or 3 PT100 using the DIP switch for more details see RAIO 01 User s Manual Resolution 11 bits sign Scan time for AI7 and AI8 10 ms connected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all Al s are galvanically isolated motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to AI7 and AI8 see section Motor protection Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery IO configuration SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 89 Configuration The value of Al1 to Al6 and AlTacho can be read from group 5 configurable default setting yes yes yes yes yes yes temperature temperature INIA RB Oo PO 10 Configurable yes The Al s can be connected to several converter functions and it is possible to scale them by means of group 13 In addition the Al s can be read by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Configurable temperature The Al s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement see M1TempSel 31 05 and M2TempSel 49 35 Configurable Al s are defined by means of following parameters Ref1Sel 11 03 Ref2Sel 11 06 TorqUsedMaxSel 20 18 TorqUsedMinSel 20 19 TorqgRefA Sel 25 10
372. ent minimum trip FidMinTripDly 45 18 delays F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 respectively F542 M2FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 9 If the field current recovers before the delay is elapsed F541 F542 will be disregarded MtFlaMinTrip 30 12 M2FIdMinTrip 49 08 Note FidMinTripDly 45 18 is blocked when OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N S MiFIdScale set motor 1 field current scaling factor Motor 1 field exciter scaling factor S M1FlaScale 45 20 is write protected unless ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode To use S M1FidScale 45 20 following inequation has to be valid M1NomFldCur 99 11 S MtFlaScale 45 20 lt maximum field current of the used field exciter For S M1FidScale 45 20 gt maximum field current of the used field exciter A132 ParConflict AlarmWora2 9 07 bit 15 is generated For M1NomFlaCur 99 11 gt S MtFlaScale 45 20 the scaling is automatically set by M1NomFldCur 99 1 1 The scaling factor is released when M1NomFidCur 99 11 lt S M1FlaScale 45 20 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 OnBoard to DCF804 0060 or FEX 4 Term5A If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over immediately Int Scaling 100 1 A Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name S M2FldScale set motor 2 field current scaling factor Motor 2 field exciter scaling factor S M
373. er Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal4 1 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N 94 35 TrmtRecVal4 2 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 2 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 2 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal4 3 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 3 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 3 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal4 4 mailbox 4 transmit receive value 4 Mailbox 4 transmit receive value 4 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 399 0 None the type code is set by user see S ConvScaleCur 97 02 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 and S BlockBridge2 Signal Parameter name ao 5 D o o Measurement o o 97 01 TypeCode type code o o Uu TypeCode 97 01 is preset in the factory and is write protected It identifies the drives current 5 a voltage temperature measurement and its quadrant type To un protect the type code set S 2 ServiceMode 99 06 SetTypeCode The change of the type code is immediately taken over and O d ServiceMode 99 06 is automatically set ba
374. er s cycle time Fieldbus communication N type The communication between the N type fieldbus adapter and the SDCS COM 8 uses data sets The data set base address is set by means of CHO DsetBaseAdadr 70 24 1 The communication for the fieldbus adapters is activated by means of CommMoadule 98 02 COM 8 Nxxx The contents of the fieldbus data sets is set by means of the same pointers as for the ABB overriding control data sets see sections Heceived data set table and Transmitted data set table Received and transmitted values are set according to groups 90 to 93 Also the update times are the same Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 112 Ch1 I O devices All optional UO devices are connected via AIMA 01 board to Ch1 The SDCS COM 8 is the master in the communication link Each device has an individual address set with switches on the I O device Before use each I O device must be activated by means of a parameter in group 98 See also IO Module Adapter AIMA 01 User s Manual Ch2 Master follower link General The master follower link is designed for applications in which the system is operated by several drives and the shafts are coupled to each other via gearing chains belts etc The master controls all followers via a fiber optic serial communication link Pulse encoders are recommended for the master and all followers The master is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow the
375. ere eee 67 DC breaker DC contactor ee 68 Ea E KE ENT M EE 68 HVCB controlled externally DC breaker controlled by the drive 68 DE contactorUSVersiO EE 69 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 12 AC and DC breaker controlled by the drive 71 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled by the drive 72 AC breaker controlled by the drive DC breaker controlled externally 73 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled externally eeeeseeeenneennnn 74 Command Trip DC breaker ssssssssssssssseseeeeeneeee ennemis 74 Dynamic braking i eoe ocit tetti tere tette sete i i tete ite ee ete Delo fetete be olo Belo fetete Pe elo Eetofeteteze eiotelo in 75 General Eee taret ten teniente teet eerie iini 75 Ee EE 75 ee e I Ni 75 gil 75 DG ACTIVATION EP 76 elen e Em 78 Generalitat that depot aur ute utra 78 Counting procedure seen enn nnnns ennt nnrs snnt nnne sent nnnn sinn n nnns nnns 78 Synchronization zt eh i ie duit 78 I O configuration 81 e arco Tele sevetadiassaictisssorecasseestenssaettnseeettepanettansaauttardasistaydaatiesaaettenaetes 81 Digital inputs RK EE 81 SDCS CON 4 GD OD 81 T and2 BDICHD edocet equa CE M CAR E M M 81 Configuration eccecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeceaaeeeeseeaeeeesecaaeeeesccaeeeesecieeeeeseneeeeeeaas 82
376. eroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped default In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking A113 COM8Com AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 12 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note The time out for Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 is set by Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Ram
377. ers depend on the selected fieldbus adapter see fieldbus adapter manual Note If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Fieldbus1 fieldbus parameter 1 Fieldbus parameter 1 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 368 Signal Parameter name 51 15 Fieldbus15 fieldbus parameter 15 Fieldbus parameter 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Fieldbus16 fieldbus parameter 16 Fieldbus parameter 16 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N FBA PAR REFRESH fieldbus parameter refreshing If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 is automatically set back to DONE after the refreshing is finished 0 DONE default 1 RESET refresh the parameters of the fieldbus adapter Note This service is only available for R type fieldbus adapters Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Fieldbus36 fieldbus parameter 36 Fieldbus parameter 36 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the Modbus adapter RMBA xx see also Modbus adapter manual Note If a Modbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only
378. ersion selection for digital input 4 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Di5invert invert digital input 5 Inversion selection for digital input 5 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Di6invert invert digital input 6 Inversion selection for digital input 6 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile DI7Invert invert digital input 7 Inversion selection for digital input 7 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 256 Signal Parameter name Di8Invert invert digital input 8 Inversion selection for digital input 8 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N DiI9Invert invert digital input 9 Inversion selection for digital input 9 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 only available with digital extension board only available with digital extension board Type C Volatile N DI10Invert invert digital input 10 Inversion selection for digital input 10 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 only available with digital extension board only available with digital extension board Type C Volatile N 10 35 DH 1Invert invert digital input 11 Inversion selection for digital input 11 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 1 only available with digital extension boar
379. erval 30 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 14 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Transmit data sets addresses 1 Addresses for the transmit data send from the drive to the overriding control The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index The data set base address is set in ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table S ignals and parameters Dataset Value e g data storage group 19 DDCS link via ChO of SDCS COM 8 Address assignment of dataset 19 01 Serial communication via P Group Index Lk 19 02 slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 90 05 19 03 see group 51 19 04 19 12 X see ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr a dsf DsetXplus1Val1 data set X 1 value 1 Data set X 1 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 1 Default setting of 801 equals MainStatWord 8 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus1Val2 data set X 1 value 2 Data set X 1 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 1 Default setting of 104 equals MotSpeed 1 04 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus1Val3 data set X 1 value 3 Data set X 1 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24
380. eseeeaeeeeeeeeens 344 M treewhll ey 344 M2KlixonSel se 82 358 452 M2KpATImQUr itera beatur 351 OR vi Le sarete 350 M ModelTime eee 356 M2NOImQOU dE ee 349 M2NomrFldCur eee 349 M2NoOmImVOIt ENEE EE edi 348 M OperModetexd 346 M2OvrSpeed snsssssseeeerrrrsssserrerrre 353 470 M2PoSLIMCU eanan 59 345 M2SpeedFbSel 354 474 M2SpeedMAax cccssceceeeeeeeeeseees 352 471 M GpeedMim 352 471 M GpeedGcale 353 471 M2StrtTorqRefSel 89 359 471 M TachMavt peed eene 384 M3Tachohcdust A 354 M2TaChOGAIN sereen 385 M Tachotune iiaia a 384 M2TachoVolt1 000 354 M tempzel 89 92 357 M2TiArmOur eee 351 M2TiFeOX e 351 M TorobrovT me 358 M llsedtexvfvpe 350 456 M ZerotzpeedDhy eerren 356 M2ZeroSpeedLim 349 474 MacroChangeMode ssssseeeeeereereereeeen 274 WERT EEEE 30 227 MailBox1 99 104 395 461 469 MailBox 2 104 395 461 469 Malo 396 461 469 MailBox4 ssses 397 461 469 MailBoxCycle1 99 104 395 461 469 MailBoxCycle2 396 461 469 MailBoxCycle3 397 461 469 MailBoxCycle4 398 461 469 MainContACk 69 82 254 432 457 MainContCtrlMode
381. eter 92 02 Input 3 51 25 6 data word 3 setting via parameter 92 03 Input 4 51 26 10 data word 4 setting via parameter 92 04 FBA PAR REFRESH DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is 51 27 changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by Ethernet adapter If all DIP switches S1 are OFF the IP address is set according to parameters 51 04 51 07 In case at least one DIP switch is on the last byte of the IP address P address 4 51 07 is set according to the DIP switches see page 42 DCS800 parameter setting using Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedHef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Up to 4 data words The content of Input Output 1 to 4 can be configured with the RETA 01 configuration parameters Please see table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters which contains all the necessary basic settings Up to 12 data words The DCS800 supports up to 12 data words in each direction The first configuration of the RETA 01 adapter has to be done according to the table RETA 01 Ethernet IP configuration parameters which
382. eter name Torque reference handling 26 01 TorqSel torque selector Torque reference selector 0 Zero zero control torque reference 0 1 Speed speed control default 2 Torque torque control 3 Minimum minimum control min TorgHef1 2 08 TorqRef2 2 09 4 Maximum maximum control max TorgHef1 2 08 TorqRef2 2 09 5 Add add control TorqRef1 2 08 TorqRef2 2 09 used for window control 6 Limitation limitation control TorqRef1 2 08 limits TorqRef2 2 09 If TorgRef1 2 08 50 then TorqRef2 2 09 is limited to 50 The output of the torque reference selector is TorqRef3 2 10 The currently used control mode is displayed in CtriMode 1 25 If the drive is in torque control AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 10 is set Note TorqSel 26 01 is only valid if TorgMuxMode 26 04 TorqSel2601 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N LoadComp load compensation Load compensation in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 added to TorqRef3 2 10 The sum of TorqRef3 2 10 and the LoadComp 26 02 results in TorqRef4 2 1 1 Note Since this torque offset is added it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N TorqSelMod torque selector mode Mode setting for the torque selector 0 Auto the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control in case the mode described in e OfftMode 21 02 StopMode 21 03 E StopMode 21 04 LocalLossCtrl 3
383. eter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning EMF controller tuning flux linearization motor name plate for minimum current at maximum field weakening maximum speed field circuit fuses field contactor is not closed if the field current oscillates if the motor is not compensated and has a high armature reaction fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s Fault is active when RdyRun 1 9 03 RdyRun 1 bit 5 9 03 RdyRef 1 t6 jand generating 7 8 Triplevel 9 03 bit 4 bi bi RdyOn 1 t 9 03 always bit Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Definition Action Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Motor 2 field exciter low under current M2FexLowCur Check M2FIdMinTrip 49 08 FldMinTripDly 45 18 parameter settings of group 44 field excitation field current controller tuning EMF controller tuning flux linearization motor name plate for minimum current at maximum field weakening maximum speed field circuit fuses field contactor is not closed if the field current oscillates if the motor is not compensated and has a high armature reaction fault message at field exciter 7 segment display or flashing LED s F543 543 COM8Com SDCS COM 8 communication loss overriding control and master follower Check CommandSel 10 01 ChO ComLossCtrl 70 05 ChO TimeOut 70 04 C
384. fA 25 01 and TorqRefB 25 04 are retained On control place change see CommandSel 10 01 the drive is stopped The aux control bits B11 to B15 are not affected control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters B15 control used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 218 Signal Parameter name 7 02 AuxCtrlWord auxiliary control word 1 ACW1 The auxiliary control word 1 can be written to by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Bit BO B1 B2 Note Name RestartDataLog TrigDataLog RampBypass BalRampOut LimSpeedRef4 DynBrakingOn HoldSpeedCtrl WindowCtrl BalSpeedCtrl SyncCommand SyncDisable ResetSyncRdy aux control aux control aux control aux control Value 1 0 1 0 1 Com
385. ffer s 3600 000 Kx Axis Length s 15 000 T Y Axis Maximum 20 00 BY Axis Minimum 10 00 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 0 00 100 00 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 0 00 100 00 3 Channel 3 0 00 100 00 10 4 Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 Channel S 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 3 00 6 00 9 00 12 00 15 00 Time s e ene sli i34 ole mio el se oooemusgobosesms Qoa 82 eo Om Bou Por Aoc 200 jw ie weie milan is Before tuning of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 46 10 tune M1ArmR 46 10 until the EMF is as close as possible to zero and dose not change it s value during the current step Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 38 E Drivewindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 ez ae ae ele ed k piel nez zs CW pcs 800 D1 01 Application Soleil 40H1 8ar 1 17 Data logger OH 1 Par 3 12 A Event logger O 1 Par 43 2 DI Faut logger LV 10H 1 Par 43 6 40H 1 Par 43 7 0H 1 Par 43 8 O 1 Par 43 9 01 Phys Act Values 0H1 Par 43 10 i 99 12 MIUsedFexType 0H 1 Par 99 12 02 SPC Signals Monitor Normal D Interval ms 10 P History Buffer s 3600 000 Kx Axis Length s 15 000 T Y axis Maximum 20 00 BY Axis Minimum 10 00 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 0 00 100 00 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 0 00 100 00 3 Channel 3 0 00 100 00 104 4 Channel 4 U UU 100 00 5 Channel 5 0 00 100 00 6 Channel6 0 00 100 00 est purpurei n
386. field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 5 DCF804 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 6 DCF803 0060 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet 7 DCF804 0060 external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet 8 DCS800 S01 external 2 Q 3 phase field exciter 9 DCS800 S02 external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter 10 DCF803 0016 external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 11 reserved to 14 reserved 15 ExFex AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC 16 ExFex Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 17 ExFex AI2 third party field exciter acknowledge via AI2 18 ExFex AIS third party field exciter acknowledge via AIS 19 ExFex Al4 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 20 FEX 4 Term5A internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int external 2 Q 16 A field exciter DCF803 0016 or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X100 2 and X100 3 21 reserved 22 Exc Appl 1 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADW00031 1 Int Scaling 1 Type c Volatile Y Mot1FexSwVer motor 1 firmware version of field exciter Motor 1 field exciter firmware version The format is yyy With yyy consecutively numbered version This signal is set during initialization of the drive New values are shown after the next power up Int Sca
387. filtered value Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 174 Limit Type Logical function Illustration Operation The value connected to IN1 will be limited with IN2 as upper limit and IN3 as lower limit OUT is the limited input value OUT stays 0 if IN3 is gt IN2 Connections IN1 16 bit integer 15 bits sign value to be limited IN2 16 bit integer 15 bits sign upper limit IN3 16 bit integer 15 bits sign lower limit OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign limited value MaskSet Type Logical function Illustration MaskSet IN IN2 IN3 OUT Operation The block sets or resets the bits in IN1 and IN2 Example INS set IN3 reset IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT 0 0 True 0 0 0 False 0 1 0 True 1 1 0 False 1 1 1 True 1 1 1 False 0 0 1 True 1 0 1 False 0 Example Whole word with IN3 set gt OUT 4370 Whole word with IN3 reset Connections IN1 16 bit integer packed boolean word input IN2 16 bit integer packed boolean word input INS boolean set reset IN2 in IN1 OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean result Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 175 Max Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT is the highest input value OUT MAX IN1 IN2 IN3 Note An open input will ignored Connections IN1 IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer 15 bi
388. ft command is given The brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 is send delayed by M1BrakeLiftDly 42 11 to the brake Then M1BrakeLiftDly 42 11 and M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 are started at the same time During M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 the speed ramp is clamped to zero and the torque reference equals StrtTorqRef 42 08 After M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 is elapsed and the brake acknowledge if selected with M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 is active clamp of speed reference is removed This function compensates for the mechanical open lift delay of the brake With Run UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 O and motor speed below M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 starts to compensate for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 to actual speed 0 Until M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 is elapsed the brake is kept open lifted After M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 is elapsed the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 is removed and the brake close apply delay M1BrakeStopDelay 42 13 is started During M1BrakeStopDelay 42 13 the motor control remains active with speed reference set to zero and the speed controller stays alive This function compensates for the mechanical close apply delay of the brake The brake can be forced by ForceBrake AuxCtrlWorae2 7 03 bit 12 ForceBrake 1 If ForceBrake is set the brake remains closed applied If the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command is given to a
389. fully check KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation 7 Ifthe autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning Attention The assistant is using the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 If using setting Encoder Encoder2 or Tacho make sure the speed feedback is working properly 07 Field weakening assistant 1 2 Open the workspace 07 DCS800 Field weakening assistant dww Enter the motor data and the field circuit data M 1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 M1FlIaMinTrip 30 12 FlaCtriMode 44 01 M1NomVolt 99 02 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 and M1NomFlaCur 99 1 1 Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 EMF FluxAuto and set On and Run via within 20 s During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 The EMF controller data are calculated the flux linearization is tuned by means of a constant speed while decreasing the field current and the EMF controller respectively flux linearization parameters are set When the autotuning is finished successfully check KpEMF 44 09 TiEMF 44 10 FldCurFlux40 44 12 FlaCurFlux70 44 13 and FldCurFlux90 44 14 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails
390. function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word It is used to connect the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a packed Boolean word With Bit 0 0000 Oh Bit 1 0001 1h Set 84 04 2 selection of ADD function Set 84 05 xx xx selection of the speed reference for Input 1 Set 84 06 xx xx selection of an external ref for Input 2 Set 84 07 1500 constant value for Input 3 Set 84 08 4000h because Input 3 constant gt Bit 1421 4000h Set 86 01 xx xx write processed value to destination parameter for further processing 84 09 contains the processed value pointer Read 155 pointer of MF channel group 70 AP FB group 84 Dataset table group 92 DCS Link Mailbox group 94 Act Signal Parameter table 7 01 7 02 99 99 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Adaptive Program 156 How to control the execution of the program The Adaptive Program executes the function blocks in numerical order according to the block number 1 16 All blocks use the same time level This cannot be changed by the user The user can e select the operation mode of the program stop start editing single cycling single stepping e adjust the execution time level of the program and e activate or de activate blocks Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware
391. g 3 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N String4 string 4 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N String5 string 5 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 382 Signal Parameter name Adaptive Program outputs Block1Out block 1 output The value of function block 1 output Block1 Output 84 09 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Block2Out block 2 output The value of function block 2 output Block2Output 84 15 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equ
392. g for 10 seconds Selection see ConvFanAck 10 20 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N NotUsed Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name DynBrakeAck dynamic braking acknowledge The drive sets A105 DynBrakeAck A armWord1 9 06 bit 4 if a digital input for dynamic braking is selected and the acknowledge dynamic braking active is still present when On UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 is set Selection see ConvFanAck 10 20 A105 DynBrakeAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 4 should prevent the drive to be started while dynamic braking is active Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N DC BreakAck DC breaker acknowledge The drive sets A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 2 if a digital input for the DC breaker is selected and the acknowledge is missing Selection see ConvFanAck 10 20 The motor will coast if A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 2 is set Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Unused 255 E C DI1Invert invert digital input 1 Inversion selection for digital input 1 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Di2invert invert digital input 2 Inversion selection for digital input 2 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Di3invert invert digital input 3 Inversion selection for digital input 3 0 Direct 1 Inverted Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Dl4invert invert digital input 4 Inv
393. g to regenerative mode see also RevVoltMargin 44 21 After a command to change current direction see CurRefUsed 3 12 the opposite current has to be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips with F557 ReversalTime Faul tWord4 9 04 bit 8 Example Drive is tripping with F557 ReversalTime FaultWord4 9 04 bit 8 CtriRefUsed 3 12 changes polarity act Zero current CtrlStatMas 6 09 detection bit 12 is set CurCtrlStat 6 03 bit 1 Ws RevDly 43 14 oO ZeroCurTime Out 97 19 Bridge reversal RevDly_a dsf Analog input monitor In case the analog input is set to 2 V to 10 V respectively 4 mA to 20 mA it is possible to check for wire breakage by means of AI Mon4mA 30 29 In case the threshold is undershoot one of the following actions will take place 1 the drive stops according to FaultStopMode 30 30 and trips with F551 AlRange 2 the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AlRange Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 434 3 the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 and sets A127 AlRange Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 435 Motor protection Armature overvoltage The nominal value of the armature voltage is set with M1NomVolt 99 02 The overvoltage level is set by means of ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 Exceeding this level causes F503 ArmOverVolt Residual cu
394. ght M e ETT 614 UserFault5 User defined fault by application program d d always 615 UserFault6 User defined fault by application program F616 616 UserFault7 User defined fault by application program always F617 617 UserFault8 User defined fault by application program Triplevel ur mM t ee NEUE bol daa i an in MN e e on a NT M REN uM C l F625 625 UserFault16 User defined fault by application program 9 05 always Triplevel is set in the application program SDCS COM 8 messages Details of the SDCS COM 8 messages are available in SysFaultWord 9 10 Definition Action Fault is active Operating system message xx An OS xx message is an empty and thus not used message of the SDCS COM 8 operating system If an OS xx message is indicated during normal operation the reason is usually caused by EMC In this case please check for proper version of the SDCS COM 8 revision and higher grounding of cables converter and cabinet Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 465 Alarm signals A An alarm is a message that a condition occurred which may lead to a dangerous situation It is displayed and written into the fault logger However the cause for the alarm can inhibit the drive from continuing with normal operation If the cause of the alarm disappears the alarm will be automatically reset The fault logger shows the appearing alarm A1xx with a plus sign and
395. ght corner of the LCD display corner of the LCD display 1266 RPM Up 12 4 A Down Scrolls up through a menu or list 465 dm i ae Scrolls down through a menu or lis displayed in the middle of the 12 22 MENU displayed in the middle of the LCD LCD display Display Increments a value if a parameter Decrements a value if a parameter is selected is selected Increments the reference if the e Decrements the reference if the upper right corner is highlighted upper right corner is highlighted in in reverse video reverse video Uso e Help Displays context sensitive and remote control of the drive gt information when the button is pressed The information displayed STOP Stops the drive in local START Starts the drive in local describes the item currently control from DCS800 panel and control from DCS800 panel and highlighted in the middle area of the when the Start up Assistant is used when the Start up assistant is used display DCS800 FW pan sum dsf General display features Soft key functions The soft key functions are defined by the text displayed just above each key Display contrast To adjust display contrast simultaneously press the MENU key and UP or DOWN as appropriate DCS800 panel operation 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 422 Output mode Use the output mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the output mode press
396. gnal Parameter name DOSIndex digital output 3 index Digital output 3 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO3BitNo 14 06 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Digital output 3 default setting is command MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO3BitNo digital output 3 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO3Index 14 05 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N DO4Index digital output 4 index Digital output 4 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO4BitNo 14 08 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is XXyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO4BitNo digital output 4 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO4Index 14 07 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N c gc DOS5Index digital output 5 index Digital output 5 is controlled by a selectable bit see DOSBitNo 14 10 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DOBBitNo digital output 5 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DOSIndex 14 09 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DO6lndex d
397. gnal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 396 94 19 Signal Parameter name MailBoxCycle2 cycle time mailbox 2 The function of MailBoxCycle2 94 19 is depending on the setting of MailBox2 94 18 If MailBox2 94 18 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle2 94 19 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle2 94 19 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle2 94 19 is set to 0 ms If MailBox2 94 18 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle2 94 19 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom A armWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle2 94 19 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time parameter Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal2 1 mailbox 2 transmit receive value 1 Mailbox 2 transmit receive value 1 The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N TrmtRecVal
398. gram Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant5 constant 5 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant6 constant 6 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant constant 7 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Constant8 constant 8 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N 381 E C Constant9 constant 9 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Constant10 constant 10 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N String1 string 1 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SIC Volatile N String2 string 2 Sets a string for the Adaptive Program With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string e g name of an event with a maximum of 12 characters This string is shown in the DCS800 Control Panel and in DriveWindow Int Scaling 1 Type SI C Volatile N String3 strin
399. h digital extension board 13 DI10 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 14 DI11 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available with digital extension board 15 MCW Bit11 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 16 MCW Bit12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 17 MCW Bit13 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 18 MCW Bit14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 19 MCW Bit15 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 20 ACW Bit12 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 21 ACW Bit13 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 22 ACW Bit14 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 23 ACW Bit15 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Note Load and speed dependent adaptation parameters are valid regardless of the selected parameter set Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Torque reference 299
400. h2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 ChO0 DriveBus 71 01 fiber optic cables to overriding control channel 0 overriding control adapters fiber optic cables between master and followers channel 2 544 Peer to peer and master follower communication P2PandMFCom loss Check ComLossCtrl 30 28 MailBox1 94 12 MailBox2 94 18 MailBox3 94 24 MailBox4 94 30 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 MailBoxCycle2 94 19 MailBoxCycle3 94 25 MailBoxCycle4 94 31 DCSLink cable connections DCSLink termination DCSLink node ID settings DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 545 ApplLoadFail Application load failure 9 03 always 1 Check bit 12 Diagnosis 9 11 Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 546 Local command loss 9 03 local LocalCmdLoss Communication fault with DCS800 Control Panel bit 13 DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light during local mode Check LocalLossCtrl 30 27 if control DCS800 Control Panel is disconnected connection adapter cables F547 547 HwFailure Hardware failure 9 03 always 1 For more details check Diagnosis 9 1 1 bit 14 548 FwFailure Firmware failure 9 03 always 1 For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 bit 15 Can happen after firmware download using an USB to COMXx converter 549 ParComp Parameter compatibility 9 04 always 1 When downl
401. hFineTune and set On and Run within 20 s Measure the motor speed with a hand held tacho and write the value into M1TachoAdjust 50 12 Check SpeedActTach 1 05 against SoeedRef4 2 18 Stop the autotuning by removing Run and On via the DriveWindow control panel 06 Autotuning speed controller 1 2 Open the workspace 06 DCS800 Autotuning speed controller dww Enter the basic speed torque and current limits the speed filter times and the motor base speed M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 TorqMax 20 05 TorqMin 20 06 M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 SpeedErrFilt 23 06 SpeedErrFilt2 23 1 1 SpeedFiltTime 50 06 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Attention For better results set the filters especially when using EMF speed feedback Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 SpdCtrlAuto and set On and Run within 20 s During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed the ramp is bypassed and torque respectively current limits Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 33 are valid The speed controller is tuned by means of speed bursts up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 and the speed controller parameters are set Attention During the autotuning the torque and or current limits will be reached 6 When the autotuning is finished success
402. he DCS800 RCNA 01 DCS800 The ControlNet communication with the drive requires the option RCNA 01 Related documentation User s Manual ControlNet Adapter Module RCNA 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Please refer to the Scanner documentation for information how to configure the system for communication with RCNA 01 EDS file The EDS file for RCNA 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RCNA 01 into slot 1 of the drive see page 17 Drive configuration The ControlNet adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances User transparent assembly and Vendor specific assembly The instances Basic speed control and Extended speed control instance 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since firmware version 2 x With these instances it is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800 For more information see User s Manual Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly ABB Drives assembly is using 2 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 70
403. he minimum or maximum firing angle See diagram below 3 DiodeBridge the 12 pulse serial slave converter is a diode bridge ArmAlphaMin 20 15 Firing I i angle of slave Firing angle of master ArmAlphaMax 20 14 output voltage of system UDC master UDC slave minimum 0 maximum DC voltage DC voltage 12P Mode 47 01 must have the same setting for 12 pulse master and 12 pulse slave In case of DiodeBridge the setting is only possible in the 12 pulse master Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile N 47 02 DiffCurLim current difference level o cl au Permitted current difference between the converters in 12 pulse parallel configuration in percent of ba a M1NomCur 99 03 The drive trips with F534 12PCurDiff FaultWord3 9 03 bit 1 if DiffCurLim 47 02 is still exceeded when DiffCurDly 47 03 is elapsed DiffCurLim 47 02 is only active in the 12 pulse parallel master Int Scaling 1 1 6 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 348 Gi Signal Parameter name 47 03 DiffCurDly current difference delay DiffCurDly 47 03 delays F534 12PCurDiff FaultWord3 9 03 bit 1 If the current difference becomes smaller than DiffCurLim 47 02 before the delay is elapsed F534 will be disregarded DiffCurLim 47 02 DiffCurDly 47 03 is only active in the 12 pulse parallel master Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N one 47 05 12P Rev
404. he speed feedback is switched to EMF the drive stops according to E StopRamp 22 11 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 In case speed actual is greater than base speed the drive trips according to SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWorad2 9 02 bit 5 2 EMF Fault Change from encoder tacho to EMF control Immediate and reacts according to fault EMF Fault Motor speed 0 Base speed Max speed The speed feedback is switched to EMF and A125 SpeedFb AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 8 is set In case speed actual is greater than base speed the drive trips according to SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 and sets F522 SpeedFb FaultWord2 9 02 bit 5 3 EMF Alarm Change from encoder tacho to EMF control Immediate and reacts according to fault EMF Alarm Motor speed 0 Base speed Max speed This selection is only valid if 2 pulse encoders are connected Depending on the setting of M1SpeeFbSel 50 03 the speed feedback is switched from pulse encoder 1 to pulse encoder 2 or vice versa in case of a problem and A125 SpeedFb AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 8 is set 4 Enc Alarm Change from Change from encoderl to encoder to encoder 2 or encoder 2 or vice versa vice versa 0 Base speed Max speed Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name CurRippleSel current ripple selector CurRippleSel 30 18 determines the re
405. ical drives Can only be done in drive state Off and local from DCS800 Control Panel Note This download does not include the user sets DOWNLOAD APPLICATION Currently not used The general procedure for parameter backup operations is 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight PAR BACKUP in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER DCS800 panel operation SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 428 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the desired option then press SEL 3 Wait until the service is finished then press OK 4 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU UO settings mode Currently not used Maintenance Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the DCS800 Control Panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is used in the DCS800 Control Panel to keep the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel The type of the battery is CR2032 Note The battery is not required for any DCS800 Control Panel or drive functions except for the clock DCS800 panel operation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 429 Fault tracing Chapter overview This chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of the drive General Fault modes Depending on the trip lev
406. ication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 108 DDCS channels with SDCS COM 8 General The following table describes the usage of the DDCS channels of the SDCS COM 8 board Channel Standard usage SDCS COM 81 SDCS COM 82 ChO Overriding control or NETA 01 10 Mb e g FCI 5 Mb fieldbus connection AC 800M adapter Ch1 IO extensions via AIMA board 5 Mb 5 Mb Ch2 Master follower link 10 Mb 10 Mb Ch3 DriveWindow or NETA 01 10 Mb 10 Mb connection The communication protocol of ChO to Ch3 is DDCS Distributed Drives Communication System The ChO of the SDCS COM 8 supports either DDCS or DriveBus see ChO DriveBus 71 01 Both the DDCS and DriveBus link between the overriding control and the drive using data sets for information exchange Each data set is a package of three words signals or parameters If a data set is received by the drive the corresponding data set is automatically transmitted to the overriding control as response Drive Received data Transmitted data gt gt gt dataset 10 data set 11 gt gt gt gt gt gt data set 12 data set 13 gt gt gt The data received from the overriding control affects only the RAM not FPROM memory in the drive Integer scaling on the DDCS link Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer values The overriding control has to use the information given in intege
407. id when galvanic isolation is used 3z DI 1 2 zero current detected 0 current not zero 4 DI2 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 5 DIS 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 6 DIA 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 7 DI5 1 2 zero current detected 0 current not zero 8 DI6 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 9 DI7 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 10 DI8 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero 11 DI9 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero only available with digital extension board 12 DI10 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero only available with digital extension board 13 DI1 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero only available with digital extension board 14 MCW Bit11 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 15 MCW Bit12 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 16 MCW Bit13 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 17 MCW Bit14 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 18 MCW Bit15 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 19 ACW Bit12 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 20 ACW Bit13 1 zero current detected 0 current not zero AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 21 ACW Bit14 1 zero current detected 0 current
408. idCurRefM1 11 SpeedRefUsed 12 VoltRef2 all others no connection 3 31 for Motor2 or 3 12 in field exciter mode NotUsed Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Pot1 potentiometer 1 Constant test reference 1 for the manual tuning functions see ApplMacro 99 08 and the square wave generator Note The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave e g SqrWavelndex 99 18 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 100 voltage 10 000 100 current 10 000 100 torque 10 000 100 speed SpeedScaleAct 2 29 20 000 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N 419 E C 99 19 Pot2 potentiometer 2 Constant test reference 2 for the manual tuning functions see ApplMacro 99 08 and the square wave generator Note The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave e g SqrWavelndex 99 18 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 100 voltage 10 000 100 current 10 000 100 torque 10 000 100 6 speed SpeedScaleAct 2 29 20 000 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N SqrWavePeriod square wave period The time period for the manual tuning functions see App Macro 99 08 and the square wave generator Int Scaling 100 1s Type I Volatile N SqrWavelndex square wave index Index pointer to the source signal parameter for the square wav
409. ield current reference only if available OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv 10 TorqRef213 TorqRefUsed 2 13 is directly used as armature current reference torque current Note The flux adaption in field weakening is inactive means no flux dependent armature current reference 11 FexCur Ext FidCurRefM1 3 30 from armature converter via DCSLink plus CurRefExt 43 03 as field current reference only available if OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv 12 CurZero forces single firing pulses and sets CurRefUsed 3 11 to zero Note In case OperModeSel 43 01 is 12PParSlave CurSel 43 02 is overwritten by the current reference from the 12 pulse parallel master Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N CurRef31 1 FluxRefEMF rRef211 43 03 CurRefExt external current reference External current reference in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Note CurRefExt 43 03 is only valid if CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurRefSlope current reference slope CurRefSlope 43 04 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 per 1 ms The di dt limitation is located at the input of the current controller Int Scaling 100 1 ms Type Volatile N 325 325 ms Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 328 Signal Parameter name 43 05 CtriModeSel control mode selector Current controller mode selection 0 Standard PI controller with RL compensat
410. ield exciter with up to 35 A and FEX 4 Term5A as internal or external field exciter with max 5 A Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4 M1UsedFexType 99 12 FEX 425 Int X100 5A DCF803 0016 or DCF803 0035 X100 35A X100 D1 M1UsedFexType 99 12 FEX 4 Term5A X100 5A X100 35A X100 D1 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the armature converter and the FEX 4 Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the armature converter node ID number to 1 and the FEX 4 node ID number to 13 The communication supervision is activated in the armature converter Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match Firmware armature converter Hardware FEX 4 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 E BaudRate 94 02 500 kBit s 1100 4 S1100 5 S 1100 6 kBit s OFF OFF ON 500 FexTimeOut 94 07 100 ms M1FexNode 94 08 18 S801 S800 1 3 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Communication 96 Set the DCSLink Cable connection SDCS DSL 4 X8 GC FEX 4 Termination 200 kOhm Bus and ground termination The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus Hardware
411. igital output 6 index Digital output 6 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO6BitNo 14 12 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO6BitNo digital output 6 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO6Index 14 11 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DO7Index digital output 7 index Digital output 7 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO7BitNo 14 14 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is XXyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO7BitNo digital output 7 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO7Index 14 13 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DO8lndex digital output 8 index Digital output 8 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO8BitNo 14 16 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Digital output 8 default setting is command MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N DOS8BitNo digital output 8 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO8Index 14 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N 4 eel e e EE aoe Signal and parameter li
412. ihVWordAC 92 271 CihVWordAC 271 CihVWordAC ee 272 CihVWordAC4 92 273 Cut Acibeak es 200 CurtCtrllnteoCut 200 CurCtrlStat 63 66 74 75 211 433 CurCtrlStat2 eeeeessseee 60 212 Cure eebe 199 CurRefExt REENEN 66 327 CurbieiGlope 327 CurRefUsed 37 199 433 469 CurRipple ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 191 441 CurRippleFilt 0 ceceeceeeeeeeeeees 191 441 Appendix C Index of signals and parameters SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g CurRippleLim 309 441 455 470 CurRippleSel 309 441 455 470 GQurSel c untseininphus 37 64 66 89 327 D ta DC RENS 277 473 R NNEN 277 PGA A a a EE 277 D ata12 nsns nc ncaenusiiiiui 277 BY Ca e e E eee eee 277 Datasis ich ite iat ite ding 277 Data 277 473 R I LEE 277 R I LEE 277 RECKEN 277 RE neseaenesebeseeniL u vid is 277 REENEN 277 Datal ogoGiats ninihi 198 DC Break Ack neient aai 82 255 467 DEVoltSerAl e eessen 194 DCSLinkNodelD 64 95 99 104 107 393 452 455 456 459 461 469 DCSLinkStat eea 97 205 DCGinkt tat 97 206 BecMonbly eripere rei ie sapia 284 DecTimed1 nnn 286 DOC Hl 288 DerivFiltTimMe ccccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 296 DerivTime E ARATE 296 Devicehame rrarena 116 417 DevLImPLL ctatnantae 64 66 402 Bloe GE 133 144 DIStatWord BEE 82 225
413. imLoad motor 1 alarm limit load The drive sets A107 M1OverLoad AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 6 if M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 thermal model is Mot1TempCalc 1 20 Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile N M1FaultLimLoad motor 1 fault limit load The drive trips with F507 M1OverLoad FaultWord1 9 01 bit 6 if M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 is exceeded Output value for motor 1 thermal model is Mot1TempCalc 1 20 Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 316 Signal Parameter name M1TempSel motor 1 temperature selector M1TempSel 31 05 selects motor 1 measured temperature input The result can be seen in Mot1TemopMeas 1 22 Connection possibilities for PT100 max 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max 3 PT100 for motor 2 or upto 6 PT100 for motor 1 only Connection possibilities PTC max 1 PTC for motor 1 and max 1 PTC for motor 2 or upto2 PTC for motor 1 only 0 NotUsed motor 1 temperature measurement is blocked default 1 1PT100 AIS one PT100 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 2 2PT100 AIS two PT100 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 3 3PT100 Al2 three PT100 connected to Al2 on SDCS IOB 3 4 4PT100 Al2 3 four PT100 3 connected to Al2 and 1 connected to Al3 on SDCS IOB 3 5 5PT100 Al2 3 five PT100 3 connected to Al2 and 2 connected to
414. imTemp motor 2 alarm limit temperature The drive sets A108 M2OverTemp AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 8 if M2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas 1 23 Note The unit depends on M2TempSel 49 35 Int Scaling 1 1 C 19 1 Type SI Volatile N 1PTC Al2 Con 357 E C M2FaultLimTemp motor 2 fault limit temperature The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 8 if M2FaultLimTemp 49 37 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas 1 23 Note The unit depends on M2TempSel 49 35 Int Scaling 1 221 C 10 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 358 Signal Parameter name 49 38 M2KlixonSel motor 2 klixon selector The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 8 if a digital input selected and the klixon is open 0 NotUsed no reaction default 1 2 DI 0 fault 1 no fault 2 DI2 0 fault 1 no fault 3 DIS 0 fault 1 no fault 4 DIA 0 fault 1 no fault 5 DI5 0 fault 1 no fault 6 DI6 0 fault 1 no fault 7 DI7 0 fault 1 no fault 8 DI8 0 fault 1 no fault 9 DI9 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 fault 1 no fault Only available with digital extension board Note It i
415. in DriveStat 8 08 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 56 AuxSupplyOn FieldCurrent Torque SpeedRefUsed 2 17 SpeedLev 50 10 ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 MCW 7 01 Bit On Off1N START On Run STOP Run is taken away Off2N Off3N Run RampOutZero RampHold RamplnZero Reset Inching1 Inching2 o O W OT Go NO Oo RemoteCmd Dou MSW 8 01 RdyOn RdyRun RdyRef Tripped Off2NStatus Off3NStatus Onlnhibited Alarm AtSetpoint Remote O O Oo Nj Od 1 Go No j O ey AboveLimit ZeroSpeed 8 02 Bit 11 BrakeCmd 8 02 Bit 8 Speed ramp output clamped CmdFansOn 6 03 Bit 0 CmdMainContactorOn 5 6 03 Bit 7 e PEE M1BrakeDly 42 03 M1BrakeCloseDly 42 04 gt 5 Behaviour depends on Om Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 6 Behaviour depends on FldHeatSel 21 18 and M1FldMinTrip 30 12 7 Behaviour depends on FanDly 21 14 8 Behaviour depends on M1BrakeCtrl 42 01 Start stop seq dsf Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Hilfsspannung ein LJ 1 Feldstrom Drehmoment SpeedRefUsed 2 17 SpeedLev 50 10 ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 MCW 7 01 Bit 57 START On Run ESTOP
416. in contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set In case the DC breaker acknowledge is missing A103 DC BreakAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 2 is set is forced to 150 and single firing pulses are given The DC breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 72 No AC breaker DC breaker controlled by the drive Command MainContactorOn see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge Command Trip DC breaker see MainContAck 10 21 see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 DC breaker No AC breaker DC breaker controlled by the drive In the above example no AC breaker is used and the DC breaker is controlled by the drive The drive closes and opens the DC breaker with the command MainContactorOn The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set The DC breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 73 AC breaker controlled by the drive DC breaker controlled externally AC breaker Command MainContactorOn see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 DC breaker acknowledge see DC BreakAck 10 2
417. increase speed 0 hold speed 6 DI6 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 7 DI7 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 8 DI8 1 increase speed 0 hold speed 9 DI9 12 increase speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 12 increase speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 11 DI 12 increase speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 increase speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 increase speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Note The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1Sel 11 03 MotPot respectively Ref2Sel 11 06 MotPot Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N ACW Bit15 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 262 Signal Parameter name MotPotDown motor pot down With the motor pot down function the moto
418. ing 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2TachoGain motor 2 tacho tuning gain Internally used tacho gain tuning for motor 2 This value should only be written to by tacho gain tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 SpdFbAssist M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 and parameter download Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N AnybusModType last connected serial communication module Internally used memory for the last attached serial communication module This value should only be written to by the DCS800 firmware and parameter download Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Receiving data sets addresses 1 Addresses for the received data transmitted from the overriding control to the drive The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index The data set base address is set in ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Overriding control SDCS CON 4 Dataset table Signals and parameters gt Dataset Value e g data storage group 19 DDCS link via ChO of SDCS COM 8 Address assignment of dataset 19 01 Serial communication via Group Index 19 02 slot 1 of SDCS CON 4 90 02 19 03 see group 51 19 04 19 1 X see ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 datset adr a dsf DsetXVal data set X value 1 Data set X value 1 interval 3 ms Data set add
419. instructions are intended for all who handle the circuit boards and fiber optic cables Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the equipment WARNING The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards Do not touch the boards unnecessarily Use grounding strip ABB order no 3ADV050035P0001 WARNING Handle the fiber optic cables with care When unplugging optic cables always grab the connector not the cable itself Do not touch the ends of the fibers with bare hands as the fiber is extremely sensitive to dirt The minimum allowed bend radius is 35 mm 1 38 in Safety instructions SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Mechanical installation A These notes are intended for all who install the drive Handle the unit carefully to avoid damage and injury WARNING DCS800 sizes D4 D7 The drive is heavy Do not lift it alone Do not lift the unit by the front cover Place units D4 and D5 only on its back DCS800 sizes D5 D7 The drive is heavy Lift the drive by the lifting lugs only Do not tilt the unit The unit will overturn from a tilt of about 6 degrees Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive when installing Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or lead to malfunction Ensure sufficient cooling Do not fasten the drive by riveting o
420. ion of EMF based on current actual plus feed forward default 1 FeedFwdRef Pl controller with RL compensation of EMF based on current reference plus feed forward 2 NoFeedFwd Pl controller without RL compensation of EMF No feed forward takes place should not be used for motoric applications 3 PowerSupply1 for more information see DCS800 Power Supply Control Manual SADWO000375 4 PowerSupply2 for more information see DCS800 Power Supply Control Manual SADWO000375 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Standard def Standard E C M1KpArmCur motor 1 p part armature current controller Proportional gain of the current controller Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal current M 1 NomCur 99 03 with M1KpArmCur 43 06 3 if the current error is 5 of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N M1TiArmCur motor 1 i part armature current controller Integral time of the current controller M1TiArmCur 43 07 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal current M 1 NomCur 99 03 with M1KpArmCur 43 06 3 if the current error is 5 of M1NomCur 99 03 On that condition and with M1TiArmCur 43 07 50 ms follows the controller generates 30 96 of motor nominal current if the current error is constant after 50 ms are elapsed 15 96 from proportional part an
421. ion to field weakening Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y sl uni CurRefUsed used current reference Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 after current limitation M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 MltCurLimBrag2 20 13 MaxCurLimSpeed 43 17 to 43 22 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y ArmAlpha armature a firing angle Firing angle a Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile Y Unused ReactCur reactive current Relative actual reactive motor current in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y K E ArmAlphaSI 12 pulse slave armature a firing angle Firing angle a of 12 pulse slave converter Valid in 12 pulse master only Int Scaling 1 221 Type l Volatile Y PLL In phase locked loop input Actual measured mains voltage cycle period time Is used as input of the PLL controller The value should be 1 50 Hz 20 ms 20 000 1 60 Hz 16 7 ms 16 667 See also DevLimPLL 97 13 KpPLL 97 14 TfPLL 97 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name CurCtrlintegOut integral part of current controller output I part of the current controller s output in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurActPeak relative actual armature peak current Relativ
422. ioning 20 2000A W Squeezes shut down times in revamp projects to a o 700 Vs minimum 290 x 600 Vs g Fits into Rittal cabinets IPOO g Compact version up to 450 A and Vario version up AA EDEB FPREDID ABB Automation Products DCS800 R Rebuild Kit m Digital control kit for existing powerstacks to 2 000 A Proven long life components are re used such as power stacks main contactors cabinets and cabling busbars cooling systems m Use of up to date communication facilities 20 20 000 A g increase of production and quality O 1160V g Very cost effective solution 230 1 200V m Open Rebuild Kits for nearly all existing DC drives IPOO g tailor made solutions for g BBC PxD a BBC SZxD g ASEATYRAK g other manufacturers Ident No 3ADW000193 R0701 Rev G Wallstadter StraBe 59 o 68526 Ladenburg e Germany e Tel 49 0 6203 71 0 o Fax 49 0 6203 71 76 09 www abb com motors amp drives 193R0701A1030000
423. is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N II I III M1BrakeRefDly motor 1 brake speed reference delay Speed reference delay This function compensates for the mechanical open lift delay of the brake During the start Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 1 of the drive the speed reference is clamped ramp output is set to zero and the speed controller output is set to start torque see M1StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 until M1BrakeRefDly 42 03 is elapsed Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1ZeroSpeedDly motor 1 zero speed delay This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerate from M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 to actual speed 0 Until M1ZeroSpeedDly 42 04 is elapsed the brake is kept open lifted Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M1BrakeFltTime motor 1 brake fault time Brake open lift acknowledge monitor During this time the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1 BrakeAckSe
424. is set high Note The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax 21 06 or E StopDecMin 21 05 is set to default Int Scaling 1 1 rpm s Type l Volatile N DecMonDly delay deceleration monitoring Time delay before the deceleration monitoring of the emergency stop starts See also E StopDecMin 21 05 and E StopDecMax 21 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type Volatile N FlyStart flying start Selection of the desired operating response to a Run command UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 during braking or coasting 0 StartFromO wait until the motor has reached zero speed see M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 then restart In case the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 4 is generated 1 FlyingStart start motor with its actual speed when the drive was stopped by RampStop TorqueLimit or CoastStop Stop by DynBraking is not interrupted wait until zero speed is reached default 2 FlyStartDyn start motor with its actual speed when the drive was stopped by RampStop TorqueLimit CoastStop or DynBraking DynBraking is interrupted Attention When using FlyStartDyn make sure that the hardware e g the switch disconnecting the braking resistor is able to disconnect the SE Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Unused StartFromO Unused FanDly fan delay After the drive has been switched off UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 On 0 both fans motor and converter mustn t switched off befor
425. ise the overriding control automatically sets the communication speed 0 8 Mbits s 1 4 Mbits s default 2 2 Mbits s 3 1 Mbits s Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N 8 Mbits s 4 Mbits s E Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ChO TimeOut channel 0 timeout Time delay before a communication loss with channel 0 is declared Depending on the setting of Ch0 ComLossCtrl 70 05 either F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 or A113 COM8Com AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 12 is set The communication fault and alarm are inactive if ChO TimeOut 70 04 is set to 0 ms Note The supervision is activated after the reception of the first valid message Note The time out starts when the link doesn t update any of the first 2 receive data sets addressed by Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Example When Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 10 the reception of data sets 10 and 12 is supervised Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N Ch0 ComLossCtrl channel 0 communication loss control Ch0 ComLossCtrl 70 05 determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 0 control F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 is set with 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature
426. ising edge 0 gt 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 Reset by rising edge 0 gt 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Biti5 Reset by rising edge 0 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N NotUsed min ACW Bit15 97 27 Unused AdjUDC adjust DC voltage AdjUDC 97 23 is used to cover drives with different voltage measuring circuits for armature and mains voltage It rescales the armature voltage measurement Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile N OffsetUDC offset DC voltage measurement Offset value in percent of M1NomVolt 99 02 added to the armature voltage measurement OffsetUDC 97 24 adjusts ArmVoltAct 1 14 and the real armature voltage Setting OffsetUDC 97 24 to 5 1 disables the manual offset If a DC breaker is used set OffsetUDC 97 24 0 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N EMF ActFiltTime actual EMF filter time EMF actual filter time constant for EMF VoltActRel 1 17 Is used for the EMF controller and the EMF feed forward Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type I Volatile N HW FiltUDC hardware filter DC voltage measurement Hardware filter for the UDC meas
427. iter nodes 1 to 16 Bit Name Value Comment BO Node1 DCSLink node1 active and OK DCSLink node1 not active or faulty B1 Node2 DCSLink node2 active and OK DCSLink node2 not active or faulty B2 Node DCSLink node active and OK DCSLink node not active or faulty DCSLink node4 active and OK DCSLink node4 not active or faulty DCSLink node5 active and OK DCSLink nodes not active or faulty DCSLink node6 active and OK DCSLink node6 not active or faulty DCSLink node active and OK DCSLink node7 not active or faulty DCSLink node8 active and OK DCSLink node8 not active or faulty DCSLink node9 active and OK DCSLink node9 not active or faulty DCSLink node10 active and OK DCSLink node10 not active or faulty Node11 DCSLink node11 active and OK DCSLink node1 1 not active or faulty DCSLink node12 active and OK DCSLink node12 not active or faulty Node13 DCSLink node13 active and OK DCSLink node13 not active or faulty DCSLink node14 active and OK DCSLink node14 not active or faulty DCSLink node15 active and OK DCSLink node15 not active or faulty DCSLink node16 active and OK DCSLink node16 not active or faulty Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y Node14 Node15 Node16 OO ch Och Och OO ch Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 206 Signal Parameter name DCSLinkStat2 DCSLink status 2 of field exciter nodes Status of DCSLink for field exciter nodes 17 to 32 Bit Name Value Comment
428. its Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y QuadrantType quadrant type of converter 1 or 2 bridges Recognized converter quadrant type Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S BlockBrdg2 97 07 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S BlockBrdg2 97 07 0 Read from S BlockBrdg2 97 07 if S BlockBrdg2 97 07 0 0 BlockBridge2 bridge 2 blocked 2 Q operation 1 RelBridge2 bridge 2 released 4 Q operation default Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y ConvOvrCur converter overcurrent DC level Converter current tripping level This signal is set during initialization of the drive New values are shown after the next power up Int Scaling 1 1A Type l Volatile Y MaxBridgeTemp maximum bridge temperature Maximum bridge temperature in degree centigrade Read from TypeCode 97 01 or set with S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 Read from TypeCode 97 01 if S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 0 Read from S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 if S MaxBrdgTemp 97 04 0 The drive trips with F504 ConvOverTemp FaultWord1 9 01 bit 3 when MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 is reached A104 ConvOverTemp A armWord1 9 06 bit 3 is set when the actual converter temperature is approximately 5 C below MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 Int Scaling 1 1 C Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 205 Signal Parameter name DCSLinkStat1 DCSLink status 1 of field exciter nodes Status of DCSLink for field exc
429. ke Control is activated by means of M1BrakeCtrl 42 01 and controls a mechanical brake automatically with the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command The internal logic is designed to meet the requirements of holding brakes e g carriage drives or coilers as well as the requirements for hanging load e g cranes Overview brake control Release Run command Sag controller 7 01 bit 3 K bi TorqProvOK torque 7 03 bit 11 proving A116 BrakeLongFaling gt 21 R D M1TorqProvTime A122 MechBrake M1BrakeAckSel M1BrakeStopDly 42 10 0 42 02 a2 13 D Gem F552 MechBrake 4 F556 TorqProving 4 Kc t M1BrakeRefDly ae 42 03 A122MechBrake 21 1 F552 MechBrake Stop Lt n M1BrakeLiftDly EH ee 42 11 A122 MechBrake E F552 MechBrake 4 MotSpeed 1 04 a ZeroSpeedLim M1ZeroSpeedDly Pislaod Speed leen 20 03 42 04 start TorqintegRef 2 05 torque Release speed reference Brake open lift command 8 02 bit 8 Ss Q RaQ S Q Rar Q StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 StrtTorqRef 42 08 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 322 Signal Parameter name Following functions are included Mechanical open lift close apply and zero speed delays Run a UsedMCW 7 04
430. l 389 DsetXplus9Val2 A 389 Desetypolusg al AAA 389 DsetXVal1 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 385 DsetXVal2 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 385 DsetXVal 122 139 141 150 385 QV db nni eet ec REIR REDE 195 DynBrakeAck 75 82 255 467 DynBrakebDly eener 76 365 E S10D eene 82 102 248 467 E StopDecMax nenne 284 E Gropt echMim eenas 284 E GiopMode srecen inerinrie iieii inii 75 283 E StopRamp nete e vepa 286 EditBlock wii 1 adn 376 EditGmd eiie 376 477 EMF ActFiltTime esses 405 EMF CtrlNegLim 45 48 334 EMF CtrlPosLim 45 48 334 EMF FbMonLev 306 442 456 463 471 EMF HetGel Traa aaa ai 338 EME VoltActRel 0 1 beret 37 45 Enc2MeasModqe enrere 366 Enc2PulseNO 522no29 522 m DnOoOd 367 Encoder2Module 407 452 Ext lO Stat eR RR 207 Ext 1O Status ttt 452 ExtAlarmOnSel eee 314 472 ExtAlarmSel ees 82 314 472 ExtFaultOnSel es 314 457 ExtFaultSel e 82 313 432 457 FanDly 55 284 447 457 467 Faultedbar iiiar irisipiniriossin isinin intei 377 477 FaultStopMode 75 313 429 447 FaultWordl eeeeeees 228 445 FaultWord2 uu cecccceeeeeecee
431. l Parameter name E C HandAuto Hand Auto command Binary signal to switch between Hand Local I O and Auto MainCtriWord control Thus the selection made by CommandSel 10 01 is overwritten 0 NotUsed default 12 DM 1 Auto 0 Hand 2 DI2 1 Auto 0 Hand 3 DI3 1 Auto 0 Hand 4 DIA 1 Auto 0 Hand 5 DI5 1 Auto 0 Hand 6 DI6 1 Auto 0 Hand 7 DI7 1 Auto 0 Hand 8 DIS 1 Auto 0 Hand 9 DI9 1 Auto 0 Hand only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 Auto 0 Hand only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 Auto 0 Hand only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 1 Auto 0 Hand MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ACW Bit15 13 MCW Bit12 Auto 0 Hand MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 Auto 0 Hand MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 Auto 0 Hand MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 Auto 0 Hand MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 Auto 0 Hand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 Auto 0 Hand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW Bit14 Auto 0 Hand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 Auto 0 Hand AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Off2 Off2 command electrical disconnect Binary signal for Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 For fastest reaction use fast digital inputs DI7 or DI8 0 NotUsed 1 2 DH 2 DI2 3 DI3
432. l 26 01 Add and AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 7 1 This function could be called over underspeed protection in torque control mode WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedErrWin TorqRef2 2 09 WinWidthPos 23 08 Window width WinWidthNeg 23 09 WinCtrlMode 23 12 SpeedActWin TorqRef2 2 09 WinWidthPos 23 08 speed actual Window width WinWidthNeg 23 09 Note to open a window with a width of 100 rpm set WinWidthPos 23 08 50 rpm and WinWidthNeg 23 09 50 rpm WinlIntegOn window control integrator on Enables the integrator of the speed controller when window control is released O0 2 Off Integrator of the speed controller is blocked when window control is released 120n Integrator of the speed controller is enabled when window control is released To release window control set TorqSel 26 01 Add and AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 7 1 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N 291 E C WinWidthPos positive window width Positive speed limit for the window control when the speed error An n N is positive 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name nit E C WinWidthNeg negative window width Negative speed limit for the window control when the speed error An n Na is negative 327
433. l 42 02 can be different without causing A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 or F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name BrakeFaultFunc brake fault function Selected motor BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 determines the reaction to an invalid brake acknowledge O Alarm the drive sets A122 MechBrake AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 5 as reaction to an invalid brake open lift or brake close apply acknowledge 1 Fault the drive trips with F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 as reaction to an invalid brake open lift or brake close apply acknowledge default 3 Crane The drive trips with F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 as reaction to an invalid brake open lift acknowledge A116 BrakeLongFalling A armWord1 9 06 bit 15 is set as reaction to an invalid brake close apply acknowledge In case of A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 15 the speed reference is set to zero and the speed controller is kept active until the drive is stopped by either On 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 or Off2N 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 Emergency Off Coast Stop Note If the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 are different for a longer time than set in M1BrakeFitTime 42 05 either A
434. l ms IQ History Buffer s KAX Axis Length s Ev Axis Minimum 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 0 00 100 00 2 03 26 VoltRef2 0 00 100 00 3 channel 3 0 00 100 00 A Channel 4 0 00 100 00 5 channel 5 0 00 100 00 6 Channel 6 0 00 100 00 DriveWindow manual tuning EMF controller set VoltCorr 44 25 0 96 remove On and Run via DriveWindow set FlaCtriMode 44 01 EMF CtriPosLim 44 07 and EMF CtrlNegLim 44 08 back to their original settings Start up SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 47 Flux linearization Basics In case the motor needs to be used in the field weakening area the flux linearization has to be set The flux linearization is needed because of the non linear relation of flux and field current due to saturation effects of the field winding Flux ds Flux linearization 9095 t Eie 22 i27 70 p 40 i Field P4412P4413 P4414 current Flux of DC motor versus field current The magnetization of the motor starts to saturate at a certain field current and thus the flux does not increase linearly For this reason the field current cannot be directly used to calculate the flux inside the motor In base speed area EMF and speed are directly proportional because the flux is kept constant n k EMF k constant 3 d Flux Example If the nominal armature voltage is 440 V and the motor is running at half speed with full flu
435. l Torg 30 03 for a time longer than StallTime 30 01 while the speed feedback was below StallSpeed 30 02 Check motor stalled mechanical couplings of the motor proper conditions of load correct field current parameter settings of group 20 limits current and torque limits 1 3 Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 459 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 532 Selected motor motor overspeed 9 02 always MotOverSpeed Check bit 15 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 parameter settings of group 24 speed control speed controller scaling of speed controller loop SpeedScaleAct 2 29 drive speed MotSpeed 1 04 vs measured motor speed hand held tacho field current too low speed feedback encoder tacho connection of speed feedback if the motor was accelerated by the load in case of EMF speed feedback if the DC voltage measurement C1 D1 might be swapped or if the armature circuit is open e g DC fuses DC breaker Triplevel Check for high inductive motor too high motor voltage compared to mains voltage 534 12PCurDiff 12 pulse current difference only for 12 pulse 9 03 parallel operation bit 1 Check DiffCurLim 47 02 DiffCurDly 47 03 parameter settings of group 43 current control armature current controller 535 12PulseCom 12 pulse communication Check 12P TimeOut 94 03 DCSLink cabl
436. l communication parameters of the RMBA 01 adapter have to be set by means of group 52 Up to 12 data words in each direction are possible Parameter setting example The Modbus adapter can be either used to control the drive with the overriding control system or only for monitoring purposes together with another fieldbus which is responsible for the control Therefore different parameter settings are necessary When controlling a drive In data set mode cyclic communication the drive will be controlled from the overriding control using the Modbus Up to 12 data words in each direction are possible The following table shows the parameter settings Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrilWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Modbus ModBusModule2 98 08 Slot1 StationNumber 52 01 1 247 desired station number BaudRate 52 02 5 5 9600 Baud Parity 52 03 4 4 Even Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 140 DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive 40001 gt data word 1 1 DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive 40002 gt data word 1 2 DsetXVal3 90 03 2501 default TorqRefA 25 01 outp
437. lPosLim 44 07 100 96 set EMF CtrlNegLim 44 08 100 give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to set a constant speed reference in the field weakening area use VoltCorr 44 25 to step the EMF controller tune the EMF controller by means of KpEMF 44 09 and TiEMF 44 10 o Steps size 2 5 do not hit any limits during the step and the step response o Step response time 2 3 times slower than the field current controller o where to step in the field weakening area Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 46 step reference N i part too long un optimal curve Jie Jie Pitt nn P Parttoo high EMF controller step responses T DriveWindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0H1 ears BAR xtel tele p4 yall x gil della DCS 800 D1 01 Browsed contol Fat amp Control 1 01 17 EMF VoltActRel 40H 1 Par 1 17 El Data logger 1 2 03 26 voltRef2 0 1 Par 3 26 Ji Event logger a MiSpeedMax rpm O 1 Par 20 2 44 01 FldCtriMode O 1 Par 44 1 Zi 44 07 EMF CtrlPostim O 1 Par 44 7 44 08 EMF CtriNegLim 35 O 1 Par 44 8 Fault logger Bi Memory O8 44 09 koe 0 1 Par 44 9 01 Phys Act Values p 44 10 TIEMF ms 40H 1 Par 44 10 SPC Signals 0 44 25 VoltCorr 99 40H 1 Par 44 25 03 Ref Act Values 99 04 MiBesespeed rpm 0 1 Per 99 4 EE uS Mode Interva
438. le N Digital outputs DO1Index digital output 1 index Digital output 1 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO1BitNo 14 02 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Examples If DO1Index 14 01 801 main status word and DO1BitNo 14 02 1 RdyRun digital output 1 is high when the drive is RdyRun If DO1Index 14 01 801 main status word and DO1BitNo 14 02 3 Tripped digital output 1 is high when the drive is not faulty Digital output 1 default setting is command FansOn CurCirlStat1 6 03 bit 0 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N DO1BitNo digital output 1 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO1Index 14 02 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DO2Index digital output 2 index Digital output 2 is controlled by a selectable bit see DO2BitNo 14 04 of the source signal parameter selected with this parameter The format is xxyy with invert digital output XX group and yy index Digital output 2 default setting is command FieldOn CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 5 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N 6V Offset DO2BitNo digital output 2 bit number Bit number of the signal parameter selected with DO2Index 14 03 Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Si
439. le time fixed AO I act directly taken from hardware Additional functions the gain of the fixed AO l act can be adjusted by means of R110 on the SDCS IOB 3 Output range AO3 and AO4 set by parameter OmA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Resolution 12 bits Cycle time for AO3 and AO4 5msconnected at SDCS CON 4 14ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all AO s are galvanically isolated Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery I O configuration SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 92 2 RAIO 01 Configuration Hardware settings AQ5 and AO6 are only used for motor temperature measurement no additional setting needed for more details see RA O 07 User s Manual Resolution 12 bits Cycle time for AO5 and AO6 5 ms connected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all AO s are galvanically isolated motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to AO5 and AO6 see section Motor protection Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery The value of AO1 and AO2 can be read from group 5 AO configurable default setting 1 yes 2 yes 3 yes 4 yes 5 temperature 6 C
440. lected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 17 MCW Bit15 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 18 ACW Bit12 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 19 ACW Bit13 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 20 ACW Bit14 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 21 ACW Bit15 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N PID Ref1 PID controller reference input value 1 index Index pointer to the source of the PID controller reference input value 1 The format is XXyy with negate reference input value 1 xx group and yy index e g 201 equals SpeedRef2 2 01 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N PID Ref2 PID controller reference input value 2 index Index pointer to the source of the PID controller reference input value 2 The format is XXyy with negate reference input value 2 xx group and yy index e g 201 equals SpeedRef2 2 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N PID OutMin PID controller minimum limit output value Minimum limit of the PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N 40 17 PID OutMax PID controller maximum
441. lector 0 PID1 reference input 1 is selected default 1 PID2 reference input 2 is selected 2 Di 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 3 DI2 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 4 DI3 12 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 5 DIA 12 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 6 DI5 12 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 7 DI6 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 8 DI7 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 9 DI8 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected 10 DI9 12 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected available with digital extension board 112 DI10 12 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected available with digital extension board 12 DI11 12 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected available with digital extension board 13 MCW Bit11 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 14 MCW Bit12 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 15 MCW Bit13 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is selected MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 16 MCW Bit14 1 reference input 2 is selected 0 reference input 1 is se
442. ling Type C Volatile Y Mot2FexSwVer motor 2 firmware version of field exciter Motor 2 field exciter firmware version The format is yyy With yyy consecutively numbered version This signal is set during initialization of the drive New values are shown after the next power up Int Scaling Type C Volatile Y Com8SwVersion firmware version of SDCS COM 8 SDCS COM 8 firmware version The format is yyy With yyy consecutively numbered version This signal is set during initialization of the drive New values are shown after the next power up Int Scaling Type C Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ApplicVer application version Version of the loaded application program The format is yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version Int Scaling Type C Volatile Y DriveLibVer drive library version Version of the loaded function block library The format is yyy with yyy consecutively numbered version Int Scaling Type C Volatile Y ConvType converter type Recognized converter type Read from TypeCode 97 01 0 None when TypeCode 97 01 None 1 D1 D1 converter 2 D2 D2 converter 3 D3 D3 converter 4 D4 D4 converter 5 D5 D5 converter 6 D6 D6 converter 7 D7 D7 converter 8 ManualSet set by user if S ConvScaleCur 97 02 and or S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 have been changed for e g rebuild k
443. ling 1 1 s Type l Volatile N StallSpeed stall speed Actual speed limit used for stall protection Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name StallTorq stall torque Actual torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 used for stall protection Int Scaling 1002 1 6 Type I Volatile N 305 E C Unused ResCurDetectSel residual current detection selector The drive trips with F505 ResCurDetect FaultWord1 9 01 bit 4 if the earth current exceeds ResCurDetectLim 30 06 for ResCurDetectDel 30 07 0 NotUsed residual current detection is blocked default 1 Al4 The earth current is measured by means of a current difference sensor in combination with Al4 X3 11 and X3 12 on the SDCS IOB 3 board 2 Di The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 3 DI The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 4 DI3 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 5 DI4 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 6 DI5 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 7 DI6 The earth current is measured by means of an external device e g Bender relays 8 DI7 The earth current is measured by
444. long as the motor remains too hot Check Triplevel gp ee M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 M1KlixonSel 31 08 MhiAlarmLimTemp 31 08 motor temperature motor fan supply voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 3 Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light F507 507 MiOverLoad Motor 1 calculated overload 9 01 always Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will bit 6 continue to work until the motor is calculated down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as long as the motor remains too hot Check MhiFaultLimLoad 31 04 _M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 508 l OBoardLoss UO board not found or faulty 9 01 always Check bit 7 Diagnosis 9 11 Ext IO Status 4 20 flat cable connections between SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 2 3 SDCS COM 8 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 Encoder2Module 98 01 CommModule 98 02 DIO ExtModule1 98 03 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 AIO ExtModule 98 06 AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 IO BoardConfig 98 15 F509 509 M2OverTemp Motor 2 measured overtemperature 9 01 alw
445. ltage and speed supervision The external contactor interlocking and the control of ForceFlaDir 45 07 have to be done by means of Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N ExtReverse Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 342 Signal Parameter name jx do oO 3 45 08 FluxRevMonDly flux reversal monitoring delay eo ui Maximum allowed time within Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 and the internal motor flux doesn t correspond S E to each other during field reversal During this time F522 SpeedFb Fau tWora2 9 02 bit 5 is EY disabled Note FluxRevMonDly 45 08 is only effective for FidCtriMode 44 01 Fix Rev EMF Rev Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N 45 09 FidRevHyst field current reversal hysteresis cl al a ul The sign of Mot1FidCurRel 1 29 is used to generate the field reversal acknowledge To avoid signal noise problems a small hysteresis in percent of M1NomFidCur 99 11 is needed Note FidRevhyst 45 09 is only effective for FidCtriMode 44 01 Fix Rev EMF Rev Fix Rev Opti or EMF Rev Opti Int Scaling 1002 1 6 Type l Volatile N 45 10 FidRefHyst field torque reference hysteresis cl al a ui To prevent the field reversal from continuous toggling due to a too small torque reference a R TorqRefUsed 2 13 hysteresis in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 is av
446. ltage protection active OvrVoltProt 30 13 autotuning failure Diagnosis 9 11 selected motor mechanical brake BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 M1StrtTorqRefSel 42 07 M2StrtTorqRefSel 49 44 at least one fault message is mask speed scaling out of range M1SpeedScale 50 01 and M1BaseSpeed 99 04 the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 selected motor speed feedback M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 SpeedFbFItSel 30 17 external alarm via binary input ExtAlarmSel 30 32 analog input range A Mon4mA 30 29 fieldbus communication loss ComLossCtrl 30 28 The parameters found in flash were found invalid at power up checksum fault The parameters were restored from the parameter backup local command loss LocalLossCtr 30 27 A new firmware with a different amount of parameters was downloaded The new parameters are set to their default values The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 1 1 parameter setting conflict the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 235 Signal Parameter name AlarmWord3 alarm word 3 Alarm word 3 Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment and alarm level BO Retainlnv A183 retain data invalid B1 ParComp A134 4 parameter compatibility the parameter causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11
447. ly by the command Trip DC breaker Command Trip DC breaker CurCtriStatf 6 03 bit 9 Command Trip DC breaker 6 03 bit 14 F512 MainsLowVolt 9 01 bit 11 Command Trip DC breaker 6 03 bit 15 F502 ArmOverCur 9 01 bit 1 F539 FastCurRise 9 03 bit 6 dcs B00Wdocutig 28 dsf Command Trip DC breaker The firmware sets the command Trip DC breaker continuous signal CurCtrlStat 6 03 bit 14 and command Trip DC breaker 4 s pulse signal CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 15 by means of F512 MainsLowVolt FaultWord1 9 01 bit 11 in regenerative mode F502 ArmOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 1 or F539 FastCurRise FaultWord3 9 03 bit 6 see chapter Motor protection In case a digital output see group 14 is assigned to one of the two signals it is updated immediately after detecting the fault and thus actively tripping the DC breaker Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 75 Dynamic braking General Operation Activation Function The drive can be stopped by dynamic braking The principle is to transfer the power of the machine inertia into a braking resistor Therefore the armature circuit has to be switched over from the drive to a braking resistor Additionally flux and field current have to be maintained Dynamic braking can be activated by all stop modes in cases of a fault or due to communication breaks Off1Mode
448. ly voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 3 DriveWindow and A107 107 M1OverLoad Motor 1 calculated overload 9 06 always 2 Check bit 6 _M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 DriveWindow Light 109 M2OverTemp Motor 2 measured overtemperature 9 06 always bit 8 M2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 motor temperature motor fan supply voltage motor fan direction of rotation motor fan components motor cooling air inlet e g filter motor cooling air outlet motor temperature sensors and cabling ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS CON 4 and SDCS IOB 3 110 M2OverLoad Motor 2 calculated overload EH 06 md Check bit 9 _M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 111 MainsLowVolt Mains low under voltage AC E 06 w 1 a is set to 150 single firing pulses bit 10 Check PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 If all 3 phases are present if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance if the main contactor closes and opens if the mains voltage scaling is correct NomMains Volt 99 10 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN 51 o Alarmlevel Fault tracing SADW
449. m and the maximum speed of the drive system which is the maximum of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 M2OvrSpeed 49 21 and M2BaseSpeed 49 03 This value should only be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune via M2TachVolt1000 49 27 TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Internally limited from 2 29 SE rpm to 2 29 A rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N M1TachoTune motor 1 tacho tuning factor Internally used tacho fine tuning factor for motor 1 This value should only be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Int Scaling 1000 Type l Volatile N M2TachoTune motor 2 tacho tuning factor Internally used tacho fine tuning factor for motor 2 This value should only be written to by tacho fine tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune TachoAdjust block in Adaptive Program TachoAdjust block in application program and parameter download Int Scaling 1000 Type l Volatile N M1TachoGain motor 1 tacho tuning gain Internally used tacho gain tuning for motor 1 This value should only be written to by tacho gain tuning via ServiceMode 99 06 SpdFbAssist MhiTachoVolt1000 50 13 and parameter download Int Scal
450. me CtrlStatSla 12 pulse slave control status 12 pulse slave control status Bit Value Comment slave is Tripped no action 12 pulse serial operation see OperModeSel 43 01 12 pulse parallel operation see OperModeSel 43 01 bridge change over active no action CurCtrlStat2 6 04 gt 0 current controller is blocked no action CurRefUsed 3 12 negative CurRefUsed 3 12 positive Valid in 12 pulse master and slave Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y MotiFexStatus motor 1 field exciter status Motor 1 field exciter status 0 NotUsed no field exciter connected 1 OK field exciter and communication OK 2 ComFault F516 M1FexCom FaultWord1 9 01 bit 15 communication faulty 3 FexFaulty F529 M1FexNotOK FaultWord2 9 02 bit 12 field exciter selftest faulty 4 FexNotReady F537 M1FexRdyLost Faul tWord3 9 03 bit 4 field exciter not ready 5 FexUnderCur F541 M1FexLowCur FaultWord3 9 03 bit 8 field exciter undercurrent 6 FexOverCur F515 M1FexOverCur FaultWord1 9 01 bit 14 field exciter overcurrent 7 WrongSetting check setting of M1UsedFexType 99 12 and M2UsedFexType 49 07 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 215 Signal Parameter name E C Mot2FexStatus motor 2 field exciter status Motor 1 field exciter status 0 NotUsed no field exciter connected 1 OK field exciter and communication OK 2 ComFault F5
451. me cho ComLossCtri Ch2 ComLossCtri TorqMuxMode torque multiplexer mode WwW TorqMuxMode 26 04 selects a pair of operation modes The change between operation modes is done by means of TorqMux 26 05 Torque reference multiplexer 0 TorqSel2601 operation mode depends on TorqSel 26 01 default 1 Speed Torq operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary input 0 speed control 1 binary input 1 torque control 2 2 Speed Min operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary input 0 speed control 1 binary input 1 gt minimum control 3 3 Speed Max operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary input 0 speed control 1 binary input 1 gt maximum control 4 4 Speed Limit operation mode depends on TorqMux 26 05 binary input 0 speed control 1 binary input 1 limitation control 6 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Speed Limit Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name TorqMux torque multiplexer TorqMux 26 05 selects a binary input to change between operation modes The choice of the operation modes is provided by means of TorgMuxMode 26 04 Torque reference multiplexer binary input 0 NotUsed 1 2 DH 2 DI2 3 DIS 4 DIA 5 DIS 6 DI6 7 DI7 8 DIS 9 DI9 10 DI10 11 DI11 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17
452. ment restart data logger no action trigger data logger see note no action bypass speed ramp speed ramp output is forced to value of speed ramp input no action speed ramp output is forced to BalRampRef 22 08 no action SpeedRef4 2 18 is not limited SpeedRef4 2 18 is limited by M1SpeedMax 20 02 M1SpeedMin 20 01 respectively by M2SpeedMax 49 19 M2SpeedMin 49 20 force dynamic braking independent from Off Mode 21 02 StopMode 21 03 or E StopMode 21 04 no action freeze hold the I part of the speed controller no action release window control block window control speed controller output is forced to BalRef 24 11 no action positioning synchronizing command from overriding control for pulse encoder 1 or pulse encoder 2 or both pulse encoders depending if SyncCommand 10 04 and or SyncCommanae 10 05 is set to SyncCommand no action positioning block synchronizing command no action positioning reset SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 no action used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control various functions selected by parameters used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control to control v
453. ment and trip level BO UserFaulti F610 B1 UserFault2 F611 UserFault3 F612 UserFault4 UserFault5 UserFault6 UserFault7 UserFault8 UserFault9 UserFault10 UserFault11 UserFault12 UserFault13 UserFault14 UserFault15 UserFault16 Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 233 Signal Parameter name AlarmWord1 alarm word 1 Alarm word 1 Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment and alarm level BO Off2ViaDI A101 1 Off2 Emergency Off Coast Stop pending via digital input Off2 10 08 B1 Off3ViaDI A102 1 Off3 E stop pending via digital input E Stop 10 09 B2 DCBreakAck A103 3 selected motor DC breaker acknowledge missing DC BreakAck 10 23 ConvOverTemp converter overtemperature shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 The converter overtemperature alarm will already appear at approximately 5 C below the shutdown temperature DynBrakeAck selected motor dynamic braking acknowledge is still pending DynBrakeAck 10 22 M1OverTemp motor 1 measured overtemperature M1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 M1OverLoad motor 1 calculated overload thermal model M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 reserved no action M2OverTemp motor 2 measured overtemperature M2AlarmLimTemp 49 36 M2OverLoad motor 2 calculated overload thermal model M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 MainsLowVolt mains low under voltage PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 P
454. meter displayed Setting a display parameter from 101 to 9999 displays the belonging signal or parameter If a signal or parameter does not exist the display shows n a DispParam1Sel select signal parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel row ol 1 Index pointer to the source of the DCS800 Control Panel first display row e g 101 equals MotSpeedFilt 1 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N Unused 101 9999 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 318 in Signal Parameter name 4 08 DispParam2Sel select signal parameter to be displayed in the DCS800 Control Panel row 2 Index pointer to the source of the DCS800 Control Panel second display row e g 114 equals ArmVoltAct 1 14 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N 3 ConvCurAct 1 16 34 34 17 Unused 34 18 Unused Unused PID control Overview of the PID controller Reference input 1 PID Ref1Max _40 09 PID Ref1 40 13 PID Ref1Min _40 08 Actual input 1 x1 T PID Act1 PID1 PID2 Reference input 2 Di Di MCW Bit11 Bit19 PID Ref2Max 40 11 j PID Ref2 140 14 PID Ref2Min T 40 10 H Actual input 2 PID controller 40 02 TiPID 40 03 TdPID 40 04 D TdFiltPID PID Resetindex 40 20 PID ResetBitNo D OutMax 40 17 H PID Out TO o 40 18 PID OutDest DCS800 PID
455. meters mode Use the changed parameters mode to view and edit a listing of all parameter that have been changed from their default values 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight CHANGED PAR in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight a changed parameter then press EDIT to enter PAR EDIT mode Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter 3 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired parameter value Note To get the parameter default value press UP DOWN simultaneously 4 Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications Note If the new value is the default value the parameter will no longer appear in the changed parameter list 5 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU Fault logger mode Use the fault logger mode to see the drives fault alarm and event history the fault state details and help for the faults DCS800 panel operation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 427 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight FAULT LOGGER in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER to see the latest faults up to 20 faults alarms and events are logged 2 Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault Details are available for the three latest faults independent of the location in the fault logger 3 Press DIAG to get additional help only for faults 4 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU Clock set mode
456. mment auxiliary undervoltage armature overcurrent ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 armature overvoltage ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 converter overtemperature ConvTempDly 97 05 shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 residual current detection ResCurDetectSel 30 05 ResCurDetectLim 30 06 ResCurDetectDel 30 07 motor 1 measured overtemperature M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 or M1KlixonSel 31 08 motor 1 calculated overload thermal model M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 I O board not found or faulty DIO ExtModule1 98 03 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 AIO ExtModule 98 06 AIO MotTempMeas 98 12 IO BoardConfig 98 15 motor 2 measured overtemperature M2FaultLimTemp 49 37 or M2KixonSel 49 38 motor 2 calculated overload thermal model M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 converter fan current ConvTempDly 97 05 mains low under voltage PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 mains overvoltage actual mains voltage is 1 3 NomMains Volt 99 10 for longer than 10 s mains not in synchronism motor 1 field exciter overcurrent M1FldOvrCurLev 30 13 motor 1 field exciter communication loss FexTimeOut 94 07 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 M1FexNode 94 08 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 229 Signal Parameter name FaultWord2 fault word 2 Fault word 2 Bit Fault text Fault code Comment and trip level BO ArmCurRipple F517 3 armature current ripple CurRippleMode
457. modules size D6 and D7 were star or delta connection is possible Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 26 ifa pulse encoder is used make sure that pulse encoder s auxiliary voltage connection corresponds to its voltage and that the channel connection corresponds to correct direction of rotation check that the shielding of the pulse encoder s cable is connected to the TE bar of the DCS800 if an analog tacho is used make sure that it is connected to the proper voltage input at the SDCS CON 4 X3 1 X3 4 90 270 V X3 2 X3 4 30 90 V X3 3 X3 4 8 30 V forall other cables make sure that both ends of the cables are connected and they do not cause any damage or danger when power is being switched on Measuring the insulation resistance of the motor cables and the motor isolate the motor cables from the drive before testing the insulation resistance or voltage withstand of the cables or the motor Instructions how to measure the insulation resistance measure the insulation resistance between 1 cables and PE 2 cables and PE 3 armature cables and field cables 4 field cable and PE 5 field cable and PE the result should be MQs Setting of Jumpers The boards of the DCS800 include jumpers to adapt the boards to different applications The position of the jumpers must be checked before connecting voltage For specific jumper settings consult the DCS800
458. n 32 06 Autotuning speed controler AEN 32 07 Field weakening assistant nemen 33 Maat amb Le Ne IE ib E E E un 34 VO configuration coe tice ede E Se cagasa Bra gas BR ra gas EE a as aaia 34 mi leNeUIqi eoe 34 Armature current coptroller nennen nnne nnns 35 Control principle essssssssssssesseeeeeneeeennnene nennen nnnm nnn n nnne nnn 35 Manual tuning sess nennen nnne 36 Analog tacl1o 1 iiid iiti sese tete tote oie bete ete Debe oio bee Sete Debe oie bee ete Po ke Eoi bie feta fi 41 Manual turing E 42 see Ee 42 tlc n O aS 42 Manual tummy iiie iet iei o cte iei beo Eee la beca ee eel ie Eb a e ooa ie Eee 43 ii genui 45 Table of contents SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g BASICS enee eene 9 Y geed 45 NEWER IUIS HEINE 45 FAUX INC ANZAUON EE 47 ET 47 Manual tunimg nennen nnnnmenn seen nnn nennen nnns 48 Thiyristor diagnosis 2 2 tiit iotete ie tete tete tene tese tete Eee fete Pike tete inie Poe toio ote Eolo fade fete tenets 50 EE 50 Glhieckcall thyristOlS derent dineros ets 50 Check individual firing pulses eceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseneeeeteeaeees 50 Firmware description 52 Chapter OVerVIGW iier reete rrr Er ter Ee tesi E Eeer 52 Identification of the firmware versions ssssseseeennemeenennnnnen 52 Start tel UE e 53 EE 53 leben Ener 53
459. n EE 121 Parameter setting example 2 using groups 90 and 92 eessen 122 Switclion sequence EE 124 ControlNet communication with fieldbus adapter DCNA 0 125 ELE CIE Ml 125 RCNA OT pO S IOO RE 125 Related documentation 125 Overriding control copfiguration nenene 125 ADRA UE 125 Mechanical and electrical installation sueseesseeeenn 125 Blees lee 125 Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembhy 125 Parameter setting example 2 using Vendor specific assembly 127 Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 sssssssssssssseeeenenn 128 luet lei en EE 128 eene E UE 128 DeviceNet communication with fieldbus adapter DHUDNA 0 129 EL EE 129 RDINA 01 DOS800 EE 129 Related documentation 129 Overriding control configuration eene 129 Bac EE 129 Mechanical and electrical installation ssesessseeeennn 129 Driveconfiguratiorsdfessot E 129 Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembhy 129 Parameter setting example 2 using User specific assembly sss 131 Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 ssssssssssssseeeeene 132 Suel ein tee DEE 132 ene E UE 132 Ethernet IP communication with fieldbus adapter RETA 01 c cceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeteaes 133 Ge E EE 133 HETA 01 DCS800 5 ance aot saved eni aSiLahisA 133 Relat
460. n an illegal copy of a program 64113 retain data invalid caused by SDCS CON 4 hardware problem 64125 5 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64126 10 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64127 20 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64128 50 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64129 100 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64130 200 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64131 500 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64132 1000 ms task halted e g task contains an endless loop 64133 application program is using an unsupported DCS800 Drive library version Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile Y LastFault last fault Displays the last fault F Fault code lt FaultName gt e g F2 ArmOverCur Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y 2 LastFault 2 last fault Displays the 2 last fault F Fault code lt FaultName gt e g F2 ArmOverCur Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name 3 LastFault 3 last fault Displays the 3 last fault F Fault code gt lt FaultName gt e g F2 ArmOverCur Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Motor 1 field exciter alarm word Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment BO reserved B1 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved
461. n contactor thus Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 76 Deactivation CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 7 stays high MainContactorOn until zero speed is reached D The activation of dynamic braking immediately sets CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 6 to high dynamic braking active Dynamic braking forces the armature current to zero and opens the DC breaker by setting CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 to high Trip DC breaker After the armature current is zero and the DC breaker acknowledge is gone CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 8 is set to high DynamicBrakingOn This signal is connected to a digital output see group 14 and used to close the brake contactor As soon as the brake contactor is closed dynamic braking starts and decreases the speed With DynBrakeAck 10 22 it is possible to select a digital input for the brake resistor acknowledge This input sets A105 DynBrakeAck AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 4 as long as the acknowledge is present Thus the drive cannot be started or re started while dynamic braking is active except FlyStart 21 10 FlyStartDyn Dynamic braking is deactivated as soon as zero speed is reached and AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 11 ZeroSpeed is set to high In case of dynamic braking with EMF feedback M1 SpeedFbSel 50 03 EMF there is no valid information about the motor speed and thus no zero speed information To prevent an interlocking of the drive after dynamic braking the speed is assum
462. n the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped default 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Note E StopMode 21 04 overrides OffiMode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N DvnBraking Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name E StopDecMin emergency stop minimum deceleration rate During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised This supervision starts after the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly 21 07 is elapsed In case the drive isn t able to decelerate within the window defined by E StopDecMin 21 05 and E StopDecMax 21 06 it is stopped by coasting and AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 2 E StopCoast is set high Note The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax 21 06 or E StopDecMin 21 05 is set to default Int Scaling 1 1 rpm s Type l Volatile N E StopDecMax emergency stop maximum deceleration rate During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised This supervision starts after the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly 21 07 is elapsed In case the drive isn t able to decelerate within the window defined by E StopDecMin 21 05 and E StopDecMax 21 06 it is stopped by coasting and AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 2 E StopCoast
463. n using Ch3 concerning the released functions Firmware compatibility SDCS CON 4 firmware version 1 8 or higher see FirmwareVer 4 01 SDCS COM 8 firmware version 1 3 or higher see Com8SwVersion 4 11 Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 119 CANopen communication with fieldbus adapter RCAN 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the CANopen adapter RCAN 01 together with the DCS800 RCAN 01 DCS800 The CANopen communication with the drive requires the option RCAN 01 Related documentation Users Manual CANopen Adapter Module RCAN 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Supported operation mode is PDO21 see page 43 and 44 EDS file The EDS file for RCAN 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RCAN 01 into slot 1 of the drive Drive configuration The CANopen adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the operation mode PDO21 see page 43 and 44 Parameter setting example 1 using group 51 Communication via group 51 is using 4 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using group 51 Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtriWord Ref
464. nal Parameter name FldWeakDyn dynamic field weakening If the motor speed passes the field weakening point base speed quickly voltage overshoot may occur To solve this problem the field weakening point can be lowered by means of FlaWeakDyn 44 15 FlaWeakDyn 44 15 is set in percent of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Note The lowered field weakening point is compensated by the EMF controller in case of constant speed or slow speed change EMF CtrlPosLim 44 07 has to be set high enough to allow the EMF controller to compensate Field current FldWeakDyn 44 15 Speed FldweakDyn dsf Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N FldBoostSel field boost selector Selector for FidBoostSel 44 17 0 NotUsed field boost is blocked default 1 Run field boost starts with Run 1 MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 2 Dl 1 field boost 0 no field boost 3 DI2 1 field boost 0 no field boost 4 DIS 1 field boost 0 no field boost 5 DIA 1 field boost 0 no field boost 6 DI5 1 field boost 0 no field boost 7 DI6 1 field boost 0 no field boost 8 DI7 1 field boost 0 no field boost 9 DI8 1 field boost 0 no field boost 10 DI9 1 field boost 0 no field boost Only available with digital extension board 11 DI10 1 field boost 0 no field boost Only available with digital extension board 12 DI11 1 field boost 0 no field boost Only available with digit
465. nbsoy pueg sw g g uogoojes enbia pue 9u 4 j 4 onbe NIVHO 1OH NOO 3NOYOL Appendix A Firmware structure diagram SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 481 Dep Aed wezberp eznqonz3s Ad 008590 edKixe3pesn W H ZL 66 OWN sodLW eov pujesixnia vct SVvv v0 66 a uenum eq ueo o i peedsioy uay yeuioyxa 0 09 lesq peeds LW A X3 10 vt epowinopia 4 xny wnwpew o ies s Zeus OZxNIUNOP LY vvv DEE ES oranurcpug wnsoduo 4wap Z0 rv EGEN orvy mue mu POL peedsiow ap eau pue Sueueinseay
466. nce 102 Input instance 103 see page 35 The assemblies Basic speed control and Extended speed control 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since DCS800 firmware version 2 x EDS file The EDS file for RDNA 01 and DCS800 is available Please ask Your local ABB agent for the newest one concerning the current DCS800 firmware Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RDNA 01 into slot 1 of the drive see page 21 Drive configuration The DeviceNet adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 Please note that the DCS800 works with the instances ABB Drives assembly and User specific assembly The instances Basic speed control and Extended speed control 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since firmware version 2 x With these instances it is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800 For more information see User s Manual Parameter setting example 1 using ABB Drives assembly ABB Drives assembly is using 2 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this profile Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtriWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommMoadule 98 02 Fieldbus Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 130 DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 def
467. nce this speed offset is added after the speed ramp it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefScale speed reference scaling Speed reference scaling After SpeedRef3 2 02 and before SpeedRef4 2 18 Int Scaling 100 Type I Volatile N 293 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 294 Signal Parameter name Speed control The Speed controller is based on a PID algorithm and is presented as follows Teri KpS D T Nact s y J 1 sTD 10095 T sTi sTF 41 2 29 with T torque reference KpS proportional gain KpS 24 03 N speed reference N speed actual TiS Integration time TiS 24 09 TD Derivation time DerivTime 24 12 TF Derivation filter time DerivFiltTime 24 13 T nominal motor torque 2 29 actual used speed scaling SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Nef 100 Tn deeg speed L torque reference 1 i reference act speed actual 24 02 DroopRate droop rate odo 9 ui Droop is used in certain applications to archive a speed drop depending on the load This function S may become necessary for proper load sharing between drives which are linked via material e g paper steel foil and running with a common speed reference The amount of speed drop caused by the load is determined by DroopRate 24
468. nctions are explained here Field Reversal Changing the field current direction is needed when the armature converter has only one bridge 2 quadrant Field reversal is changing the direction of the field current Thus the direction of the speed is changing and it is possible to regenerate energy back into the mains For example to decelerate a large inertia To initiate the field reversal the sign of TorqRefUsed 2 13 is taken and defines the desired direction of the field current Armature converters with two anti parallel bridges 4 quadrant do not require field reversal FluxRefSum Flux linearization FluxCorr FidCurFlux40 FidCurFlux70 FidCurFlux90 Optitorque Sign Field reversal TorgRefUsed FidCtriMode FidRefHyst Parchange 10 10 FidHeatSell 21 18 ForceFldDi M1FldRemode 45 05 E 45 07 E Forward C Reverse TorgRefUsed FldCtriMode FidRefGain Overview field reversal and optitorque Field reversal is activated by means of FlaCtriMode 44 01 FidCurRefM1 Field control Mode Functionality Armature converter Fix constant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q or 4 Q blocked field reversal blocked optitorque blocked default EMF field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q or 4 Q field reversal blocked optitorque blocked Fix Rev constant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q bl
469. nd Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 EE Command Coast Stop see xem MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 1 Command MainContactorOn see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtriStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 DC breaker Trip DC breaker HVCB controlled externally DC breaker controlled by the drive Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 69 In the above example the High Voltage Circuit Breaker HVCB is controlled externally e g by the operator The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set Usually HVCB are equipped with an overcurrent relay which can trip the HVCB To protect the drive a 50 ms to 100 ms pre triggered trip command must be connected to Off2 Coast Stop MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 1 Additionally the trip command from the HVCB should also trip the DC breaker DC breaker is controlled by the drive The drive closes and opens the DC breaker with the command MainContactorOn The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 In case the main contactor acknowledge is missing F524 MainContAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 7 is set The DC breaker can be tripped actively by the command Trip DC breaker DC contactor US version If using a DC contactor you must connect an auxiliary co
470. nd or pulse encoder 2 depends on the setting of SyncCommand 10 04 and SyncCommanae 10 05 the next synchronization of the pulse encoders must be prepared by resetting SyncRdy AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 5 with ResetSyncRdy AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 11 default the synchronization of the pulse encoders happens on every occurrence of the synchronization event Type Volatile N WinderScale winder scaling Speed actual scaling Before speed error An generation Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N Enc2MeasMode encoder 2 measuring mode Enc2MeasMode 50 18 selects the measurement mode for pulse encoder 2 0 A B Dir channel A rising edges for speed channel A not not used channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 1 1 A channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channels B and B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 2 A B Dir channels A and A not rising and falling edges for speed channel B direction channel B not not used speed evaluation factor 2 3 A B channels A A not and B B not rising and falling edges for speed and direction speed evaluation factor 4 default Int Scaling 1221 Type C Volatile N A B Dir Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Enc2PulseNo encoder 2 pulse number Amount of pulses per revolution ppr for pulse encoder 2 if a pulse encoder extension mo
471. nd Run 0 NotUsed NotUsed i Doo cl Note The field heating references are set with M1FidHeatRef 44 04 and M2FidHeatRef 49 06 Field heating for the individual motor can be disabled when the belonging reference is set to zero Field nominal currents are set with M1NomFlaCur 99 11 and M2NomFlaCur 49 05 Note In case the field exciter is not connected via a separate field contactor following settings apply for field heating MainContCtrlMode 21 16 On FidHeatSel 21 18 OnRun Note When two motors in shared motion are used and field economy is needed for the dormant set FidHeatSel 21 18 NotUsed Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Speed ramp AccTime1 acceleration time 1 The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Toexpand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 AccTimel1 22 01 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N DecTime1 deceleration time 1 The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 DecTime1 22 02 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N RampTimeScale ramp time scaling Multiplier for AccTime1 22 01 AccTime2 22 09 and DecTime1 22 02 DecTime2 22 10 to expand the ramp time Int Scaling 100 Type l Volatile N E StopRamp emergency stop r
472. nd fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Depending on the type of communication loss either A128 FieldBusCom AlarmWord2 9 02 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom A armWord1 9 01 bit 11 is set with 4 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning 5 FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 23 02 Note The time out for ComLossCtrl 30 28 is set by FB TimeOut 30 35 for all R type fieldbusses and MailBoxCycle1 94 13 to MailBoxCycle4 94 31 for the DCSLink drive to drive respectively master follower communication Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N 30 29 Al Mon4mA analog input 4 mA fault selector 9 lu Al Mon4mA 30 29 determines the reaction to an undershoot of one of the analog inputs under 4 aaa mA 2 V if it is configured to this mode z a 0 NotUsed no reaction z 2 1 Fault the drive stops according to FaultStopMode 30 30 and trips with F551 S AlRange FaultWord4 9 04 bit 2 default m 2 LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AlRange AlarmWora 2 9 07 bit 10 3
473. nd the brake acknowledge fails 0 NotUsed brake acknowledge is blocked default 12 DI 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 2 DI2 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 3 DD 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 4 DIA 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 5 DI5 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 6 DI6 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 7 DI7 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted 8 DI8 0 brake is closed applied 1 9 DI9 0 brake is closed applied 1 with digital extension board 10 D10 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bit11 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 0 brake is closed applied 1 brake is open lifted AuxCtrlWord
474. ne resistance and inductance of the motor connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode monitor EMF VoltActRel 1 17 and CurRefUsed 3 12 set CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt set M1KpArmCur 43 06 M1TiArmCur 46 07 M1DiscontCurLim 46 08 M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 46 10 to default set M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to step the armature current controller and watch the EMF make sure the motor is not turning Attention let the drive run only fora short time ES Drivewindow ABB SMP DCS 800 D1 0 1 5 lel xij File Edit View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help Haea Slee lel fell sel gell IK Wiel sl IA Application amp control El ata logger D Event logger DI Faut logger memory E Parameters Eg 01 Phys Act Values Eg 02 SPC Signals Eg 03 Ref Act Values Browsed Name 1 01 17 EMF VoltactRel 0 43 40H1 Par 1 17 2 03 12 CurRefUsed 0 40H 1 Par 3 12 1 43 02 Cursel CurRefExt 40H 1 Par 43 2 f 43 06 MIKpArmCur 01 10 H1 Par 43 6 f 43 07 MI TiArmCur ms 50 40H1 Par 43 7 e 43 08 M1DiscontCurLim 95 100 40H 1 Par 43 8 f 43 09 MLArmL mH o 0H1 Par 43 9 EI 43 10 MLArmR mOhm 0 O 1 Par 43 10 zi 99 12 MiUsedFexType NotUsed 0H1 Par 99 12 Monitor Normal 20 Interval ms 10 History Bu
475. nections index Example Reading AccTime1 22 01 IN1 22 and IN2 01 IN1 16 bit integer 15 bits sign group IN2 16 bit integer 15 bits sign index IN3 not used OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign parameter value Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 177 ParWrite Type Parameter function Illustration IN1 IN2 OUT Operation Value of IN1 is written into a parameter defined by IN2 as group 100 index e g MainCtrlWord 7 01 701 The block will be activated with a change of IN1 IN3 determines if the value is saved in the flash Attention Cyclic saving of values in the flash will damage it Do not set IN3 constantly to true OUT gives the error code if parameter access is denied Example Set AccTime1 22 01 150 not saving into flash IN1 150 desired value IN2 2201 this must be a defined as a constant and not as a parameter IN3 false Connections IN1 16 bit integer 15 bits sign desired value IN2 16 bit integer 15 bits sign group 100 index IN3 boolean true save in flash false don t save in flash OUT 16 bit integer packed boolean error code PI Type Arithmetical controller Illustration Operation OUT is IN1 multiplied by IN2 100 plus integrated IN1 multiplied by IN3 100 Connections O 11 12 100 73 100 71 Note The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors IN1 16 bit integer
476. negative speed reference limit in rpm for SpeedHef2 2 01 SpeedHefUsed 2 17 32767 AE 32767 20000 20000 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm Note M1SpeedMin 20 01 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWorda 2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note M1SpeedMin 20 01 is also applied to SpeedRef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 2 18 by means of AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 4 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N 10000 10000 1500 rom Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 279 Signal Parameter name Q uj M1SpeedMax motor 1 maximum speed ol Motor 1 positive speed reference limit in rpm for SpeedHef2 2 01 SpeedHefUsed 2 17 32767 32767 Internally limited from 2 29 rpm to 2 29 rpm 20000 20000 Note M1SpeedMax 20 02 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed 99 04 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Note M1SpeedMax 20 02 is also applied to SpeedRef4 2 18 to avoid exceeding the speed limits by means of SpeedCorr 23 04 To be able to overspeed the drive e g for winder it is possible to switch off the spe
477. ng or FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop TorqueLimit or DynBraking fan contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 CoastStop but stays on in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop TorqueLimit or DynBraking At standstill the main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor stays on in case of field heating fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly 21 14 is running Trip level 5 As long as the drive is stopping via any communication loss control LocalLossCtrl 30 27 ComLossCtrl 30 28 ChoComLossCtrl 70 05 or Ch2ComLossCtrl 70 15 the main contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected communication loss control field contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected communication loss control but it stays on in case of field heating fan contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected communication loss control At standstill main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor stays on in case of field heating fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly 21 14 is running In case a fault occurs it stays active until the cause is eliminated and a Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 is given Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 449 Fault name Fault n
478. nimum torque limit in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 for external references TorqRefA 25 01 TorqRefB 25 04 The used torque limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g other torque limits current limits field weakening The limit with the largest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M1CurLimBrdg1 motor 1 current limit of bridge 1 Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Setting M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 to 0 disables bridge 1 Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the largest value is valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N M1CurLimBrdg2 motor 1 current limit of bridge 2 Current limit bridge 2 in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 Setting M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 to 0 disables bridge 2 Note The used current limit depends also on the converter s actual limitation situation e g torque limits other current limits field weakening The limit with the smallest value is valid Note M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 is internally set to O if QuadrantType 4 15 2 Q 2 Q drive Thus do not change the default setting for 2 Q drives Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N ArmAlphaMax maximum firing angle Maximum firing angle a in degrees The maximum firing angel can be forced using AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 bit 7 Int Scaling 1 1deg
479. nit s phase lock loop Int Scaling 100 1 Type Volatile N TfPLL phase locked loop filter Filter of firing unit s phase lock loop Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type Volatile N AdjIDC adjust DC current AdjIDC 97 16 is used to cover drives with different current measuring circuits for bridge 1 and bridge 2 It rescales the measured armature current if bridge2 is active Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N 12 5 800 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name OffsetIDC offset DC current measurement Offset value in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 added to the armature current measurement OffsetIDC 97 17 adjusts ConvCurAct 1 16 and the real armature current Setting OffsetIDC 97 17 to 0 disables the manual offset Commissioning hint In case a 2 Q converter module is used and the motor turns with speed reference equals zero increase OffsetIDC 97 17 until the motor is not turning anymore Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N ZeroCurDetect zero current detection Selects the zero current detection method Use a binary signal if the zero current detection is done by another converter 0 Current based on the converter s own zero current detection resistors default 1 Voltage based on the converter s own thyristor voltages not valid when galvanic isolation is used 2 CurAndVolt based on discontinuous current and thyristor voltages not val
480. ns 98 Set the DCSLink hardware nennen nnne nnne nennen nn 98 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed 99 Activate the mailboxyes AEN 99 Activate the communication supervision sssssseseeeeeeeeenennennn nnns 99 nie and RUE 100 liti E azliguoj rr M 101 ee liitol are BE UL titii te e eee Gee t Ge ee et i ote teta ttes 102 Drive to drive Communication nennen nennen nnne nnne nanan ennenen 103 Setthe DCSLink hardWare eret edere dene en eroe deno Eni Rara TARERE nA 103 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed 104 Activate the malboxves nennen nnemenn nnn nnne nnne nnns 104 Activate the communication supervision cssseseseeeeeeeeennnn nene 104 Send and receive values enne n nnns nnns 105 RE E E TRIN I I reer eee 106 Set the DCSLink hardware eene 106 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision 107 DDCS channels with GDCG COM8 nennen nennen snnt nnne nnns 108 EE EE 108 Integer scaling on the DDCS link nnns 108 ChO communication to overriding Control 109 ABB overriding Control 109 Parameter setting examen 109 Received data set table Ae 110 Transmitted data set table nemen nennen nnns 111 Fieldbus communication N type sssssssssssseeeeeneneeennneneenn nennen nnns 111 n We ee EEN 112 Ch2 Master follower link essen enne nnn nnnn sehn n nnne nennen enne 112 rM TUUT LE
481. nstant If boolean value true is needed set the constant to 1 If boolean value false is needed set to O e Accept by Enter e Scroll to attribute parameter BlockxAttrib e Set the bit for constant attribute of this input in BlockxAttrib parameter e Accept by Enter String input How to select the input With the EVENT block the text from fault alarm or notice lists will be selected To change the text DriveWindow and SDCS COM 8 are required Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 168 Function blocks General Each of the 16 function blocks has three input parameters IN1 to IN3 which can be connected to the firmware outputs of other function blocks or constants Boolean values are interpreted like this e 1as true and e Oas false A 4 parameter is used for the attributes of the inputs The attribute has to be edited manually if the functions blocks are edited with the DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light The attribute is set automatically when DWL AP is used The output OUT can connected with the inputs of function blocks To write output values into firmware parameters connect the necessary output pointer group 86 to the desired parameter ABS Type Illustration Operation Connections Arithmetical function ABS IN IN2 IN3 OUT OUT is the absolute value of IN1 multiplied by IN2 and divided by INS OUT IIN11 IN2 INS IN1 IN2 and INS 16
482. nt Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Ch3 NodeAddr channel 3 node address Channel 3 is used for communication with start up and maintenance tools e g DriveWindow If several drives are connected together via channel 8 each of them must be set to a unique node address Node address channel 3 0 75 valid node address for SDCS COM 8 76 124 reserved node address for NDBU x5 branching units 125 254 valid node address for SDCS COM 8 Attention A new node address becomes only valid after the next SDCS COM 8 power up Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch3 LinkControl channel 3 link control DDCS channel 3 light intensity control for transmission LEDs When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch0 DsetBaseAddr channel 0 data set base address Data set number of the 17 data set used for the communication with the overriding control system e g field bus adapters ABB overriding control The data set addressed by ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 is the 1 data set send from the overriding control to the drive while the next 2 data set is the first one send from the drive to the overriding control and so on Up to 8 data sets for each direction are supported addressing of the data sets see groups 90 to 93 Examples Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 1 data set range 1 16 Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 10 data set range 10 25 Note The
483. nt Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N FilterAO3 filter analog output 3 Analog output 3 filter time Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO3 scaling analog output 3 100 of the signal parameter selected with IndexAO3 15 11 is scaled to the current in ScaleAO3 15 15 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N IndexAO4 analog output 4 index Analog output 4 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO4 15 16 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N 4mA 20mA Uni e Ie 5 E 2 lt x e Y lt x E Ei ba Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name CtrlWordAO4 control word analog output 4 Analog output 4 can be written to via CtrI WordAOA4 15 17 using Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if IndexAO4 15 17 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvModeAOA convert mode analog output 4 Analog output 4 signal offset 0 0mA 20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output 1 4mA 20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output default 2 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 3 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g to
484. nt Scaling 100 1s Type I Volatile N Speed reference SpeedRef speed reference Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed 2 17 via RefiMux 11 02 and Ref1Sel 11 03 or Ref2Mux 11 12 and Ref2Sel 11 06 Internally limited from 2 29 E to 2 29 UD rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y FixedSpeed1 fixed speed 1 FixedSpeed1 23 02 is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 2 01 at the speed ramp s input It can be released by Jog 10 17 or MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 8 The ramp times are set with JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime 22 13 Internally limited from 2 29 e to 2 29 PE rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N FixedSpeed2 fixed speed 2 FixedSpeed2 23 03 is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 2 01 at the speed ramp s input It can be released by Jog2 10 18 or MainCtriWord 7 01 bit 9 The ramp times are set with JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime 22 13 Internally limited from 2 29 eau rpm to 2 29 E rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N 289 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 290 23 06 Signal Parameter name SpeedCorr speed correction The SpeedCorr 23 04 is added to the ramped reference SpeedRef3 2 02 Internally limit
485. nt of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorgqIntegRef integral part of torque reference part of the speed controller s output in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqDerRef derivation part of torque reference D part of the speed controller s output in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name TorqAccCompRef torque reference for acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation output in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y unit 195 E C TorqRef1 torque reference 1 Relative torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after limiter for the external torque reference TorqMaxTref 20 09 TorgqMinTref 20 10 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRef2 torque reference 2 Output value of the speed controller in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after limiter TorqMaxSPC 20 07 TorqMinSPC 20 08 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y TorqRef3 torque reference 3 Relative torque reference value in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 after torque selector TorqSel 26 01 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y K TorqRef4 torque reference 4 TorqRef3 2 10 LoadComp 26 02 in percent of MotNom
486. ntact to a digital input of your choice and set para MainContAck accordingly Set the following parameters MainContAck 10 21 DM or any input you choose for the DC cont auxiliary contact DO8BitNo 14 16 10 MainContCtriMode 21 16 DCcontact 3 Set these parameters AFTER macros are loaded but BEFORE the drive is commissioned Digital output 8 DO8 must be used to turn the DC contactor on and off DC contactor US DC contactor US K1 1 is a special designed contactor with 2x NO contacts for C1 and D1 connection and 1x NC contact for connection of Dynamic Brake resistor RB The contactor should be controlled by CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 10 The acknowledae can be connected to parameter MainContAck 10 21 DCBreakAck 10 23 L MainContactorOn 6 03 bit 7 MENTEM MEAN DynamicBrakingOn 6 03 bit 8 SERRE EE US DCBreakerOn 6 03 bit 10 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 70 If using Dynamic Braking the drive allows you to select the stopping method under three different situations Parameters 21 02 21 03 and 21 04 select the stopping method for loss of the OnOff run command StartStop Jog1 Jog2 etc and E Stop input respectively Each can be set to e RampStop TorqueLimit e CoastStop DynBraking In order to command the drive to perform a DB stop one or more of these parameters must be set to DynBraking Most users will want the drive to ramp stop when OnOff or a
487. ntion Positive mailbox node ID numbers must be unique Negative mailbox node ID numbers can be used by several mailboxes The master mailbox one for example is set to 5 and thus transmitting data Mailbox one of the followers is set to 5 and thus receiving data Activate the communication supervision The communication supervision is activated by means of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 The function of MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is depending on the setting of MailBox1 94 12 If MailBox1 94 12 is positive data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 3 ms the transmit and receiving intervals are synchronized with mains frequency either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms values from 1 2 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms If MailBoxt 94 12 is negative data will be received MailBoxCycle1 94 13 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle1 94 13 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle
488. nto the external UO module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 3 see Node ID selector S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no second RDIO xx is used default 1 Sloti second RDIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 second RDIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 second RDIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA second RDIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 3 The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RDIO xx extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Note For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO xx by means of dip switch S2 Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected Note The digital inputs are available via DI StatWord 8 05 The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord 7 05 Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Switches on the 2 RDIO xx Node ID selector S1 Pos 0 1 2 E F A ID 0 1 2 14 15 o E NotUsed NotUsed Configuration switch S2 ee DIS HW filtering 123 123 12 1234 DI2 HW filtering DI1 HW filtering Unused Node ID selector S1 is only
489. nvalid bit number for function block Bset location of function block PI Bal after PI function block Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile Y B4 Bit4 FaultedPar faulted parameters The Adaptive Program will be checked before running If there is a fault AdapPrgStat 84 01 is set to faulty and FaultedPar 84 02 shows the faulty input Note In case of a problem check the value and the attribute of the faulty input Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile Y LocationCounter location counter Location counter for AdapProgCmd 83 01 SingleStep shows the function block number which will be executed next Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile Y 377 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 378 Signal Parameter name 84 04 BlockiType function block 1 type Selects the type for function block 1 Block Parameter Set 1 BPS1 Detailed description of the type can be found in chapter Function blocks 0 NotUsed 1 ABS 2 ADD 3 AND 4 Bitwise 5 Bset 6 Compare 7 Count 8 D Pot 9 Event 10 Filter 11 Limit 12 MaskSet 13 Max 14 Min 15 MulDiv 16 OR 17 ParRead 18 ParWrite 19 PI 20 PI Bal 21 Ramp 22 SqWav 23 SR 24 Switch B 25 Switch l 26 TOFF 27 TON 28 Trigg 29 XOR 30 Sort 31 Jump 32 TachoAdjust 33 Position Int Scaling 1 function block is not used absolu
490. nvert 10 27 x64 H 4 phinvert 10 28 X6 5 DIS 4 pisinvert 10 29 X6 6 DIS Di6invert 10 30 x67 PI 4 przinvert 10 31 ven D 4 Disinvert 10 32 IO BoardConfig 98 15 Inversion of DI s 1 p Em 4 1 RDIO 01 x11 D9 X11 2 x12 1 pio X12 2 xi23 pni X12 4 DIO ExtModule1 98 03 24 RDIO 01 X11 1 D112 X11 2 x12 1 DI13 X12 2 X123 Du4 X12 4 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 Structure of Die Use of DI s only defaults default TT ConvFanAck 10 20 DI1 L e 4 MotFanAck 10 06 DI2 L MainContAck 10 21 DI3 ENS Off2 10 08 D14 Weg d l7 E Stop 10 09 DIS Reset 10 03 DI6 OnOff1 10 15 DI7 StartStop 10 16 DI8 e DI StatWord 8 05 Fixed assigned DI bit 0 DM DI7 for positioning bit 1 DI2 bit 2 DI3 bit 3 D14 bit 4 DI5 bit 5 DI6 bit 6 DI7 bit 7 DI8 bit 8 DI9 bit 9 DI10 bit 10 DI11 bit 11 DI12 bit 12 DI13 bit 13 DI14 SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g I O configuration 84 Digital outputs DO s The basic UO board is the SDCS CON 4 with 7 standard DO s Standard DO8 is located on the SDCS PIN 4 for units size D1 D4 or SDCS POW 4 for units size D5 D7 All 8 standard DO s can be replaced with SDCS IOB 2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO 01 digital I O extension modules Thus the maximum number of DO s is 12 The hardware source is selected by DIO Ex
491. o gain Me2TachoVolt1000 49 27 0 V the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed feedback assistant M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 1 V the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of the speed feedback assistant Note Use ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune Int Scaling 10 1V Type l Volatile N EMF Volt o CH s N OI o CH CH OH e ba e CH e CH e CH CH CH T rd 1 270 Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2BrakeCtrl motor 2 brake control Releases the control of motor 2 brake 0 NotUsed brake logic is blocked default 120n brake logic is released according to it s parameter settings 2 BrakeClose test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always closed applied 3 BrakeOpen test mode the brake logic will work but the brake is always opened lifted Attention A closed applied brake will open lift immediately Do not use this mode with e g an unsaved crane drive The brake open lift command BrakeCmd is readable in AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and can be connected to the digital output controlling the brake Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M2BrakeAckSel motor 2 brake acknowledge selector The drive sets either A122 MechBrake A armWora 2 9 07 bit 5 F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 or A116 BrakeLongFalling AlarmWora1 9 06 bit 15 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 if a digital input is selected a
492. o shared motion MotSel 8 09 or field heating FldHeatSel 21 18 default 12M2FldCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 2 2 M1iFidRefExt M1FidRefExt 45 06 external field current reference M1FidRefExt Field current control 5 ms ParChange FldHeatSel M1FlidRefMode 45 05 FldCurRefM1 Motor 1 field e Optitorque y current controller and M1FidHeatRef o field reversal M1FldRefExt 45 06 group 45 M1KpFex M1TiFex M1PosLimCtrl ParChange 10 10 FldHeatSel 21 18 MiPdReMode Motor 2 field ES current controller M2FidHeatRef 49 06 C M2FldRefExt 45 14 M2KpFex M2TiFex M2PosLimCtrl Int Scaling 1 Volatile N M1FIdRefExt motor 1 external field current reference Motor 1 external field current reference input in percent of M1NomFlaCur 99 1 1 Note M1FidRefExt 45 06 is only valid if M1FldRefMode 45 05 M1FIdRefExt Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N ForceFldDir force field current direction Motor 1 field direction force command 0 NotUsed the field direction is controlled by FlaCtriMode 44 01 and TorqRefUsed 2 13 default 1 Forward field direction is forced to forward direction 2 Reverse field direction is forced to reverse direction 3 ExtReverse In case an external contactor in the field current loop is used to change the field direction ForceFlaDir 45 07 has to be switched between Forward and ExtReverse ExtReverse adapts the armature vo
493. oading parameter sets or during power up bit O the firmware attempts to write their values If the setting is not possible or not compatible the parameter is set to default The parameters causing the fault can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Check parameter setting Triplevel c1 550 ParMemRead Parameter or Memory Card read always 1 Reading the actual parameter set or a user parameter bi set from either flash or Memory Card failed checksum one or both parameter sets User1 and or User2 have not been saved properly see AppliMacro 99 08 Memory Card and SDCS CON 4 551 AlRange Analog input range always 4 Undershoot of one of the analog input values under i 4mA 2V Check Al Mon4mA 30 29 used analog inputs connections and cables polarity of connection 552 MechBrake Selected motor mechanical brake 9 04 always 3 The acknowledge signal for brake opened lifted or bit 3 brake closed applied is missing Check MiBrakeAckSel 42 02 M1BrakeFitTime 42 05 BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 MiBrakeLongTime 42 12 brake brake cabling used digital inputs and outputs Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 463 Text on DCS800 Definition Action Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Triplevel 553 TachPolarity Selected motor tacho polarity 9 04 always The polarity of the analog tacho respectively pulse bit 4 encoder depending on M1Spee
494. ocked field reversal active optitorque blocked EMF Rev field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q field reversal active optitorque blocked Fix Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q or 4 Q blocked field reversal blocked optitorque active EMF Opti field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q or 4 Q field reversal blocked optitorque active Fix Rev Opti constant field no field weakening EMF controller 2 Q Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Field reference hysteresis Force field current direction Reversal time Bumpless transition Optitorque Field current reference gain 59 blocked field reversal active optitorque active EMF Rev Opti field weakening active EMF controller released 2 Q field reversal active optitorque active To prevent field reversal from continuous toggling due to a too small torque reference a torque reference hysteresis is available The hysteresis is symmetrical and is set by FldRefHyst 45 10 TorqRefUsed 2 13 Field reference hysteresis With ForceFlaDir 45 07 it is possible to force and clamp the field current direction This gives the user the possibility to control the field current direction or change it in case of need Thus unnecessary field current changes at low torque are prevented and it is also possible to release field reversal for certain occasions e g
495. ode 50 07 PulseEdges 1 22 65536 pulse edges Scaled 1 1 revolution Rollover always 0 See also SyncCommand 10 04 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N SpeedLev speed level When MotSpeed 1 04 reaches SpeedLev 50 10 the bit AboveLimit MainStatWord 8 01 bit 10 is set Internally limited from 2 29 SERT rpm to 2 29 SROI rpm 20000 20000 Note With SpeedLev 50 10 it is possible to automatically switch between the two p and i parts of the speed controller see Par2Select 24 29 SpeedLevel or SpeedError Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N DynBrakeDly dynamic braking delay In case of dynamic braking with EMF feedback M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 EMF or a speed feedback fault there is no valid information about the motor speed and thus no zero speed information To prevent an interlocking of the drive after dynamic braking the speed is assumed zero after DynBrakeDly 50 11 is elapsed 1s the motor voltage is measured directly at the motor terminals and is thus valid during dynamic braking 0s no zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated 1sto3000s zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated after the programmed time is elapsed Int Scaling 1 1 s Type I Volatile N 365 E C Analog tacho inputs SDCS CON 4 Analog tacho scaling Se t M1SpeedScale 50 01 SOY to 2 0V O x3 1 M1TachoAdjust 50 12 30V to 90V 4469 x3 2 AlTachoVal M1TachoVolt1000 50 13 SpeedA
496. olatile N MultiFexOff1 Multi fex off 1 For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADW000309 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N MultiFexOff2 Multi fex off 2 For more information see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADW000309 Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 347 Signal Parameter name zo 2 LU S o 12 pulse operation o 47 01 12P Mode 12 pulse mode wo Ju The setting of OperModeSel 43 01 determines the reaction of 12P Mode 47 01 g5 g OperModeSel 43 01 12PParMaster respectively 12PParSlave 3 a S 0 Normal 12 pulse parallel master and 12 pulse parallel slave use their own current controller independently default 1 Difference the 12 pulse parallel slave calculates the difference between the 12 pulse parallel master actual current and its own actual current and controls this difference to zero by means of its current controller not implemented yet 2 Sequential not used for 12 pulse parallel mode 3 DiodeBridge not used for 12 pulse parallel mode OperModeSel 43 01 12PSerMaster respectively 12PSerSlave 0 Normal 12 pulse serial master and 12 pulse serial slave are controlled by the same firing angle default 1 Difference not used for 12 pulse serial mode 2 Sequential Sequential control of the firing angles Only one unit changes its firing angle while the other unit s firing angle is fixed at t
497. ommunication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 142 DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 17 data word from drive to overriding control 40004 lt data word 2 1 DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control 40005 lt data word 2 2 DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 209 default TorqRef2 2 09 input data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from drive to overriding control 40006 data word 2 3 up to DsetXplus7Val3 92 12 907 default Alarmword2 9 07 input data word 12 alarm word 2 12 data word from drive to overriding control 40024 lt data word 8 3 DCS800 parameter setting using a Modbus monitoring the drive Note New settings of group 52 take effect only after the next power up of the adapter Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Setting of PLC parameter groups 90 and 92 143 Set in PLC Direction ABB Parameter group 90 and 92 f PLC lt gt Drive Datasets i name i 0002 e 32 40004 A e e e s _ C5
498. on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel when DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 523 ExtFanAck External fan acknowledge missing RdyRun 1 Check MotFanAck 10 06 external fan contactor external fan circuit external fan supply voltage used digital inputs and outputs 524 MainContAck Main contactor acknowledge missing RdyRun 1 Check MainContAck 10 21 switch on off sequence auxiliary contactor relay switching the main contactor after On Off command safety relays used digital inputs and outputs group 14 525 TypeCode Type code mismatch When using D1 D2 D3 or D4 modules the current and voltage range of the type code setting is limited to max 1000 ADC and max 600 VAC Check TypeCode 97 01 S ConvScaleCur 97 02 S ConvScaleVolt 97 03 526 ExternalDl External fault via binary input Always or There is no problem with the drive itself i RdyRun 1 Check ExtFaultSel 30 31 ExtFaultOnSel 30 33 F527 527 ConvFanAck Converter fan acknowledge missing RdyRun 1 Check Af Triplevel ConvFanAck 10 20 FanDly 21 14 converter fan contactor converter fan circuit converter fan klixon converter fan components converter fan supply voltage converter fan direction of rotation converter door open converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet D6 an D7 pressure switch setting should be 2 mbar used digital inputs and outputs group 14
499. one sink Be very carefully with e g MainCtriWord 7 01 SpeedRef 23 01 TorqRefA 25 01 E stop In case of an E stop the master must be in control of all followers Thus set E Stop 10 09 NotUsed and TorqSelMod 26 03 Fix in all followers Feedback from the followers to the master The feedback from the followers to the master has to be set up manually using drive to drive communication and Adaptive Program or application program Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 103 Drive to drive communication Set the DCSLink hardware Cable connection 1st drive SDCS DSL 4 X8 X51 1 aay B00 mA 1 o CANL 1 EEE f nrw Bus and ground termination The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus In the above example termination is mandatory at drive 1 and drive 2 SDCS DSL 4 jumper S1 1 2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 104 Set the node ID numbers and transmission speed In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the master and all followers Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the 1 drives node ID number to 1 and the 2 drives node ID number to 2 Also the transmission speed of all
500. one via jumpers on the SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 board 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10V 20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input default 120V 10V Uni OV to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto 10V 4mA to 20 mA unipolar input 3 5V Offset 5 V 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N FilterAM filter time analog input 1 Analog input 1 filter time The hardware filter time is lt 2ms Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N Al2HighVal analog input 2 high value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in A 2HighVal 13 05 Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type I Volatile N 10000 10000 10000 6V Offset Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Al2LowVal analog input 2 low value 100 of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in Al2LowVal 13 06 Note Al2LowVal 13 06 is only valid if ConvModeAI2 13 07 10V Bi Note To use current please set the jumper SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 3 accordingly and calculate 20 mA to
501. ore help DCS800 panel operation 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 426 Attention This assistant is using the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 If using setting Encoder Encoder2 or Tacho make sure the speed feedback is working properly 7 Field weakening Enter the motor data the field circuit data and follow the instructions of assistant the assistant only used when maximum During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if speed is higher than base existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 The EMF controller data are calculated the flux linearization is tuned by means of a constant speed while decreasing the field current and the EMF controller respectively flux linearization parameters are set When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help 1 Press UP DOWN to highlight ASSISTANTS in the MAIN MENU then press ENTER 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate start up assistant then press SEL to enter PAR EDIT mode 3 Make entries or selections as appropriate 4 Press SAVE to save settings Each individual parameter setting is valid immediately after pressing SAVE 5 Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU Macros mode Currently not used Changed para
502. orkspaces are online workspaces thus use Ch3 NodeAdar 70 22 1 2 The preconfigured workspaces are available from Your local ABB agent or can be found after the DCS800 CD tools CD is installed under fi C ABB DCS800 DWComp Workspaces File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Li Q sak T x m DO search Ki Folders O ES E x Ki EK Address lo rop Go Folders x Name EI Desktop S if uninson0 exe EN a My Documents uninsODD dat a X My Computer DE L 0130005 DEU109895 B01 02 DCS800 Name plate data amp macro assistant dww E amp Local Disk C Bios pcsaoo Autotuning Field current controller dw Bros DCS800 Autotuning armature current controller dww El C ABB El Dcsaoo Bios pcs800 Speed feedback assistant daat Docu Bios pcseoo Autotuning speed controller dun El VO DwComp D nz pcsaoo0 Field weakening assistant dww CO Workspaces siu gt D objects Disk free space 8 82 GB e26 KB X My Computer 7 Location of workspaces 01 02 Macro assistant Name plate data 1 Open the workspace 01 02 DCS800 Name plate data amp macro assistant dww 2 Get all parameters to default by means of ApplMacro 99 08 Factory and ApplhRestore 99 07 Yes Check with MacroSel 8 10 3 Enter the motor data the mains supply data and the most important protections M1 SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 ArmOvrCurLev 30 09 M1OvrSpeed 30 16 Language 9
503. ote2 When using EMF speed feedback together with a DC breaker wrong voltage measurements can lead to F532 MotOverSpeed FaultWora 2 9 02 bit 15 In case of an open DC breaker the voltage measurement might show high values caused by leakage currents through the snubber circuits of the thyristors because there is no load on the DC side To prevent these trips set MainContAck 10 21 DCcontact Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M2EncPulseNo motor 2 encoder 1 pulse number Amount of pulses per revolution ppr for pulse encoder 1 Int Scaling 1 1ppr Type l Volatile N M2TachoAdjust motor 2 tacho adjust Fine tuning of analog tacho The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held tacho M2TachoAdjust 49 26 speed actual Internally limited to 2 29 SH rpm 20000 HandHeldTacho Note Changes of M2TachoAdjust 49 26 are only valid during tacho fine tuning ServiceMode 99 06 TachFineTune During tacho fine tuning M2SpeedFbSel 49 24 is automatically forced to EMF Attention The value of M2TachoAdjust 49 26 has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and not the delta between speed reference and measured speed Int Scaling 2 29 Type l Volatile Y M2TachoVolt1000 motor 2 tacho voltage at 1000 rpm M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed of 1000 rpm M2TachoVolt1000 49 27 1 V the setting is used to calculate tach
504. ower on If a power up error is indicated during normal operation the reason is usually caused by EMC In this case please check for proper grounding of cables converter and cabinet Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 447 Fault signals F To avoid dangerous situations damage of the motor the drive or any other material some physical values must not exceed certain limits Therefore limit values can be specified for these values by parameter setting which cause an alarm or a fault when the value exceeds the limits e g max armature voltage max converter temperature Faults can also be caused by situations which inhibit the drive from normal operation e g blown fuse A fault is a condition which requires an immediate stop of the drive in order to avoid danger or damage The drive is stopped automatically and cannot be restarted before removing its cause All fault signals with the exception of F501 AuxUnderVolt F525 TypeCode F547 HwFailure and F548 FwFailure are resetable in case the fault is eliminated To reset a fault following steps are required remove the Run and On commands UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 and 0 eliminate the faults acknowledge the fault with Reset UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 via digital input overriding control system or in Local mode with DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light depending on the systems condition generate Run and On command
505. pStop FixedSpeed1 Unused Ch2 FolSig1 channel 2 follower signal 1 Follower signal 1 receives via channel 2 the 1 value of data set 41 from the master The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord 7 01 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Ch2 FolSig2 channel 2 follower signal 2 Follower signal 2 receives via channel 2 the 2 value of data set 41 from the master The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 374 Signal Parameter name Ch2 FolSig3 channel 2 follower signal 3 Follower signal 3 receives via channel 2 the 3 value of data set 41 from the master The format is XXyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA 25 01 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Ch3 HW Config channel 3 hardware configuration CH3 HW Config 70 21 is used to enable disable the regeneration of the Channel 3 optotransmitters Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back O Ring Regeneration is enabled Used with ring type bus topology 1 Star Regeneration is disabled Used with star type topology Typically with configurations using the NDBU x5 branching units default Note This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode ChO DriveBus 71 01 Yes I
506. parameter set 5 Man Const manual constant speed 6 Hand Auto hand manual automatic 7 Hand MotPot hand manual motor potentiometer 8 reserved reserved 9 MotPot motor potentiometer 10 TorqCtrl torque control 11 TorqLimit torque limit 12 DemoStandard demo standard 13 2WreDCcontUS 2 wire with US style DC breaker 14 3WreDCcontUS 3 wire with US style DC breaker 15 3WreStandard 3 wire standard See ApplMacro 99 08 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y RFE StatWord status word resonance frequency eliminator Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word Bit Name Value Comment BO FiltParCalcAct internal parameters are being calculated filter algorithm is skipped no action B1 ParUdpReq parameter update request after parameter change no action B2 FiltReleased RFE filter is released RFE filter is blocked ParChange parameter have changed no action reserved B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 228 Signal Parameter name Fault alarm words FaultWord1 fault word 1 Fault word 1 Bit BO B1 B2 Fault text AuxUnderVolt ArmOverCur ArmOverVolt ConvOverTemp ResCurDetect M1OverTemp M1OverLoad l OBoardLoss M2OverTemp M2OverLoad ConvFanCur MainsLowVolt MainsOvrVolt MainsNotSync M1FexOverCur MiFexCom Int Scaling Fault code and trip level F501 F502 F503 1 Co
507. pends on the selected measurement mode For PT100 the unit is degree Celsius and for PTC the unit is Q The motor temperature measurement uses either AI2 and AI3 of the SDCS IOB 3 or AI7 and AI8 of the RAIO Additionally the SDCS IOB 3 features a selectable constant current source for PT100 5 mA or PTC 1 5 mA Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 436 Measurement selection Connection possibilities for PT100 max 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max 3 PT100 for motor 2 or upto 6 PT100 for a single motor SDCS IOB 3 AI2 motor 1 and AI3 motor 2 are used for the temperature measurement with PT100 In case only one PT100 is connected to an Al the input range must be configured by jumpers to a gain of 10 Jumper settings for input range and constant current source see DCS800 Hardware Manual All parameters for AI2 and AI3 in group 15 have to set to default SDCS IOB 3 5 X3 S 6 Al2 gt D 7 T AI3 AID F ZU E 2 p ep X4 10 PRSE T PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 gt PT100 11 S ch xd SMA vV v wa NE Motor 1 Motor 2 J Ka single motor DCS800 FW PT100 and IOB3 adsf PT100 and SDCS IOB 3 e For more information see section Analog Inputs Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 437 RAIO for motor temperature measurement AI7 motor 1 and AI8 motor 2 are used for the temperature measurement with PT100 AO5 and A
508. played in the MainStatWord 8 01 The marks e g 9 describe the order of the commands according to Profibus standard The overriding control can be AC 800M via DDCS communication Serial communication e g Profibus hardware signals see CommandSel 10 01 Local I O master follower communication Adaptive Program or application program Switch on sequence RemoteCmd SS Inching2 amp Inching1 2 RampOutZerd S RamplnZero amp RampHold Reset Off before On On main cont On Run with reference E Stop Start inhibit Examples for the MainCtrlWord 7 01 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 54 Start the drive The start sequence given below is only valid for MainContCtriMode 21 16 On Attention All signals have to be maintained On and Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit O and 1 commands are only taken over with their rising edges Overriding Control MainCtrlWord 7 01 The overriding control commands On On 1 bit 0 gt The overriding control commands Run Run 1 bit 3 gt Now the drive follows the speed or torque references Note Drive MainStatWord 8 01 When the drive is ready to close the main contactor RdyOn state is set RdyOn 1 bit 0 The drive closes the main contactor the field contactor and the contactors for converter and motor fans After the mains voltage and all acknowledge
509. ple 4 drive to drive 94 01 1 2 3 see example 5 Example 1 Single drive with one or two field exciters and communication supervision single drive 13 excitation P94 01 2 1 P94 01 21 P94 08 21 P94 07 100 2d excitation P94 09 30 P94 01 30 Example 2 12 pulse configuration and communication supervision 12 pulse master drive 2 12 pulse slave drive P94 01 1 P94 01 31 P94 03 100 pur P94 04 31 SC SE P94 07 100 IS excitation P94 08 21 P94 01 21 Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Example 3 Master follower configuration broadcast with one mailbox activated and communication supervision Master drive 1st follower drive 13 excitation P94 01 1 P94 01 2 P94 01 22 P94 07 100 P94 07 100 P94 08 21 P94 08 22 P94 12 5 P94 12 2 5 P94 13 100 P94 13 200 1st excitation 2nd follower drive 13t excitation P94 01 21 P94 01 3 P94 01 23 P94 07 100 P94 08 23 P94 12 5 P94 13 200 10th follower drive 13 excitation P94 01 11 P94 01 31 P94 07 100 P94 08 31 P94 12 2 5 P94 13 200 Example 4 Two 12 pulse drives in master follower configuration and communication supervision Master 12 pulse master drive P94 01 1 P94 03 100 P94 04 31 P94 07 100 P94 08 21 12 pulse slave drive P94 01 31 14 excitation P94 01 21 Follower 12 pulse master drive P94 01 2 P94
510. polar output negative values are shown positive Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N 15 09 FilterAO2 filter analog output 2 Analog output 2 filter time Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO2 scaling analog output 2 100 of the signal parameter selected with IndexAO2 15 06 is scaled to the voltage in ScaleAO 2 15 10 Int Scaling 1 1 mV Type l Volatile N IndexAOS analog output 3 index Analog output 3 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO3 15 11 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N CtriWordAO3 control word analog output 3 Analog output 3 can be written to via CtrIWordAOG 15 12 using Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if IndexAO3 15 11 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvModeAOS convert mode analog output 3 Analog output 3 signal offset 0 0mA 20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output 1 4mA 20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output default 2 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 3 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 0mA 20mA Abs absolute 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output negative values are shown positive I
511. program or overriding control Configurable DI s are defined by means of following parameters Direction 10 02 Reset 10 03 SyncCommand 10 04 MotFanAck 10 06 HandAuto 10 07 Off2 10 08 E Stop 10 09 ParChange 10 10 OvrVoltProt 10 13 OnOffi 10 15 StartStop 10 16 Jog1 10 17 Jog2 10 18 ConvFanAck 10 20 MainContAck 10 21 DynBrakeAck 10 22 DC BreakAck 10 23 Following restrictions apply The position counter synchronization is fixed assigned to input DIT if Ref1Mux 11 02 Ref2Mux 11 12 MotPotUp 11 13 MotPotDown 11 14 MotPotMin 11 15 Ramp2Select 22 11 Par2Select 24 29 TorqMux 26 05 ResCurDetectSel 30 05 ExtFaultSel 30 31 ExtAlarmSel 30 32 M1KlixonSel 31 08 M1BrakeAckSel 42 02 FlaBoostSel 44 17 M2klixonSel 49 38 ZeroCurDetect 97 18 ResetAhCounter 97 21 VO configuration SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g activated via SyncCommand 10 04 83 DlI12 to DI14 are only available in the DI StatWord 8 05 thus they can only be used by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control SDCS CON 4 or SDCS IOB 2 wei Pt pHinvert 10 25 X6 2 Die hd DlI2Invert 10 26 X63 LH 4 pigI
512. pulse edge 1 Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 2 Rollover 0 and 65536 360 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y PosCount2High position counter high value encoder 2 Position counter high word pulse encoder 2 PosCount2lnitHi 50 22 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 0 PulseEdges 1 65536 pulse edges 1 Scaled 1 1 revolution 2 Rollover always 0 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile Y PosCountLow position counter low value encoder 1 Position counter low word pulse encoder 1 PosCountlnitLo 50 08 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 0 PulseEdges 1 1 pulse edge 1 Scaled 0 0 and 65536 360 2 Rollover 0 0 and 65536 360 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 199 Signal Parameter name E C PosCountHigh position counter high value encoder 1 Position counter high word pulse encoder 1 PosCountlnitHi 50 09 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 0 PulseEdges 1 65536 pulse edges 1 Scaled 1 1 revolution 2 Rollover always 0 Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile Y PID Out output PID controller PID controller output value in percent of the used PID controller input see group 40 Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile Y CurRef current reference Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur 99 03 after adapt
513. pulse encoder motor rotating reverse 9zZ rising edge 0 1 taken from zero channel pulse encoder 10 SyncCommand rising edge 0 1 taken from AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 9 Note Forward rotation means that encoder channel A pulses lead channel B pulses by 90 electrical Reverse rotation means that encoder channel B pulses lead channel A pulses by 90 electrical Int Scaling 1221 Type C Volatile N MotFanAck motor fan acknowledge The drive trips with F523 ExtFanAck FaultWora 2 9 02 bit 6 if a digital input for an external fan is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 DI1 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 2 DI 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge default 3 DIS 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 4 DI4 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 5 DI5 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 6 DI6 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 7 DI7 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 8 DI8 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 9 DI9 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 12 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 12 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed NotUsed def NotUsed nit E C Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 247 Signa
514. que selection 3 3 ms TorqRef2 Torque selector as 298 TorgRef2 MS Speed 1 TorqRefA Sel 224 Filter mes Torque 2 TorqRef3 OTO 2305 AIT AG LL 2502 TorqRefA FTG b0adShare TorgRefB Torque ramp 0 08 H roraMaxTref 20 10 P TorgMinTret E z 23 03 H TorqSeiMod 26 05 TorqMux 26 04 TorqMuxMode i 21 02 off Mode NotUsed TorqSel 280T TorqSe 2601 0 6 21 03 StopMode DI D11 Speed Torq 1 or 2 21 04 E StopMode CW Bit 11 MCW Bit15 Speed Min 1 or 3 A 30 27 LocalLoossCtr ACW Bit 12 ACW Bit 15 Speed Max 1 or 4 x EE L ISpeediLimit 1 or 6 30 28 CommLosst 30 30 FauttStopMode 42 10 MtTorgProvTime 49 40 M2TorgProvTime 70 05 Cho ComLossctrl 70 15 Ch2 ComLossCtrl Master parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 210 sends the torque value to the follower Follower MailBox1 94 12 5 configures followers first mailbox to receive data Follower parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 2501 gets the torque value from the master Torque reference and torque selection 3 3 ms
515. r by means of setting parameters in group 90 and group 92 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 149 Communication via group 51 E g the 3 data word from overriding control to drive should be the torque reference and the 3 data word from the drive to the overriding control should be the actual motor torque Therefore following settings have to be made PZD3 OUT 51 05 2501 TorqRefA 25 01 and PZD3 IN 51 06 107 MotTorqFilt 1 07 After changing parameters in group 51 please don t forget to reset the RPBA 01 adapter by means of FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET Now the corresponding parameters in group 90 and group 92 are disabled Attention Make sure that the used parameters like TorqRefA 25 01 are removed from groups 90 and 91 PROFIBUS DP cyclic DCS800 d j Parameter Signals PZD3 out PZD10 out j 51 05 5119 100 51 06 51 20 i N Parameter PZD1 in Signals PZD2 in PZD3 in PZD10 in i PB setting data words dsf Setting of data words using only group 51 or using group 90 and group 92 Communication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 150 Communication via group 90 and group 92 The other possibility perhaps more familiar is to connect via group 90 and group 92
516. r scaling to be able to change values of parameters properly Example If TorqMaxSPC 20 07 is written to from the overriding control an integer value of 100 corresponds to 1 torque Example2 If SpeedHef 23 01 is written to from the overriding control 20 000 equals the speed in rpm shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 MotTorq motor torque Motor torque in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 Filtered by means of a 6 order FIR filter sliding average filter filter time is 1 mains voltage period Int Scaling 100 22 1 6 Type SI Volatile Y Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 109 Ch0 communication to overriding control ABB overriding control The communication between the overriding control and the SDCS COM 8 via ChO uses data sets The data sets are connected to the firmware by read and write pointers see sections Heceived data set table and Transmitted data set table Received and transmitted values are set according to groups 90 to 93 Received data sets are typically connected to MainCtrlWord 7 01 and SpeedRef 23 01 whereas transmitted data sets are connected to MainStatWord 8 01 and MotSpeed 1 04 Parameter setting example The following table lists the parameters which need to be defined when setting up the communication between the drive and ABB overriding control Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1S
517. r sizes D1 D4 only default internal 1 Q 25 A field exciter for size D5 only used for field currents from 0 3 A to 25 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 35 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 external 1 Q 50 A field exciter DCF803 0050 or DCF503B 0050 external 4 Q 50 A field exciter DCF804 0050 or DCF504B 0050 external 1 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 4 Q 60 A field exciter not implemented yet external 2 Q 3 phase field exciter external 4 Q 3 phase field exciter external 1 Q 16 A field exciter used for field currents from 0 3 A to 16 A terminals X100 1 and X100 3 third party field exciter acknowledge via AITAC third party field exciter acknowledge via Al1 third party field exciter acknowledge via AI2 third party field exciter acknowledge via AI3 third party field exciter acknowledge via Al4 internal 2 Q 25 A field exciter FEX 425 Int external 2 Q 16 A field exciter DCF803 0016 or external 2 Q 35 A field exciter DCF803 0035 used for field currents from 0 3 A to 5 A terminals X100 2 and X100 3 see DCS800 MultiFex motor control 3ADW000309 see DCS800 Series wound motor control 3ADWOOO031 1 If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up Int Scaling 1 1 Type Volatile N SqrWavePeriod TestSignal ServiceMode 99 06 0 99 18 SqrWavelndex 6 342 CurRefUsed 7 C 330 F
518. r speed is decreased by means of the selected binary input The deceleration is limited by DecTime1 22 02 until zero speed respectively MotPotMin 11 15 is reached MotPotDown 11 14 overrides MotPotUp 11 13 0 NotUsed 1 2 DH 2 DI2 3 DIS 4 DIA 5 DI5 6 DI6 7 DI7 8 DI8 9 DI9 10 DI10 11 DI11 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17 ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 20 ACW Bit15 Note default 12 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed only available with digital extension board 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 1 decrease speed 0 hold speed AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 1 decrease speed
519. r the specified time when starting to run the cold motor 40 C with nominal current This time is about four times the motor thermal time constant The temperature rise of the motor behaves like the time constant which is proportional with the motor current to the power of two 2 Le fi d 1 Ion When the motor is cooling down following temperature model is valid 2 t I zt Qo EC tet 2 Motn with vam temperature rise M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 temperature rise M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 o temperature rise Mot1 TempCalc 1 20 actual motor current overload e g 170 lu nominal motor current 100 t length of overload e g 60 s 1 temperature time constant in seconds M1ModelTime 31 01 As from the formulas 1 and 2 can be seen the temperature model uses the same time constant when the motor is heating or cooling down Alarm and tripping levels Alarm and tripping levels are selected by means of M1AlarmLimLoad 31 03 and M1FaultLimLoad 31 04 If the levels are exceeded A107 M1OverLoad respectively F507 M1OverLoad is set The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm limit The default values are selected in order to achieve quite high overload ability Recommended value for alarming is 102 96 and for tripping 106 96 of nominal motor current Thus the temperature rise is MiAlarmLimLoad 31 03 10296 1 02 1 04 and
520. r welding Safety instructions 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate the drive Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death and or damage to the equipment WARNING A e Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the base speed Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device disconnecting mains instead use the control panel keys and or commands via the I O board of the drive Mains connection You can use a disconnect switch with fuses to disconnect the electrical components of the drive from the mains for installation and maintenance work The type of disconnect switch used must be as per EN 60947 3 Class B so as to comply with EU regulations or a circuit breaker type which switches off the load circuit by means of an auxiliary contact causing the breaker s main contacts to open The mains disconnect must be locked in its OPEN position during any installation and maintenance work EMERGENCY STOP buttons must be installed at each control desk and at all other control panels requiring an emergency stop function Pressing the STOP button on the control panel of the drive will neither
521. ram runs with 100 ms 4 500ms Adaptive Program runs with 500 ms A136 NoAPTaskTime AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 3 is set when TimeLevSel 83 04 is not set to 5 ms 20 ms 100 ms or 500 ms but AdapProgCmd 83 01 is set to Start SingleCycle or SingleStep Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N PassCode pass code The pass code is a number between 1 and 65535 to write protect Adaptive Programs by means of EditCmd 83 02 After using Protect or Unprotect PassCode 83 05 is automatically set back to zero Attention Do not forget the pass code Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile Y Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name BreakPoint break point Breakpoint for AdapProgCmd 83 01 SingleCycle The break point is not used if BreakPoint 83 06 is set to zero Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile Y Adaptive Program AdapPrgStat Adaptive Program status word Adaptive Program status word Bit Name Value Comment BO BitO 1 Adaptive Program is running 0 Adaptive Program is stopped B1 Bit1 1 Adaptive Program can be edited 0 Adaptive Program cannot be edited B2 Bit2 1 Adaptive Program is being checked 0 no action B3 Bit3 1 Adaptive Program is faulty 0 Adaptive Program is OK 1 Adaptive Program is protected 0 Adaptive Program is unprotected Faults in the Adaptive Program can be used function block with not at least input 1 connection used pointer is not valid i
522. ramp is bypassed The signal is forced to zero if RampOutZero 0 or RampinZero 0 see MainCtrlWord 70 1 Volatile N SpeedRef2301 SpeedRef2301 Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Ref2Sel speed reference 2 select Speed reference 2 value 0 SpeedRef2301 1 AuxSpeedRef 2 AM 3 Al2 4 AI3 5 Al4 6 AIS 7 Al6 8 FixedSpeed1 9 FixedSpeed2 10 MotPot 11 Al2 Al3 12 Al2 Al3 13 AH AI2 14 Al2 Al3 15 MinAl2Al4 16 MaxAl2Al4 17 Encoder2 Int Scaling 1 Unused Unused SpeedRef 23 01 default AuxSpeedRef 23 13 analog input Al1 analog input Al2 analog input AI3 analog input Al4 analog input AIS analog input Al6 FixedSpeed1 23 02 FixedSpeed2 23 03 motor pot controlled by MotPotUp 11 13 MotPotDown 11 14 and MotPotMin 11 15 AI2 minus AIS AI2 plus AI3 Al1 multiplied with Al2 Al2 multiplied with AIS minimum of Al2 and Al4 maximum of Al2 and Al4 pulse encoder 2 Type C Volatile N Encoder2 259 E C Unused Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 260 Signal Parameter name Ref2Mux speed reference 2 selector multiplexer Speed reference 2 selector 0 Invert1102 1 Open 2 Close 3 DH 4 DI 5 DIS 6 DI4 7 DI5 8 DI6 9 DI7 10 DI8 11 DI9 12 DI10 13 DI11 14 MCW Bit11 15 MCW Bit
523. ranch fuses thyristor gate cathode resistance thyristor gate connection current transformers T51 T52 EE Found new application on Memory Card i directly after Activate application on Memory Card by means of i energizing of ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl auxiliary supply Application on drive and Memory Card are directly after different i energizing of Activate application on Memory Card by means of auxiliary ParApplSave 16 06 EableAppl supply Overvoltage protection active 9 07 always 3 Overvoltage protection DCF806 is active and bit 3 converter is blocked a is set to 150 single firing pulses Check OvrVoltProt 10 13 if necessary invert the signal group 10 field converter cables and connections Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 121 AutotuneFail 122 MechBrake 123 FaultSuppres 124 SpeedScale 125 SpeedFb Definition Action Autotuning failed For more details check Diagnosis 9 1 1 To clear the alarm set ServiceMode 99 06 NormalMode Selected motor mechanical brake Acknowledge brake applied closed is missing or torque actual does not reach StrtTorgRef 42 08 during torque proving Check BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 MiStrtTorqRefSel 42 07 M2StrtTorqRefSel 49 44 brake brake cabling used digital inputs and outputs group 14 Fault suppressed A
524. re uses DriveWindow for further information about DriveWindow consult its online help However parameters can also be changed with DriveWindow Light or the DCS800 Control Panel The start up procedure includes actions that need only be taken when powering up the drive for the first time in a new installation e g entering the motor data After the start up the drive can be powered up without using these start up functions again The start up procedure can be repeated later if the start up data needs to be altered Refer to section Fault tracing in case problems should arise In case of a major problem disconnect mains and wait for 5 minutes before attempting any work on the drive the motor or the motor cables Start up SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 25 Start up procedure f The Safety Instructions at the beginning of this manual have to be observed with extreme care during the start up procedure The start up procedure should only be carried out by a qualified electrician Check the mechanical and electrical installation the drive according to the DCS800 Hardware Manual Tools For drive commissioning following software tools are mandatory DriveWindow Light including commissioning wizard and DWL AP for Adaptive Program and DriveWindow for fast drive monitoring using SDCS COM 8 For drive commissioning following tools are mandatory in addition to standard tools An oscilloscope including memor
525. receive up to 4 values TrmtRecVal4 1 94 32 TrmtRecVal4 2 94 33 TrmtRecVal4 3 94 34 and TrmtRecVal4 4 94 35 Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data negative receive data To get communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed See also examples 6 and 7 above The mailbox is inactive if MailBox4 94 30 is set to O Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name MailBoxCycle4 cycle time mailbox 4 The function of MailBoxCycle4 94 31 is depending on the setting of MailBox4 94 30 If MailBox4 94 30 is positive A data will be transmitted MailBoxCycle4 94 31 sets the transmitting and receiving intervals values from 1 4 ms are too fast and will generate a fault the communication is inactive if MailBoxCycle4 94 31 is set to 0 ms If MailBox4 94 30 is negative data will be receive A MailBoxCycle4 94 31 sets the communication timeout This is the time delay before a drive to drive or master follower communication break is declared Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl 30 28 either F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 or A112 P2PandMFCom A armWord1 9 06 bit 11 is set the communication fault and alarm are inactive if MailBoxCycle4 94 31 is set to 0 ms Attention The communication timeout has to be set at least twice as long as the corresponding mail box cycle time paramet
526. red values oem El spo sj El ama 129 ParRestored Parameter restored The parameters found in the flash were invalid at power up checksum fault All parameters were Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 132 ParConflict 133 RetainInv 134 ParComp 135 ParUpDwnLoad 136 NoAPTaskTime 473 Definition Action Alarm word Parameter setting conflict 9 07 Is triggered by parameter settings conflicting with other bit 15 4 Alarmlevel parameters The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Retain data invalid 9 08 directly after Set when the retain data in the flash are invalid during bitO energizing of power up In this case the backup data are used electronics for Note max 10s The backup of the lost retain data reflects the status at the previous power up Examples for retain data are fault logger data Data1 19 01 to Data4 19 04 I O options see group 98 and parameters defined by means of DCS800 ControlBuilder CoDeSys with the box RETAIN ticked The situation of invalid retain data occurs if the auxiliary voltage of the DCS800 is switched off about 2 seconds after power up while the retain data sector is being rearranged Check if the flash of the SDCS CON 4 is defective and if the auxiliary power supply has a problem setting is not possible
527. rence values e g torque reference from the master to one or several followers Master follower is an application in which machinery is run by several drives with all motor shafts coupled to each other by gears chains belts etc 0 reserved 1 NotUsed channel 2 is not used for master follower communication default 2 Master the drive is the master of the master follower link and broadcasts via channel 2 the contents of data set 41 defined by Ch2 MasSig1 70 10 to Ch2 MasSig3 70 12 3 Follower the drive is a follower of the master follower link and receives via channel 2 the contents of data set 41 defined by Ch2 FolSig1 70 18 to Ch2 FolSig3 70 20 Note The follower s node address is defined by Ch2 NodeAdar 70 08 Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N Ch2 MasSig1 channel 2 master signal 1 Master signal 1 broadcasts via channel 2 as 1 value of data set 41 to all followers The format is XXyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord 7 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 MasSig2 channel 2 master signal 2 Master signal 2 broadcasts via channel 2 as 2 value of data set 41 to all followers The format is xxyy with xx group and yy index Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 MasSig3 channel 2 master signal 3 Master signal 3 broadcasts via channel 2 as 3 value of data set 41 to all followers The format is XXyy wi
528. rent controller 1 2 Open the workspace 04 DCS800 Autotuning armature current controller dww Enter the basic current limitations and the motor nominal current TorgMax 20 05 TorgMin 20 06 M1CurLimBrdg1 20 12 M1CurLimBrdg2 20 13 and M1NomcCur 99 03 Attention Do not change the default values of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 Changing them will falsify the results of the autotuning Switch the drive to local mode DriveWindow DCS800 Control Panel or local I O Start the autotuning by means of ServiceMode 99 06 ArmCurAuto and set On and Run within 20 s During the autotuning the main contactor will be closed the armature circuit is measured by means of armature current bursts and the armature current control parameters are set The field current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn but due to remanence in the field circuit about 40 of all motors will turn create torque These motors have to be locked When the autotuning is finished successfully check M1KpArmCur 43 06 M1TiArmCur 43 07 M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 parameters set by the autotuning for confirmation If the autotuning fails A121 AutotuneFail is set For more details check Diagnosis 9 11 and repeat the autotuning Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 32 05 Speed feedback assistant 1 2 Analog tacho fine tune procedure
529. resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN 51 9 01 RdyRun 1 Fault tracing SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 504 ConvOverTemp 505 ResCurDetect F506 506 MiOverTemp 451 Definition Action Fault is active when Converter overtemperature 9 01 always Wait until the converter is cooled down bit 3 Shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp 4 17 Check converter door open converter fan supply voltage converter fan direction of rotation converter fan components converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet ambient temperature inadmissible load cycle connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 if TypeCode 97 01 None and S MaxBridgeTemp 97 04 is set properly Residual current detection sum of I l l 9 01 always zero bit 4 Check ResCurDetectSel 30 05 ResCurDetectLim 30 06 ResCurDetectDel 30 07 sum current transformer if necessary change transformer or SDCS IOB 3 disconnect the mains verify safe isolation from supply in armature and field circuits and make insulation tests for the complete installation Motor 1 measured overtemperature 9 01 always Wait until the motor is cooled down The motor fan will bit 5 continue to work until the motor is cooled down under the alarm level It is not possible to reset the fault as
530. ress ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord 7 01 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXVal2 data set X value 2 Data set X value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N DsetXVal3 data set X value 3 Data set X value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA 25 01 Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 386 Signal Parameter name DsetXplus2Val1 data set X 2 value 1 Data set X42 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 2 Default setting of 702 equals AuxCtrlWord 7 02 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus2Val2 data set X 2 value 2 Data set X 2 value 2 interval 3 ms Data set address ChO DsetBaseAddr 70 24 2 Default setting of 703 equals AuxCtrlWord2 7 03 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile N DsetXplus2Val3 data set X 2 value 3 Data set X 2 value 3 interval 3 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 2 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus4Val1 data set X 4 value 1 Data set X 4 value 1 interval 3 ms Data set address Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 70 24 4 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile DsetXplus4Val2 data set X 4 value 2 D
531. reversal is in progress see CurCtrlStat2 6 04 bit 11 active the current controller is blocked the l part of the speed controller frozen the output of the speed ramp is updated by means of the actual speed if RevDly 43 14 is greater than 25 ms and RevMode 43 16 Soft Field Heating Overview Field heating also referred to as field warming and field economy is used for a couple of reasons Previous generations of DC drives used voltage controlled field supplies meaning that the only thing the field supply could directly control was the field voltage For DC motors to maintain optimal torque it is important to maintain the field current Ohm s law U R I tells us that voltage equals resistance multiplied by current So as long as resistance remains constant current is proportional to voltage But field resistance increases with temperature Therefore a cold motor would have a Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 61 higher field current than a warm motor even though voltage remained unchanged To keep the resistance and thus the current constant the field was left on to keep it warm Then the voltage controlled field supply works just fine The new generation of drives including all field supplies used with the DCS800 are current controlled Thus the field supply directly controls field current This means that field heating may no longer be necessary when the DCS800 is employ
532. rive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 The data set base address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 An additional R type fieldbus adapter connected in option slot 1 is used for monitoring purposes only This choice is not valid for the Modbus 6 AC800xModbus The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 The data set base address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAdar 70 24 An additional Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 1 or 2 see ModBusModule2 98 08 is used for monitoring purposes only 7 NxxxModbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS COM 8 connected in option slot 3 and an N type fieldbus adapter The data set base address is selected by means of ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 An additional Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 1 or 2 see ModBusModule2 98 08 is used for monitoring purposes only 8 FldBusModbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via an R type fieldbus adapter connected in option slot 1 The data set base address has to be set to 1 set ChO DsetBaseAdar 70 24 1 This choice is not valid for the Modbus An additional Modbus RMBA xx connected in option slot 2 or 3 see ModBusModule2 98 08 is used for monitoring purposes only The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the communication module configuration is not met Atten
533. rmature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Note FaultStopMode 30 30 doesn t apply to communication faults Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N DvnBraking 313 E C ExtFaultSel external fault selector The drive trips with F526 ExternalDI Fau tWord2 9 02 bit 9 if a binary input for an external fault is selected and 1 0 NotUsed no reaction default 12 DH 1 fault 0 no fault 2 DI2 1 fault 0 no fault 3 DI3 fault O no fault 4 DIA ault O no fault 5 DI5 ault O no fault 6 DI6 ault O no fault 7 DI7 ault O no fault 8 DI8 ault O no fault 9 DI9 a 10 DO a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ult O no fault Only available with digital extension board 1 11 DI11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f f f f f f fault 0 no fault Only available with digital extension board fault 0 no fault Only available with digital extension board fault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 f f f f f f f f 12 MCW Bit11 13 MCW Bit12 14 MCW Bit13 15 MCW Bit14 16 MCW Bit15 17 ACW Bit12 18 ACW Bit13 19 ACW Bit14 20 ACW Bit15 ault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 ault O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 ult O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 ult O no fault MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 ult O no fault AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 ult
534. rmtRecVal2 3 eene 105 396 TrmtRecVal2 4 eene 105 396 TrmmtiecH al 397 TrmmtecH al 73 397 TrmmtecH al 23 397 TrmtRecVal3 4 eene 397 TrmmiecHald 1 398 Bu Ee 398 TrmmiecHald 73 398 TrmmtecH ad A 398 TS PDO3T 1etCOp 119 122 TX PDO21 1stSubj 119 122 TX PDO21 2ndSubj 119 122 TX PDO21 2ndtObj 119 122 TX PDO21 3rdObj 119 122 TX PDO21 3rdSubj 119 122 TX PDO21 4thObj 119 122 TX PDO21 4thSubj 119 122 TX PDO21 Enable 119 122 TX PDO21 EvTime 119 122 TX PDO21 TxType ssss 119 122 TypeCode 28 399 427 429 450 451 457 Up CR TE 329 UNetMin1 309 430 453 468 UNetMin 2 310 430 453 468 UsedMOW oiccen 53 75 100 220 UserAlarmWord ees 236 445 UserFaultWord 232 445 RL 188 275 VarSlopeRate ssnsseeeeeeeeeeeeerireeererneerreree 287 Vot Achel EE A EE SEES A EEE EEE 192 AVAIL A i A E EE E Ate 45 338 el Le EE 200 Kell EE 45 200 Volteftvt EEEE EE 338 VoltRefSlope ssssseen 338 VSA I O size 125 127 129 131 WinCtrlMode
535. rmware Manual e g 490 MI Tacho ne eem 384 M1TachoVolt1000 32 42 366 MAT ACHTUNG steeds iiia io 42 M1TempSel iesene 89 92 316 435 M1TiArmOur n 31 37 65 328 MiTFex 31 34 333 MiTorgProvTime 326 463 M1UsedFexType31 37 64 95 418 455 456 M1ZeroSpeedDy ssssssss 324 M1ZeroSpeedLim 279 474 M2AlarmLimLoad 356 453 468 M2AlarmLimTemp 357 452 468 M2ArM Zakar haBDid redi 352 M2ArMR EE 352 M basepeed 349 471 M2BrakeAckSel reee 355 M ZbrakeCI uer EE 355 M2BrakeFItTime eee 358 M2BrakeLiftDly eeeeesssssss 358 M2BrakeLongTime ssse 358 M2BrakeRefDly AA 356 M2BrakeStopDly ssesssss 358 M Curt md 351 M2CurLimBrdg2 sssesssss 351 M2DiscontCurLim eee 351 M tnchMeachMode eem 353 M2EncPulseNo eem 354 M2FaultLimLoad 356 453 M2FaultLimTemp s 357 452 M tev larmmwWord eee 243 M2FexFaultWord eee 243 M techode isisisi nsun 394 456 M2FldHeatRef ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 349 M2FIdMinTrip eese 350 461 M2FIdOvrCurLev oee 350 455 M Eldbettxvt 344 M2FIdRefModE ccc ceeeeeeccces
536. rom0 and if the restart command comes before zero speed is reached A137 SpeedNotZero AlarmWord3 9 08 bit 4 is generated Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 rpm Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N M2NomFIdCur motor 2 nominal field current LL Motor 2 nominal field current from the motor rating plate Note In case the converter is used as a 3 phase field exciter use M2NomCur 49 05 to set the nominal field current Int Scaling 100 1A Type I Volatile N M2FidHeatRef motor 2 field heating reference LL Field current reference in percent of M2NomFieldCur 49 05 for field heating and field economy Field heating Field heating is released according to FldHeatSel 21 18 Field economy Field economy is only available when 2 motors with 2 independent field exciters are connected to the drive Field economy for motor 2 is released by means of M2FidHeatRef 49 06 lt 100 and activated if On 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 for longer than 10 s the other motor is selected via ParChange 10 10 the other motor can be seen in MotSel 8 09 and MhtFlidRefMode 45 05 M2FldRefMode 45 13 Internal Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 350 Signal Parameter name 49 07 M2UsedFexType motor 2 used field exciter type 49 09 0 NotUsed 1 OnBoard 2 FEX 425 Int 3 DCF803 0035 4 D
537. rotection DCF505 or DCF506 is mandatory Large field exciter controlled by a DCS800 armature converter Overriding control CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrIWord DCS800 DCS800 DCF505 armature excitation DCF506 DCSLink Communication in field exciter mode Large field exciters are fully controlled via the DCSLink DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 default M1FexNode 94 08 21 default M2FexNode 94 09 30 default Single drive with one or two large field exciters singlesdrive 1 excitation P94 01 1 P94 01 21 P94 08 21 P94 09 30 24 excitation P94 01 30 Firmware description 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 64 In the large field exciters set OperModeSel 43 01 FieldConv and CommandSel 10 01 FexLink as source for the control word OnOff1 StartStop and Reset The reference is selected by CurSel 43 02 FexCurRef In the armature converter the field current is set by means of M1NominalFldCur 99 11 and in the large field exciter the current is set by means of M1NomCur 99 03 To close the field contactor use CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Parameters to be set in the DCS800 armature converter Parameter Armature converter Comments M1FIaMinTrip 30 12 XXX 96 sets level for F541 MQ1FexLowCur FlaCtriMode 44 01 1 EMF EMF controller released field weakening active depending on the application FlaMinTripDly 45 18 2000 ms def
538. rpm f 49 22 lt 10 then 20 000 Max 1 49 19 l 1 49 22 l in rpm Int Scaling 1 1rpm_ Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefExt1 external speed reference 1 External speed reference 1 after reference 1 multiplexer RefiMux 11 02 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRefExt2 external speed reference 2 External speed reference 2 after reference 2 multiplexer Ref2Mux 11 12 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y SpeedRampOut speed ramp output Speed reference after ramp Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Reference actual values DataLogStatus status data logger 0 Notlnit data logger not initialized 1 Empty data logger is empty 2 Running data logger is running activated 3 Triggered data logger is triggered but not filled jet 4 Filled data logger is triggered and filled data can be uploaded Int Scaling 1 1 Type C Volatile Y Unused SquareWave square wave Output signal of the square wave generator Pott 99 15 Pot2 99 16 SqrWavePeriod 99 17 SqrWavelndex 99 18 and TestSignal 99 19 Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y Unused PosCount2Low position counter low value encoder 2 Position counter low word pulse encoder 2 PosCount2lnitLo 50 21 Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode 50 07 0 PulseEdges 1 1
539. rque speed etc 4 0mA 20mA Abs absolute 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output negative values are shown positive Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N FilterAO4 filter analog output 4 Analog output 4 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO4 scaling analog output 4 100 of the signal parameter selected with IndexAO4 15 16 is scaled to the current in ScaleAO4 15 20 Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N System control inputs Unused OmA 20mA Abs ParLock parameter lock The user can lock all parameters by means of ParLock 16 02 and SysPassCode 16 03 Tolock parameters set SysPassCode 16 03 to the desired value and change ParLock 16 02 from Open to Locked A Unlocking of parameters is only possible if the proper pass code the value which was present during locking is used To open parameters set SysPassCode 16 03 to the proper value and change ParLock 16 02 from Locked to Open After the parameters are locked or opened the value in SysPassCode 16 03 is automatically changed to 0 0 Open parameter change possible default 1 Locked parameter change not possible Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N SysPassCode system pass code The SysPassCode 16 03 is a number between 1 and 30 000 to lock all parameters by means of ParLock 16 02 After using Open or Locked SysPassCode 16 03 is automatically set back to zero Attention Do not forget the pass code Int
540. rrent detection The residual current detection earth fault is based on a sum current transformer at the AC side of the converter or an external device e g Bender relays If a current transformer ratio is 400 1 is used its secondary winding is connected to Al4 X3 11 and X3 12 on the SDCS IOB 3 board The sum current of all three phases has to be zero otherwise a residual current is detected and F505 ResCurDetect is set ResCurDetectSel 30 05 activates the residual current detection and selects the choice of connected hardware transformer or external device The residual current detection tripping level in amperes at the primary side of the current transformer is set with ResCurDetectLim 30 06 if a sum current transformer is used In case an external device is used HesCurDetectLim 30 06 is deactivated ResCurDetectDel 30 07 delays F505 ResCurDetect Measured motor temperature General The temperatures of motor 1 and motor 2 parameter for motor 2 see group 49 can be measured at the same time Alarm and tripping levels are selected by means of M1AlarmLimTemp 31 06 and M1FaultLimTemp 31 07 If the levels are exceeded A106 M1OverTemp respectively F506 M1OverTemp is set The motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down to alarm limit The measurement is configured by means of M1TempSel 31 05 and the measured temperature is shown in Mot1 TempMeas 1 22 The unit of the measurement de
541. rt function blocks Use Ctrl left mouse button on one of the yellow boxes This opens the pop up window nsert Change Remove Block Insert Change Remove Block In this manner it is possible to insert up to 16 function blocks from the list to the desktop With the button Change Block xxthe selected block will be changed The button nsert Before Block xx means that the new block will be inserted before the selected block Button nsert After Block xx means that the new block will be inserted after the selected block neg or D EU OE e Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Connect function blocks Function blocks can be connected to other blocks or to firmware parameters To connect use Ctrl left mouse button on the red cross at the input This opens the pop up window Set Pointer Parameter This window provides several connection possibilities 7 01 MainCtrlword 3 28 Flux Ref Sum 7 02 Aust HA 7 03 AuxCtiWord2 7 04 used MCW 7 05 DO Cord 8 01 MainStatWord 8 02 AuxStatword 8 05 DI StatWord 9 03 Faultword3 9 04 Faullword4 9 05 UserFaultword 9 06 AlarmWord1 Connect a Constant value to the input 159 Connect a Parameter from the list and set the bit in case of connecting a packed boolean value Set Pointer Parameter 84 05 Set Pointer Parameter 84 05 In Advanced mode choose the parameter with
542. rt is to reduce as quickly as possible the difference between speed reference and speed actual o Step response time 100 ms count only from 10 96 to 90 in cold mills and 60 ms in rod and bar mills o where to step 25 30 of maximum speed step has to be in base speed range and 80 of maximum speed step has to be in field weakening area o filter time en e g 5 ms 10 ms see SpeedErrFilt 23 06 and SpeedErrFilt2 23 11 or o filter time speed actual e g 5 ms 10 ms see SpeedFiltTime 50 06 O O 0 0 Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 44 A undercompensated p part too small and i part too short B undercompensated p part too small C normal D normal when a low impact speed drop is required E overcompensated p part too large and i part too short Speed controller step responses T zie xd Ele Edi View Network Drive Desktop Monitor Datalogger Help Zlslelzl el 2 2 ale etel ed ym nlx sid el iz x CW DCS 800 D1 9H1 Browsed Conti IF Application amp Control ane L4 1 01 04 MotSpeed rpm 0 899999 4OH1 Par 1 4 B Data logger 2 02 18 SpeedRef4 rpm 0 899999 40H1 Par 2 18 23 04 SpeedCorr rpm 0 40H1 Par 23 4 f 23 06 SpeedErrFilt ms o 40H1 Par 23 6 fi 23 11 Speed rrFilt2 ms 0 40H1 Par 23 11 f 24 03 kps 1 69 40H1 Par 24 3 f 24 09 TiS ms 141 40H1 Par 24 9 D 01 Phys Act Values E
543. run command StartStop Jog1 Jog2 etc input is cleared and dynamically brake when the E Stop input is cleared In that case use the following settings e Off1Mode 21 02 RampStop e StopMode 21 03 RampStop e E StopMode 21 04 DynBraking However any case is allowed and the final decision is left to the user Other parameters control stops during faults See LocalLossCtrl 30 27 ComLossCtrl 30 28 FaultStopMode 30 30 SpeedFbFltMode 30 36 If using EMF feedback with dynamic braking set e DynBrakeDly 50 11 t Where t the time sec it normally takes the motor to stop during dynamic braking Attention If the motor voltage measurement is connected to the motor terminals D5 D7 with modified SDCS PIN 51 then set MainContCtrl 21 16 On Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 71 AC and DC breaker controlled by the drive AC breaker Command MainContactorOn see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 7 Main contactor acknowledge see MainContAck 10 21 Command Trip DC breaker see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 14 15 DC breaker acknowledge see DC BreakAck 10 23 DC breaker AC and DC breaker controlled by the drive In the above example both the AC and the DC breaker are controlled by the drive The drive closes and opens both breakers with the command MainContactorOn The result is checked by means of MainContAck 10 21 and DC BreakAck 10 23 In case the ma
544. s UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 and 0 again The fault signals will switch the drive off completely or partly depending on its trip level Trip level 1 main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor is switched off immediately fan contactor is switched off immediately Trip level 2 main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor is switched off immediately fan contactor stays on as long as the fault is pending or as long as FanDly 21 14 is running Trip level 3 The drive is stopping via SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 thus the main contactor is switched off immediately field contactor is switched off immediately in case of SpeedFbFltMode 30 36 CoastStop but it stays on in case of field heating or SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 DynBraking fan contactor stays on At standstill the main contactor cannot be switched on again field contactor stays on in case of field heating fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly 21 14 is running Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 448 Trip level 4 As long as the drive is stopping via FaultStopMode 30 30 the main contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 CoastStop or DynBraking but it stays on in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 RampStop or TorqueLimit field contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode 30 30 CoastStop but it stays on in case of field heati
545. s FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RAIO xx extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Switches on the 1 RAIO xx Node ID selector S1 Pos 0 1 2 E F ID 0 1 2 14 15 G Configuration switch S2 ry Al1 signal mode cossesscessss Alt signal level 123456 123456 Al2 signal mode Al2 signal level _ X2 x1 Node ID selector S1 is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board ADDRESS y Ze D N a 9 o So L x si Sret Configuration switch S2 The operation of the analog inputs can be selected using the configuration DIP switch S2 on the circuit board of the module The drive parameters must be set accordingly Input mode selection In bipolar mode the analog inputs can handle positive and negative signals The resolution of the A D conversion is 11 data bits 1 sign bit In unipolar mode default the analog inputs can handle positive signals only The resolution of the A D conversion is 12 data bits DIP switch setting Input signal type Analogue input Al1 Analogue input AI2 e m 0 4 20 mA UI Hill 0 2 10 V 123456 123456 0 2 V ON ON 0 4 20 mA 0 2 10
546. s parameter value The output value is also available in write pointer Block 1Out 86 01 Block Out 86 01 contains the destination parameter into which the value is written How to connect the Application Program with the firmware The outputs of the Adaptive Program need to be connected to the firmware For that purpose there are two possibilities e The outputs e g Block1Output 84 09 can be selected for further functions e The output values are available in the write pointers e g Block10Out 86 01 These parameters contain the destination parameters into which the values are written Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Block Paramet Act Signal Parameter table 1 01 1 02 er Set for block 1 Block Parameter Set 1 99 99 1 DORON 84 07 Set Attribute HEX 84 08 Example Add a constant value and an external additional reference to the speed reference r INT Boolean vc INT Boolean INT Boolean e 0 Bit To use an input as a constant value the bit belonging to the input must be set high input 3 bit sel input 2 bit sel input 1 bit sel This
547. s are checked and the field current is established the drive sets state RdyRun RdyRun 1 bit 1 The drive releases the ramp all references all controllers and sets state RdyRef RdyRet 1 bit 2 To give On and Run at the same time set OnOff1 10 15 StartStop 10 16 Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 55 Stop the drive The drive can be stopped in two ways either by taking away the On command directly which opens all contactors as fast as possible after stopping the drive according to Off Mode 21 02 or by means of the following sequence Overriding Control Drive MainCtrlWord 7 01 MainStatWord 8 01 The overriding control removes Run Run 0 bit 3 1 In speed control mode the drive stops according to StopMode 21 03 In torque control mode the torque reference is reduced to zero according to TorqRefA FTC 25 02 respectively TorqRampDown 25 06 depending on the used torque reference channel A or B When zero speed or zero torque is reached the state RdyRef is removed OQ RayRef o bit 2 The overriding control can keep the On command if the drive has to be started up again The overriding control removes On On 0 bit 0 gt All contactors are opened the fan contactors stay in according to FanDly 21 14 and the state RdyRun is removed E Kal RdyRun 0 bit 1 Besides in MainStatWord 8 01 the drive s state is shown
548. s controlled via local I O S S c Reset 10 03 DI6 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 7 default S S OnOff1 10 15 DI7 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 default and StartStop 10 16 DI8 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 default 1 MainCtrlWord drive is controlled via MainCtrlWord 7 01 2 Key Automatic switchover from MainCtrlWord to Local I O in case of F528 FieldBusCom FaultWorda 2 9 02 bit 11 It is still possible to control the drive via local I O OnOff1 10 15 DI7 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 default and StartStop 10 16 DI8 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 default The used speed reference is set by means of FixedSpeed1 23 02 3 12PLink Drive is controlled from 12 pulse master OnOff1 StartStop Off2N and Reset Only available when OperModeSel 43 01 12P ParaSla or 12P SerSla 4 FexLink Drive is controlled from field exciter master OnOff1 StartStop and Reset Only available when OperModeSel 43 01 FieldExciter Note Local control mode has higher priority than the selection made with CommandSel 10 01 Note The commands Off2 10 08 E Stop 10 09 and Reset 10 03 are always active in case they are assigned regardless of CommanaSel 10 01 setting Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N 10 02 Direction direction of rotation ow o lo Binary signal for Direction Direction 10 02 allows to change the direction of rotation by negating 9 9 the speed reference in remote operation z m z 0 NotUsed default E Fa z 1 DH 1 Reverse 0 Forward lt
549. s possible to connect several klixons in series Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N M2BrakeFItTime motor 2 brake fault time Brake open lift acknowledge monitor During this time the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 and the brake acknowledge signal M2BrakeAckSel 49 29 can be different without causing A122 MechBrake AlarmWorda2 9 07 bit 5 or F552 MechBrake FaultWord4 9 04 bit 3 depending on BrakeFaultFunc 42 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2TorqProvTime motor 2 torque proving time Brake torque proving acknowledge The drive trips with F556 TorqProv FaultWord4 9 04 bit 7 if the Run MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 3 command is set and the acknowledge TorqProvOK AuxCtrlWorad2 7 03 bit 11 is not set before M2TorgProvTime 49 40 is elapsed The torque proving is inactive if M2TorqProvTime 49 40 is set to O Note The acknowledge signal TorqProvOK has to be provided by Adaptive Program application program or overriding control and is set by means of a rising edge 0 1 The torque reference might be set by means of BalRef 24 11 or TorqSel 26 01 and BalSpeedCtrl AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 8 or TorgRefA 25 01 The reaction of the drive might be taken from MotCur 1 06 Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2BrakeLiftDly motor 2 brake lift delay Brake open lift delay This function delays the brake open lift command BrakeCmd AuxStatWord 8 02 bit 8 until M2Brak
550. s used Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N AverageCur 329 E C Uk relative short circuit impedance For more information contact Your ABB representative Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile N FiringLimMode firing limit mode FiringLimMode 43 13 selects the strategy for ArmAlphaMax 20 14 0 Fix the firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax 20 14 1 FixSingle The firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax 20 14 When ArmAlphaMax 20 14 is reached single firing pulses are fired default 2 Calculated the firing limit is reduced from 165 to ArmAlphaMax 20 14 depending on the actual motor current and M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 3 CalcSingle function same as in Calculated but single pulses are fired when the limit is reached degrees C ArmAlphaMax 20 14 actual motor M1DiscontCurLim current 43 08 Note Single firing pulses force discontinuous current automatically to zero Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N CalcSinale Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name RevDly reversal delay RevDly 43 14 defines the delay time in ms for the bridge reversal after zero current has been detected see CurCtrlStat1 6 03 bit 13 CtriRefUsed 3 12 changes polarity Zero current CtrlStatMas 6 09 detection bit 12 is set CurCtrlStat 6 03 gy bit 13 j RevDly 43 14 ZeroCurTimeOut 97 19 RevDly
551. sate for uk The measured phase angle of the firing unit s PLL can be corrected in order to compensate the error caused by the commutation related voltage drops The compensation depends on the uk short circuit voltage of the mains CompUkPLL 97 12 defines the mains short circuit voltage in percent of NomMainsVolt 99 10 which is caused by the converter s nominal current for the PLL correction CompUkPLL uk Sc 100 S with uk related mains short circuit voltage S apparent power of converter and S apparent power of transformer Commissioning hint CompUkPLL 97 12 is used to compensate for the phase shift of the mains due to commutation notches in case the mains are measured on the secondary side of the dedicated transformer The whole situation leads to unstable armature current during high motor loads Increase CompUkPLL 97 12 slowly 1 by 1 until the armature current becomes stable Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N DevLimPLL phase locked loop deviation limit Maximum allowed deviation of the PLL controller The current controller is blocked in case the limit is reached see CurCitrlStat2 6 04 bit 13 for 50 Hz mains is valid 360 20ms 20 000 50H for 60 Hz mains is valid 360 16 67ms The PLL input can be seen in PLLIn 3 20 The PLL output can be seen in MainsFreqAct 1 38 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N KpPLL phase locked loop p part Gain of firing u
552. saves the actual used parameters into the flash 3 SaveToMemC saves a complete parameter set actual used parameters User1 and User2 from control board to memory card 4 LoadFromMemC loads a complete parameter set actual used parameters User and User2 from memory card to control board 4 EableAppl enables the application program 5 DisableAppl disables the application program 6 DeleteAppl To un protect DeleteAppl set ServiceMode 99 06 DeleteAppl Deletes the application and the complete parameter set actual used parameters User1 and User stored on the memory card Also all user defined parameters will be erased from the actual parameter set Parameter sets User1 or User2 stored in the drive itself will not be influenced In case an application will be loaded anew all user defined parameters are set to default This procedure can also be used to repair a memory card After an action e g save load is finished ParApplSave 16 06 is changed back to Done This will take max 1 second Note Do not use the parameter save function unnecessarily Note Parameters changed by DCS800 Control Panel or commissioning tools are immediately saved into the flash Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y 16 08 Unused Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name USI Sel selector for user interface The user interface for the DCS800 Control Panel Compact Extend
553. sed as speed feedback device the actual speed is measured by counting the amount of pulses per cycle time The cycle time for the measurement is synchronized with the mains every 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms In case very small speeds have to be measured that means there is less than one pulse per cycle time it is possible to increase the measuring time by means of MaxEncoderTime 50 05 The speed is set to zero after MaxEncoderTime 50 05 is elapsed without a measured pulse speed pulses cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle i cycle time R time time time time time time time time Note MaxEncoderTime 50 05 is valid for motor 1 motor 2 encoder 1 and encoder 2 Note Formula to calculate the maximum speed using an encoder 300 kHz 60 s nax rpm ppr with ppr pulses per revolution see M1EncPulseNo 50 04 300 kHz are the maximum allowed input frequency Note Formula to calculate the minimum speed resolution using an encoder 60 s k ppr t cycle k 2 speed evaluation factor see M1EncMeasMode 50 02 ppr pulses per revolution see M1EncPulseNo 50 04 tose cycle time of the speed controller either 3 3 ms or 2 77 ms cycle Int Scaling 1 1 ms Type l Volatile N SpeedFiltTime actual speed filter time Speed actual filter time for MotSpeed 1 04 There are three different filters for actual speed and speed error An SpeedFiltTime 50 06 is filtering the actual speed and
554. self bit 9 Check ExtAlarmSel 30 32 alarm 0 ExtAlarmOnSel 30 34 A127 127 AlRange Analog input range 9 07 always Undershoot of one of the analog input values under bit 10 4mA 2V Check Al Mon4mA 30 29 used analog inputs connections and cables polarity of connection 128 FieldBusCom Fieldbus communication loss 9 07 always if FB F528 FieldBusCom is only activated after the first bit 11 TimeOut data set from the overriding control is received by the 30 35 0 drive Before the first data set is received only A128 FieldBusCom is active The reason is to suppress unnecessary faults the start up of the overriding control is usually slower than the one of the drive Check ComLossCtrl 30 28 FB TimeOut 30 35 CommModule 98 02 parameter settings of group 51 fieldbus fieldbus cable fieldbus termination fieldbus adapter restored from the parameter backup 130 Local command loss LocalCmdLoss Connection fault with DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light Check LocalLossCtrl 30 27 if control DCS800 Control Panel is disconnected connection adapter cables 131 ParAdded Parameter added after A new firmware with a different amount of parameters bit 14 download of was downloaded The new parameters are set to their firmware for default values The parameters causing the alarm can max 10s be identified in Diagnosis 9 11 Check new parameters and set them to the desi
555. served DCS800 Control Panel up or download checksum faulty DCS800 Control Panel up or download software faulty DCS800 Control Panel up or download verification failed reserved The flash is written to cyclic by Adaptive Program e g block ParWrite or application program Cyclic saving of values in the flash will damage it Do not write cyclic on the flash reserved Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 238 Signal Parameter name Hardware parameter flash faulty erase parameter flash faulty program check connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 and connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 reserved A132 ParConflict alarm parameter setting conflict 70z no field reversal possible due to ForceFlaDir 45 07 ExtReverse 71 flux linearization parameters not consistent 72 reserved 73 armature data not consistent Check if M1NomCur 99 03 is set to zero M1NomvVolt 99 02 and M1NomCur 99 03 are fitting with the drive In case they are much smaller than the drive the internal calculation of M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 can cause an internal overflow Set M1ArmL 43 09 and M1ArmR 43 10 to zero For M1ArmL 43 09 following limitation is valid 43 09 4096 99 03 _ 3740 1000 99 02 For M1ArmR 43 10 following limitation is valid 43 10 4096 99 03 1000 99 02 74 76 reserved Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0701 D
556. sired numbers of data words VSA I O size 51 26 1 9 Defines the length of the Vendor specific assembly in pairs of data words E g a parameter value of 4 means 4 word as output and 4 words as input FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 DONE default If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by ControlNet adapter If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the rotary switches of the RCNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using Vendor specific assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 128 Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 Output I O par 3 Output I O par 4 Input I O par 3 Parameter group 51 Direction ABB Parameter group 90 and 92 iname set value PLC lt gt Drive Datasets i name DsetXVal1 DsetXVal2 DsetXVal3 DsetXplus2Val1 DsetXplus1Val1 DsetXplus1Val2 DsetXplus1Val3 Input I O par 4 Output I O par 5 Output I O par 6 DsetXplus3Val1 DsetXplus2Val2 DsetXplus2Val3
557. soft keys Lower middle displays the current time if configured to do so Operating the Drive LOC REM Each time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and is controlled as specified in CommandSel 10 01 To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the DCS800 Control Panel press the button DCS800 panel operation SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Other modes 423 When switching from local control LOC to remote control REM the drive s status e g On Run and the speed reference of the remote control are taken To switch back to remote control REM press the button Start Stop To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons Shaft direction To change the shaft direction press DIR Speed reference To modify the speed reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is highlighted press the UP or DOWN button the reference changes immediately The speed reference can be modified via the DCS800 Control Panel when in local control LOC Note The START STOP buttons shaft direction DIR and reference functions are only valid in local control LOC Below the output mode the DCS800 Control Panel has Other operating modes are available through the MAIN MENU A fault mode that is triggered by faults The fault mode includes a diagnostic assistant mode An alarm mode that is triggered by drive alarms LOC U MAIN MEN
558. speed reference and VarSlopeRate 22 07 are equal the shape of SpeedRef3 2 02 is a strait line Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N BalRampRef balance ramp reference The output of the speed ramp can be forced to the value defined by BalRampRef 22 08 The function is released by setting AuxCtrIWord 7 02 bit 3 1 Internally limited from 2 29 SO rpm to 2 29 EM rpm 20000 20000 Int Scaling 2 29 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name def AccTime2 acceleration time 2 The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct 2 29 Toexpand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 AccTime2 22 09 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N DecTime2 deceleration time 2 The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct 2 29 to zero speed Toexpand the ramp time use RampTimeScale 22 03 DecTime2 22 10 can be released with Ramp2Sel 22 11 Int Scaling 100 1s Type l Volatile N Ramp2Select ramp 2 selector Select active ramp parameters 0 Acc Dec1 parameter set 1 AccTime1 22 01 and DecTime1 22 02 is active default 1 Acc Dec2 parameter set 2 AccTime2 22 09 and DecTime2 22 10 is active 2 SpeedLevel If SpeedRef3 2 02 lt SpeedLev 50 10 l then parameter set1 is active If SpeedRef3 2 02 gt
559. ssseee 281 TorglIntegRef AAA 194 Rettel lu e E 196 WOlQMAX uge deiedededeie deit dede re tore ro serere oe eig 31 279 org Meel ege Ed Ee went 195 ToroMaxpbt 108 189 279 TOPGMaxX A NC TEE 280 o te LW 31 279 TOMMA sie aa xe te 196 ToroMmm bt 280 ToroMimnTret nn 280 TOrgMUX i e ioc ooo ae ae eeu 82 115 302 TorgMuxMode ssesssssessseeeeeeeeeeerereene 115 301 TorqProphel uet ant 194 Torobiampt own seeen 55 299 Rettel Cla e UE 299 Torqhef1 en 195 TorqRef2 119 122 139 141 195 Reiter BEE 100 113 195 ele EE 195 TorqRefA 100 113 115 119 122 139 141 149 299 TorqRefA ETC 55 299 TorqhefA Sel eritis 89 Reie iE 299 TorgRefExt 2 n nnnnnnoseseniss 89 196 TorqRefUsed 58 93 195 TorqScale Ret 304 TorqSel tetti 100 115 300 TorqSelMod eee 102 300 TorollsecdhMan 196 TorqUsedMaxSel suse 89 281 TorqUsedaMin eeeseeeeesess 196 TorqUsedMinSel 89 281 TransparentIProfil 119 122 493 TrmtRecVal1 1 100 105 395 TrmtRecVal1 2 100 105 395 TrmtRecVal1 3 100 105 395 TrmtRecVal1 4 100 105 395 TrmtRecVal2 1 eeseeeeee 105 396 TrmtRecVal2 2 eene 105 396 T
560. st 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Analog outputs 271 E C 15 06 IndexAO 1 analog output 1 index Analog output 1 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO1 15 01 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile N CtrlWordAO1 control word analog output 1 Analog output 1 can be written to via CtriI WordAO 1 15 02 using Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if ndexAO 15 01 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y ConvModeAO 1 convert mode analog output 1 Analog output 1 signal offset 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V bipolar output default 120V 10V Uni OV to 10 V unipolar output 2 2V 10V Uni 2Vto 10 V unipolar output 3 5V Offset 5 V offset in the range O V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 5 0V 10V Abs absolute 0 V to 10 V unipolar output negative values are shown positive Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N FilterAO1 filter analog output 1 Analog output 1 filter time Int Scaling 1 1ms Type Volatile N ScaleAO1 scaling analog output 1 100 of the signal parameter selected with ndexAO 1 15 01 is scaled to the vol
561. su mnam 9 00 12 00 15 00 10 Time s Ia c i eme 2 2 4 aoe foe After tuning of M1ArmR 46 10 Itis not possible to tune M1ArmL 43 09 manually Thus set M1ArmL 43 09 0 Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 39 remove On and Run via DriveWindow set CurSel 43 02 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 back to their original settings Part 2 determine discontinuous current limit of the motor connect an oscilloscope to the fixed AO l act X4 9 10 on the SDCS CON 4 or X4 5 6 on the SDCS IOB 3 connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode set CurSel 43 02 CurRefExt set M1DiscontCurLim 46 08 to default set M1UsedFexType 99 12 NotUsed give On and Run via DriveWindow use DriveWindow to increase the armature current reference make sure the motor is not turning Attention let the drive run only for a short time watch the current bubbles and increase the current reference until the current is continuous Actual current waveform Current is discontinuous Discontinuous current Start up SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 40 Actual current waveform Current is continuous t Continuous current Part 3 remove On and Run via DriveWindow set CurSel 43 02 and M1UsedFexType 99 12 back to their original settings copy the current reference used in DriveWindow and paste it into M1DiscontCurLim 46
562. t If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon setting FBA PAR REFRESH 51 27 RESET or at the next power up of the fieldbus adapter Read only or automatically detected by DeviceNet adapter If HW SW option 51 04 0 Hardware the values are automatically set via the DIP switches of the RDNA 01 DCS800 parameter setting using User specific assembly Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 132 Setting of parameter groups 51 90 and 92 Output I O par 3 Output I O par 4 Input I O par 3 Parameter group 51 Direction ABB Parameter group 90 and 92 iname set value PLC lt gt Drive Datasets i name DsetXVal1 DsetXVal2 DsetXVal3 DsetXplus2Val1 DsetXplus1Val1 DsetXplus1Val2 DsetXplus1Val3 Input I O par 4 Output I O par 5 Output I O par 6 DsetXplus3Val1 DsetXplus2Val2 DsetXplus2Val3 Output I O par 7 DsetXplus4Val1 Output I O par 8 Output I O par 9 DsetXplus4Val2 DsetXplus4Val3 Input VO par5 DE DsetXplus3val2 Input VO par6 DE DsetXplus3val3 Input VO par 07 DsetXplus5valt Input VO par8 08 DsetXplus5val2
563. t AdapProgCmd 83 01 Edit 2 set EditBlock 83 03 5 selects function block 5 as the desired spot for the new function block 3 set EditCmd 83 02 Push shifts function block 5 and all subsequent function blocks one spot forward 4 Program empty spot 5 by means of 84 28 to 84 33 2 Delete Deletes the function block in the spot defined by EditBlock 83 03 and shifts all subsequent function blocks one spot backward To delete all function blocks set EditBlock 83 03 17 3 Protect Turns all parameters of the Adaptive Program into protected mode parameters cannot be read or written to Before using the Protect command set the pass code by means of PassCode 83 05 Attention Do not forget the pass code 4 Unprotect Reset of protected mode Before the Unprotect command can be used PassCode 83 05 has to be set Attention The proper pass code has to be used Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile Y EditBlock edit block Defines the function block which is selected by EditCmd 83 02 Push or Delete After a Push or Delete EditBlock 83 03 is automatically set back to 1 Note To delete all function blocks set EditBlock 83 03 17 Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y TimeLevSel time level select Selects the cycle time for the Adaptive Program This setting is valid for all function blocks 0 Off no task selected 125ms Adaptive Program runs with 5 ms 2 20ms Adaptive Program runs with 20 ms 3 100ms Adaptive Prog
564. t integer value 0 65536 SI 16 bit signed integer value 32768 32767 C text string ENUM Volatile Y values are NOT stored in the flash they will be lost when the drive is de energized N values are stored in the flash they will remain when the drive is de energized Signal and parameter list 8ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Parameter groups list 187 This chapter explains the function and valid values or selections for all parameters They are arranged in groups by their function The following table gives an overview of all parameter groups Group Description 10 Start stop select 11 Speed reference inputs 12 Constant speeds 13 Analog inputs 14 Digital outputs 15 Analog outputs 16 System control inputs 19 Data storage 20 Limits 21 Start stop 22 Speed ramp 23 Speed reference 24 Speed control 25 Torque reference 26 Torque reference handling 30 Fault functions 31 Motor 1 temperature 34 DCS800 Control Panel display 40 PID control 42 Brake control 43 Current control 44 Field excitation 45 Field converter settings 47 12 pulse operation 49 Shared motion 50 Speed measurement 51 Fieldbus 52 Modbus 60 69 Application program parameters 70 DDCS control 71 Drivebus 83 Adaptive Program control 84 Adaptive Program 85 User constants 86 Adaptive Program outputs 88 Internal 90 Receiving dat
565. t is used to connect high the Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a packed Boolean word With Bit 0 0000 Oh Bit 1 0001 1h Bit 15 1111 Fh Int Scaling 1 Volatile N Block1 Output function block 1 output Function block 1 output can be used as an input for further function blocks Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 380 Signal Parameter name 84 10 The description of the parameters for function blocks 2 to 16 is basically the same as for function block 1 For Your convenience the following table shows the parameter numbers of all function 84 99 blocks1 Function BlockxType BlockxIn1 BlockxIn2 BlockxIn3 BlockxAttrib BlockxOutput BlockxOut block input 1 input 2 input 1 signal pointer 84 07 84 09 86 01 84 13 i 84 15 84 19 84 21 84 25 84 27 84 31 84 33 84 37 84 39 84 43 User constants Constant1 constant 1 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 1 Type SI Volatile Constant2 constant 2 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant3 constant 3 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Constant4 constant 4 Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Pro
566. t least one fault message is currently active and suppressed Speed scaling out of range The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis 9 1 1 a is set to 150 single firing pulses Check M1SpeedMin 20 01 M1SpeedMax 20 02 M2BaseSpeed 49 03 M2SpeedMin 49 19 M2SpeedMax 49 20 M2SpeedScale 49 22 M1SpeedScale 50 01 M1BaseSpeed 99 04 Selected motor speed feedback The comparison of the speed feedback from pulse encoder or analog tacho has failed Check M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 SpeedFbFltMode 30 36 SpeedFbFitSel 30 17 EMF FbMonLev 30 15 SpeedFbMonLev 30 14 pulse encoder encoder itself alignment cabling coupling power supply feedback might be too low mechanical disturbances jumper S4 on SDCS CON 4 analog tacho tacho itself tacho polarity and voltage alignment cabling coupling mechanical disturbances jumper S1 on SDCS CON 4 EMF connection converter armature circuit closed SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 3 SDCS POW 4 471 Alarm Alarm is active word when 9 07 always bit 4 9 07 always bit 5 07 07 9 07 always bit 6 4 3 9 always bit 7 9 07 always 4 bit 8 pe El ama 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Fault tracing Text on DCS800 Definition Action Alarm Control Panel word DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light 126 ExternalDI External alarm via binary input 9 07 always There is no problem with the drive it
567. t speed controller The speed controller output value TorqRef2 2 09 in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 where the gain equals KpS 24 03 Int Scaling 100 1 Type l Volatile N 325 KpSWeakpFiltTime filter time for weakening point of p part speed controller Filter time to soften the proportional gains rate of change 10000 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N 24 07 Unused TiS i part speed controller Integral time of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 TiS 24 09 defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part Example The controller generates 15 of motor nominal torque with KpS 24 03 3 if the speed error An is 5 of SpeedScaleAct 2 29 On that condition and with TiS 24 09 300 ms follows the controller generates 30 of motor nominal torque if the speed error An is constant after 300 ms are elapsed 15 from proportional part and 15 from integral part Setting T S 24 09 to 0 ms disables the integral part of the speed controller and resets its integrator Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N EE m mes 64000 2500 TiSInitValue initial value for i part speed controller Initial value of the speed controller integrator in percent of MotNomTorque 4 23 The integrator is set as soon as RdyRef MainStatWord 8 01 becomes valid Int Scaling 100 1 Type SI Volatile N
568. t tete ime tane da de idet itte itas 146 Profibus communication with fieldbus adapter RPBA 01 00 eeeeccceeee cette eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenaaaes 147 T al EE 147 RPBA 01 DOS800 EE 147 Related docum En Ee EE 147 Overriding control copfiguration enne enne 147 Mechanical and electrical installation ssessssseeeemn 147 Drive configuraltloni uiii iege io iie iati eerta Paru Eee trs e Era a EEN de 147 Parameter setting example 1 using PPO Type 1 147 Parameter setting example 2 using PPO types 2 4 and bp 148 Communication via group BT 149 Communication via group 90 and group 03 150 ele e Ee ne 151 Data Set tele set c c EEUU 152 Adaptive Program AP 153 Chapter oVerView 5i than te e ha ainda dann dana denned 153 What is the Adaptive Program 153 FGCU OS seca Metra haa aunt tin tdi aeaa aeara aeaee aoee TAE a aE 153 How to build the program ccc eee ee aaa reer eee aee eee nnne nnne seen nnn 154 How to connect the Application Program with the firmware ete 154 Block Parameter Set for block 1 155 How to control the execution of the program 156 p LE 157 ENEE LEE 157 Important keys and buttons nennen nennen nennen nnns 157 Program modes TEE 157 Change to Edit mode eie a iat a iaiia biiain 157 Insert function blocks edere edd eese dasavecsvaveeecers 158 Connect function blocks 5 einen entres tee arti ea trea ere cea Ere Ra E EBEN uS 159 Setthe Time evel utet tt
569. tModule1 98 03 for DO9 and DO10 DIO ExtModule2 98 04 for DO11 and DO12 10 BoaraConfig 98 15 Note The maximum amount of digital UO extension modules is two regardless if an AIMA 01 board is used SDCS CON 4 SDCS IOB 2 On the SDCS CON 4 the standard DO s are relay drivers DO8 is located on the SDCS PIN 4 and is isolated by means of a relay If the SDCS IOB 2 is being used DO6 and DO7 are isolated by means of optocouplers while the others DO1 to DO5 and DOS are isolated by means of relays Output values SDCS CON 4 DO1 to DO7 max 50 mA 22 VDC at no load for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Output values SDCS PIN 4 DO8 max 3 A 24 VDC max 0 3A 115 VDC 230 VDC or max 3A 230 VAC for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Output values SCDS IOB 2 DO6 and DO7 max 50 mA 24 VDC all others max 3 A 24 VDC max 0 3A 115 VDC 230 VDC or max 3A 250 VAC for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Cycle time for DO1 to DO8 5ms 17 and 2 RDIO 01 The extension DO s are isolated by means of relays Output values max 5A 24 VDC max 0 4 A 120 VDC or max 1250 VA 250 VAC for more details see HDIO 01 User s Manual Cycle time for DO9 to DO12 5msconnected at SDCS CON 4 14 ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO 01 boards with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery
570. tXVal3 90 03 2501 default TorqHefA 25 01 output data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus2Val1 90 04 702 default AuxCtrlWord 7 02 output data word 4 auxiliary control word 4 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 209 default TorqRef2 2 09 input data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus3Val1 92 04 802 default AuxStatWord 8 02 input data word 4 auxiliary status word 4 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 CANopen Node ID 51 02 bag set node address as required Baudrate 51 03 8 8 1 MBits s PDO21 Cfg 51 04 1 0 Configuration via CANopen objects 1 Configuration via RCAN 01 adapter parameters Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 123 RX PDO21 Enable 51 05 769 This value has to be calculated with 300 Hex 768 Node ID 51 02 Here 768 1 769 RX PDO21 TxType 51 06 255 255 Asynchronous see page 83 RX PDO21 1stObj 5
571. tack overflow B13 System stack overflow B14 System stack underflow B15 reserved Int Scaling 1 Type l overflow due to EMC or firmware bug overflow due to EMC or firmware bug underflow due to crash of CPU or firmware bug Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 237 Signal Parameter name Diagnosis diagnosis Attention Diagnosis 9 11 is set to zero by means of Reset Displays diagnostics messages 0 no message Firmware default setting of parameters wrong parameter flash image too small for all parameters reserved illegal write attempt on a signal or write protected parameter e g writing on UsedMCW 7 04 with master follower reserved wrong type code an un initialized interrupted has occurred reserved wrong parameter value Autotuning autotuning aborted by fault or removing the Run command UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 autotuning timeout Run command UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 is not set in time motor is still turning no speed zero indication field current not zero armature current not zero armature voltage measurement circuit open e g not connected or interrupted check also current and torque limits armature circuit and or armature voltage measurement circuit wrongly connected no load connected to armature circuit invalid nominal armature current setting armature current M1MotNomCur 99 03 is set to zero field current does not decrease when the excit
572. tage in ScaleAO 15 05 Example Incase the min max voltage 10 V of analog output 1 should equal 250 of TorqRefUsed 2 13 set IndexAO 1 15 01 213 ConvModeAO 15 03 10V Bi and ScaleAO 1 15 05 4000 mV Int Scaling 1 1mV_ Type l Volatile N IndexAO2 analog output 2 index Analog output 2 is controlled by a source signal parameter selected with IndexAO2 15 06 The format is xxyy with negate analog output xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N CtrlWordAO2 control word analog output 2 Analog output 2 can be written to via CtrI WordAO2 15 07 using Adaptive Program application program or overriding control if IndexAO2 15 06 is set to zero Further description see group 19 Data Storage Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile Y 9999 OV 10V Abs Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 272 Signal Parameter name 15 08 ConvModeAO2 convert mode analog output 2 Analog output 2 signal offset 0 10V Bi 10 V to 10 V bipolar output default 120V 10V Uni OV to 10 V unipolar output 2 2V 10V Uni 2 V to 10 V unipolar output 3 5V Offset 5 V offset in the range 0 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 4 6V Offset 6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals e g torque speed etc 5 0V 10V Abs absolute 0 V to 10 V uni
573. taken away at the same time or nearly contemporary OT Mode 21 02 and StopMode 21 03 must have the same setting Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N RampStop RampStop C Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name StopMode stop mode Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Run is set to low 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and Run is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and Run is set to low the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control 2 CoastStop The firing pulses are immediately set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked 3 DynBraking dynamic braking Note In c
574. tant Enter the EMF speed feedback parameters if applicable the parameters for the pulse encoder respectively the analog tacho and follow the instructions of the assistant The speed feedback assistant detects the kind of speed feedback the drive is using and provides help to set up pulse encoders or analog tachometers During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed M1BaseSpeed 99 04 During the whole procedure the drive will be in EMF speed control despite the setting of M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 When the assistant is finished successfully the speed feedback is set If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help Autotuning speed controller Enter the motor base speed the basic speed limitations the speed filter time and follow the instructions of the assistant During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor if existing will be closed the ramp is bypassed and torque respectively current limits are valid The speed controller is tuned by means of speed bursts up to base speed M 1BaseSpeed 99 04 and the speed controller parameters are set Attention During the autotuning the torque limits will be reached When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for m
575. tches see page 42 DCS800 parameter setting using Modbus TCP protocol Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedRef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 50 01 respectively M1SpeedMin 20 01 or M1SpeedMax 20 02 Switch on sequence Please see the example at the end of this chapter Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 147 Profibus communication with fieldbus adapter RPBA 01 General This chapter gives additional information using the Profibus adapter RPBA 01 together with the DCS800 RPBA 01 DCS800 The Profibus communication with the drive requires the option RPBA 01 Related documentation Users Manual PROFIBUS DP Adapter Module RPBA 01 The quoted page numbers correspond to the User s Manual Overriding control configuration Supported operation mode is VENDOR SPECIFIC for ABB Drives see page 19 and 20 The RPBA 01 uses data consistent communication meaning that the whole data frame is transmitted during a single program cycle Some overriding controls handle this internally but others must be programmed to transmit data consistent telegrams Mechanical and electrical installation If not already done so insert RPBA 01 into slot 1 of the drive see page 21 Drive configuration The Profibus adapter is activated by means of CommModule 98 02 see page 22
576. te value sum AND bit compare bit set compare counter ramp event filter limit mask set maximum minimum multiplication and division OR parameter read parameter write Pl controller initialization for Pl controller ramp square wave SR flip flop switch Boolean switch integer timer off timer on trigger exclusive OR square root jump adjust analog tacho position Type C Volatile N 84 05 Block1In1 function block 1 input 1 Selects the source for input 1 of function block 1 BPS1 There are 2 types of inputs signals parameters and constants Signals parameters are all signals and parameters available in the drive The format is XXyy With negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Example To connect negated SpeedRef 23 01 set Block1In1 84 05 2301 and Block1Attrib 84 08 Oh NotUsed NotUsed E To get only a certain bit e g RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord 8 01 set Block1In1 84 05 801 and Block1Attrib 84 08 3h Constants are feed directly into the function block input and have to be declared by means of Block1Attrib 84 08 Example To connect the constant value of 12345 set Block1In1 84 05 12345 and Block1Attrib 84 08 1000h Int Scaling 1 Type SI Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Block1In2 function block 1 input 2 Selects the source
577. ter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N 383 E C Block120ut block 12 output The value of function block 12 output B ock1 Output 84 75 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedHef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Block130ut block 13 output The value of function block 13 output B ock1 Output 84 81 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N Block14Out block 14 output The value of function block 14 output B ock1 Output 84 87 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Scaling 1 1 Type I Volatile N Block150ut block 15 output The value of function block 15 output B ock1 Output 84 93 is written to a sink signal parameter by means of this index pointer e g 2301 equals SpeedRef 23 01 The format is xxyy with negate signal parameter xx group and yy index Int Sc
578. ter for each block group 86 e 10 additional user constants group 85 used as data container Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 154 How to build the program The programmer connects a function block to other blocks through a Block Parameter Set The sets are also used for reading values from the firmware and transferring data to the firmware Each Block Parameter Set consists of six parameters in group 84 and a write pointer in group 86 The programmer connects a function block to other blocks through a Block Parameter Set The sets are also used for reading values from the firmware and transferring data to the firmware Each Block Parameter Set consists of six parameters in group 84 and a write pointer in group 86 The figure below shows the use of Block Parameter Set 1 in the firmware parameters 84 04 to 84 09 and 86 01 Block1Type 84 04 selects the function block type Block1In1 84 05 selects the source of IN1 A negative value means that the source will be inverted Block1In2 84 06 selects the source of IN2 A negative value means that the source will be inverted Block1In3 84 07 selects the source of IN3 A negative value means that the source will be inverted Block1Attrib 84 08 defines the attributes of the inputs Block1Output 84 09 provides the value of the function block output which can be used further for other input selections The user cannot edit thi
579. th xx group and yy index Default setting of 210 equals TorqRef3 2 10 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N Ch2 LinkControl channel 2 link control DDCS channel 2 light intensity control for transmission LEDs When using the maximum allowed length of the fiber optic cable set the value to 15 Int Scaling 1 1 Type l Volatile N NotUsed 10 a0 aam zil Mosel 0 PESE Weg MIT ee a ee ee dE oel oel pgh JH e Ee EH Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name Ch2 TimeOut channel 2 timeout Time delay before a communication loss with channel 2 is declared Depending on the setting of Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 either F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 or A113 COM8Com AlarmWord1 9 06 bit 12 is set The communication fault and alarm are inactive if Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 is set to 0 ms Note The supervision is activated after the reception of the first valid message Note The time out starts when the link doesn t update the master follower data set Int Scaling 1 1ms Type l Volatile N Ch2 ComLossCtrl channel 2 communication loss control Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 2 F543 COM8Com FaultWord3 9 03 bit 10 is set with 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according to DecTime1 22 02 or DecTime2 22 10 When reaching M1Z
580. th one normally closed contact for the dynamic braking resistor R and two normally open contacts for C1 and D1 The DC breaker should be controlled by CurCtr Start1 6 03 bit 10 The acknowledge signal can be connected to either MainContAck 10 21 or DCBreakAck 10 23 Main contactor 6 03 b 7 Dyn Brake 6 03 b 8 DCS800 Converter on board field exciter DC Contact US 6 03 b 10 module Le DC cont us dsf Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name def nit E C FldHeatSel field heat selector FldHeatSel 21 18 releases the field heating for motor 1 and motor 2 0 NotUsed field heating is off default 1 On field heating is on as long as On 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 0 Off2N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 1 and Off3N 1 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 2 2 OnRun field heating is on as ong as On 1 Run 0 UsedMCW 7 04 bit 3 Off2N 1 and Off3N 1 3 ACW Bit12 field heating is on as long as ACW Bit12 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 and Run 0 4 ACW Bit13 field heating is on as long as ACW Bit13 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 and Run 0 5 ACW Bit14 field heating is on as long as ACW Bit14 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 and Run 0 6 ACW Bit15 field heating is on as long as ACW Bit15 1 AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 a
581. the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped 1 DynBraking dynamic braking Note SpeedFbFitMode 30 36 doesn t apply to communication faults Int Scaling 1 Type Cc Volatile N NotUsed CoastStop Fault amp RdvR Alarm amp Rd def NotUsed CoastStop nit E C Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 315 Signal Parameter name 89 2 LU amp o Motor 1 temperature 2 o o 31 01 M1ModelTime motor 1 model time constant cl Oo ci aw Thermal time constant for motor 1 with fan forced cooling The time within the temperature rises to S a 63 of its nominal value The motor thermal model is blocked if M1ModelTime 31 01 is set to zero The value of Moti TempCalc 1 20 is saved at power down of the drives electronics With the very first energizing of the drives electronics the motor s ambient temperature is set to 30 C A WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it is not properly cooled e g due to dust and dirt Int Scaling 10 1 s Type I Volatile N 31 02 M1ModelTime2 motor 1 model time 2 constant ddd ad ui Thermal time constant for motor 1 with fan forced cooling if motor fan is switched off i Temp Torque fan on fan off Attention For motors without fan set M1ModelTime 31 01 MiModelTime2 31 02 Int Scaling 10 1 Type I Volatile N M1AlarmL
582. the instructions can cause physical injury or death and or damage to the equipment WARNING A Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive e Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when main power is applied Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that 1 Voltage between drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the frame is close to 0 V 2 Voltage between terminals C and D and the frame is close to 0 V e Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may cause dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is switched off e Do not make any insulation resistance or voltage withstand tests on the drive or drive modules solate the motor cables from the drive when testing the insulation resistance or voltage withstand of the cables or the motor e When reconnecting the motor cable always check that the C and D cables are connected with the proper terminal Note e The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when the main power is on regardless of whether the motor is running or not e Depending on the external wiring dangerous voltages 115 V 220 V or 230 V may be present on the relay outputs of the drive system e g SDCS IOB 2 and RDIO e DCS800 with enclosure extension Before working on the
583. the maximum motor speed 32767 rpm 20000 The overspeed fault for motor 2 is inactive if M2OvrSpeed 49 21 is set to zero Int Scaling 2 29 Type I Volatile N Internally limited from Orpm to 2 29 M2SpeedScale motor 2 speed scaling Motor 2 speed scaling in rpm M2SpeedScale 49 22 defines the speed in rpm that corresponds to 20 000 speed units The speed scaling is released when M2SpeedScale 49 22 2 10 20 000 speed units M2SpeedScale 49 22 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 gt 10 20 000 speed units maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin 49 19 and M2SpeedMax 49 20 in case M2SpeedScale 49 22 lt 10 or mathematically If 49 22 2 10 then 20 000 49 22 in rpm If 49 22 lt 10 then 20 000 Max I 49 19 l 1 49 20 I in rpm The actual used speed scaling is visible in SpeedScale Act 2 29 Note M2SpeedScale 49 22 has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding control e g fieldbus Note M2SpeedScale 49 22 is must be set in the range of 0 625 to 5 times of M2BaseSpeed 49 03 If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale AlarmWord2 9 07 bit 7 is generated Commissioning hint set M2SpeedScale 49 22 to maximum speed set M2BaseSpeed 49 03 to base speed set M2SpeedMax 49 20 M2SpeedMin 49 19 to maximum speed Int Scaling 10 1 rpm Type I Volatile N M2EncMeasMode motor 2 encoder 1 measuring mode M2EncMeasMode 49 23 selects the
584. the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select 24 29 Int Scaling 1 1ms Type I Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 298 Signal Parameter name Par2Select selector for 2 set of speed controller parameters Select active speed controller parameters 0 ParSett1 parameter set 1 KpS 24 03 and TiS 24 09 is active default 1 ParSet2 parameter set 2 KpS2 24 27 and TiS2 24 28 is active 2 SpeedLevel _ If MotSpeed 1 04 lt SpeedLev 50 70 then parameter set1 is active If IMotSpeed 1 04 gt SpeedLev 50 10 l then parameter set 2 is active 3 SpeedError If SpeedErrNeg 2 03 lt ISpeedLev 50 10 then parameter sei is active If SpeedErrNeg 2 03 gt SpeedLev 50 10 l then parameter set 2 is active 4 DI 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 5 Dl2 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 6 DI3 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 7 DIA 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 8 DI5 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 9 DI6 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 10 DI7 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 11 DI8 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active 12 DI9 0 parameter set 1 is active 1 parameter set 2 is active only available wit
585. thermal model is blocked if M2ModelTime 49 32 is set to zero The value of Mot2TempCalc 1 21 is saved at power down of the drives electronics With the very first energizing of the drives electronics the motor s ambient temperature is set to 30 C A WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it is not properly cooled e g due to dust and dirt Int Scaling 10 1 s Type l Volatile N M2AlarmLimLoad motor 2 alarm limit load The drive sets A110 M2OverLoad A armWord1 9 06 bit 9 if M2AlarmLimLoad 49 33 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 thermal model is Mot2TempCalc 1 21 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N M2FaultLimLoad motor 2 fault limit load The drive trips with F510 M2OverLoad FaultWord1 9 01 bit 9 if M2FaultLimLoad 49 34 in percent of M2NomCur 49 02 is exceeded Output value for motor 2 thermal model is Mot2TempCalc 1 21 Int Scaling 10 1 Type l Volatile N Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name M2TempSel motor 2 temperature selector M2TempSel 49 33 selects motor 2 measured temperature input The result can be seen in Mot2TemopMeas 1 23 Connection possibilities for PT100 max 3 PT100 for motor 2 and max 3 PT100 for motor 1 or upto 6 PT100 for motor 2 only Connection possibilities PTC max 1 PTC for motor 2 and max 1 PTC for motor 1 or upto 2 PTC for motor 2
586. those cases a flying Switch over between speed and torque controls is required The switch over can be done by e g the overriding control using TorqSel 26 01 See also TorqMux 26 05 and TorqMuxMode 26 04 Follower diagnostics All the followers receive the torque reference via TorqRefA 25 01 All followers are able to detect communication breaks after the first valid message is received The action due to a communication break is defined by Ch2 TimeOut 70 14 and Ch2 ComLossCtrl 70 15 Feedback for all alarms and faults from the followers must be handled by the overriding control through the ChO on the SDCS COM 8 board Master follower link specification Size of the link One master and maximum ten followers are allowed If more than ten followers are required a local ABB agent should be consulted Configuration Link is configurable by the overriding control using Ch2 MaFoMode 70 09 This makes possible to change between master and follower by the overriding control without changes in the hardware Transmission rate 4 Mbit s Total performance of the link 2 ms between master and followers Protocol Distributed Drives Communication System DDCS Communication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 116 Ch3 commissioning and maintenance tools DriveWindow DriveWindow can be connected to Ch3 in either ring max 5 drives or star connection using NDBU xx branching units see Ch3 HW Config 70 21 The node n
587. time Macro assistant Selects an application macro Autotuning field current controller Enter the field circuit data and follow the instructions of the assistant During the autotuning the main respectively field contactor will be closed the field circuit is measured by means of increasing the field current to nominal field current and the field current control parameters are set The armature current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help Autotuning armature current controller Enter the motor nominal current the basic current limitations and follow the instructions of the assistant During the autotuning the main contactor will be closed the armature circuit is measured by means of armature current bursts and the armature current control parameters are set The field current is not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not turn but due to remanence in the field circuit about 4096 of all motors will turn create torque These motors have to be locked When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by the assistant are shown for confirmation If the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help Speed feedback assis
588. time parameter Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 100 Firmware master Firmware first follower Firmware 10 follower MailBoxCycle1 94 13 100 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 200 MailBoxCycle1 94 13 200 Send and receive values Each mailbox can transmit receive up to 4 values depending on the sign of the mailbox node ID number The master follower communication usually needs to send 3 values from the master to the followers thus the follower is completely controlled by the master Master parameters source TrmtRecVal1 1 94 14 701 or 704 MainCtrlWord 7 01 or UsedMCW 7 04 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 15 217 SpeedRefUsed 2 17 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 210 TorgRef3 2 10 TrmtRecVal1 4 94 17 0 not used Follower parameters sinks TrmtRecVal1 1 94 14 701 MainCtrlWord 7 01 TrmtRecVal1 2 94 15 2301 SpeedRef 23 01 TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 2501 TorqRefA 25 01 TrmtRecVal1 4 94 17 2 0 not used CommandsSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord TorqSel 26 01 Torque or Add Master signal TorqRef3 2 10 is send via master parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 to follower signal TorqRefA 25 01 via follower parameter TrmtRecVal1 3 94 16 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 101 Firmware structure Master MailBox1 94 12 5 configures the masters first mailbox to transmit data Torque reference and tor
589. tion To ensure proper connection and communication of the communication modules with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 98 03 Signal Parameter name DIO ExtModule1 digital extension module 1 First RDIO xx extension module interface selection DIO ExtModule1 98 03 releases DI9 DI10 DI11 DO9 and DO10 The module can be connected in option slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 2 see Node ID selector S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no first RDIO xx is used default 1 Sloti first RDIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 first RDIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 first RDIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA first RDIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 2 The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RDIO xx extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Note For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO xx by means of dip switch S2 Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected Note The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord 7 05 Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RDIO xx board with
590. tion slot 1 2 3 or alternatively onto the external I O module adapter AIMA connected via SDCS COM 8 The node ID 9 see Node ID selector S1 is only required for connection via AIMA 0 NotUsed no second RAIO xx is used default 1 Sloti second RAIO xx is connected in option slot 1 2 Slot2 second RAIO xx is connected in option slot 2 3 Slot3 second RAIO xx is connected in option slot 3 4 AIMA second RAIO xx is connected onto the external I O module adapter AIMA node ID 9 The drive trips with F508 l OBoardLoss FaultWord1 9 01 bit 7 if the RAIO extension module is chosen but not connected or faulty Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO xx board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Switches on the 2 RAIO xx Node ID selector S1 Pos 0 1 2 E F ID 0 1 2 14 15 oe Configuration switch S2 yy Al1 signal mode cosceSscsessssS Ali signal level 123456 123456 Al2 signal mode Al2 signal level X2 x1 Node ID selector S1 is only valid when plugged in an AIMA board ADDRESS ee 6 o E Ka o DAS S1 Streik Configuration switch S2 For temperature measurement set the operating mode to unipolar and DIP switch setting unipolar Input signal type
591. to 2 Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile The instances 100 101 20 70 and 21 71 are supported since firmware version 2 x if Protocol 51 16 is set to 1 Ethernet IP AC DC communication profile With these instances it is not possible to use the full flexibility of the DCS800 For more information see User s Manual Parameter setting example using Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile EtherneUIP ABB Drives communication profile uses up to 4 data words in each direction by default The internal connection from and to the DCS800 has to be done by means of parameter group 51 Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile uses up to 12 data words in each direction The configuration has to be done via fieldbus link configuration using Vendor Specific Drive UO Object Class 91h Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 1 data word from overriding control to drive Communication SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 134 DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data
592. to bit 10 is the same as the in the MainCtrlWord 7 01 Not all functions are controllable from local control or local I O mode BO see MainCtrlWord 7 01 to B10 see MainCtrlWord 7 01 B11 reserved to B15 reserved 7 01 MCW B10 Hand Auto 10 07 7 04 CommandSe 10 01 i MainCtriWord MCW i UsedMCW UMCW i BitO On Off1N ote Bito On Off1N Onofft 10 15 O Bit1 Off2N Coast Stop Bit1 Off2N Coast Stop Off2 10 08 7 Bit2 Off3N E Stop Bit2 Off3N E Stop E Stop 10 09 Bit3 Run StartStop 10 16 Bit4 RampOutZero ur Bit3 Run be HE Bit4 RampOutZero pe Bits RampHold Bit5 RampHold BIG RamplnZero Bit6 RamplnZero Bit7 Reset LBit7 Reset 10 03 Bit8 Inching1 Bit8 Inching1 0 Bit9 Inching2 Bit9 Inching2 Bit10 RemoteCmd Bit10 RemoteCmd Bit11 Bit15 aux control Attention The UsedMCW 7 04 is write protected thus it is not possible to write on the used main control word by means of Master follower Adaptive Program application program or overriding control Int Scaling 1 Type l Volatile Y Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name DO CtriWord digital output control word DOCW The DO control word 1
593. tput Adaptive Program SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 179 Sqrt Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT is the square root of IN1 IN2 With IN3 true IN1 and IN2 are read as absolute values OUT Al IN1 IN2 With IN3 false OUT is set to zero if IN1 IN2 is negative QUT VINI IN2 if IN IN2 gt 0 OUT 0 if INI IN2 0 Connections IN1 16 bit integer 15 bits sign IN2 16 bit integer 15 bits sign IN3 boolean OUT 16 bit integer SqWav Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT alternates between the value of IN3 and zero 0 if the block is enabled with IN1 Connections true The period is set with IN2 in ms IN1 boolean true enable SqWav false disable SqWav IN2 16 bit integer cycle time in ms IN3 16 bit integer 15 bits sign height of square wave OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign square wave Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 180 SR Type Illustration Operation Connections Logical function Set reset block IN1 S sets OUT IN2 R or IN3 R reset OUT If IN1 IN2 and IN3 are false the current value remains at OUT The SR is reset dominant Truth table IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 no change no change 0 0 1 false all bits O 0 0 1 0 false all bits O 0 0 1 1 false all bits O 0 1 0 0 true all
594. tr et eem Lo LM 190 469 MotFanAck 64 66 82 246 432 457 MotNomrTorque oseere 443 Moto own 82 262 MOotPotMin ccccccccseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 82 263 MOtPOtUp EE 82 261 Motel Zeenen e te eet ERE coc 227 MotSpeed 43 48 102 122 125 129 133 139 141 144 147 190 459 MotSpeedkilt 1 ioo SSES Set 190 MOTTO G c iii ANAS aS 186 191 MottTorgqEilt 2 mee 149 191 Mot Torohom ccceeeeeeseeseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 208 MultiFexCount eee 346 MultiFexOff ennaa 346 M ltiFexOff2 6teseSesezesnu 346 Node address 147 Node ID eene tinens 119 122 NomMainsVolt 30 64 66 417 431 453 454 468 Off1 Mode 55 75 282 Tee 82 247 467 Suite RED 403 OffsetUDO in n eee 405 OnQOfLl c GENEE 54 82 251 OperModeSel ssansnnnnneeeeeeee 64 66 327 ONE oU aan EPET TTT 133 144 Output 2 5 x nne eed 133 144 Output 3 nno neaoneneaenmesee 133 144 OUTDO aes uio eere 133 144 Output I O par 1 125 127 129 131 Output instance 125 127 129 131 OvrVoltProt 64 66 82 250 470 bDar Gelect n esaeen innit 82 298 ParApplSave ssss 274 470 475 ParChange niea 82 249 Parity iiit tente 139 141 369 mi i Bore TL 273 PassCode incnnsasueensine 376 477 PDO21 Cig 119 122 RUE etlech 319 PID AGI2 uetus truth 319 PID IMUM Pr 320 PID OUT er 199 PID Out
595. ts sign OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Min Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT is the lowest input value OUT MIN ONT IN2 IN3 Note An open input will be set to as zero Connections Input IN1 IN2 and INS 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign MulDiv Type Arithmetical function Illustration Operation OUT is the IN1 multiplied with IN2 and divided by IN3 Connections OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 Input IN1 IN2 and INS 16 bit integer values 15 bits sign Output OUT 16 bit integer 15 bits sign Adaptive Program 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 176 NotUsed Type s Illustration Operation Block is not enabled and not working default Connections OR Type Logical function Illustration Operation OUT is true if any of the connected inputs is true Otherwise the OUT is false Truth table IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT binary OUT value on display 0 0 0 False All bits 0 0 0 0 1 True Allbits 1 1 0 1 0 True Allbits 1 1 0 1 1 True Allbits 1 1 1 0 0 True Allbits 1 1 1 1 0 True Allbits 1 1 1 1 1 True Allbits 1 1 Connections IN1 IN2 and IN3 boolean values OUT 16 bit integer value packed boolean ParRead Type Parameter function Illustration ParRead IN IN2 OUT Operation OUT shows the value of a parameter which is defined with IN1 as group and IN2 as Con
596. tw HIT 66 anguuviw 940 elzeubio Eege S0 tV WOASUPNWON LOL 66 pow wi BULL paueuAiddngamd Z e6puq ywy juaun Eb 0 AW3lexnia e 2 2 peodseseain H v0 66 H legepoyonuod z6piguruno iw youunoxey Pa mouon Hers Pp E Ieseponiedo e6puq ywy jueng aviv EOSED xb ree mpisseuxni ferot ween ntzree xeweudivuuiy 0 eoo vaieuns LIESER fl ee abenu L106 i Leena LUS 2 W I Dep 3030W D r sing H 0 ER SI L E posnietung H i Bm wer e EI sngwonauoo SOF m r Ges ES i EE E K N ueweinseew jesepowiedo zwisuono Ceeuunc spotuedo I wa l Sct 1 00001 mee ri queuno ma 0000 HEH row Buljeos ue oe gued Bujeos ue CL reuvionsurew sui g g gue puan eameuuv IOH LNOO LN3YO SOLL VIASHV agram i tructure d ix A Firmware s Append 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 482 3Sp T Aoi Weber exnjonzis Ad 008590 edkixespesnzw H 706 Teen Hors SC Ons
597. umber Fault name Fault number 12PulseCom F535 M1FexNotOK F529 12PCurDiff F534 MiFexOverCur F515 12PRevTime F533 MiFexRdyLost F537 12PSlaveFail F536 M1OverLoad F507 M1OverTemp F506 AlRange F551 M2FexCom F519 ApplLoadFail F545 M2FexLowCur F542 ArmCurRipple F517 M2FexNotOK F530 ArmOverCur F502 M2FexOverCur F518 ArmOverVolt F503 M2FexRdyLost F538 AuxUnderVolt F501 M2OverLoad F510 M2OverTemp F509 COM8Com F543 MainContAck F524 COM8Faulty F540 MainsLowVolt F512 ConvFanAck F527 MainsNotSync F514 ConvFanCur F511 MainsOvrVolt F513 ConvOverTemp F504 MechBrake F552 MotorStalled F531 ExternalDl F526 MotOverSpeed F532 ExtFanAck F523 P2PandMFCom F544 FastCurRise F539 ParComp F549 FieldAck F521 ParMemRead F550 FieldBusCom F528 FwFailure F548 ResCurDetect F505 ReversalTime F557 HwFailure F547 SpeedFb F522 l OBoardLoss F508 TachPolarity F553 LocalCmdLoss F546 TachoRange F554 TorgProving F556 M1FexCom F516 TypeCode F525 M1FexLowCur F541 For additional fault messages see SysFaultWord 9 10 Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 450 Fault is active when Text on DCS800 Definition Action Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Triplevel 501 AuxUnderVolt Auxiliary undervoltage The auxiliary voltage is too low while the drive is in operation If resetting fails check internal auxiliary voltages SDCS CON 4 and chang
598. umbers Ch3 NodeAddar 70 32 must be set for each drive individually before starting the communication through the connection This setting has to be made by a point to point connection using the DCS800 Control Panel DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light The new node address becomes valid after the next SDCS COM 8 power up The SDCS COM 8 Ch3 has been configured to be a slave in the communication point of view With DeviceName 99 09 and DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string name with a maximum of 12 characters for individual drive identification See also Configuration Instructions NDBU 85 95 3ADW000100 Optical DDCS Communication Link 3BFE64285513 and DDCS Cabling and Branching 3AFE63988235 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 117 Ethernet communication for monitoring with Ethernet adapter NETA 01 General This chapter gives information using the Ethernet adapter NETA 01 together with the DCS800 NETA 01 DCS800 The Ethernet communication for monitoring with the drive requires the options NETA 01 and SDCS COM 8 The NETA 01 is connected to the SDCS COM 8 usually via Ch3 ChO can be used as well Following browser based remote monitoring functions are released for DC drives e Parameters Read and write parameters e Signals Read signals e Fault logger Show fault logger Clear fault logger Save faults to a file in the NETA 01 Download saved fault logger files via FTP e Data logger Select
599. uring circuit O FilterOff the filter time is set to 200 us 1 FilterOn the filter time is set to 10 ms default Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N Measurement measurement reserved Int Scaling 1 Type I Volatile N rmeot o so 125 0 1000 FilterOn Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 406 Signal Parameter name 97 28 TestFire type of thyristor diagnosis The thyristor diagnosis is started by setting ServiceMode 99 06 ThyDiagnosis TestFire 97 28 defines which type of thyristor diagnosis should be used 0 Off all thyristors are tested the result is shown in Diagnosis 9 1 1 default 1 2 V11 firing pulses for thyristor V11 are released 2 2 V12 firing pulses for thyristor V12 are released 3 V13 firing pulses for thyristor V13 are released 4 V14 firing pulses for thyristor V14 are released 5 V15 firing pulses for thyristor V15 are released 6 V16 firing pulses for thyristor V16 are released 7 V21 firing pulses for thyristor V21 are released 8 V22 firing pulses for thyristor V22 are released 9 V23 firing pulses for thyristor V23 are released 10 V24 firing pulses for thyristor V24 are released 11 V25 firing pulses for thyristor V25 are released 12 V26 firing pulses for thyristor V26 are released C1 vii A Si V24 V13 ZN Si V26 F15 Il branching fuse TM _ N EH SEET N L7 S principle B6 a det
600. us TCP if Protocol 51 16 is set to 0 Modbus TCP Parameter setting example using Modbus TCP Modbus TCP is using 4 data words in each direction The following table shows the parameter setting using this protocol Drive parameters Settings Comments CommandSel 10 01 MainCtrlWord Ref1Sel 11 03 SpeedRef2301 CommModtule 98 02 Fieldbus DsetXVal1 90 01 701 default MainCtrlWord 7 01 output data word 1 control word 17 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXVal2 90 02 2301 default SpeedRef 23 01 output data word 2 speed reference 2 data word from overriding control to drive DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 gata word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 ETHERNET TCP Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 145 Comm rate 51 02 0 Auto negotiate automatic set baud rate as required DHCP 51 03 0 DHCP disabled IP address setting from following parameters IP address 1 51 04 192 e g IP address 192 168 0 1 IP address 2 51 05 168 IP address 3 51 06 o IP address 4 51 07 es Subnet mask 1 51 08 255 e g subnet mask
601. us the input range changes e g from 10 V to 1 V for more details see DCS800 Hardware Manual Input range Al1 to Al4 set by parameter 10 V O V to 10V 2 V to 10 V 5 V offset 6 V offset 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Resolution 15 bits sign Scan time for Al1 and AI2 3 3 ms 2 77 ms synchronized with mains frequency Scan time for AI3 and Al4 5ms I O configuration SADWO00193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 88 1 RAIO 01 2 RAIO 01 Additional functions motor temperature measurement for PT100 or PTC connected to AI2 and AIS3 see section Motor protection residual current detection monitor input via Al4 see section Motor protection Hardware setting input range and switching from voltage to current by means of a DIP switch for more details see RAIO 01 User s Manual Input range AIS and AI6 set by parameter 10V 0Vto10V 2V to 10 V 5 V offset 6 V offset 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 10 mA offset 12 mA offset Resolution 11 bits sign Scan time for AI5 and AI6 10ms connected at SDCS CON 4 14ms connected via SDCS COM 8 Additional functions all Als are galvanically isolated Attention To ensure proper connection and communication of the RAIO 01 board with the SDCS CON 4 use the screws included in the scope of delivery Hardware setting AI7 and AI8 are only used for motor temperature measurem
602. use fast digital inputs DI7 or DI8 0 NotUsed 12 DH 12 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 2 DI 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 3 DIS 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 4 DIA 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 5 DI5 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active default 6 DI6 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 7 DI7 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 8 DI8 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active 9 DI9 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active only available with digital extension board 12 MCW Bitl1 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 11 13 MCW Bit12 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 12 14 MCW Bit13 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 13 15 MCW Bit14 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 14 16 MCW Bit15 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active MainCtrlWord 7 01 bit 15 17 ACW Bit12 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 12 18 ACW Bit13 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 13 19 ACW BA 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 14 20 ACW Bit15 1 no E Stop 0 E Stop active AuxCtrlWord 7 02 bit 15 Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N NotUsed Signal and parameter list SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Signal Parameter name ParChang
603. used Acceleration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime 22 12 and JogDecTime Int Scaling 1 Type Volatile N ConvFanAck converter fan acknowledge The drive trips with F527 ConvFanAck FaultWord2 9 02 bit 10 if a digital input for the converter fan is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds As soon as the acknowledge is missing A104 ConvOverTemp A armWord1 9 06 bit 3 is set The alarm is reset automatically if the converter fan acknowledge is coming back before the 10 seconds are elapsed 0 NotUsed no reaction 1 DI1 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge default 2 DI2 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 3 DIS 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 4 DI4 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 5 DI5 12 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 6 DI6 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 7 DI7 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 8 DI8 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge 9 DI9 12 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 10 DI10 1 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board 11 DI11 12 acknowledge OK 0 no acknowledge only available with digital extension board Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N NotUsed MainContAck main contactor acknowledge The drive trips with F524 MainContAck FaultWora 2 9 02 bit 7 if a digital input for the main contactor is selected and the acknowledge is missin
604. ut data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from overriding control to drive 40003 gt data word 1 3 up to DsetXplus6Val3 90 12 0 default not connected output data word 12 not connected 12 data word from overriding control to drive 40021 lt data word 7 3 DsetXplus1Val1 92 01 801 default MainStatWord 8 01 input data word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control 40004 lt data word 2 1 DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control 40005 data word 2 2 DsetXplus1Val3 92 03 209 default TorqRef2 2 09 input data word 3 torque reference 3 data word from drive to overriding control 40006 data word 2 3 up to DsetXplus7Val3 92 12 907 default Alarmword2 9 07 input data word 12 alarm word 2 12 data word from drive to overriding control 40024 lt data word 8 3 DCS800 parameter setting using a Modbus controlling the drive Note New settings of group 52 take effect only after the next power up of the adapter Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 141 Note 20 000 speed units decimal for speed reference SpeedHef 23 01 and speed actual MotSpeed 1 04 corresponds to the speed shown in SpeedScaleAct 2 29 That speed is set by means of M1SpeedScale 5
605. ve SDCS DSL 4 X8 X8 24V 200 mA m 24V 200 mA Bus and ground termination The DCSLink is a bus system using twisted pair cables Therefore bus termination is mandatory at the two physical ends of the bus In the above example termination is mandatory at the 12 pulse master and the excitation SDCS DSL 4 jumper S1 1 2 sets the bus termination jumper S2 sets the ground termination Communication 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 107 Set the node numbers transmission speed and the communication supervision In all bus systems unique node ID numbers are required and have to be set in the 12 pulse master 12 pulse slave and the excitation Two stations with the same node ID number are not allowed For example set the 12 pulse master node ID number to 1 the 12 pulse slave node ID number to 31 and the excitation node ID number to 21 The 12 pulse and excitation communication supervision is activated in the 12 pulse master Also the transmission speed of all converters has to match Firmware 12 pulse master Firmware 12 pulse slave Firmware excitation DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 1 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 31 DCSLinkNodelD 94 01 21 Baudhate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s BaudRate 94 02 500kBit s 12P TimeOut 94 03 100 ms 12P SlaNode 94 04 31 FexTimeOut 94 07 100 ms M1FexNode 94 08 21 Commun
606. verter fan direction of rotation converter fan components converter cooling air inlet e g filter converter cooling air outlet connector X12 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X22 on SDCS PIN 4 51 Triplevel Mains low under voltage AC 9 01 RdyRun 1 3 Check bit 11 PwrLossTrip 30 21 UNetMin1 30 22 UNetMin2 30 23 PowrDownTime 30 24 if all 3 phases are present o D1 to D4 measure also the fuses F100 to F102 on the SDCS PIN 4 see Appendix B o D5 to D7 check also the connections U1 V1 and W1 on the SDCS PIN 51 if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance if the main contactor closes and opens if the mains voltage scaling is correct NomMainsVolt 99 10 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS PIN 4 51 cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS PIN 51 D1 to D4 check if the field circuit has no short circuit or ground fault B o A Fault tracing 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Text on DCS800 Definition Action Fault is active Control Panel DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light Triplevel 513 MainsOvrVolt Mains overvoltage AC RdyRun 1 Actual mains voltage is gt 1 3 NomMainsVolt 99 10 bit 12 for more than 10 s and RdyRun 1 Check if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance if the mains voltage scaling is correct NomMains Volt 99 10 connector X12 and X13 on SDCS CON 4 connector X12 an
607. with the commissioning set all parameters to default by means of ApplMacro 99 08 Factory and App Restore 99 07 Yes Check with MacroSel 8 10 Parameter Field converter Comments CommandSel 10 01 0 Local I O def 1 MainCtriWord MotFanAck 10 06 0 NotUsed OvrVoltProt 10 13 2 DI2 depending on hardware connection to DCF506 ArmOvrVoltLev 30 08 500 96 to suppress F503 ArmOverVolt if this does not help increase M1NomVolt 99 02 OperModeSel 43 01 1 FieldConv Firmware description SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 67 CurSel 43 02 1 CurRefExt depending on the connection 2 AI 3 AI2 4 AIS 5 AI 6 AIS 7 Al6 CurRefExt 43 03 XXX 96 e g written to by overriding control M1DiscontCurLim 43 08 0 RevDly 43 14 50 ms FlaCtriMode 44 01 0 Fix def DevLimPLL 97 13 20 to suppress blocking of current controller see CuCtrlStat2 6 04 bit 13 M1NomvVolt 99 02 xxx V U xxx V rated field voltage M1NomCur 99 03 XXX A ly XXX A rated field current NomMains Volt 99 10 xxx V Une XXX V nominal supply voltage AC M1UsedFexType 99 12 0 NotUsed Field current autotuning for stand alone field exciter The field current autotuning has to be started directly in the stand alone field exciter Parameter Field converter Comments ServiceMode 9
608. word 1 status word 1 data word from drive to overriding control DsetXplus1Val2 92 02 104 default MotSpeed 1 04 input data word 2 speed actual 2 data word from drive to overriding control ModuleType 51 01 ETHERNET TCP Comm rate 51 02 0 Auto negotiate automatic set baud rate as required DHCP 51 03 0 DHCP disabled IP address setting from following parameters IP address 1 51 04 192 e g IP address 192 168 0 1 IP address 2 51 05 168 IP address 3 51 06 o IP address 4 51 07 L Subnet mask 1 51 08 255 e g subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 2 51 09 255 Subnet mask 3 51 10 255 Subnet mask 4 51 11 0 GW adaress 1 51 12 0 e g gateway address 0 0 0 0 GW adaress 2 51 13 0 GW adaress 3 51 14 0 GW adaress 4 51 15 0 Protocol 51 16 2 1 Ethernet IP AC DC communication profile 2 Ethernet IP ABB Drives communication profile Modbus timeout 51 17 22 0 no monitoring 12100 ms 22 2200 ms Stop function 51 18 0 0 Ramp stop Output 1 51 19 1 data word 1 setting via parameter 90 01 Output 2 51 20 2 data word 2 setting via parameter 90 02 Output 3 51 21 3 data word 3 setting via parameter 90 03 Communication SADWO000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 135 Output 4 51 22 7 data word 4 setting via parameter 90 04 Input 1 51 23 4 data word 1 setting via parameter 92 01 Input 2 51 24 5 data word 2 setting via param
609. x then the armature voltage is about 220 V Now the flux is reduced to 50 at constant speed then the armature voltage drops to about 110 V Since the EMF is directly proportional to the flux it is possible to define a relationship between the field current and the flux by means of measuring the armature voltage without load EMF Thus the main idea of the flux linearization is to find field currents which produces desired EMF voltage at a certain speed The flux linearization is done by means of a function block defined by 3 values field current at 40 flux FidCurFlux40 44 12 field current at 70 flux FlaCurFlux70 44 13 field current at 90 flux FldCurFlux90 44 14 The intermediate values are interpolated During commissioning all 3 parameters must be set if the flux linearization is needed e mn irm van ou Speed reference Run On DriveWindow information Start up 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 48 Manual tuning Manual tuning of the flux linearization connect DriveWindow to the drive and choose local mode make sure the speed feedback device is either encoder or analog tacho M1SpeedFbSel 50 03 Encoder or Tacho and not EMF monitor MotSpeed 1 04 ArmVoltAct 1 14 and Mot1FlaCurhel 1 29 set M1FidMinTrip 30 12 10 96 set FldCtriMode 44 01 EMF set EMF CtrlPosLim 44 07 0 96 set EMF CtriNegLim 44 08 O 96 set FlaCurFlux40 44 12 FldCurFlux
610. xed to 10 s Int Scaling 1 Type C Volatile N FixedSpeed1 311 E C Signal and parameter list 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g 312 Signal Parameter name 4 89 3 UI 30 28 ComLossCtrl communication loss control dod sy ComLossCtrl 30 28 determines the reaction to a communication control loss fieldbusses R amp 3 g type DCSLink drive to drive respectively master follower see also CommandSel 10 01 o Q Depending on the type of communication loss either F528 FieldBusCom FaultWord2 9 02 bit E E E 11 or F544 P2PandMFCom FaultWord3 9 03 bit 11 is set with m g e 0 RampStop The input of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops according i to E StopRamp 22 04 When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter and fans are stopped In case TorqSelMod 26 03 Auto and communication loss is active the torque selector is bypassed and the drive is forced to speed control default 1 TorqueLimit The output of the drives ramp is set to zero Thus the drive stops at the active torque limit When reaching M1ZeroSpeedLim 20 03 the firing pulses are set to 150 degrees to decrease the armature current When the armature current is zero the firing pulses are blocked the contactors are opened field exciter a
611. y differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Al3 Val analog input 3 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 3 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Al4 Val analog input 4 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 4 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and jumper settings Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y AIS Val analog input 5 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 5 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and DIP switch settings Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule 98 06 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y Al6 Val analog input 6 value Measured actual voltage at analog input 6 The integer scaling may differ depending on the connected hardware and DIP switch settings Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule 98 06 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y 5 09 Unused Unused ooo wl eee v er AO1 Val analog output 1 value Measured actual voltage at analog output 1 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y AO Val analog output 2 value Measured actual voltage at analog output 2 Int Scaling 1000 1 V Type SI Volatile Y o v Signal and parameter list 3ADW0
612. y function with either galvanically isolating transformer or isolating amplifier for safe measurements A clamp on current probe In case the scaling of the DC load current needs to be checked it must be a DC clamp on current probe A voltmeter Make sure that all equipment in use is suitable for the voltage level applied to the power part Checking with the power switched off Check the settings of the main breaker e g overcurrent 1 6 l short circuit current 10 I time for thermal tripping 10 s time overcurrent thermal and voltage relays the earth fault protection e g Bender relay Check the insulation of the mains voltage cables or busbars between the SECURA side of the dedicated transformer and the drive disconnect the dedicated transformer from its incoming voltage check that all circuits between the mains and the drive e g control auxiliary voltage are disconnected measure the insulation resistance between L1 L2 L1 L3 L2 L3 L1 PE L2 PE L3 PE the result should be MOs Check the installation crosscheck the wiring with the drawings check the mechanical mounting of the motor and pulse encoder or analog tacho make sure that the motor is connected in a correct way armature field serial windings cable shields check the connections of the motor fan if existing make sure that the converter fan is connected correctly especially in
613. you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive the motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the unit To which products this chapter applies The information is valid for the whole range of the product DCS800 the converter modules DCS800 SOx size D1 to D7 field exciter units DCF80x etc like the Rebuild Kit DCS800 R00 9xxx Usage of warnings and notes There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual warnings and notes Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury or death and or damage to the equipment caused by electricity which can result in physical injury or death and or damage to the equipment f General danger warning warns about conditions other than those Electrostatic sensitive devices warning warns of electrostatic Y A discharge which can damage the equipment Safety instructions 3ADW000193R0701 DCS800 Firmware Manual e g Installation and maintenance work These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor Ignoring

DCS800 Firmware Manual - Galco Industrial Electronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents